
Cfass. 
Book 



COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT? 



A GRAMMAR 



FRENCH LANGUAGE, 



PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
BY N. WAXOSTROCHT, LL,D. 

It 

TO WHICH IS ADDED A VERY COMPREHENSIVE TABLE OF CONTENTS, 

AND AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE 

IRREGULAR VERBS, 

WITH REFERENCE TO THE PLACES WHERE THEY ARE CONJUGATED, WITH 

ALTERATIONS; ADDITIONS, AXD IMPROVEMENTS; 

AND A SCHEME FOR PARSING: 



A TREATISE OX FRENCH VERSIFICATION, 



BY M. DE WAILLY, 

MEMBER OF THE NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF FRANCS, ETC., ETC. 



<W ; 



3) AND & +3 

BY N. H. JEROME, 

TEACHER OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE, SAXEM, MASSACHUSETTS, 



PHILADELPHIA: 
ED. BARKIXGTON & GEO. D HASWELL. 






Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1837, by tho 

AMERICAN STATIONER'S COMPANY, 
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of Massachusetts. 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1854, by 

BARRINGTON & HASWELL, 

in the Clerk's Office of the DislHcTTSurt for the Eastern District of 
Pennsylvania. 



AVERTISSEMENT. 

Voulant consacrer mes instants a l'enseignement de la 
langue frangaise, j'ai du rechercher les moyens les plus 
prompts pour arriver a mon but; et, a cet effet, je me suis 
entoure de toutes les grammaires et de toutes les methodes 
que j'ai pu me procurer. 

La grammaire de Noel et Chapsal, telle qu'elle etait pre- 
cedemment imprimee, est fort bonne ; mais elle demande au 
moins deux ans d' etude. Telle quelle est imprimee aujour- 
d'hui, elle n'enseigne plus rien. 

Celle du comte de Laporte, basee sur celle de Noel et 
Chapsal, demande aussi un temps beaucoup trop long. 

Celle de Bugard presente le meme inconvenient. 

Celle de Levizac reproduit toutes les erreurs commises 
par Restaut sur la regie des participes passes. 

Ennn ; la metbode d' Ollendorff, par J. L. Jewett et V. 
Value, ale double desavantage d'etre beaucoup trop etendue 
et de se trop ressentir de la durete des langues du Nord, 
durete qui n'existe nullement dans la langue francaise. 

La grammaire de Wanostrocht, telle que je Tai corrigee, 
de meme que celle de Douville, a Favantage de reunir toutes 
les regies de la langue francaise d'une rnaniere tres explicite 
et tres facile a comprendre ; et c'est, pour cette raison, que 
je la recommande aux personnes qui veulent acquerir 
promptement une connaissance generale de cette langue, 
sans s'attacher a toutes les difficultes qu'elle presente, et 

(vii) 



Vlll AVERTISSEMENT. 

pour la connaissance parfaite des quelles il faudrait dix ans 
d' etudes continuelles. 

Je lie me suis pas attache a rectifier les eas^ qui n' exis- 
tent pas en francais, pour les remplacer par Temploi des pre- 
positions de et a, parceque j'ai reconnu qu'ils presentaient 
plus d'analogie avec la langue anglaise et que consequem- 
nient la theorie en etait plus facile a comprendre. 

Je n'ai pas non plus rectifie les modes des verbes qui sont 
au nombre de cinq, savoir : Tinfinitif, Tindicatif, le condi- 
tional, Timperatif et le subjonctif, quoique Wanostrocht 
ait compris les deux temps du conditionnel dans le mode 
indicatif, car j'ai pense qu'il suffisait de signaler cette 
erreur ici. 

On remarquera qu'a la page 313 j'ai dit que les mots 
u l% is," suivis d'un pronom de la troisieme personne pluri- 
elle, sont rendus en francais par "ce sont" et non par 
"c'est;" j'ajouterai qu'il en est de meme lorsqu'ils sont 
suivis d'un substantif de la meme personne. Ainsi au lieu 
de dire: c'est les hommes, c'est les femmes, il faut dire: 
ce sont les hommes, ce sont les femmes. Mais on dira, 
c'est Fhomme et la femme ; car ; bien qu'il y ait deux sub- 
stantifs, ces substantifs sont a la troisieme personne du sin- 
gulier. 

Telles sont les observations que j'ai cru devoir presenter 
aux personnes qui desirent apprendre en peu de mois ; et sans 
se' charger la memoire d'exceptions inutiles, les principes 
generaux de la langue francaise. A 

JEKOME. 

Salem, le 21 Avril ; 1854. 



PREFACE. 

That ' a great book is a great evil" is generally a great truth, 
for the discovery of which we modems must hold oursehes indebted f o 
the sages of antiquity. In the following sheets, I have endeavoured to 
improve upon the ancient maxim, and bring the two ends of the book 
as near together as I possibly could. On this frugal plan, the preface 
might have been spared, but custom must be complied with : some part 
of our time must be spent on superfluities ; and what is rendered ven- 
erable by age must not too hastily be rejected. To enter abruptly upon 
the main subject is generally considered as a breach of politeness. 
What is useful must sometimes give place to what is convenient, and 
what rigorous justice cannot defend, may yet enjoy the security of pre- 
scription. In compliance, therefore, with universal custom, with the 
general practice of the ancients, and, what is still more forcible, the 
urgent solicitation of the booksellers. I proceed to lay before the reader 
the general plan of the work. 

The idea of the Practical, Grammar was first suggested to 
the Author in the course of his private teaching. He found daily the 
inconvenience of referring from book to book, and determined to supply 
the defect in the best manner he could. Whatever was necessary to 
furnish a tolerable acquaintance with the elements of the language, and 
point out the nature of its construction, he proposed to admit ; and re- 
ject every thing that was not essentially connected with his principal de- 
sign. His first object was to comprise, in as little room as possible, 
ever^ thing that was really useful in the grammar, the exercise-book, 
and the book of dialogues. To this plan he has strictly adhered in. the 
composition, and has brought the whole together in a much smaller 
compass than, at riist, could reasonably have been expected. 

The several parts of speech are arranged in the usual order, and each 
part is discussed under a separate section. 

Each rule is followed by a familiar exercise, which the master may 
use in the place of a dialogue. 

The advantages resulting from the scholars learning and then repeal- 
ing their own translations by heart, must, in the opinion of impartial 
and disinterested minds* materially tend to their improvement. By these 

xi 



X PREFACE. 

means, the pupils, uniting practice to theory, not only become impercep- 
tibly acquainted with the French phraseology, which in many instances 
differs so much from the English construction, but immediately know 
what is the English word that corresponds with the French, and vice 
versa, which cannot absolutely be done, in a dialogue where the French 
is ready made for them. Therefore, in order the more fully to answer 
the Author's intention, he has, instead of fine sentences, extracted from 
the most elegant writers, and often above the comprehension of young 
people, preferred, and made use, throughout all the exercises, of plain 
and easy sentences, which, at the same time they are within the reach 
of the young learners' faculties, will soon enable them to speak the 
French language with propriety and elegance. What more can be ex- 
pected from an elementary book ? 

At the close of every section, a recapitulatory exercise Is given upon 
all the preceding rules. 

When there is any difference in the order of arrangement, the French 
construction is pointed out by the small figures placed against the top 
of the words in the English sentence. 

Some of the most remarkable French idioms are noticed, and exem- 
plified by various instances. Many others might have been adduced, 
perhaps, to very little profit. The idiomatical expressions are daily 
giving way to a regular syntactical form, and growing into disuse with 
the best masters. 

A few general rules for pronunciation only have been given. From 
all the attempts that have hitherto been made, it does not appear that 
any adequate idea of it can be conveyed in writing. The ear cannot 
be properly formed without the assistance of a good speaker. 
• Throughout the whole composition, the Author's chief aim has been 
to unite ease 'and simplicity with accuracy and precision. That he has 
not sometimes said too little where more is required, and sometimes too 
much where less would have been sufficient, he does not take upon 
himself to assert. That he has sometimes failed through negligence, 
and many times through ignorance, he has also great reason to fear. 
His daily avocations left him but little time for study, and his want of 
a better acquaintance with the English language may have subjected 
him to many inaccuracies in his style, and sometimes, perhaps, to pal- 
pable improprieties. 



CONTENTS. 



AN Alphabetical Arrangement of Irregular Verbs - 16 

An Explanation of the Abbreviations - - 25 

French Alphabet - ; - -26 



SECT. l. 

Of Grammar ----27 

Of the French Alphabet ifc. 

Of Vowels — Diphthongs — Accents — Kinds of E. - - - ib 

Of Diaeresis — Cedilla — Apostrophe ------ 29 

Alphabetical List of French Words having their initial h mute - ib. 

Variations in the Pronunciation of Consonants - 31 

Kinds of Words - 32 

General Explanation of their Use ------ 33 



SECT. H. 

Of Nouns 34 

Of Articles - - - - __ - - - - - - 35 

Of the Definite, Partitive and Indefinite Articles - - - - ib 

Of Genders and Numl>ers - - - 36 

General Rules for the Formation of the Plural Number 37 

Of Cases 40 

Of the Declension of Nouns ------ - 41 

Declension of the Article Definite Le, (the) before Nouns masculine 

beginning with a Consonant or h aspirated ib. 
Declension of the Article Definite La, (the) before -Nouns feminine 

beginning with a Consonant or h aspirated 42 
Declension of the Article Definite £' (the) for both Genders, before 

Nouns beginning with a Vowel, or an h not aspirated - - ib. 

Recapitulation of the Article Definite, ------ 43 

Ruies for the proper Use of the Definite Article with Exercises - ib. 

Declension of the Article Partitive ------ 51 

Rules and Exercises upon this Partitive - - - - - 52 

Declension of the Article Indefinite - - - - - 54 

Rules and Exercises on this Indefinite ----- 55 

Declension of Un 9 m. Une 9 f. a or an - - - - - CO 

Rules and Exercises on this Article ------ 61 

Of Nouns Adjective ---.... 63 

Of the Gender and Number of Adjectives - - - - ib. 

Declension of Nouns Adjective - -.---- 65 

Rules and Exercises upon Adjectives - - ..'..&. 

The Place of an Adjective in a Sentence - *> - - 68 

Of Adjectives which precede their Substantives - ib. 

Of Adjectives which come after their Substantives - - 6.9 

Rides and Exercises upon these Adjectives - - - - - ib 

Of the Degrees of Comparison - - - 72 

Ruies with Exercises upon the Degrees of Comparison - - - ib, 



'<U CONTENTS. 

Of Numbers -79 

Rules and Exercises upon these Cardinal Numbers - 80 

Of ihe Ordinal Numbers - -83 

Rules and Exercises upon the Ordinal Numbers 84 
Recapitulatory or Promiscuous Exercises upon all the preceding 

Rules - - - . i g<5 

SECT. III. 

Of Prmouns -------...93 

Of Pronouns Personal ....... { . 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns • - - - - 94 

Observations on the Pronouns Je and Moi, Tu and Toi, II and Lui, 

Us and Eux 96" 

Exercises upon the preceding Observations - - - - - 97 

Of Conjunctive Pronouns and their Declensions - 98 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns - - - - - 99 

Oi' Particles Relative or Supplying Pronouns en, y, and le - 103 

Rules and Exercises upon these Supplying Pronouns - - ib 

Of Pronouns Possessive, and their Declensions - - - 109 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns, ----- HO 

OF Pronouns Demonstrative - - - - - - - 114 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns - - - - - 115 

Of Pronouns Relative - 120 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns - - - - - 121 

Of Pronouns interrogative --....-. 126 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns ----- i"5. 

Of Pronouns Indefinite -------- 128 

Rules and Exercises upon these Pronouns ----- 129 

Recapitulatory or Promiscuous Exercises upon all the Pronouns - 143 



SECT. IV. 

Of Verbs and their different Sorts - - - . - - 150 

Conjugation of Verbs and Moods ..... 152 

Tenses - - ----.-.. 154 

Tenses of the Indicative Mood ----..- 156 

Simple Tenses of the Indicative Mood ----- ib. 

Compound Tenses of the Indicative Mood ----- 160 

Tenses of the Subjunctive or Conjunctive Mood, and their Compounds 164 

Numbers and Persons - - - - - - - - 165 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Avoir, to have ... 167 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Etre, to be - - - 169 

Rules and Exercises on the two preceding Auxiliary Verbs - - 172 
Promiscuous Exercises upon the Compound Tenses of these Auxiliary 

Verbs - ------.-. 174 

Rules and Examples for Using these Verbs Interrogatively, &c - 175 

Promiscuous Exercises on Rules of Interrogation, &c. - - 177 

Remark on the Verb Eire, to be - - - - - - 179 

First Conjugation in er, as in Parl-er - ISO 

Important Observation upon the Repetition of Verbs, &c. see N. B. - 184 

Exercises on this Conjugation - - - 185 
Exercises on the Compound Tenses - - - - - -188 

Second Conjugation, in ir, as in Pun-zV - - 189 

Exercises on this Conjugation - - - - - - - 191 

Third Conjugation in evoir, as in rec-evoir .... 194 



CONTENTS. Xni 

Exercises on this Conjugation - - 196 

Fourth Conjugation in re, as in Vend-re - - - 200 

Elxercises on this Conjugation ....... 203 

Recapitulatory Exercises on the Regular Verbs of the Four Conjuga- 
tions 205 

Promiscuous Exercises on the compound Tenses of the preceding Con- 
jugations - ......... 208 

Conjugations of the Passive Verbs - - - - - - 209 

Of Neuter Verbs generally ... - ... 210 

Of Reflective Verbs .... - - - 215 

Model of Conjugations for the Reflected Verbs of the Four Conjugations 219 

Exercises on the Reflective Verbs - 222 

Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs of the First Conjugation - - 227 
Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation - - - - 22Q 
Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the First and Second Conjugations 234 
Continuation of the Irregular. Verbs of the Second Conjugation - 236 
Exercises on the preceding Irregular Verbs ----- 241 
Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation - 242 
Exercises on the preceding Irregular Verbs and their Compounds - 247 
Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation - 250 
Observation upon May and Might, when used as a Verb or Aux- 
iliary - - -- 255 

Observation upon the words Will and Would, when used as a Verb 

or an Auxiliary --------- 260 

Exercises upon Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation - - 261 

Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation ----- 265 

Exercises upon the preceding Irregular Verbs and their Compounds 274 

Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation - 277 

Exercises on the preceding Irregular Verbs and their Compounds - 286 

Continuation of the Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation - 292 

Exercises on the preceding Verbs and their Compounds - - 200 

Of the Impersonal Verbs - - - - - - - - 305 

Conjugation of the Impersonal Verbs ----- 306 

Exercises on the Impersonal Verbs ------ ib 

Upon the Impersonal Verb y avoir - ... - 307 

Exercises on the preceding Verb - ----- 308 

Remarks on the general Pronoun On ----- 309 

Exercises on the preceding Pronoun, &c. - - - - ib. 

Remarks on the Impersonal Verb Falloir, to be needful, '-equisite, 

necessary - - - - - -.- - - - 316 

Exercises on the preceding Impersonal Verb - - - - 318 

Additional Remarks on the general Pronoun On - - - 321 

Exorcises on the preceding Proncan ----- \b. 

Recapitulatory Exercises on the Impersonal Verb3 • - 322 



sect, v 



Of Participles 

Rules and Exercises on the Particinles Active and Passive 



lb. to 



325 

33& 



SECT. 

Of Indeclinable Parts of Speech 
2 



VI. 



335 



XIV CONTENTS. 

Of Adverbs 335 

Table of Adverbs - - - 335, 338, 340, 342, 343, 345, 347, 349 
Observation on the Adverb Ou ------- 350 

Table of Adverbs continued - - 352, 354, 356, 357, 359 



SECT. VII. 

Of Prepositions -- 361 

Prepositions governing the Genitive or Ablative Cases - ib 362 

Exercises on these Prepositions --.... ib. 

Prepositions governing the Dative Case - 364 

Exercises on these Prepositions - ib. 

Prepositions requiring the Accusative Case - - - - - 365 
Exercises upon these Prepositions - - - - - 366 

Observations on some Prepositions, and Exercises upon them, Above, 

368; ^,369,370; By, 371, 372, 373; For, 374; From, ib ; 

In, 375. 376; On or Upon, 377 ; Over, 376 $ With, 379, 379, 380, 

382 ; Without, 383. 



SECT. VIII. 

Of Conjunctions 383 

Conjunctions requiring the Infinitive Mood, and Exercises upon them 384 
Conjunctions requiring the Verb in the Indicative Mood, and Exercises 

upon them in continuation ------- 385 

Conjunctions requiring the Future Tense ----- 389 

Remark on the Conjunction Que, preceding an Infinitive or Subjunc- 
tive Mood 890 

Conjunctions requiring the Verb in the Subjunctive Mood, and Exer- 
cises upon them -----.... 391 
Remarks on the Conjunctions Si and Que - 394 
Exercises on the preceding Conjunctions ----- 395 
Verbs requiring the Conjunction Que, with the following Verb in the 

Subjunctive Mood 397 

Exercises on this and the preceding Rules ----- 397 

Observations on the Verb Vouloir, to will, to wish - - - 400 
Conjunctions Qui, Que or Dont, requiring the following Verb in the 

Subjunctive Mood, and Exercises upon them - - - - 401 



SECT. IX. 

Of Interjections -----.--- 403 

'Table of Interjections -------- ib. 

Exercises on the preceding Interjections ----- 404 

Remarks on the Particles De, a, Pour, when not expressed, and Exer- 
cises upon them --------- ib 

Remarks on the Particle De, when it is to be expressed, and Exerci- 
ses upon it --------- 406 

Remarks on the Particle a, when it is to be expressed, and Exercises 
upon it 409 

Important Remarks on the Particles De, a, Pour, with Exercises - 411 



CONTENTS. XV 

SECT. X. 

Idiomatical Expressions --...... 419 

Of the Verb Avoir, to have, and Exercises upon it ib. 

Of Eire, to be, and Exercises upon it - - * - - 415 

Of Fuire, to make, or to do, and Exercises upon it 416 
Of Different Verbs, and Exercises upon them - 418, 419 

General and Promiscuous Exercises - - 421 

Of the Understanding of Languages ib. 

Of Study 422 



SECT. XI. 

Scheme for Parsing a French Sentence • • • • 424 

Treatise upon French Versification - - - - - 427 



16 



AN 



ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT 



OF 



IRREGULAR VERBS, 

With References to the Places in which they , or similar Verbs } 
are conjugated in this Grammar ; 

WITH REMARKS. 



English 

To Acquire 

Avoid, 1 or Shun 

Abstain 

Attain to 

Anticipate 

Assault 

be able 

Absolve * 

Abate 

Acknowledge, or 
know again 

Accrue 

Appear 

Appear, tc ^ive evi- 
dence 

Ask too much 

Admit 

Anoint 

Apprehend, or under- 
stand 



A. 
French. 

xAicquerir 

Fuir2 

S'Abstenir 

Parvenir a 

Prevenir 

Assaillir 

Pouvoir 3 

Absoudre 

Rabattre 

> Reconnaitre 

AccroTtre 
ParaTtre 

> Comparaitre 

Surfaire 

Admettre 

Oindre 4 

> Com prendre 



Conjugated like 



* Tenir 
Tressaillir 

Battie 
k Connaltre 



Faire 

Mettre 

Craindre 

Prendre 



Pasje' 
229 
236 

244 

246 
255 
265 
266 



272 



282 
284 
277 

294 



1 Eviter, to avoid, and slssister, to assist, are regular verbs of the 
First Conjugation. 

2 See Pret. page 294, and Imperfect of Subjunctive, page 295* 

3 See page 255 and 256. 

4 See Remark, page 293, 



AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT, &C. 



To Abstract 

Assist 2 

Agree 

be Acquainted with 

be Afraid 

fall Asleep 

fall Asleep again 



To Boil 

Boil again 

Belie 
. Belong 

Become of 

Become fit, &c. 

Befall 

Beat 

Beat again 

Beat down (abate) 

Bray 

Believe 

Bake, or Boil, often 
Englished to do 

Bake again, do again 

Bring to, or Reduce to 

Build 6 , or construct 

Banish 6 

be Born 

be Born again 



To Conquer 
Concur 

Contradict or belie 
Consent 
Cover 

Cover again 
Contain 
Come 
Come back 
Clothe 

Come to, Befall 
Clear a table 



French. 
Abstraire 
Secourir 
Consentir 
Connaitre 
Craindre 
S'Endormir 
Se Rendormir 

B. 

Bouillir 

Rebouillrr 

Dementir 

Appartenir 

Devenir 4 

Convenir 

Survenir 

Battre 

Rebattie 

Rabattre 

Braire 3 

Croire 

> Cuire 

Recuire 

Reduire 

Construire 

Proscrire 

Naitre 

Renaitre 

c. 

Conquerir 
Concourir 
Dementir 
Consentir 
Couvrir 
Recouvrir 
Contenir 
Venn- 
Re venir 
Vetir 
Survenir 
Desservir 



Conjugated like 

Traire 

Courir 

Mentir 



- Dormir 



► Bouillir* 
Mentir 

► Tenir 
•Battre 



> Conduiro 

Ecrire 

> Naitre 

Acqu^rir 
Courir 

> Mentir 
?OiTrir 

VTenir 

J 

Servir 



17 



297 
231 
237 
272 
277 

233 



230 
237 

244 

266 

26* 
277 

270 

2SC 
292 

230 
231 

237 
239 

244 

243 



2 See note 1 in preceding page. 3 See page 231. 

4 See Note*, page 247. 5 See pages 268 and 269 

6 Biltir, to build, and Bannir % to banish, are regulars of the Soc- 
ond Conjugation. 



18 AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF 

Conjugated like 



English, 
To Conclude 

Conduct, Lead, or 

Carry 
Construct, Build 
Circumcise 
Chance, or Fall out 
Contradict 
Curse 
Constrain 
Compel 
Complain 
Come to life, as from 

an egg, &c. 
Counterfeit 
Compromise 
'Commit 
Chide 
ConqueT 
Convince 



French. 

Conclure 
Conduire 



i„ 



Construire 

Circoncire 3 

echoir 4 

Contredire 5 

Maudire 

Contraindre 

Se Plaindre 

> eel ore 6 

Contrefaire 

Compromettre 

Commettre 

Reprendre 

Vaincre 

Convaincre 



> Conduire 

Confire 
Decljoir 

I Dire 

> Craindre 



Faire 
I Mettre 

Prendre 
> Vaincre 



269 

270 

269 
253 

279 
277 

2S0 

282 
2S4 
294 
298 



D. 



To Discourse 


Discourir 


Courir 


231 


Die 

be Dying 


Mourir 
Se Mourir 


> Mourir 


238 


Detain 

Disagree 


Detenir 
Disconvenir 


I Tenir 


244 


Discover 


De.couvrir 


Offrir 


239 


Distribute 


Departir 


Mentir 


237 


Dissolve 


Dissoudre 2 


Absoudre 


265 


Drink 


Boire 




267 


Debute 


Debattre 


Battre 


266 


Decay 


Dechoir 




253 


Do an ill oiriee 


Desservir 


Servir 


243 


Deduct 


Deduire 


1 




Destroy 


Detruire 


l 




Do over, with mortar, 


> Enduire 


| Conduire 


270 


Decrease 
Disappear 


Decroitre 
Disparaitre 


> ConnaTtre 


272 


Describe 


Decrire 


Ecrire 


280 


Do 


Faire 


) 




Do again 


Refaire 


> Faire 


282 


Defeat 


De faire 


) 





2 See Remark, page 266. 3 See Participle Pass, page 269. 

4 See Participle Act. and Pass, page 254. 5. See JNote, p. 280 

6 Sec page 280 



THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



19 



English. 
To Dissemble 
Dye 

Draw, Design 
Defer, Put off, or 

Deliver up 
Displease 
Distract 



French. 
Feindre 
Teindre 

Peindre 

Remettre. 

Deplane 
Distraire 



Conjugated like 



> Craindre 



Mettre 

Plaire 
Traire 



277 



284 

293 
297 



To Entertain 
Exclude 
Extract 
Enjoin 
Enclose 
Encompass 
Elect 
Extract 



E. 

Entretenir 
Exclure 
Surfaire 
Enjoindre 

> Enceindre 

Elire 
Ex traire 



Tenir 

Conclure 

Faire 

> Craindre 

Lire 
Traire 



244 

269 

282 

277 

283 
297 



To Fetch 

Flee, or Fly 

Feel 

Foresee, or have i 
foresight of 

Foresee 

Fit, or fit well 

Fight 

Fear 

Force 

Feign 

Forbid 

Foretell 

Fall out, or Hap- 
pen 

Fry 

Feed, or Graze 

Follow 

Follow from 

Fine-draw 



F. 

Querir 1 

Fuir2 

Sentir 

Pressentir 

Prevoir3 

Seoir 5 

Combattre 

Craindre 

Contraindre 

Feindre 

Interdire 

Pre dire 

> e choir 7 

Frire 8 

Paitre 

Su?vre 

S'Ensuivre 

Rentraire 



Acquerir 



> Mentir 

Voir 

Asseoir 

Battre 

► Craindre 



230 
236 

237 

259 

252 
266 

277 



Dire6 


279 


Dechoir 


254 




2S3 


Connaitre 


272 


Suivre 


296 


Traire 


297 



To Go 

Go away 



G. 

Aller 
S'en Aller 



Aller 



1 See Note, page 230. 2 See page 237. 
4 See page 282 5 See page 252. 

7 See page 254 8 See page 283 



227 



3 See N B. pago 259. 
6 See Note, page 279. 



20 



AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF 



English, 
To Gather 

Gather together 
Go out 
Grow 
Grow less 
Grow again 
Graze 
Glitter 

Glimpse, or to have < 
a glimpse of ] 

Grind 

Grind again 
Give other clothes 
Gird 



To Hold 

Happen unexpected- 

h 

Hear 

Hatch 

Hurt 

Humor 

Hold one's tongue 



Hear of 



To Incur 
Impart 
Infringe 
Intervene 
Invest 
Interdict 
Inscribe 
Induce 
Instruct 
Introduce 
Include 



To Jut, Jet out, a term 
in Architecture 
only 
Join 



French. 

Cueillir 

R ©cueillir 

Sortir 

Croitre 

Decroitre 

Recroltre 

Paitre 

Reluire 1 

Entrevoir 

Moudre 
Remoudre 
Revetir 
Ceindre 

H. 

Tenir 
> Survenir 

OuTr2 

Eclore 3 

Nuire4 

Complaire 

Se Taire 
) Apprendre 
) des nouvelles 

i. 

Encourir 
Departir 
Contrevenirk 
Intervenir 
Revetir 
lnterdire 5 
Inscrire 
Induire 
Instruire 
Introduire 
Comprendre 



J. 



> SafflirS 
Joindre 



Conjugated like 
I Cueillir 233 

Mentir 237 



> Connaltre 

Conduire 
Voir 

Moudre 
Craindre 

► Tenir 



Conduire 
I Plaire 

> Prendre 

Courir 
Mentir 

I Tenir 

Dire 
Ecrire 

> Conduire 
Prendre 



Tressaillir 
Craindre 



272 

270 
258 

286 

212 

277 



244 

240 

280 
270 

293 
294 



231 
237 

244 

242 
279 
2S0 

270 

294 



245 
277 



1 See page 284. 2 See page 240. 3 See page 280. 4 See page 293 
5 See NoteT page 279 6 See page 246 and N. B. 246. 



THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



21 



English. 



To Keep 

Know somebody 

Know again 
Know something 



To Lie 

give one the Lie 

Lead 

Lead again 

Learn 

Leap for 

Laugh 

Live 



French. 
K. 

Tenir 
Connaltre 
Reconnaitre 
Savoir 2 

L. 

Mentir 

De mentir 

Conduire 

Reconduire 

Apprendre 

Tressailiir 

Rire 

Vivrc 



Conjugated like 



> Connaitre 



> Mentir 

> Conduire 
Prendre 



211 

272 
256 



237 

270 

294 
245 
295 
299 



To Maintain 

Move 

Move, or Stir up 
Mistake, or be de- 
ceived 
Make 

Make up again 
Mimic 
Milk 



| Tenir 
Mouvoir 



M. 

> Mamtenir 
J Soutenir 

Mouvoir 

emouvoir 

Me connaitre, or Connaitre Se Me 

prendre, Prendre 

Faire ^ 

Refaire > Faire 

Contrefaiio } 

Trains 



244 

254 

272 
294 

282 

297 



To 



make a 

Noise 



great 



N. 



> Bruire 3 



269 



To Overtake 
Offer 
Open 
Obtain 

do an ill Office 
Open as an Oyster 
Outlaw 
Omit 
Outlive 
Oblige 



o. 

Atteindre 

Offrir 

Ouvrir 

Ob tenir 

Desservir 

eclore 1 

Proscrire 

Omettre 

Survivre 

Astreindre 2 



Craindre 

! Offrir 

Tenir 
Servir 

Ecrire 
Mettre 
Vivre 
Craindre 



277 

239 

244 
243 
280 

280 
2S4 
299 
211 



1 See page 2S0. 2 See Notes, page 266. 3 See page 269 



22 



AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT OF 



English. 


French. 

p. 


Conjugated like 


To Prevent 


Prevenir > 
Provenir J 


Tenir 


Proceed 




Prescribe 


Prescrire > 
Proscrire j 


Ecrire 


Proscribe 




Prevail 


Prevaloir 3 


Valoir 


Provide 


Pourvoir* 


Voir 


Pull down 


Abattre 


Battre 


Preserve 


Connie 




Put out 


eteindre ^ 




Pretend 


Feindre [ 


■ Craindre 


Paint 


Peindre [ 




Pity 


Plaindre J 




Part with 


Se Defaire 


Faire 


Put 


Mettres 




Permit 


Permettre 




Promise 


Promettre^ H 


Mettre 


Put back again 


> Remettre 




Put off 




Prejudice 


> Prevenir 
Produire 


Tenir 


Prepossess 
Produce 


Conduire 


Pursue 


Poursuivre 


Suivre 


Please 


Plaire 

R. 




To Require 


Requerir 


Acque*rir 


get Rid of 


Se Defaire 


Faire 


Run 


Courir 




Run to 


Accourir 


► Courir 


Run over 


Parcourir 




have Recourse to 


Recourir 




Run away 


Fuin 




Retain 


Retenir 




Return 


Revenir 




Remember, or 
Remind 


> Se Souvenir 2 


► Tenir 


Recollect 


> Se ressouve- 

> nir 




Relieve 


Subvenir 


J 


Resent 


Ressentir 


) 


Reply 


Repartir 


> Mentir 


Repent 


Se Repentir 


) 


Roar 


Bruire 7 





244 

280 

,257 

258 
266 
271 



277 
282 

284 



244 

270 

296 
293 



229 

282 

231 
236 

241 



237 
269 



1 See p. 236, and 237. Pret. aud Imp. 2 See Note, t p. 247 
3 See • 9.58. 4. Sec p. 259. 5 See Note, p. 284 See Note, 
p 285. 7 See p. 269, 



THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



as flower 



English 

To Resolve 
Retract 
Recant 
Read 

Read again 
Remove 
Resign 
Rise 
Revive 
Rebuke 
Reduce 
Restrain 
Reach 
Revive 
Recovei 



To Succour 
Sleep 

make Sleep 
Shun 
Suffer 
Serve 
Support 
Suit 

Start, Startle 
Stir up 
See 

See asain 
Solve 
Sew 
Stitch 
Sew again 
Sharpen 
Set out 
Set out again 
be Sensible of 
Smell 
Struggle 
Sit down 
Sit down again 
Supercede 
Say 

Say again 
Slander 
Speak ill of 

1 See p. 266. 
4 See p. 266. 



French. 
Resoudre 4 

> Se Dedire 5 

Lire 
Relire 
Demettre 
Se Damettre 

) NaTtre 

5 Renaitre 
Reprendre 
Reduire 
Restreindre 
Atteindre 

> Revivre 



s. 

Secourir 

Dormir 

Endormir 

Fuir 

SoufFrir 

Servir 

Soutenir 

Convenir 

Tressaillir 

emouvoir 

Voir 

Revoir 

Soudrei 

• Coudre 

Recoudre 

Emoudre 

Partir 

Repartir 

Ressentir 

Sentir 

Se De'battre 

Asseoir 2 

Se Rasseoir 

Surseoir 3 

Dire 

Redire 5 

I Me dire 






Conjugated like 
Absoudre 
Dire 

> Lire 
{ Mettre 

I Na'itre 

Prendre 
Conduire 

> Craindre 
Vivre 



Courir 
Dormir 

OfTrir 

Tcnir 

IMouvoir 
|v Q Jr 
Absoudre 

> Coudre 

Moudre 

I Mentir 



i Dire 



23 

265 
279 

283 

284 

292 

294 

270 

277 

299 

231 

233 

336 
239 
243 

244 

245 
254 

25S 

265 

273 

2S6 

237 



Battre 


266 


Asseoir 


250 




252 



279 



2 See p. 251. 

5 See Note *, p. 279, 



3 See p, 252. 



24 



AN ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT, &,C. 



English. 
To Shut, or close 
Shut, or 
Surround with 

walls, &c. 
Subscribe 
Satisfy 
Shine 
Submit 
Surprise 
Smile 
Seduce 
Suffice, or 
be Sufficient 
Seem 
Subtract 

To Toll 

Tell again 
Transcribe 
Turn out 
Transmit 
Take 

Take again 
Translate 
Throw down 

To Unsew 

Use, or make Usa o* 
Uncover 

Unsay 

Undo 

Undo again 

Understand 

Unlearn 

Undertake 

To Vanquish 

jfa Welcome 
he Worth 

Wish, or be Willing 
Write 

Write again 
Whet / 

1 See n 296. 

4 See p. 261, 262. 



French. 
Clore 

> Enclore 5 

Souscrire 

Satisfaire 

Luire 6 

Soumettre 

Surprendre 

Sourire 

Seduire 

I Suffire* 

Paraitre 
Soustraire 

T. 

Dire 
Red ire 
Transcrire 
D^mettre 
Transmettre 
Prendre 
Reprendre 
Traduire 
A battre 

IT. 
Decoudre 
Se Servir 
Decouvrir 
Se Dedire2 
D-'.- fa ire 
Reds faire 
Comprendre 
Desaprendre 
Entreprendre 

v. 

Vaincre 3 

w. 

Accueillir 

Valoir 
Vouloir 4 
ecrire 
R ecrire 
Emoudre 



Conjugated like 






> Eclore 

Ecrire 

Faire 

Conduire 

Mettre 

Prendre 

Rire 

Conduire 

Confire 

Connaitre 
Traire 



5 Dire 
Ecrire 

> Mettre 

> Prendre 

Conduire 
Rattre 

Coudre 

Servir 

Offrir 

Dire 

> Faire 

> Prendre 



Cueillir 



! 



Ecrire 
Moudre 



280 

280 
282 
270 
284 
294 
295 
270 

271 

272 

297 



279 

280 

284 

294 

270 

266 

273 
243 
239 

279 

282 
294 



29S 

232 

257 
260 

280 

286 



2 Sea Note *, p. 279. 3 See Note, p. 298 
6 See p. 284. 



5 See p. i!S0.' 



An Explanation of the Abbreviations made use of hi the fit- 
lowing work. 



m. 
f. 

pi. 
adj. 


Noun masculine. 

Noun feminine. 

Plural. 

Noun adjective. 


pro 
v. 


Pronoun. 
Verb. t 


p. act. 
p.p. 


Participle active. 
Participle passive. 


P- 

adv. 

c. 


Preposition. 

Adverb. 

Conjunction. 


int. 


Interjection. 

The English word that has this mark 




underneath, is not to be expressed in 

French. 



The figures. , » 2 ' 3 - 8tc. direct to the arrangement of the 
words in the French sentence. 

Two words having the same figure are expressed bv 
the French word placed under one of them. 

Two or three words between parentheses ( ), are ex- 
pressed by the French under them, or have been pre- 
viously expressed. 



FRENCH ALPHABET, 



lloman letters. 


Italic 


letters. 


Old Pro. 


New Pro. 


A 


a 


A 


a 


ah 


ah 


B 


b 


B 


b 


bay 


bet 


C 


c 


C 


c 


my 


he and ce 


D 


d 


B 


d 


day 


de 


E 


e 


E 


e 


a 


a 


F 


f 


F 


f 


€ 


fi 


G 


g 


G 


S 


jay* 


ghe and ge 


H 


h 


H 


h 


ash 


he 


I 


i 


I 


i 


ee 


ee 


J 


J 


J 


3 


je# 


j e * 


K 


k 


K 


k 


hah 


kah 


L 


I 


L 


I 


ell 


le 


M 


m 


M 


m 


emm 


me 


N 


n. 


' JV 


n 


enn 


ne 


O 

















P 


P 


p 


V 


pay 


pe 


Q 


q 


Q 


7 


fcuf 


ke 


R 


r 


R 


r 


airr 


re 


S 


s 


S 


s 


es3 


se and ze 


T 


t 


T 


t 


tay 


te 


U 


u 


U 


a 


4 


AC* 


V 


V 


V 


V 


vay 


ve 


X 


X 


X 


X 


ceks 


ke and ze 


Y 


y 


Y 


y 


ee graik 


ee graik 


Z 


z 


Z 


z 


zaid 


ze 



* The two consonants g and j are sounded in the alphabet like 5 in 
pleasure or z in azure. 

t U has no similar sound in English, and must be learned from a 
master 

X In the new pronunciation, e after each consonant is sounded a3 in 
{he English word barber, faint!y sounding the r t 



A PRACTICAL 
FRENCH GRAMMAR. 

SECTION I. 

GRAMMAR is the art of speaking and writing in any 
language with propriety ; or, it is the art of rightly ex- 
pressing our thoughts by words. 

Grammar is of two kinds, general and particular. Uni- 
versal grammar considers language in itself, explains the 
principles which are alike common to every tongue, and 
distinguishes, with precision, between those particulars 
which are essential and those which are only accidental. 
Particular grammar applies these common principles to a 
particular language, and furnishes certain rules and ob- 
servations which are, either mediately or immediately, de- 
ducible from its common principles. 

A grammar of the French tongue must be formed agree- 
ably to the established usage, and those particular modes 
of expression, to which custom has given its sanction, It 
has therefore for its object, in common with all other 
grammars, the consideration of letters, syllables, words, 
sentences, &c. 

ALPHABET ; — is composed of twenty-five letters, of 
which words are formed ; five of them, a, e, i, o, u 7 are 
distinguished by the name of vowels, which form a perfect 
sound of themselves. The twenty other letters, 6, c, d 9 f y 
g, hj jj lc, /, m, n, p, q, r, s, f, t*, a?, y } z, are called conso- 
nants, and cannot be pronounced but when joined with 
vowels, except ?/, which has often the sound of double i y 
and of which some make a sixth vowel. 

VOWELS, three sorts ; Simple, a, e, i, o, «, which 
are subdivided into short and long, the sound of which is 
more prolonged and deeper 



28 

Compound, of two or three simple vowels, as ai, ex, oi, 
uiy au, eu, on, oz, ozu : ai has the sound of e, mute in fais- 
ant,* and the sound of e close in je lived, as well as in all 
the verbs in the first person singular of the future. 

Nasal, when they are joined to m, or n, and when they 
form only one sound, as an, am, en, em, in, im, ain, ein. 

DIPHTHONG ; — Is the union of several vowels, the 
pronunciation. of which causes two sounds to be heard by 
a single impulse of the voice. Dieu, yeux, niais, pion, 
oiii e, mien, are diphthongs : yet, Caen, eau, paon, craie, are 
not so, because they are pronounced Can, 6, pan, ere, 

ACCENTS, three sorts ; — The acute ', the grave \ 
and the circumflex % serve to modify the sound of the 
vowels : the office of the latter is to render long the vow- 
els which are affected by it ; thus pronounce a, e, i, 6, u 9 
by a greater opening of the mouth, almost as if it were 
aa, ee, ii, oo, uu. It is thus we write age instead of aage ; 
this is also the reason why it is placed over the vowels that 
were formerly followed by an s, which has f)een dropped, 
since it is no longer pronounced ; as in asne, beste, in 
which the suppression of the s, requires that we should 
write dne, bete, in order to show that a and e are long. 

KINDS of E, Jive ; — two kinds, Mule : 1st. — One 
whose dull sound is almost null in brave, encore, which art 
pronounced no otherwise than brav, encor. 

2d. — The other, the sound of which, although obscure, 
can be prolonged, nearly as the sound of eu, inje, me y te } 
revenir, redemander. 

Sd. — Close, by the accent Acute, in bonfe ; also ez is 
equivalent to e, as in voyez, lisez, touchez, &,e 

4th. — Open, by the accent Grave, in acces, succes, ncfle, 
which accent is suppressed in grejj'e, sans cesse, abbesse, 

5th. — Very open, by the accent Circumflex, in etre, iete, 
tempetc, which were formerly pronounced and written cs- 
ire, teste, fyc. 

* See Faire, page 270. 



29 

Middling, followed by a double consonant, and the 
sound of which is between that of e close and e open ? in 
maisonnette, musette, pouleUe. 

The DIJERESIS, (")— Which is placed over the vow- 
ols e 3 i', w, and causes them to be pronounced separately 
from the preceding vowel, as in a'leul, Sail!, and 
may be ranked among the accents. 

The CEDILLA, (*)— A little dash, which is put under 
the c, is also a sort of accent, since it serves to modify the 
hard pronunciation which it would otherwise have before 
the vowels a, o, M 3 and to change it into that of S ; it is 
thus we pronounce it in frangais, j agon, re^u. 

The APOSTROPHE, (') ;— Is only a comma put over 
the place which the vowel e or a ought to occupy, which 
is suppressed when the word following begins with a vow- 
el or an h not aspirate ;* thus, instead of le esprit, la ambi- 



*AN 


ALPHABETICAL LIST 


• 


of such French words as 


:iave their init 


lal h mute. 


HABILE, 


CLEVER 


heliotrope, 




turn-sol 


habilement, 


cleverly 


hemisphere, 




hemisphere 


habile to, 


cleverness 


■ hemistiehe, 




hemistich 


habiller, 


to clothe 


hemorrhage, 




bloody-flux 


habillement, 


dress 


hemorrhoides, 




piles 


habit, 


a coat 


hepatique, 




hepaiical 


habiter, 


to inhabit 


herbage, 


ha 


'bave, pasture 


habitable, 


ink a bit able 


herbe, 




herb or g r ass 


habitant, 


inhabitant 


herboriste, 




herbalist 


habitude, 


custom 


hereditaire, 




hereditary 


habitael, 


habitual 


heresie, 




heresy- 


habituer, 


to use 


heretique, 




heretic 


haleine, 


breath 


heritage 




inheritance 


ha me con, 


fishing hook 


heriter, - ; 




to inherit 


harmonie. 


harmony 


heritier, 




an hei:' 


hebdomadaire, 


weekly 


heritiere, 




an heiress 


HebraTque, 


Hebraick 


hermine, 




ermine 


Hebreu, 


Hebrew 


hermite, 




an hermit 


hecatombe, 


an hecatomb 


hermitage 3 




hermitage 


hpcrire ; 


hegira 


heroine.* 




an heroine 


hclas ! 


alas ! 


hero'ique, 




her 01 cat 


Helicon, 


Helicon 


heroisme, 




heroism 



* The h in all this family is only aspirated in htros 
3 * 



30 



hon, and le homme, we must pronounce and write P esprit 
Pamhition ? Phomme. But when the h is aspirate, the arti- 



hesiter. 


to hesitate 


hostie, 


host or victim 


hesitation, 


hesitation 


hostiiite, 


hostility 


heur, 


luck 


hote, 


landlord 


heure, 


hour 


hotesse, 


landlady 


heureux, 


happy 


hotel, a hotel or great house 


heureusement, 


happily 


hotelier, 


inn-keeper 


hexagone, 


an hexagon 


hotellerie, 


an inn 


hexametre, 


hexameter 


huile, 


oil 


hiatus, 


hiatus, a gap 


huilier, 


oil- cruet 


hier, 


yesterday 


huissier, 


usher or tip-staff 


hieroglyphe, 


hieroglyphic 


huitre, 


oyster. 


hirondelle, 


a swallow 


humain, 


humane 


histoire, 


history 


humainement, 


humanely 


historien, 


historian 


humaniser, 


to civilize 


historique, 


historical 


humanite, 


humanity 


histrion, 


a buffoon 


humble, 


humble 


hiver, 


winter 


humble ment, 


humbly 


hiverner, 


to winter 


humectation, 


moistening 


holocauste, 


burnt sacrifice 


humecter, 


to moisten 


hombre, (jeu} 


ombre 


humeur, 


humour 


homelie, 


an homily 


humide, 


damp, moist 


-homicide, 


an homicide 


humidite, 


humidity 


hommage, 


homage 


humiliant, 


mortifying 


homm'e , 


man 


humiliation, 


humiliation 


honnete, 


honest 


humilier, 


to humble 


honnetement, 


honestly 


humilite, 


humility 


honnete te, 


honesty 


hyacinthe, 


hyacinth 


honneur, 


honour 


hydre, 


hydra 


honorable, 


honorable 


hydromel, 


mead, 


honoraire 


honorary 


hydropique, 


hydropic 


honorer, 


to honour 


hydropisie, 


dropsy 


hopital, 


hospital 


hymen, 


hymen 


horizon, 


horizon 


hymne, 


hymn 


horloge, 


a town clock 


hyperbole, 


hyperbole 


horloger, 


zoatch-maker 


hypocondre, 


tiypocondriac 


hormis, 


except 


hypocrisie, 


hypocrisy 


horoscope, 


horoscope 


hypocrite, 


hypocrite 


horreur, 


horror 


hypotheque, 


mortgage 


horrible, 


horrid 


hypothequer, 


to mortgage 


horriblement, 


horribly 


hypothese, 


hypothesis 


hospitalier, 


hospitable 


hysope, 


hyssop 


hospitalite, 


hospitality 


hysterique, 


hysteric 



In a familiar discourse, the letter h is not aspirated in the following 
words, viz. Hanovre, Hollande, and Hongrie, when either of them 
is preceded by the particle de ; for though we always say le Hanovre, 
la Hollande and la Hongrie, yet it is usual to say and write V Elector at 
d'Hanovre, la Reine a" Hongrie, la toile a" Hollande, and the like. 
\s to other national and proper names, the initial h is aspirated in most 



31 

cle remains entire ; we must not say Vheros, but pronounce 
le heros, du heros, an heros. 

VARIATION IN THE PRONUNCIATION Of 

CONSONANTS ; — C is pronounced hard like k before 
the vowels a, o, u, in cocarde, cube ; like s before e, i, in 
ceciie. There are even some words in which it is pro- 
nounced like g, as in second, &c. G is pronounced hard 
before a, o, u ; like j, before e, i ; when we wish to modi- 
fy its pronunciation before a, o, u, an e is placed after it, 
as in, il gagea, nageoire ; when on the contrary we wish 
to have it pronounced hard before a, o, u, an u is placed af- 
ter it, as in, guerir,. guide. H is of two sorts, aspirated as 
in hair, envahir; then the consonants by which it is preced- 
ed are not sounded ; it is called mute, when it is not pro- 
nounced at all, as in homme, heroine. The h of heros is as- 
pirate, that of its derivatives is not so. Q when not the 
last letter of a word, as in cinq, is never used without be- 
ing followed by u, which gives it the pronunciation of h, 
as in qui, quelconque ; yet in several words u has retained 
its ancient sound of on, and then qu is pronounced like kou 
as in aquatique, equation. & is pronounced hard in salut. 
senat ; but between two vowels, it takes the pronunciation 
of z, as in viser, raison, &c. T followed by i and anothei 
rowel, is pronounced like c, as in partial, partial , portion ; 
but if i is preceded by s or x, or if it is at the beginning 
of a word, it is pronounced hard, as in tircr, question, mixtion. 
Xis pronounced like cs in fixer, taxer; like gz in examen, ex- 
emple; and like s in six, dix, soixante. Ch is generally 
pronounced like sh, as in chat ; yet it is pronounced often 
like k : Christ, orchestre, bacchante, are examples. Rh, th, 
ph, are pronounced like r, t,f, in rhume, theme, philosophe, 
which are pronounced rume, teme,jilosofe. 

A syllable, whether composed of one or more letters, 
requires, in the pronunciation, no more than a single im- 
pulse of the voice : ex. ba, me, moi, &c. 

A word may consist of one syllable, or of many compact- 
ed into one meaning ; for, a word is the smallest part of 
speech which is in itself significant : ex. mon, my ; hvre, 
book, &c. 

-of them*; as in Hainaut, Hambourgh, Havann*, Henri, fyc but in 
Hamilton, Har court. Hector, Helhie, Herculc, Rerode, Homcrc, 
Horacct and Hyppolitc, it is mute. 



32 

A sentence, or phrase, is an assemblage of words a- 
ranged in their proper order, forming a sense either mort> 
or less complete : ex. 

Je suis voire ami, m I am your friend. 

J'ecrivis hier a voire tante, I yesterday wrote to your 

aunt. 

A feriod may consist of two or three sentences joined 
together, so that they depend on one another to form a 
complete sense. Each "of the sentences forming part of a 
period is called a member of ihe period : ex. 

Les grands ho mines sont r ares ; Great men are scarce ; we 

on doit les respecter, et Von ought to respect them, 

deviait toujour s travailler a and constantly endeavour 

se rendre semhlable a ewx, to resemble them. 

A discourse, or speech, is an assemblage of sentences 
(or phrases) and periods, joined together, and arranged 
according to the rules of the language. 

KINDS OF WORDS. 

There are, in the French tongue, nine different sorts of 
words, which are generally called the nine parts of 
speech, viz. 

1. L 5 Article, Article. 

2. Le Nom et Adjectif, Noun and Adjective. 

3. Le Prono3I, Pronoun. 

4. Le Yerbe, Verb. 

5. Le Participe, Participle. 

6. L'Adverbe, Adverb. 

7. La Preposition, Preposition. 

8. La Conjunction, Conjunction. 

9. L'Interjection, Interjection. 

Five of them are declinable ; that is to say, the radical 
part of the word remaining the same, the other parts, 
but especially the termination, will admit of several vari- 
ations. These declinable words are, the article, noun, 
and adjective, pronoun, verb, and participle. 

The four last, as they never vary their terminations, are 
therefore called indeclinable. 



33 

GENERAL EXPLANATION. 

The articles are certain minute words, which, joined 
jo nouns, determine the extent of their signification, and 
which, in French, denote their gender, number, and case, 
corresponding to the English words, the, of they from the, 
and to the. These in French, are 

Le, la, les, The. 

De, du, de la, des, Of or from the. 

Jl, au, a la, aux, To the. 

The noun, in general, is a word which is used to name 
or qualify everything which is the object of discourse : 
ex. 



Papier, 


Paper. 


Bon, 


Good. 


Plume , 


Pen. 


Petit, 


Little. 


Pain, 


Bread. 


Mauvais, 


Bad, &c. 



The pa&NOUN is a word commonly substituted in the 
place of the noun, to avoid its too frequent repetition : 
J\d vu M. voire pere, et I saw your father, and spoke 

lui ai parte, to him. 

In this instance, the word ltd, to him, is put to avoid the 
repetition of the word pere, father. 

The verb is a word which either expresses the state of 
the subject, or an action done by the subject; or the action 
received or suffered by the subject : ex. 

Monfrere est malade, My brother is ill. 

Ma sceur ecrit une letire, My sister writes a letter. 

Voire cousine est punie, Your cousin is punished. 

The verb is varied by modes, tenses, persons, and num- 
bers. 

The participle partakes both of the nature of the verb 
and the noun adjective : ex. 

Jtyant, Having. | Jlime, Loved. 

Donnant, Giving. | Puni, Punished, &c 

The adverb is Sometimes joined to the noun, but more 
frequently to the verb, whence it derives its name. The 
use of the adverb is, to determine the signification of the 



34 

noun or verb, or expresses some particular modification or 
circumstance of the action or quality : ex. 

Je vous aime sincerement, I love you sincerely. 
Venez demain, „ Come to-morrow. 

In these instances the words sincerely and to-morrow arc 
adverbs. 

The preposition is a word which is put before the noun 
or pronoun, and it always governs the word before which 
it is placed : ex. 

Chez mon ami y Jit my friend's house. 

Devant moi, Before me, &x. 

The conjunction serves to connect the several parts of 
a discourse : ex. et, and ; car, for ; mats, but, &.c. 

The interjection is a word which expresses the differ- 
ent affections or passions of the soul : ex. 

Heias ! mon JDieu ! Oh ! my God ! &x. 

A more particular delineation of these nine parts of 
speech, and their use in the composition of a sentence, or 
period, will be the subject of the following sections. 



SECTION II. 

OF JYOUJYS. 

NOUNS are divided into substantives and adjectives. 
A noun substantive expresses a thing subsisting by itself, 
and can make a complete sense independent of any other 
word : ex. Dieu y God ; roi } king ; maison, house, &,c. 

A noun substantive is either common, collective, or 
proper. 

A common noun is applicable to all beings or things of 
the same kind : ex. homme, man ; roi } king ; ville, town ; 
tahhj table, &c. 

A collective noun is expressive of many particulars ; 
yet, as these particulars are all united in the mind, and 
comprehended under one general idea, they may there- 
fore be conceived as one individual, and, without any im- 
propriety, expressed in the singular number : ex. peuple, 
people *, foret } forest ; armee army, &c. 



35 

A proper noun is applicable to one person or thing 
only, ex. Pierre, Peter ; Londres, London, &c. 

JV. B. A noun is always a Substantive when we can- 
not, with propriety, add to it the word personne, person, or 
the word chose, thing. 

A noun adjective is used to express the quality, color, 
form or quantity, of the substance to which it belongs ; 
and is so called because its meaning cannot be ascertained 
without being joined to its proper substantive, with which 
it must also agree in gender, number and case ; ex. bon, 
good ; aimahle, lovely ; rouge, red ; jaune, yellow ; rond, 
round ; carre, square ; mi, one ; deux, two; trois, three, &c. 

N. B. The noun is always adjective when we can add 
io it the word personne or chose, person or thing. 

In nouns, four things must be considered, viz. 

Les Articles, The Articles. 

Les Genres, ' The Genders. 

Les Nombres, The Numbers. 

Les Cas, The Cases. 

ARTICLES. 

There are three sorts of Articles, viz. 

IJJlriicle deftni, The Article definite. 

L?Jiriie\e parlitif, The Article partitive. 

L Article indefini, The Article indefinite 

The Article must always agree with the noun in gender 
and number. 

The definite article is so called, because it means 
the whole of the object to which it is applied. 

Singular. 
,Le, for the masculine, before nouns, beginning with a 
consonant or h aspirated, ex. le rot, the king ; le heros, 
the hero, &c. 
La, for the feminine : ex. la reine, the queen, he. 
L\ with an elision for both genders, before nouns singular 
beginning with a vowel or h not aspirated : ex. Venfantj 
the child ; Vhomme, the man, &.c. 



36 

Plural. 

Lts for both genders-, whether the noun begin with a con 
sonant or a vowel : ex. les rois, the kings ; les reines, 
the queens ; les enfants, the children, &c. 
The partitive ARTiCLE-means only a part of the object, 

the English word some being always expressed or implied 

Singular. 

> These two articles are used 

Du for the masc. j before nouns beginning with a 
De la, for the fern, J- consonant or h aspirated : ex 
J du pain, some bread ; 

j de la vianae, some meat. 

De l\ for both genders beginning with a vowel or an h 
not aspirated ; ex. de V encre, some ink. 

Plural. 

Des, for both genders : ex. des amis, some friends. * 

The indefinite article is de or d\ of, from, and a, to. 

This article is used, without distinction, before nouns 
masculine and feminine in both numbers. Proper names, 
and the greater part of the pronouns, are declined with it 

Some grammarians admit of a fourth article, viz. un, for 
the masculine, and une for the feminine, in English a or 
an; but it may be observed, that it is always declined 
with the indefinite article, and therefore takes the nature 
of a noun adjective. 

GEJYDERS AJYD NUMBERS. 

There are two genders, viz. the masculine and femi- 
nine. A noun is masculine when there is before it le or 
im, as le or kn Here, the or a book. A noun is feminine 
when it is preceded by la or une, as la or une plume } the or 
a pen. 

There are twe NUMBERS,the singular and plural. The 
singular number speaks of one thing only, as une table, a 
table : the plural speaks of a more than one, as des tables, 
tables. There are some nouns that are never used but in 
the singular number : as, 
1. The names of metals : ex. or, gold ; argent, silver ; 

cuivre, brass ; plomb, lead, &c 



37 

c 2 The names of virtues and vices : ex. avarice, avarice ; 
charite, charity; jfot, faith ; haine, hatred; orgueil, pride; 
prodigalitt, prodigality, &c. 

3. The names by which the five senses are denoted : 
ex. la viie, the sight ; le gout, the taste ; PpdoraL the 
rmcH ; le toucher, feeling ; Vouie, hearing. 

4. Proper names, except when they are used metaphori- 
cally. 

5. To the foregoing may be added the following, which 
are not reducible to any general rules : 



Jlrtillerie, 

Jltiirail, 

Bonheur, 

Colere, 

Courroux, 

Enfance, 

Lait, 

Miel, 

JYoblesse, 

Pauvrele, 

Sang, 



artillery. 

implements. 

happiness. 

anger. 

wrath. 

infancy. 

milk. 

honey. 

nobility. 

poverty. 

blood. 



Faim, 

Fumee, 

Fuite, 

G hire , 

Honte, 

Jeunesse, 

Salat, 

Soif, 

SommeiL 



hunger. 

smoke 

flight. 

glory. 

shame. 

youth. 

safety. 

thirst. 

sleep. 



Vieillesse, old age. 



There are others which are never used but in the plu- 
ral number only ; such as, 



Jlncetres, 
Aijeux, 
Funerailles, 
Frais. 



elices, 



Depens, 
Enlr allies, 



ancestors. 

forefathers. 

a funeral. 

expense. 

delight. 

cost. 

entrails. 



JHoim, apparel 

Ciseaux, scissors 

Hardes, clothes. 

Limites, limits. 

Moeurs, manners 

Mouchettes, snuffers. 

Tenebres, darkness. 

Vivres, victuals. 



Epousailles, espousals. 
Fonts, font. 

And, in general, those which, in English, admit of no 
singular. 

In general, the plural number is formed by adding an & 
to the singular : ex. 

Le pere, the father ; les ptres, the fathers. 

La mere, the mother , les meres, the mothers, Sec. 

All nouns having their singular ending in s, x, or z, ad- 
mit of no variation in the plural : ex 
4 



38 

Lefds, the son; les fils, the sons. 

Une noix, a walnut i des noix, walnuts. 

Le nez, the nose ; les nez, the noses. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Nouns ending in an, eau, 'eu, ceu, ieu, or on, form their plural 
by x, instead of s: ex. 

TJn chapeau, a hat ; des chapeaux, hats. 

TJn manteau, a cloak ; des manteaux, cloaks, 

TJn lieu, a place ; des lieux, places. 

TJn chou, a cabbage ; des choux, cabbages. 

The following differ from this rule, and their plural termi- 
nates in s : ex. 

TJn matou, a great cat ; des matous, great cats. 

TJn sou, a cent; des sous, cents. 

TJn trou, a hole ; des trous, holes. 

TJn licou, a halter ; des licous, halters. 

TJn clou, a nail ; des clous, nails. 

TJn ecrou, a nut ; des erous, nuts. 

TJn sapajou, a sapajou ; des sapajous, sapajous. 

Nouns ending in al and ail have their plural in aux : ex. 
TJn animal, a living creature; des animaux, living creatures, 
TJn cheval, a horse ; des chevaux, horses. 

Un travail, a work ; des travaux, works. 



These only are excepted : 
TJn bal, a ball. 
Detail, account, retail. 
Ed entail, a fan. 
TJn gouv email, a helm. 
TJn serail, a seraglio. 



TJn portail, a gateway. 
Epouvantail, a scarecrow. 
A Mr ail, baggage. 
Camail, a priest's cloak. 
Regal, a treat. 



Which form their plural in s. 

Nouns of more than one syllable (polysyllables) ending in 
nt, most generally form their plural by changing the t into s : as, 
Enfant, a child ; enfants, children. 

Commandement, command ; commandements, commands. 

But nouns of one syllable only (monosyllables) preserve the 
t, and form their plural by adding 5 ; as, 

Dent tooth ; dents, teeth. 

Pont bridge ; pouts, bridges. 

The substantives terminated by ant and by ent must always and absolutely con- 
serve in the plural the t of the singular. It is a gross mistake to use otherwise, 
although the best grammers say that use permits us to suppress this t. 

The same rule must be applied to the adjectives, the termination of which is in 
ant or ent, (Nap. Landais, page 252.) 



39 

Tout, adj. ail, makes tons, in its plural masculine ; toide 
in the feminine gender sing, and toutes in the plural. 

The following are not conformable to any established 
rale. 

Ai'eid, grandfather ; a\eux, grandfathers. 

Bet ail, cattle ; bestiaux, cattle. 

Ciel, heaven ; cieux, heavens. 

(Eil, eye ; yeux, eyes. 

p _ , ( ties cicls de lit,* testers of a bed. 

* \ des ceils de bceuf, ovals. 

There are in French several compound words like the 
last two, which require some attention from the learner, 
in the formation of their plural, the difficulty of which 
may soon be removed by means of reflection ; for exam- 
ple : 

A noun being composed of a substantive and an adjec- 
tive, united by a hyphen, both admit of the plural forma- 
tion : as, 

Un genlil-homme, a noble- des gentils-hommes, noble- 
man ; men. 
A noun compounded of two substantives and a preposi- 
tion, united by hyphens, the first only in French, which 
is generally the last in English, admits of the plural for- 
mation : as, 

Un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow ; des arcs-en ciel, rainbows. 
Un chef-d'ozuvre, a master- des chefs-d'ecuvre, master- 
piece ; pieces. 

JV. B. Some of these French compound words are some- 
times rendered in English by one word, in which case the 
formation of the plural in the French is still the same : as, 

tin cul-de-sac, an alley (with- des culs-de-sac, alleys, 
out egress ;) 

Nouns composed of a verb or a preposition and a substan- 
tive, the substantive only admits of the plural formation : 

as, 

Un avant-ioit, eaves ; des avant-toits, eaves. 

Un 'jasse-noisetie, a nut- des casse-noiscttes, nut-crack- 
cracker ; ers. 

* This term is growing obsolete : it is better to say, unfond de lit 



40 

Un garde-fou, a rail ; des gardc-foiis, rails, Sec. 

Monscigneur, my lord ; \ J= f Messeigneurs, my lords. 

Monsieur, Mr. or gent ; f .g-g • Messieurs, gentlemen. 

Madame, Mrs. or Madam ; k |-f, ) Mesdames, ladies. 

Mademoiselle, miss ; ' a [Mesdemoiselles, misses. 

CASES. 

There are six cases, viz. 

1. .Le JVominatify Nominative. 

2. Le Genitif, Cenitive. 

3. Le Datif, Dative. 

4. LPJlccusatif, Accusative. 

5. Le Vocatij) Vocative. 

6. L'Mlaiif, Ablative. 

The nominative and accusative cases have exactly the 
same form, and are always declined with the same article ; 
the only difference between them arises from their differ- 
ent positions in the sentence. 

In the natural construction, the nominative always pre- 
cedes the verb, and the accusative follows it. The nom- 
inative is the subject of the sentence, and the accusative is 
the object to which it refers : ex. 

Le rot aime le peuple ; The king loves the people. 

In .order to know the nominative from the accusative, I 
ask, Who loves the people? The King (which is the ans- 
wer) is the subject, and consequently the nominative. 
Whom or what does the king love ? The answer is, The 
People, which is the object, and therefore the accusative. 

The genitive and ablative are declined with the same 
article, but the first is always preceded by another word 
in which it depends : as, 

La porte de la chambre ; The chamber door, that is, 

the door of the chamber. 
La maison de mon pere ; My father's house, &c. 
or it is governed by a preposition, as, 
Pres dufeu ; Near the fire, Sec. 

The last is always put after nouns or verbs expressing 
division, partition, or separation ; and after some preposi- 
tions. The genitive is known by the articles de, du } de la. 



41 

des, of or of the. Sometimes the article is not expressed 
In English, as may be seen in the sentences before men- 
tioned. The ablative is known by the article de, du, de 
h, des, from, or from the. 

The dative shows to whom the thing spoken of, is giv- 
en, or to what k is attributed : as, 

Uonnez cette pomme a man Give that apple to my bro 
frtre; ther. 

This case is known by the articles a, au, a la, aux, to or 
to the. n 

The vocative is used only for calling or naming the 
person to whom the speech is addressed : as, 

Ami, qui etes-vous ? Friend, who are you ? 

DECLENSIONS OF NOUNS. 

All changes in nouns are formed by numbers and cases 
To decline a noun, therefore, is to express its several va- 
riations ; and, under these variations, to point out its dif- 
ferent significations. 

Some short examples are added to the nouns, that learn- 
ers may more easily understand what has been said re- 
specting the cases. 

Declension of the Article Definite Le (the,) before Nouns 
mascidine beginning with a consonant or an h aspirated. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. Le Prince, The prince. 

Le prince est genereux, The prince is generous. 

Gen. Du prince, Of the prince. 

Les vertus du prince, The virtues of the prince, 

or, the prince's virtues. 

Dat. Au prince, To the prince. 

Parler au prince, To speak to the prince. r 

Ace. Le prince, The prince. 

Aimer le prince, To love the prince. 

Voc. O prince, O prince. 

Abl. Du prince, From the prince. 

Recevoir des leitres du To receive letters from the 
prince, prince. 

4* 



42 



Declension of the Article Definite La (the,) before Nouns 
feminine beginning with a Consonant, or u aspirated 



Nom. La Princesse, 

Laprincesse est aimable, 
Gen. De la princesse, 

Les regards de la prin- 
cesse, 
Dat. A laprincesse, 

Donner a la princesse, 
Ace. la pnncessey 

Imitez la princesse, 
Voc. O princesse, 
Abl. De la princesse, 

Eire separe de la prin- 
cesse. 



SINGULAR. 

The princess. 

The princess is amiable. 

Of the princess. 

The looks of the princess, 

or, the princess's looks. 
To the princess. 
To give to the princess. 
The princess. 
Imitate the princess 
princess. 
From the princess. 
To be separated from the 

princess. 



Declension of the Article Definite L' (the) for both genders, 
before Nouns beginning with a vowel, or an H not aspira- 
ted. 

SINGULAR. 



Nom. L^enfant, 

If enfant est timide, 
Gen. De V enfant, 

Le temperament de V en- 
fant, 
Dat. A V enfant, 

Attribuer a V enfant. 
Ace. U enfant, 

Admirer V enfant, 
Yoc. O enfant, 
Abl. De V enfant, 

S* eloigner de V enfant, 



The child. 

The child is fearful. 

Of the child. 

The child's temper ; or, the 

temper of the child. 
To the child. 
To attribute to the child. 
The child. 
To admire the child. 
O child. 
From the child 
To go away from the child 



The plural of these nouns, whether they begin with a 
consonant or a vowel *h aspirated or not aspirated, is de- 
clined, in both genders, by the article les (the.) 
]Som. Les rois. The kings. 

Les rois commandent, The king's command. 

Gen. Des rois. Of the kings. 

* See the list of words beginning with an h not aspirated, page 29 



43 

Vordre des rois, The order of the kings ; or. 

the kings' order. 

Dat. Jiux ^ois, To the kings. 

Envoyer aux rois. To send to the kings. 

Ace, Les rois, The kings. 

Respectez les rois, Honour the kings. 

Voc. O rois, O kings. 

Abl. Des rois, From the kings. 

Eire loin des rois, To be far from the kings 

RECAPITULATION OF THE ARTICLE 
DEFINITE. 

Singular Plural. 

Mas. Fern. Mas. 8f Fern. Mas. $* Fern. 

Nom.SiAc. Le, la, V ; Les, the. 

Gen. ScAb. Du, de la, de V ; Des, of or from the. 

Dat. Jhx, ci la, a V ; Jiux, to the. 

The definite article must be placed, in French, before 
all nouns used in a general sense, or denoting a whole spe- 
cies of objects, and before names of countries and provin- 
ces, though the English admit of no article in this 
case : ex. 

Uhomme est world, Man is mortal. 

De Danemar c, la Suede et Denmark, Sweden, and 
XJingleterrc, sont les trots Englaad, are the three 

royaumes du nord, northern kingdoms. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE 

I hate idleness. - -Yirtue is estimable. - - 

Je,pro. hais,v. par esse, f. vertu,f.est,v. estimable, adj . 

Gold is m preferable to silver. Do you 2 

0/',m. prefer able, adj. argent, m. *&* t'o«s,pro. 

prefer 1 England to France ? Corn grows 

prejerez,v. Jlngleterre,f. France,?. BIe,m. croit,v 

for men, and grass for cattle. Love 

pour,]). homme.m. et,c. herbefi. bet ail, m. Aimez,v, 

wisdom. Do 1 aot s neglect 2 study. - 

sagesse,{. ^ ne pas, adv. negligez ,v : etude, f. 

Avoid leisure. She comes from church. - 

Evilez^. loisir,m. Elle,pro. vicnt } \\ eglise,L 



44 

We soeak of America, and not 

JS'uitSrfjTO. panons,v. v1meriquc } f. non pas, ad v. 

of Poland. Grant us peace. - - 

Polognefi JLccordez,\. nous,pro. paix,f. 

Honour is due to kings. They 

Honneur,m. dw,p.p. roi,m. IZs,pro 

come from Africa. Pride disgraces man. - - 

viennent,v. JlfriqueS. Orgueil,m. degrade,^. 

Charity oatiently 2 bears 1 injuries. 3 

Charxie ,f. patiemment,&dv. souffre,v. injure^* 

This article is also placed before nouns used in a speci- 
jic sense, or denoting a particular object, in which case 
the article is likewise expressed in English : ex. 

Uhomme que vous m'avez The man whom you re- 
recommande est fort ha- commended to me is very 

bile, skilful. 

Les poires de voire jardin The pears of your garden are 
sont excdlentes, excellent. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULE. 

Where is the master of the house ? - - The 

G^,adv, est maitre,m. maisonf. 

prince spoke to the king. --To the ttiird* 

prince,m. parlay. troisieme,mj 

page of the book. - - The 1 lazy 2 do 3 not 5 

page,f. livre,m. paresma^adj.pl.t/T* 

love 4 work 6 . Justice is the mistress and 

aiment,v. ouvrage,m. Justice ? f. . maitresse,L 

queen of virtue. - - Send the child to school. -- 

reine,f. Envoyez,v* enfant,m.ecole,£. 

Walk in the garden. * 'Tranquility 

Promenez-vous,v. dans,p. jardin,m. Tranquillity f. 

of soul is the height of felicity. -- Give the tooth 
amef. comble,m. felicilefi Donnez,v. cure- 

picks to the gentlemen. Education is to the 

dent,m. Messwurs, m. Education ,f. 

mind, what cleanliness is to the body. - - The 

espril,m . ce que, pro . proprete,?. corps,m 

* Adjectives take no article unless used substantively. 



45 

life of man is short. - - The enemies were on 

rie,f. cowrie, adj. ennemi,m. etaient,v sur, p 

the mountain. - - You admire the beauty of 

montagne,f. Vous, pro. adrairez,v. beaute,£. 

the ladies. --To the thickness of the walls. - - Wf? 

dame,f. epaisseurjf. muraille, f. 

go to the park. It is the will of the em- 

allons,v. parc,m. C'est,v. volontl,?. on- 

peror. The fate of nations is governed 

perewr 7 m. sort,va. nation,?. gouveme,\).p. 

by Providence. - - You play with the boys. - - 

par,]). Providence, f. jouez,v. avec,m. garc } on } p 

--Revenge is the pleasure of a weak 2 mind 1 . - - 

Vengeance,?. plaisir,m. unfaible, adj. 

Italy is the garden -of Europe. - - The most noble 

Italie,f. Europe,? plus, adv. woo/e,adj. 

of virtues is chanty. -- Carry the grammar to tho 
porleZyV. grammaire,?. 

boys, and the dictionary to the girls. He 

dictionnaire,m. fille,?. i/,pro. 

comes from the Indies. - - Give me the loaf. 

vient,v. hide,?. . moi,pro. pain,m. 

This article being declinable in French, and conse- 
quently admitting of different variations, ought to be re- 
peated before all the substantives of a sentence, as well as 
before adjectives used as substantives, and agree with 
them in gender and number : ex. 

Le scl, la moutarde, el, The salt, mustard, and oil, 

Vhuile, sont sur les tables, are on the tables. 

Le blanc, le rouge, et le noir, White, red, and black, 

sont trois differentes cou- are three different col- 

leurs, ours. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

Prefer Virtue to riches, friendship to 

Preferez,v. Wc/i esses, f. pi. amitief. 

money, and utility to pleasure. -- The father, mother, 

argent,m. utiliie,?. plaisir,m. pere,m. ?nere,f. 

and children are dead. - - The men, women, and chil- 

sont,v, wiorte,p.p. femmeju 



46 

drcri of the village were all at the burial. 

village, m.e talent, tous, ad] . a,p. enter rement,m. 

Children generally 2 * like 1 apples and pears 

ordinairement,adv. aiment,v. pomme,? % poire 3 ( 

I like yellow and grey. - - Peace and plenty 

aime,v. jaune,m. gris,m. abondnncef 

make men happy. Wheat and barley 

rendent,v. iieureux,sxd]. Fromeiit,m. orge,f 

are dear. I hate milk, butter, and cheese. - - 

cherSyBid]. lait,m. beurre,m. fromage,m. 

Bring the knives and forks. - v - - Patience 

£pportez,v. couteau,m. f our chette,?. Patience,?. 

and perseverance are necessary. The desire 

per severance , necessaire,a.d]. desir,m. 

of glory, riches, power, and pleasure, is a 

gloire,?. richesses ,f.pl. pouvoir,m. une 

disease of the mind, Have you passed 

maladie,?. ame,?. Avez, v. passe, p. p. 

through Spain, Portugal, or Holland ? - - Fre- 

par,p. Espagne,?. Portugal, in. ou Hollandt,?. 
fer always virtue, prudence, and good sense 

toujours,d&v. prudence,?. 6on,adj. scns,m. 

to beauty. -- Put the wine, beer and cider on 

Metiez,v. vin,m. biere,?. cidre,m. sur,p. 

the table, (It is said) that America, France, and 

table,?. On dit que 

Spain have made peace with England. 
ont,v. fait, p.p. 
On the contrary, this article, though expressed in Eng- 
lish, must be omitted in French, before a noun employed 
as an apposition, or definition of the noun which precedes; 
and when it precedes a noun in the nominative or accusa- 
tive case, denoting dignity, office, or business: ex. 
Alexandre, flls de Philippe, Alexander the son of Philip. 
Mon ami demeure a Lon- My friend lives in London, 
dres, ville capitate d^An- the capital city of Eng- 
gleterre, land. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Jupiter, a god of the heathens, was the son o, 
ax* dieu,m. paiens,m. elait,\. Jils,m. 

* Place simple adverbs after verba,, and in compound lenses before 
the participles. 



47 

Saturn, and the father of the other gods. --Robert, 
Saturne, a«/res,adj. 

duke of Normandy, the brother of Henry, King 
duc,m. JYormandie, frere 9 m. Henri, 

of England, was the son of William the con- 

Guillaumc, con- 

queror. My sister lives at York, the cap- 

querant,m. Ma, pro. so2ur,f. demeure,v.a,]). 

ital city of the county of the same name. 

comte,m. m erne, ad}, no num. 

Mr. C***; the rector of the parish of St. James, and 

cure,m. paroisse,?. Jdques, 

his brother, the dean of the cathedral, were 
sow,pro. doyen,m. catiiedralefi etaient. 

the sons of Mr. L***, the first lord of 

premier jSidj. seigneur 
the admiralty. 
amirauie,f. 

In several instances, the definite article is neither ex 
piessed in English nor in French, as in narrations, when 
the style is animated ; and after the conjunction fit, when 
it implies a complete negation, otherwise it has an article, 
requiring in both cases the negation ne before the verb : 
ex. 

Conscience, honneur, interet, Conscience, honour, inter- 
totrt est sacrifie ; il n\t est, every thing is sacri- 

ni justice, ni humanite. ficed ; he has neither jus- 

tice nor humanity. 

JYi Vor, ni la grandeur ne Neither gold nor greatness 
nous rendent heureux, can make us happy. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The town was taken by storm : men, 

ville,f. fut,v. prise,p.p. d J assaid,m. 

women, children, old people, (every body) was 

vieillard,m. tout, adj. 
put to death. - - Palaces, temples, public 2 build- 

mis ; ,p.p. u mort. Palais,m. edi- 

ings 1 , private 2 houses 1 (every thing) was 

Jice,m. particuliere^adj. maisonS tout 



48 

destroyed -His father will 2 spare 2 neither* 

detruil,p.p. A>o»,pro. epctrgnera,v. ne ni 

pains nor money. (He is) a fatherless child, 

p<n;ie,f.sing. Cest,\. orp/ie/m,adj. up 

he has neither parents . nor friends. - - Neither the 

a parent,m. ami,m. 

house nor bed are made for you. 
lit,m. sont fails. 

When, in English, two or more substantives, signifying 
different things, come together in a sentence, having a de- 
pendence on each other, and having no stop between 
them, the last (in English) must be placed at the begin- 
ning of the sentence (in French), and the others having 
•he sign of the English possessive case, thus ('s) or (') on- 
V, come after it, with the genitive of this article before 
.hem, according to their gender and number : ex. 
Le fits du roi, The king's son. 

La couronne de la reine, The queen's crown. 

That is ; the son of the king, the crown of the queen. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I have seen the king's apartments and the 

ai,v. vu,p.p. appatiemcni,m. 

queen's picture. The chancellor's son's wife is 

portrait, ra. chancelier,m. 

the prime minister's eldest 2 sister 1 . - - - The man's 

premier, ainee, a.d). sozur,f. 

strength is very great. Lend me the 

force,?. grande,&&]. Pretez,\. moi,pro. 

maid's cloak. My cousin's brother is 

servantefi mantelet, m. Jtfon,pro. cousin,m. 

my uncle's best friend. The title of 

oncle,m. meilleur y adj. ami,m. litre, m. 

Dauphin belongs to the king of France's eldest 2 

appartie'ntyY. dine, 

! son. - - Modesty is a woman's greatest orna- 

Modestie,? y,ne femme,{. le plus gi*and,ad}. orne- 
nieiii. 
ment,m. 

The genitive of this article is often made in English 'by 
to, especially )cfore nouns expressing alliance, consanguin- 



49 

\hj, or kindred, witness, or inheritance ; and in short 
whenever to may be rendered by the above genitive de- 
finite : ex. 

Monseigneur le due de *** ; My lord duke of ***, bro- 
frere du roi y ther to the king, or tho 

king's brother. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE. 

Mr. Richard, brother to the Prince's steward, 
Mons. intendant,m. 

has married Miss Prescott, niece to the Constable 
a,v. epouse,p. p. Mile. niece,?. Conneiable,m. 

of the Tower. I have spoken to the Marchioness 

Tour,? parle,p.p. Marquise,?. 

of ** # , sister to the queen's first Lady of honor. 

Dame,?. 
Mr. Henry, perfumer to the Princess, has made 
HenriyVa. parfumeur,m. fait, p.p. 

a Considerable fortune. The heir to the 

considerable, adj. fortune,?. heritier,m. 

crown of Portugal is the Prince of Brazil. - - My 

couronne,?. du BresiUm. 

father was witness to that quarrel. 

a ete,p.p. ttmoin,m. cette, pro. querelle,?. 

I* am a friend to 2 diligent Scholars, and an 

suis,v. <jcn diligent, ad'}. ecolier,m. uj^ 

enemy to idleness. 

ennemi,m. paresse,?. 

After the adverb bien, when placed before a substan- 
tive and signifying much, a great deal, many, the genitive 
of this same article must always be used * ex 

Bien du merite, Much merit. 

Bien des amis, Many friends. 

Bien de /' argent, A great deal of monev. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE 

The children make • much noise. This man 

font,v. bruit, in, Cet, pro. 

has (a great deal) of money, but he has also maav 

awssi,adv. 



50 

enemies They 2 give 1 you much trouble 

donnent,v. peine,?. 

now ; but they will 2 give 2 you 1 afterwards 

a present, adv. mais,c. donneront,v. ensuite,ndv. 

much pleasure. (There were) many ladies in 

11 y avait,v. dames en 

^company (last night. ) Mr. R. has read 

compagnie hier au soir,&dv. Mons. Zw,p.p. 

many books, and he has acquired much know- 

livre y m. acquis,p.p. connais- 

ledge. To teach youth (we must 

sanc6S ? f.pl. Pour y ip. enseigner y v. jeunesse y f. (ilfaut y v. 
have) (a great deal) of patience. 
avoir y v.) 

If the second substantive in French (which is the first in 
English) serve to denote some particular commodity, use y 
quality, or liquor, then it must be put in the dative :. ex. 

Le pot au lait, The 1 milk 3 -pot 2 . 

Lafemme aux pommes, The 1 apple 3 -woman 2 . 
Une cruche a Peau, A water-jug. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Tell the servant to bringo 

Diles,\.au or a la domesliqne y m.&L?. de apporlr,v. 

me 1 the tea-cannister, sugar - dish, and cream 

me, pro. the^m.boite,?. sucre,m.pot,xn. creme,?. 

basin. Go to the wine-cellar and bring 2 us 1 the 

bassin,m. JHhz,v. vin,m.cave,f. apporiez 

vinegar - bottle. - - (There is) the oyster-woman. 

vinaigre,m.bouteille,f. Voilli huitre y ?.p\. 

I live in* the hay - market, my cousin in the 

j o in, m. mar die, m. mon,pro. 
fish-market, and my sister in the poultry-market. - - 
poisson,m.smg. ma, pro. volatile,?. 

Give me the oil-bottle, pepper - box, and mustard- 
moi, pro. huile,f. poivre,vf\. boite,f. motdarde,?. 

pot. The butter-boy, the greens-girl, the 

beurrejen. legume,m.ip\. 

*In is generally en, when immediately followed by a noun, and 
dans when followed by an article or pronouu. 



51 

hot? rolls 2 man 1 ,, and the gingerbread-woman 

ds ,adj . pain,m. pi. pa in d J epices y m 

called here. T\ e had cabbage -soup, 

out passe ,p. p. icz,adv. n/m£'S,-v.c/iozt,m. pl.de lasoupe, 

a rice-pudding, a (leg of mutton) with caper 
un riz,m.pouding,m. gigot,m. copre ,f. pi. 

sauce and ice - cream. - - We shall have pease- 
de la sauce,?. glace ,£ anrons,v. pois,m. 

porridge, a salt 2 cod,i with egg-sauce, and a 
de la soupe une s«/ee, adj. mon/e,f. cc^m.pl. 
lurbot with lobster-sauce - - I bought a plum 

AoniarcZjin.pl. ai ackete raisins, secs,m. 
cake, an apple - tart, and two gooseberry and 

galeau,m. pommefipl.tariej. groseillefiiA, 

cherry pies. 

ccWse, f pi. tourte. 

DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE PARTITIVE. 

Singular. — Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. du pain, some bread. 
Gen. Abl. de pain, of or from some bread. 
Dat. d du pain, to some bread. 

Feminine. 
de la viande, some meat. 
deviande, of or from some meat. 
a de la viande, to some meat. 

Masculine or Feminine. 

de V argent, some money. 
d y argent, of or from some money 
a de Vargent, to some money. 

The plural is the same for both genders. 
des livres, some books. 
des auteurs, some authors. 
de livres, of or from some books. i 
d'auteurs, of or from some authors 
a des livres, to some books. 
a des auteurs, to some authors 
In asking a question, the English generally 

make use of any, which, in French, must be rendered by 

the same article, as some: ex. 



Nom. 


Ace. 


Gen. 


Abl. 


Dat. 




Nom 


Ace. 


Gen. 


Abl. 


Dat. 


Th 


Nom 


. Ace. 


Gen. 


Abl. 


Dat. 




N. 


B. ] 



52 

¥ a-t-il du pain ici ? Is there any bread here ? 

Avez-vous de la viande ? Have you any meat ? 

This article must be used wherever the English word 
some or any is either expressed or understood, and ought 
to be repeated before every substantive in a sentence: ex. 

Du pain et de Peau lui suffi- Bread and water are suffi- 

senty cient for him. 

Jlpportez du vinaigre, de la Bring some vinegar, mus- 

moutarde, de Vhuile et des tard, oil and forks. 

fourclieltes, 

Avez-vous de V argent a nous Have you any money s 

preler ? lend us ? 

EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE. 

Bread, meat, and water, are things necessary 

so7it,v. chose?, neccssaires&dy 
to man. - - - 1 drink wine and water. --She eats 

hoiSyV. m mange ,v. 

cheese. Bring me some mustard. Have you 

frontage yin. 

bought some paper, pens, and ink ? - * Send 

achetetf.p. papier ,m. plume y f. encre,f, 

him some bread, meat, and potatoes. Do you 2 

lui pomme de terre 9 f.<zr* 

sell 1 fruit 3 ? - - Buy some tea and sugar. - - 

vendeZyV. fruit ,m. AcheteZyV. theyVa. 

Will you eat some beef with turnips and 

VouleZyV. mangeryV. bceufym. navet y m. 

carrots ? - - Do you drink beer ? - (Is there) any 

carotie yf. ur» buvez, biereyf. Y a-t-il 

wine in the cellar ? (Was there) any oil in the 

Yavait-il 
bottle ? - - P have 3 given 4 him 2 bread, monr,y, 

donne,p.p. luiy pro. 
and clothes. - - She has modesty and prudence. - - 

habit, m. modesiie 9 {. prudence,?. 

He has bought some dishes and plates. Will 

plalyxxi. assiette,f. 

you have some milk or cream ? - - I eat fish, eggs, 
vcr teitfym 



53 

greens, artichokes, and asparagus. Bread, meat, 

legume, artichaut,m, asperge,f.p\. 

fish and vegetables, often 2 make 1 a good 

vegetaiix,m.\)\. souvent,o.dv. font, v. bon 
dinner. 
diner, m. 

If the substantive be preceded by an adjective, instead of 
du, de la, des, we must use de or d' : as, 

Masc. Fern. Masc. or Fem. 

N. Ac C De mauvais trin, De bonne eau, -D' excellent pain, 
G. Abl. ( Bad wine. Good water. Excellent bread, 

Dat a de mauvais vin,a de bonne eau, a d'' excellent pain, 

To bad wine. To good water. To excellent bread. 

PLURAL. 

N. Ac. > De bons Uvres, d'habiles gem, 

G. Ab. ) Good books, Learned men. 

Dat a de bons livres, a d'habiles gens, 

To good books. To learned men. 

N. B. This last rule is without, exception. But some 
persons find it difficult to distinguish between the genitive 
of the definite and this article ; now let them but parse, and 
they will perceive that in this phrase : Londres est le centre 
du bon gold, du is no more than the genitive of the definite 
article denoting what kind of taste. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS AXD THE PRECEDING RULES. 

You always 2 read good books. - - 2 Bad wine 3 

toujours,&&v. lisez,v. 
is 4 3 not 5 worth 4 good water. - - - He speaks to learned 

vaut,\. parley. 

men. - - - I have heard good news. - - - 

gens,f* apjrris,]).^). bonne } Q.dj. nouveHe,f.^L 

You have fine fruit. - - - - She has worthy 

avez,Y. beau,?Aj. dlgne^d]. 

friends. - - Bring me good pens. - - Onions, celery, 

Ognons,m. celeri,m. 
leeks, chervil, and (a great deal) of meat make 

poireau 7 m. cerfeui^m beaucoipfidY. font.Y. 

* Gens, preceded by an adjective^ is of the feminine gender. 
When the adjective follows; it is put in the masculine. 

5* 



54 

what the French call good 

ce que, pro. Franeats,m.\A. appellent,v 

broth. 1 prefer good water to bad cider. 

bouillon,m. * cidre,m. 

I have discoursed with learned people. - - My father 

converse, p. p. gens,f. 

has in his garden good plums, fine peaches, 

son,pro. prune,?. oe//e,adj. peche,f. 

and very large apricots. Miss Sharp 

fres, adv. gros, adj. abricot,m. Mile,?. 

has fine eyes. - - Paris is the centre of wit. 

beau, ceil,m. bel esprit,m. 

DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE INDEFINITE, 

used before proper names of persons and places, and in tho 
Gen. and Abl. the e is cut off before a vowel or an h 
mute, as usual. 

Singular. — Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. Pierre, Peter. 
Gen. Abl. de Pierre, of Peter. 
Dat. d Pierre, to Peter. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. Marie, Maria. 
Gen. Abl. de Marie, of Maria. 
Dat. a Marie, to Maria. 

Nom. Ace. Jintoine, Antony. 
Gen. Abl. d' Jintoine, of Antony. 
Dat. a Jintoine, to Antony. 

Nom. Ace. Londres, London. 
Gen. Abl. de Londres, of London. 
Dat. a Londres, to London. 

N. B. It is necessary to observe, that the particle To, 
used after a word signifying coming, going, returning, or 
sending to, placed before the name of a kingdom, republic, 
country, province, or county, must be rendered in French by 
Lhe preposition en, without any article : ex. 

Mon frere est alle en Italie, My brother is gone to Italy. 

II doit bientot relourner en He is soon to go back to 
n&merique. America. 



55 

On the contrary, to must be rendered by de, when imme- 
diately preceded by the words road, or path-way : ex. 

Le chemin de Londres, The road to London. 
Le chemin de Paris, The way to Paris. 

It must be observed that the proper names of most of the 
islands and other countries, both in the East and West-In- 
dies, and a few places in Europe, do not follow the above 
rule, but take the definite article, such as VJlbijssinie, Ab- 
yssinia ; le Bresil, Brasil ; le Caire, Cairo ; le Canada, 
Canada; la Guadeloupe, Guadaloup ; la Jamaiq ue, Jamai- 
ca ; le Jap on, Japan ; la Martinique, Martinico ; le Perou, 
Peru ; la Virginie, Virginia ; le Mexique, Mexico ; and a 
few others : ex. • 

C de VJlbijssinie, ) ( from Abyssinia, 

Venir < du Bresil, > to come < from Brasil, 

( du Carre, ) ( from Cairo. 

C a la Chine, 5 (to China, 

filler < au Canada, > to go < to Canada, 

( au Tapon, ) {to Japan 

EXERCISE UPON THESE RULES. 

(Here is) John's brother. - - Speak to Martha. - - 
Voici,<xdv. Jean Parlez,v. MartJie. 

It is Peter's hat. She goes to Richmond. 

Cesl,y. chapeau,m. va,v. 

He comes from Paris. You have Mr. 

vient,v. Mons. 

Richard's sword. - - - When 1 will 2 you 3 go 2 to 

epee,{. Qiiand,adv. irez,v. 

Frdnce ? - - 1 know not, for my father says 

sais,v. ne pas, adv. car,c. dit,v. 

that he (will 2 send) me 1 soon to Canada or 

que,c. i/,pro. ^ enverra,v. bientdt,£L<lv. 

Jamaica. - - (iive me Laura's cap. I (am going) 

Laure bonnet, m< vais,v. 

to Roxbury. 1 have found Andrew's waistcoat. 

trouve^.p. Andre, m. veste,f. 
She (shall come back) to England (next year) 

reviendra,v. Vannee prochaine 

to see her brother who is arrived from 

pour voir,v sen } qui,^vo. est y v. arrive ,p.p. 



56 

Japan and China. - - Carry that to Stephen. - - 

Portez,v. ce/a,pro. Ehenne. 

(Here is) the road to Medford. My mother 

Ma ., pro. 
intends to send my sister to Portugal 

se propose de,v. envoyer,v. ma,pro. 

or Spain, and thence to Rome ; and my cousin (is to) 
de la doit,v. 

go to Mexico or Cairo. 
alter, v. ow,c. 

The genitive of this article de is used after nouns and 
adverbs of quantity , whether expressed in English or not ; 
after the negation pas or point, no or not ; the word que, 
what, standing for how much, or how many, and quelque 
chose, something, rien, nothing ; before names of countries, 
kingdoms and provinces, when preceded by a noun express- 
ing a personal title, &c. or by a verb signifying coming, 
arriving, or returning from : ex. 

Tant de pommes, So many apples. 

Tant <¥ argent, So much money. 

Point de repos, No rest. 

Que de peines et de soins! What care and trouble ! 

Quelque chose* de bon, Something good. 

11 arrive de France, He arrives from France. 

Rien de rnauvais, Nothing bad. 

Le roi d'Angleterre, The king of England. 

Elle vient tfJlmerique, She comes from America. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE. 

I have bought six yards of cloth. Bring 

achete,p.]>. six came drap,m. 

me three pounds of veal, and two pounds of 

trois livre veaa,m. deux 

mutton. --She has a great number of childien. -- 
raouton,m. ungrand,o.d], nombre,m. 

He has (too much) vanity. You have less merit ; 

trop,a.dv. vaniie,L moins,&dv 9 

* It must be observed, that the word chose, standing by itself, is of 
the feminine gender ; but, being joined to the word quelque, it is of 

the masculine. 



3 



57 

but more wisdom. — What a noise you make. 
HiaiSjC. plus^Av. sagesse ^crbruit^m. faiies^v, 

(How many) fools in the world ! --Do *not 4 give ! 

foil monde,m. ^cn ne pas, adv. 

her 2 (too many) pears. -- 1 1 have 3 2 no 4 daugh- 
luiypro. £mp 5 adv. ai ne pointycidv. 

ters 3 . - - (So much) pride does x not 4 become 3 him 2 . - 
Taniyadv. orgueilym.^o^ siedy v. Zz«i,pro, 

(There is) something noble in his physiognomy. - - 

II y a,v. sa, pro. physionomie. 

We have (so many) grapes. - - They have a little 

raisin^m. unpeuyixdv 

money. I know the king of Prussia. - - Did you 

connaiSyV. Prussefi. JLvez,v. 

see the duke of Bavaria with the archbishop 

vu^p.p. duc,m. Baviere y f. archeveque,m 

of York ?-- He commanded an army of forty 

commandaityV. line armeeyi. quarante 

thousand men. -- She 1 says 3 2 nothing 4 true 5 . -- 

mille dityV. ne ne^adv. waz, adj. 

You speak of Alexander, king of Macedonia. -- 

parleZyV. Alexandre ,m. Macedoineyf. 

Do you 2 come 1 from Italy ? No, I come 

i&* venez y v. Aon,adv. viens,v. 

from Africa. 

Afrique. 

De is likewise placed before nouns governed by another 
substantive, of which they express the character, cause, 
country , mattery natnrey and quality ; and after the adjectives 
of number, when they are followed by a participle passiye : 
ex. 

line maison de brique, A 1 brick 3 house 2 . 
Un bonnet de nuit, A night cap. 

line cuiller ft* argent, A silver spoon. 

Du poisson de riviere, River fish . 

Du vin de Bourgogne, Burgundy 2 wine 1 . 

Quatre de renvoyes, Four (sent away.) 

EXERCISE UPON THIS ARTICLE. 



Your 1 sister 2 


has 3 a 4 silk 6 gown 5 


and a gold 


Volre,pi'o, sceur,£ 


a,v, une soie,t % robe, 


un or,m. 



58 



wine. -• 



drink Champaign e 
buvonSjV. 

pillar. They have a 

pillier : m. line 

built with oak 

construite,\).]). de ; p. chene 

is the capital city of the 
capitale, adj. villej. 



thimble. --We 

marble 
marbre 

house 
maison 
Edinburgh 
Edinbourgyin. 

of Scotland. -- Shut 

Ecosse. Fermez,v. 

of wit is a jewel 

esprit unjoyaiiyiYi. 
of honor. 

liGnneur. 
and diamond 
diamant 
spoken 
par !e, p. p. 
upper - crust. - 
dessus croute y f. 

my night - cap. - - - Miss Brown's 
nidi bonnet, m. Mile. 



It is a 

C y est,v. 
country 
campagne 

wood. - - 
hois. 
kingdom 
royaume^m. 
the fore - door. - - A lady 
devant portefi Une 

of worth. (He is) a man 

prix. CestjV. 

She has bought silver buckles 

argent bouclc,i\ 

ear - rings. Have you 

pendant s-d^ or eille y m. Avez y v. 

to the silk-merchant ? Give me the 

marchand y m 
- - Bring me my straw-hat and 

man paille ckapeau y m. 

chamber - maid and 
chambre jillefi 



Mrs. Rose's house-keeper 

Mme. femme de charge,?. 

ters. - - The rich make use of silver 

ric/ie,m.pl. se serveni y v. 
and the poor make use 

pauvre y m^\. font 9 Y. us age, m. 



are two sis- 
deux 
plate, 
vaisselle 
of iron forks 

fer y m. 

had a 

eurentyV. vcr> 

wounded, and 

blesses,]), p. 



and pewter spoons. The enemies 

etain y m, cuiller. 
hundred men killed, seventy 

cent tueSyip.'p. soixante-dix 

forty lost . 

quarante perdt«s,p.p. 

De is placed after the adjectives signifying dimension, 
as, epais y thick ; gros y big, large ; haut y high, tall ; large, 
wide, broad ; long, long ; and profond, deep ; though 
there is no article expressed in English : ex. 

A table ten feet long and 
eight broad, 



Un table longue de dix pieds y 



el large de Jiuit. 



59 

But there is a more elegant way, which is, to turn the 
adjective of dimension into the substantive ; then the 
tvords of measure and those of dimension are preceded by 
de: ex. 

Un table de dix pieds de Ion- A table ten feet long and 
gueur, et de huh de largeur, eight broad. 

In this last example it may be seen, that the French 
and English are parallel with each other ; therefore, in 
the following exercise, the adjective and substantive are 
put down, that the learner may translate it both ways. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I saw a tree eighteen feet large. 

J'aijY. ptf,p.p. unarbre,m. dix-huit pied y m. gros- 

1 have a box four inches thick, 

seur* une boittfi. quatre pouce,m. 'epais-seur, 

ten feet long and six broad. - - 1 know 

dix pied ,m. long-ueur, large-ur. conruzis y v. 

a man seven feet high. (It is) a ditch 

un sept haut-eur. Cesi^v. un fosse/n. 

nine feet six inches deep and five feet broad 

neuf profond-eur cinq 

(There is) a room fifty paces long and 

Voilcl une chambreS. cinquanle pas y m. 

twenty broad. The walls of our garden 

vingt murailhyf. notre^vo. 

are or (have) thirty feet three inches high, and two 

sont,Y. or "j*0ftf,v. irente trots deux 

feet broad. - - I have a tree eighteen feet round 

un arbre 7 m. dix-huit gros-sevr 7 f. 

and sixty high. 

If the learner translate this last sentence by the adjec- 
tive of dimension, he must use the word sont, which is the 
proper word of the English are, and follows the preceding 
rule ; but if he turn the adjective of dimension into its 
substantive, the word sont, are, is to be rendered into 
French by the verb oni, have, and de before the word of 
measure is suppressed. 

* Road gros, adjective, grossevr, substantive, without separation, 
and su of tho others. See the roles to form the feminine gender, p. 50 
t See tho rule upon avoir and etre, next page. 



60 

Literal example by the adjective : 
Notre chambre est longue Our room is long by fcwen- 

de vingt pieds, et large de ty feet, and wide by 

douze. twelve. 

By the substantive : 
Notre chambre a vingt pieds Our room has twenty feet 

de longueur, et douze de in length and twelve in 

largeur. width. 

When two substantives are joined together, both mak- 
ing a compound word in English, the first of which de- 
notes the form or use of the second, the latter must be 
placed before the former in French, and followed by the 
particle a, in the sense of for. 

Tin moidin a papier, A paper 2 mill 1 . 

Une boite a poudre, A powder 2 box 1 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Gun - powder was invented by a monk. 

Canon,m.'poudre,f. fui,v. inveniee,p.p. par, p. moine,m. 
The servant has lost the steel, and cannot 

perdu, p. p. briquet, m. ne peut pas 

light the candle. - - - If you go to London 

allumer,v. chandelkS. Si,c. allez,v. 

to-morrow, bring me a toupee-iron. - Have you 

demain,adv. apportez,v. toupet,m.fer,m. 
seen the water-mill which my father has bought ? 
vu,p.p. que,pro. achete,p.p. 

No, but I have seen the wind-mill which your 

Non,3.dv. vent,m. 

brother has built at Greenwich. 1 have 

fait baiir,v. & 

found your sister's work - bag. William has for- 

ouvrage sac,m. Guillaume a de- 
bidden his children to go to the dancing room. 
fendu a ses dialler danser salle,f. 

DECLENSION of UN,m. UNE,f. A Or AN. 

singular. — Masculine 
Norn. Ace. un livre, a book 



Gen, Abl cVun livre, of or from a book. 
Dat. a un livre, to a took. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. une plume, a pen. 
Gen. Abl. dhme plume, of or from a pen. 
Dat. a une plume, to a pen. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I have a hat and a sword. --- She speaks 

chapeau,m. epee,f. parley. 

of an officer. He 1 has 3 given 4 it 2 to 5 a 

ojflicier,m. donne,p.p. Ze,pro. 

sailor. - - (There are) a bird and a cage. 

matelot,m. Voila oiseau,m. cage,?. 

An ungrateful man is a monster (in the) eyes of a 

ingrat,m. <jct monsire,m. aux ceil,m. 

sensible 2 man 1 . -- Alexander was a great warrior, 
sense, adj. Alexandre, xn. etait,v. guerrier,m. 

and a very learned philosopher. - - A fine 

ires, adv. savant, adj. philosophe,xn. belle,ad] 

flower in a garden is an ornament. 
jleur,f. ornemcnt,m. 

It must be observed, that the English article a or an 9 
before nouns of measure, weight, and number, must be 
rendered in French by the definite articles, le, la, les ; and 
by the preposition par, used for lime and space in the sense 
of each, every, or per : ex. 



Deux chelins le cent, Two 


shillings a hundred. 


Un ecu le i 


boisseau, A crown a bushel. 


Cinq chelins par semaine, Five 


shillings a week. 


Une guinee 


! par mots, One 


guinea a month. 




EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE 


Barley 


sells for three 


shillings a bushel. 


Orge,f. 


se vend,v. </?> 




That 


ale (is worth) 


six pence a pint. - - 


Cette,\)YO. 


aile,f. vaui,v. 


sou,m. pinte,£. 


Beef 


costs eight 


pence a pound. 


B(zuf,m. 


couie,v. huit,sid]. 


livre,?. 


This 


lace cost a 


crown an ell. Ilfj 


Cdte,pro. 


dentel!e,f. cGida,v 
6 


ecu,m. aune,i 



62 

sells his best cloth a guinea a yard.-- 
vend } y. son,pro. mcillcur drop,m. une verge J. 

Burgundy wine (is sold) nine shillings a bottle. --- 

le vin se vend,v. we?//*, adj. 
My shoemaker * soid 2 me 1 two pairs of 

Mon y \)YO. cordonnier,m. a vendu^.p. paire,f. 

shoes (at the rate) of 2 half *a guinea a pair. - - M\ 
Soulier ,m. a raison demi 

master comes twice a week. --My uncle goe? 

vientjV. deux fois, adv. va y v. 

Lo France thrice a year. She gives three 

trois fois fidv. an,m. donne 7 v. 

shillings a day, and ten pence a mile. 

jour,m. mille jin. 

According to the rule p. 46, a or an is not expressed 
m French before the second noun when it qualifies the 
first ; the same article is likewise omitted when the verb 
elre precedes the substantive ; excepting when that verb 
has ce for its nominative : in the first instance the noun is 
employed as an adjective, in the second as a substantive ; 
thus il est homme signifies, he has the feelings of a man, 
while c'est an homme means, there is a man. 

M. D., membre de la cham- M. D., a member of the 

bre des communes, house of commons. 

Etes-vous Jlnglois ? Are you an Englishman ? 

jYon, Monsieur , je suis- IVo, sir, I am a French- 

Frangois, man. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I saw the duke of C***^ a prince of the blood, 
J J ai vu diiCjin. sang yirt. 

who (was speaking) to Mr. F., a member of 

qiiitfro parloitjV. 

parliament. — His cousin is a surgeon, and his brother 
parlementyXn. Son chirurgien } m. 

is a physician. - - My sister is a milliner, 

medeciri,m. marchande de modes,?. 

my brother is a tailor, and I am a carpenter. 

taiileur y m. charpenlierjw. 

I have read Castor and Pollux, a 2 French 'opera. - - 

Gperciyin. 



63 

Bristol, a sea - port, passes 

mcrf. pori.m. pass* ,v. a present ^adv. 

for the second city of the kingdom of Eng- 

poifr,p. 

land. Is she a duchess. or a marchoiness \ 

Est, v. duchcssefi marquis,: ,f. 

No, she is a countess. 

comiesscyi. * 

OP NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 

Adjectives form their plural :.'. the substantives. 

Rule to form their Fejuhjhb Qshdbb. 

M : " adjec fives in " hs ? no plural for th ;ii as Experu 

experimental ; j il, parochial ; sod . . ". a liacaL 

jectivea ending in a?, having their plural in ah : 

amicable \ a s ". fatal; final, final; frugal, 

frugal; glacial, glacial .initial: 2 Lai; lingual, lingual 

';//, medial: paschal \ nasal, nasal. 

.'. virginal. 

Adjectives ending in e mute are of both genders : ex. 

Un je u n e horn m e, on g man. 

Une jeune femme, A young woman. 

stives ending with one of the following letters 7 . i : ', L n } r, s. t, 
and u, form their feminine by adding an t mute : ex. 

Mase. Grand, Fein, grande,* great, tall, large. 

Poll, | -.-.. 

*Wben that adjective precedes a substantive singular of the feminine 
gender, beginning with a consonant, we of ess. '.n French, both 

in the pronunciation and writing the e. which i< sapplied by an apostrophe, 
as in the following instances. 

A grand' peine, with hard labor. 

Cgra n d ' fa i m . ) Tver y b 1 1 r. g r y . 

Avoir < grand 9 soif. > to be < very thirsty. 

{grand* peur, J (very much frightened. 

Faire grand' chire, to live well, to fare sumptuously. 

.La grand' mere, the grand mother. 

Xa grand' messe, the high mass, 

ia grand' chambre, the high court 

Should however the word grands be preceded by .'res. frrf. very, 
one, or la plus, the most. inal e must be added ; as, 

O'nejort gtimde satte, A very large room. 



64 

Aime, aimee, loved. 

Civil, civile, civil. 

Demi, demie, half. 

JYu, nue, naked. 

The last two adjectives are indeclinable when they 
precede a substantive, but are declinable when they fol- 
low it : ex. 

Une demi-livre, A half-pound. 

Une livre et demie, A pound and a half. 

JVu iete, bare head, > la tele nue. 

Jfupieds, bare feet, ) les pieds nus. 

There are a few ending in an, as, el, il, eil, ien, in, es, et, 
ts, on, os, ot, and id, that double the final letter, before an 
e mute, for the feminine : ex. 



Masc. Gras, 


Fern 


, grasse, 


fat. 


Gentil, 




gentille, 


genteel. 


Eternel, 




etemelle, 


eternal. 


Pareil, 




pareille, 


alike. 


Chretien, 




chretienne, 


christian. 


Epais, 




epaisse, 


thick. 


Bon, 




bonne, 


good. 


Masc. GroSy 


Fern 


. grosse, 


big. 


Sot, 




sotte, 


foolish, simple. 


The following are 


very irregular, and cannot be com- 


prised under any ruh 


3, viz. 






Masc. Beau, Bel,* 


Fern 


. belle, 


handsome, fine. 


Benin, 




benigne, 


benign. 


Favori; 




favorite, 


favorite. 


Fou, fol* 




folk, 


foolish, crazy. 


Frais, 




fraiche, 


fresh. 


Long, 




longue, 


long. 


Malin, 




maligne, 


malicious. 


Mou, mol* 




molle, 


soft. 


JYouveau, nouvel,* 


nouvelle, 


new, novel. 


Vieux, vieil* 




vieille, 


old. 



Adjectives ending in c add he to the c for their femi- 
nine * ex. 



v These adjectives are used before substantives beginning with a vowel 
or h not aspirated 



65 

Masc. Blanc, Fern, blanche, white. 

Franc, franche, sincere. 

Sec, secke, dry, &c. 

The four following are excepted : 
Masc. Caduc, . Fern, caduque, in decay. 

Grec, Grec que, Greek. 

Public, publique public. 

Turc, Tur que, Turkish. 

Those ending in f change f into ve for the feminine 
ex. 

Blase. Bref, Fern, breve, short. 

Naif, naive, plain, ingenuous 

Nevf, neuve, new, not old. 

Veuf, veuve, widowed. 

Vif, vive, quick. 

Adjectives ending in x, change x into se: ex. 
Masc. Douloureux, Fern, doidoureuse, painful, dolorous 
Heureux, . heurcuse, happy, &.c 

Jaloux, jaloase, jealous* , 

The following are excepted : 
Masc. Doux, Fern, douce, sweet. 

Faux, fansse, false. 

Perplex, perplexe, perplexed. 

Prefix, prejixe prefixed. 

Roux, rouss'e, reddish. 

DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 

French adjectives must agree with their substantives 
id gender, number, and case : ex. 

Singular. — Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. Le bon Iwre, the good book. 
Gen. Abl. Du bon livre, of or from the good book. 
Dat. Au bon livre, to the good book. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. Les bons Hvres, the good books. 
Gen, Abl. des bons livres, of or from the good books, 
Oat aux bons livres, to the good books. 

6* 



66 

Singular. — Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. La bonne plume, the good pen. 
Gen. Abl. de la bonne plume, of or from the good pen. 
Dat. a la bonne plume, to the good pen. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. Les bonnes plumes, the good pens 
Gen. Abl. des bonnes plumes, of or from the good pens. 
Dat. aux bonnes plumes, to the good pens. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The tall man, the little woman, and the 

petit, adj. 

pretty children, whom I met yesterday 

;o/i,adj. que,pro. a ^ rencontres, p. p. hier, adv. 

with their grandmother (were going) to London : 

allaient,v. 

they were all very hungry and thirsty. The polite 2 

avaient,v. 
inhabitants 1 of that fine city treat all the 

habitant mi. cette, pro. traitent,v. 

strangers in a civil 2 and frank 3 manner 1 . 

etr anger, m. dhme manierefi 

Lean 2 sheep* grow fat in good 

Maigre,adj. les brebis, f.pl. deviennent,v. dans, p. 

pastures. Constant 2 study 1 joined to a great 

paturage,m. etude,?. joint, p. p. 

application makes men learned. The new 2 

application, f. rend,v. savant ,adj. neuf 

coat 1 which you 2 gave 'me, is 

liahit,m. que,pro* avez donne,p.p. 

better than the old great-coat which my 

meilleur,B.d]. que,c. rcdingote,f. 

father had bought at his tailor's. - - We went 

avait achetee chez,p. allames,v. 

yesterday to the high court, where we found all 

trouvames,Y. 
the judges already met. 

deja,&dv. assembles, p.p. 

As two or more substantives in the singular are equiva- 
lent to a plural, the verb and adjective, or participle past, 



67 

not immediately following them, must be put in the plu- 
ral, when they refer to two or more substantives in the 
singular, and that adjective or participle is to be put in 
the masculine, if these substantives be of different gen- 
ders • ex. 
Le frere, la sceur, le neveu, The brother, sister, ne- 

et la niece, sont toils phew, and niece, are 

morts, all dead. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The book, paper, pencil, and penknife, which 
papier ,m. crayonjcn. canif^m. que 

you sent 2 me 1 , are excellent. - - - The 

avez pref^,p.p. wie,pro. excellent ,adj. 

pen, ruler, inkhorn and grammar which my bro- 
reglefi ecritoirefi 

ther has bought, are very good. The king 

ires, adv. 

queen, prince, and princesses were gone. The 

etaientyV. sor/i,p.p. 
corn, wheat, rye, pease and beans, in a word, all 

seigle,m feve,f. en mot,m. 

the grains which were on the ground, 

grain y m. qui^vo. etaient y v. swr,p. terrefi. 

were frozen. My father's house, and my uncle's 

furentjV. g"e/e,p.p. 

(country seat) are (very much) alike. 

chateau ,m. bien^dv. semblable^ adj. 

When two or more substantives are immediately followed 
by an adjective or participle past, these may agree in gen- 
der and number with the last substantive, when the sub- 
stantives are synonymous, or nearly so ; any other case met 
with in authors is either a poetical license or an oversight : 
ex. 

11 gouverne avec un pou- He governs with an abso- 

voir et une autorite ah- lute power and authori- 

solue ? ty. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

He studied with an incredible 3 application 1 and 

etudie,v. incroi/ablefldj. 



63 



courage 2 . He who has for his guides 

courage,m. Celui,^xo. qui,\)XO. xjcn guide ,m 

consummate 3 zeal 1 „ and prudence 2 deserves 

consomme } ndj. un zele,\x\. une 'prudence ,f. mirite 7 Y 

the general 3 esteem 1 and applause 2 of his 

estime,f. applaudissementyXn. ses,pro. 

fellow-citizens. I found the doors, the 

concitoyen,m. ai trouve,\).ip. ' porte,f. 
Windows, and the shutters shut. 



fcnetrefi. 



volets,m. ferme,ip.ip. 



THE PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVE IN A SEN- 
TENCE. 

Some adjectives are always placed before their substan- 
tives, and others after them ; but there is a kind of adjec- 
tives, which may either precede or follow their substan- 
tives, as the euphony of the sentence requires. 

The following are commonly placed before.* 



Beau j handsome, fine. 
Bon, good. 
Brave , brave. 
Cliery dear. 

Clieilfy vile, poor, mean. 
Galanty well-bred. 
Grand,, great, tall. 
Gros, big, large. 
Honnete, honest, civil. 
Jeune, young 



Jolt, pretty. 
Mediant } wicked. 
Mauvaisy bad. 
Meilleur, better. 
Moindrey less. 
Petit y little, small 
Saint y holy. 
Tout, all. 
VieuXy old 
Vraiy true. 



EXERCISE ON THE FOREGOING ADJECTIVES. 



I have seen a handsome lady, who (was 
va,]).p. dameyf. gm,pro. 
speaking) to an old gentleman. He 



parlaityW 



monsieur, m. 



II 



pro. 



had 
avail, v. 



. * No general rale can be given on this subject, however ; for of those 
adjectives enumerated here above, many may be placed after and receive 
a new signification, thus, un gal ant homme, means a well-bred man, 
un homme galant, a gallant, &c. Practice and observation only will 
give that knowledge, — See next rule. 



69 

a fine hat and a pretty sword. Your little 

chapeau,m. epeefi. Volrejpxo. 

sister deserved a better fate. - - I know a yountr 

merdattjV. aeshn y m. connais y v. 

man who has a good horse, but a bad stable. 

chevalyin. ecuritfi 

He 1 has 3 lent 4 # it 2 to an honest man. - - The 

a pr<jfe,p,p.Ze.pro. 

apostle Paul was a holy man. My brother has 

apdtre y m. 

bought a good watch. Your father was a 

achete.p.p. montrefi. etait^v. 

brave general, and a well-bred man. You have 

aveZyV 

lost all your money. Vile creature, I have 

p e j xl u,p. p. c rect lure , f. 

heard your wicked conversation. Mr. A. is a 

eiiicnduyp.p. conversation,?. 

great man, and the best of all fathers. 
ho mine, 

Some adjectives have different meanings, according as 
they are placed before or after their substantive ; as, une 
frame sage, a wise woman ; tine sage femme, a midwife ; 
and une grosse femme, a big woman ; une femme grosse, 
a pregnant woman ; un homme honnete, a civil man ; wn 
honnete homme, an honest man ; a little practice will soon 
remove any of these apparent difficulties. 

The following adjectives must be placed after their sub- 
stantives. 

1. All particles used as adjectives ; as, 

Une personne reconmissante, A grateful person 
Du bceuf roily Roast beef. 



2. All adjectives expressing the shape or form; as, 

ze table ronde, A round table. 

le chambre carree, A square room. 

3. All adjectives expressing the colour or taste j a3. 



70 

Un chapeau noir, A. black hat. 

Un habit rouge , A red coat. 

Une pomme douce, A sweet apple. 

Une liqueur amere, A bitter liquor. 

4. All adjectives expressing the matter of which a thing 

is composed ; as, 

Des parties sulfureuses , Sulphurous parts. 

Un corps aerien, An aerial body. 

5. All adjectives expressing the quality of hearing and 
touching ; as, 

Un instrument sonore, A sonorous instrument. 

Une voix harmonieiise. An harmonious voice. 

Un hois dur y A hard wood. 

Un corps mou, A soft body. 

6. All adjectives expressing the name of nations ; as, 

L' empire Romain, The Roman empire. 

La poesie Jinglaise, The English poetry. 

7. All adjectives, which, when used by themselves, 
convey the meaning of a substantive, as, rich, blind, &c t 

Un homme riche, A rich man. 

Une femme aveugle, A blind woman. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE 

An ignorant young man is despised by (every 

mepnse,p.p. de y j>. tout le 

body.) You have an English hat, and she has a 

monde^m. Jhiglais,ai$. 

French gown. - He reads an Italian proverb. - - 

Franpais, adj. robe y f. lit,v. Italien^yproverbe.m. 

I like (very much) the German tongue and 

ahne,v. beaucoup,B.dv. *dllemand,s.dj. languefi 

the Spanish dress. (It is) a square place. 

Espagnol } a.dj.hahillement,m* C J est,v. carre, adj. place ,f 
She likes sweet wine. - - Your sister has an har- 

aime } v. doux^dj. le vin y m. 

monious voice. I have bought a white gown 

voixfi blanc,ad]. 

and a black cloak. - - - You have a faithful 

ftoir,adj= mantelet ,m. ^dc/^adj 



71 

servant. - - I eat green peas, with 

domcstique,m.et,f. mange,Y. t?cr£,auj. 
boiled mutton. - Bring me a pound and a half 
bouilli,p.p. mouton,m demi, adj 

of cherries, and half a pound of currants. - We had a 
cerise,?. groseillej. eumes,v 

kind reception, and we played at a di- 

favorable, adj. accueil.m. jouames,v. d,p. di- 

verting game. - He lives in a cold country. 

vertissant,^d}.jeu,m. demeure,v. froid,&d]. pays,m. 

- - You have left the windows and the door 

laisse.p.p. feneire,i. porte,t. 

open. - - Will you have a bit of roast 

xXp morceau,m. roft 3 p.p. 

chicken? -- Do you 2 read 1 the Punic war ? - - 

poulet,m. uCP lisez.v. punique, did], guerre ,f.~ 

He has made a rash vow. - - Your sistei 

fait, p.]). temeraire&dj. vceu,m. 
is an agreeable lady. -- I like a grey stuff. 

agreable } Vid} . gm,adj . etoffe,£. 

(It was) really a tragical history 

C y etaif,v. reellement,u.dv. tragique^d}, histoireS 

When two or more adjectives belong to one substantive, 
the surest way is to place them after it, with the conjunc- 
tion et, and, before the last ; and if an adjective be used 
in a sentence without a substantive, this adjective must 
always be rendered in French by the masculine gender. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

We have a just, wise, and bountiful king. -- 

juste,a.d\. sage, adj. bienfai$ari,a.d]. 
Mr. Brown's oaugnter Is with a sincere and 

Monsieur, m. sincere, adj. 

generous lady. -- I have a scholar of a solid, 

genereux, adj. eeolier,m solide,n.d'y 

bright, and livelv genius. - - The wicked 

briilant,ad}. vif,adj. espnt,m. mediant, adj. pi. 

(shall be) punished. - - Miss * Preston is a 

serontjV. pimi,p.p. ' Mademoiselle, f. 
young, handsome, and well shaped lady. - - She has 

bien-fait,did]. 



l c 2 

married a sober, virtuous, and amiable 

Spouse, p. p. so&re,adj. vertueux,ad]. aimable,^ 

man. — The good (shall be) praised. — The diligent 

seront,p\. lone, p. p. diligent, adj. pi. 

f shall be) rewarded. 

recompense, p. p 

DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 

Adjectives and adverbs are the only kind of words that 
will admit of different degrees of more or less in the seve- 
ral qualities of persons or things. 

There are two degrees of comparison : 

1. Le comparatif, the comparative. 

2. Le superlaiif, the superlative. 

Some grammarians admit of another degree, which they 
call positive: but this is merely an adjective used in its 
simple signification, without expressing any increase or 
diminution : ex. joli, pretty; aimable, lovely. 

The comparative refers to some other person or thing, 
and shows its equality, excess, or defect : it is therefore of 
three sorts : 

1. Le comparatif d'egalite', The comparative by equal- 

c l.Le comparatif d'exces The comparative by ex 

cess. 
3. Le comparatif de defaut, The comparative by defect. 

The comparative by equality is formed by placing the 
adverbs autant, as much, as many ; aussi, so or as, before 
an adjective ; and que, as after it : ex. 
Vorte oncle a autant oVar- Your uncle has as much 

gent, et autant d'amis que money, and as many 

mon pere, friends as my father 

Ma sozur est aussi ambitieuse My sister is as ambitious 

que vous, as you. 

Mon frere est aussi savant My brother is as learned 
que le voire, as yours. 

N. B. — From the preceding examples and the follow- 
ing, it will be easily seen that when the adverbs, tant, so 
much, so many ; autant, as much, as many ; plus, more, 



73 

and moins, less, arc immediately followed by a substan- 
tive, that substantive must bo preceded by de. Th« 
learner will also observe that si and aussi, so, as ; gene- 
rally precede adjectives, when a comparison is made by 
either ; whereas iant and autant are always followed by a 
noun or verb, the French conjunction que, Englished by 
either as, than, or that, being the term of the comparison ; 
plus, or moins , may precede either an adjective, a noun or 
verb. 

Than, after more or less, plus ou moinSj followed by a 
noun of number, is rendered in French by de, and not by 
que : ex. 

Je perds plus dhm Louis, et 1 lose more than a Louis, 
vous gagnez moins de cinq and you gain less than 
francs, five francs. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Alexander was as ambitious as Caesar. - - 

etait,v. ambitieux,&d}. que,c. Cesar, m. 
I am as tall as you. - - Miss D. has as much live- 

suis,v. haul,ad}. Mile a,v. viva- 

liness, and she is as amiable as her cousin. - If my fa- 
ciie,f. est,v. s<x,pro. cousine,f.Si,c. 

ther were as rich as my uncle, he (would make) a better 

etait,v. oncle,m. f emit, v. 

use of his riches. - We have as many books as your 
usage,m. ses,\>ro. autant,B.dv. vos, pro. 

brothers, and they are as learned as we. - I am as honest 

sont,v. nows,pro. 

2nd civil as my companions. - - You 2 owe 'me more 

compagnon,m. devez,v. 

than two dollars, and you pay 2 me 1 less than fifty cents. 
gourde p aye z so u , m . 

The comparative by excess is formed by placing the ad- 
verb plus, more, before an adjective : ex. 
Sa cousine est plus diligente Her cousin is more diligent 
que moi, et est plus savante than I, and is more learn- 
que vous, ed than you. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Miss A. is handsomer and more learned than 

Mile que,c 



74 

ner sisters. - - Lucia is taller and more proud 

Lucie, f. orgueilleiix y adj 

than her little cousin. His sister is more 

sa,pro. cqusine,f. iSa,pro. 

covetous than he. Nothing is pleasanter to 

avarefldj Zm,pro. Rien ?ie,adv. agreable^d]. 

the mind than the light of truth. - - 

esprit ,m. lumiere,?. veritefi 

Nothing is more lovely than virtue, and 

aimable,a.dj. 

nothing is more desirable than wisdom. 

desirable ,adj. sagessej. 

My daughter is taller than your son by* two inches. - - 

de pouce^m. 

Your brother is taller than you by the 2 whole 1 head 3 . - - 

tout tetefi. 
In winter the roads are always worse than 

En hiver,m. chemin,m. plus mauvais^d]. 

in summer. -- He gave 2 me 1 a more beautiful eagle. 
ete donna : aiglefi 

The comparative by defect is formed by placing the ad- 
verb moins y less, before an adjective ; or tant, so much, so 
many ; or si, so ; with the negation ne pas, or point, not ; 
or ne, ni, neither, nor, before them : ex. 
Voire cousine est moins noble Your cousin is less noble 

que vous, than you. 

11 n'est pas si orgucilleux que He is not so proud as his 
sa sxur, sister. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Mrs. p*#* i s i ess polite than her daughter, 

Mme po/i,adj. 

but her daughter (is not) so revengeful as she. 

rtesl pas, adv. vindicaiifad}* 

You are 5 *not 3 so dutiful as your brother. 

eieSyV.ne pas,D.dv. obeissant,&dj. 

My father is not so rich as yours, but he has 

le votre^pvo. 

not so much self-love. Miss Goodwill has less wit 

amour-propre,m. Mile 

than her mother. Paris (is not) so populous as 

pe upley adj. 
* By, after a comparison, is rendered into French by de. 



75 

London. - - Your companion is neither so prudent nor 

tfest itt ni 

so circumspect as you. 

It must be observed, that in sentences in which the 
above adverbs more or less are repeated to express a com- 
parison, the definite article the, preceding either, is totally 

pressed in French : as, 
Pius on est pauvre, moms on The poorer* people are, the 

a (PembarraS) less care they have. 

Plus je la vols , plus, je la The more I see her, the mere 

haisj I hate her 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The more a thing is difficult, the more honour- 
chose,f. difficile, ad}. hono- 

it 1 is 2 . The less you give to your chil- 

\adj. elle, pro. donnez.y vos. 

di'dj, the less they spend. The Richer 4 they 4 

Us, pro. depenseni,\. 

are 3 , the more covetous they are. - - The more a 

a rare, adj. 
young man studies, the more learned he grows. 

etudie,v. savant, adj. devient,v. 

The more a drunkard drinks, the more thirsty he is. - - 

ivrogne,m. boit,v. altere,ad}. 

The more odious laziness is, the more we should 

odieux.iid}. paresse,f. devrions,v. 

avoid 2 it 1 . --The less you apply? the less you 

eviler,v. la. pro. vous voas appliquez,v. 

learn, -- The more they know 2 y ou / tne ^ ess 

apprenez,v. connoAtrord,v. fut. 

they will esteem 2 you 1 . 
eslimeront,v. fut. 

The above comparative adverbs, si, aussi, tant, aidant, 
plus and mains, must be repeated in French, before each 
adjective, noun, verb or adverb, in the sentence : ex. 

Voire frere est aussi savant, Your brother is as learned 
ei aussi eclaire que mon and enlightened as my 

cousin, cousin. 

^Poorer, richer, and all similar forms are rendered into French by 
more poor, more rich ; observe well the construction of the above sen 
tenca 



76 

M, Robert tfa ni tant de Mr. Robert has neither so 
l)icn } ni tant d\sprit que much wealth nor wit as 

M Dubois, Mr. Dubois. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

My father has as many (apple - trees) 

autant^dv . pommierjn. 

and (pear - trees) in his orchard as (there are) 

poirier,m. verger, ni. ily ena,v. 

in yours. -His eldest brother (will be) more 

le voire mnefidj. sera^v. 

attentive, industrious, and rich than he. 

cdtentif^d]. industrieax,a.d). lui,pro 

Miss A m * has less wit, less liveliness, and becom- 

vivacite agre- 

ingness than her sister. - - She has as much virtue 

mcnts 
and good sense as beauty and modesty. - - My 

sens »7tfon,pro. 

cousin is as merry, lively, and amiable as his 

gm,adj. enjoue,a,d). ses,pro. 

school-fellows. 
condsisciples,m. 

The same rule is to be observed with respect to the ad- 
verbs used in forming the superlative degree. 

The three following adjectives are comparative by 
themselves, meilleur, better ; pire, worse ; and moindre, 
less ; which signify plus bon^plus mauvais, plus petit ; and 
ahie, elder, or eldest, is used for plus age, or le plus age. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The watch which my grand-father has bought 
montrefi que,pvo. grand-pere,m. achetee,p.p 
is better than the clock which he gave to 

pendulefi. a donnee,ip.p. 

my mother. My friend's buckles are better than 

mere,f, houclefi 

those of his uncle, but mine are worse 

< e//es,pro. oncte,m. . les miennes, pro. 

than his. The life of a slave is 

les siennes,])YO. vie ,f. esclave,m. 

ten times worse than death itself. - - The 

dix fois/ddv, mortfi 



77 

pain which I endure is less than that which 

peine, £ que souffre,v. celle ,pio. qv.i^vo. 

iS inflicted on galley-slaves. 

infligee,p.p. aiuix galerien.m. 

The superlative expresses the highest degree of any 
quality. There are two kinds of superlatives : 1. The 
relative, which expresses the quality of a person or thing 
above all others of the same kind. In this case, one of 
the following articles, le, la, les ; n de, du, tie, la, ties ; a, au, 
a, la, aux, precedes the adverbs plus, standing then for 
most, mieux] best, moins, least, before an adjective ; or the 
adjectives meilleur, best ; moindre, least ; pire, worst : ex. 
Voire sceur est la plus belle Your sister is the hand- 
ed la meilleure femme de somest and best woman in 
la ville, the town. 

EXERCISE UPOX THIS RULE. 

The vine is one of the 2 raost useful 3 * and 4 agree- 
v ign e , f . v. n le s plus utile s , a dj . pi. 

able gifts 1 of Providence 5 . -- Virtue . is 1 the 5 most 4 pre- 
don,m. Providence.f. pre- 

cious 4 thing 2 tin the world. The lion is the 

cicux,o.d}. chose,f. du monde,m. 

strongest and most courageous of all animals. - - - - 

fort. ad]. courageux,cid]. animal,m. 

(There is) the handsomest lady in London. She is 

Voila,ad\. de 

so touchy, that she will not bear the least 

bourru, adj. veut, v. souffrir,v. 

joke. Miss P. is the mildest, politest, and most 

raUteriefi doux,zd], polled}. 

affable of all her sisters. Ingratitude is 

affable, adj. ses, pro. 

the greatest of all vices. If France were as rich 

vice,m. eto.it, v. 

as England, (it would be) the best country in the world. J 
ce sirait,y. pays,m. 

* See the gender of adjectives, p. 63. 
t See the note on the page that follows this. 

t It may be ob.-erved hi some of these examples, that the preposition 
in, following an adjective hi the 5iiper!ati\e degree, must be rendered In 



78 

The absolute simply expresses the quality of a person 
or thing in its highest degree. This happens when one 
of the adverbs /res, fort, bien, very, infiniment, infinitely 
precedes an adjective ; and when any of the comparatives 
Ijy excess or defect are preceded by one of the posses- 
sive pronouns, mon, ton, son, notre, voire, leur, fyc. they be- 
come superlatives : ex. 

Vofre oiseau est tres joli, Your bird is very pretty. 

Vous etes mon meilleur ami, You are my best friend. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

God is a being infinitely great and perfect. - - - - 
etre,m. parfait,adj. 

I am your most humble and obedient 

£res,adv. obeissant, Vid]. 

servant. The front of your house is very 

serviteur,m. fagade,i. 

beautiful. You are very good, but your brother 

bean. 

is very wicked. My uncle has a very fine coun- 

mechant, 3.d']. cam- 

. try - house, and very spacious 2 gardens. 1 

pagne spacieux,adj. 

My best friend is dead. Our common 

Notre, pro. commun, adj. 

enemy has 1 the 3 most 4 inveterate 5 hatred 2 against 

invetere,s.d]. haine,f. contre,p. 

this country. Their least embarrassments 

cc,pro. pays,m. Lcurs,pro. embarras,m. 

make their greatest delight. Pride and 

font,v. delicesj.pl. Orgueil,m. 

passion are his least defects. 

colere,L ses,pro. defaut,m. 

French by one of these articles, de, du, de la, des, according to the 
gender and number of the substantive to which it belongs. The prepo- 
sition by, when it follows an adjective in the comparative degree, is 
rendered by dc only 



79 

OF NUMBERS. 

There are two kinds of numbers : 1st, The absolute f 
which simply relates the number of the things spoken of. 
viz. 



Un (femin. une.) 

Deux, 

Trois, 

Quatre, 

Cinq, (q is sounded,) 

Six, (pron. sm,) 

Sept, (pron. set,) 

Huit, (t is sounded,) 

Neuf, (f is sounded,) 

Dix, (pron. diss,) 

Onze, 

Douze, 

Treize, 

Quatorze, 

Quinze, 

Seize, (sei is broad,) 

Dix-sept, (pron. diss-set,) 

Dix-kuit, (pron. diz-uii,) 

Dix-neuf, (pron. diz-neuf,) 

Vingt, (gt are dropped,) 

Vingt-un, 

Vingt-deux, 

Fingt-trois, S$c 

Trente, 

Trente-un, 

Trente-deux, fyc. 

Quarante, 

Cinquante, 

Soixante, (pron. soissant,) 

Soixante-un, 

Soixante-deux, &c. 

Soixante-dix, 

Soixanteonze, dec. 

Quatre-vingts, (gts are 

dropped and gt in the 

following two. 
Quatre-vingt-an, 



g is dropt i 
but t is 
sounded 



One. 
Two. 

Three. 

Four. 

Fiye. 

Six. 

Seven. 

Eight. 

Nine. 

Ten. 

Eleven. 

Twelve. 

Thirteen. 

Fourteen. 

Fifteen. 

Sixteen. 

Seventeen. 

Eighteen. 

Nineteen. 

Twenty. 

Twenty-one. 

Twenty-two. 

Twenty-three, &.e. 

Thirty. 

Thirty-one. 

Thirty-two, &c. 

Forty. 

Fifty. 

Sixty. 

Sixty-one. 

Sixty-two, &,c. 

Seventy. 

Seventy-one, &c. 

Eighty. 
Eighty-one. 



so 

Quatre-yingt-deux, &fc Eighty-two, &c. 

Quatre-vingl-dix, fyc. Ninety, &c. 

Cent, (t in cent is di ,>pped, ) A ^ , , , 

\\ ,, c u . \ l x' > A or one* hundred, 
and in the following two,J ) 

Ceni-un, A or one* hundred and 

one, &c. 

Deux-cents ,{x is dropped, and ^ 
the two final consonants in 
the following also, and be- J> Two hundred, 
fore any other word begin- 
ning with a consonant,) 

Trols cents, Three hundred. 

Neuf cents, (/dropped,) Nine hundred. 

Mille, mil, "f A or one # thousand. 

Deux milk, Two thousand. 

Trois milk, 8?c. Three thousand, &c. 

Cent milk, fyc. A or one* hundred thousand, 

&c. 

JYeuf cent milk, (f dropped,)Nine hundred thousand. 

Un million, A million. 

These absolute numbers are declined with the article in- 
definite de, a, and are always placed before the substan- 
tive to which they are joined without any article interve- 
ning ; and they are invariable in their form, except quatre- 
vingt, eighty ; cent, a hundred ; and million, a million ; 
which take an s in their plural, when immediately followed 
by a substantive : ex. 

Qmlre-vingts femmes, Eighty women. 

Deux cents homines, Two hundred men. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I was in the company of seven gentlemen and 

compagniefi MM. 

* It will be seen by the following, that the English particle a or one, 
is not expressed in French : ex. 

Je Vai vu et lui ai parte cent I have seen him and spoken to him a 
fois, mille fois, hundred times, a thousand times. 

t Mentioning the date of the year, we must write, mi/, and not 
mille: ex. Van mil huit-cent quinze, the year 1815. 



81 

nine ladies. -- lie has spoken to three officers and 

da ma parliyp.p. 

two generals. - - If I had a hundred guineas., I would 2 
avaiSyV. guinte, en 

lend 2 you 1 eighty. - - The army of our 

pretermSyV. armee 7 f. nos.pro. 

allies was composed of a hundred thousand 

allie,m. etait co^nposee^p.p. 

men of foot, and twenty thousand of horse. 

infanterie cavalerie. 
They took fifteen hundred men prisoners, 
prirentyV. ( prtsonnier 3 
killed four thousand, wounded a thousand, 
en tuerentyY. en blesserent, v. 
and (carried away) above two millions in specie. 

emporterentyW. plus de especes. 

The battle (was fought) in one thousand eight hun- 

batailhyf. se Uwa 7 v. en 
dred and fourteen, at three o'clock (in the) morning. 

*jcn heureSyf. du matin. 

These numbers are employed as substantives, in some 
cases, as in the game of cards, and in dates : ex. 

Le huit de cozury The eight of hearts. 

Nous partimes de Boston We left Boston on the fif- 

le quinzey teenth. 

le veviendrai le douse 7 I shall return on the twelfth. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Will you but tell 2 me 1 , if you have the seven of 

settlement dire 
clubs ? - Yes, I have 2 it 1 , and the ten of spades too. - The 
trefle ? ai le pique aussi. 

nine of diamonds (is missing) in this pack. - - I (shall be) 

carreau manque ce jeu. serial 

absent for a week or two, but you may be certain, that 

& pouvez 

I shall be here on the twenty-fifth. - - Tell my sister 
*/?> Dites a 

that I expect 2 her 1 on the seventeenth. You may 

attends la up 



82 

date your letter the twenty-sixth. The 

dafeTyV. du 

sixteenth (will be) her birth-day. The ten of 

sera son jour de naissance y nh 

diamonds is not good. -.- I have the ace of spades. - - 
carreau as pique. 

We (shall have) a holiday on the twenty-fifth instant. - - 
aurons clucourant. 

Congress met on the third of December. 

s^est assemble 
We received the President's Message on Friday, the 

regurnes ucn 

fifth of this month, it is most excellent. 
ce tres 

In every instance therefore the cardinal numbers must 
be used in French when speaking of the days of the month, 
though the ordinal be used in English ; excepting for le 
premier, the first, speaking of the first day of every month ; 
as, 

Le premier de Mai, The first of May. 

he deux de JVbvembre, The second of November. 

Vest aujourcrhui le quaire To day is the fourth of 
d'Jloutj August. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

My friend will come (to see 2 ) us 1 on the fifth of 
viendra y v. voir^v. ucn» 

next 2 month 1 . - -Lady 2 - day 1 falls 

p?*oc7iai7i,adj. mois,m. Noire Dame jour y m. tombe y w» 
on the twenty-fifth of March. - - In the leap 2 
jcp Mars, m. bissextile ,adj. 

year 1 the month of February has one day more, 
anneefi Fevrier y m. de plus^&v. 

which is the twenty-ninth. - - The first of November 
qui. pro. No v emb re , m 

is (all-saints-day,) and the fifth of the same month 

la toussaiat wi erne, adj. mois y m. 

is the day of the 2 Gun powder 1 plot. 

des poudres,\A. conspiration,?. 
Come on the first day of July. 
Vmez^y Juittet 7 m. 



33 

2. The of&h al members. This class of numerals, beside 
the simple notation, signifies the order or rank of things, 
viz. 

Le premier, ou umeme. 



\ on deuxieme, 
Le troisieme, 

Le an afrit me, 

Le cinqv.ieme, 

Le sixieme, 

Le sepfieme, 

Le h: 

Le neumeme, 

Le d 

Le onziemej* 

L~ douzii 

Le treizieme, . 

Le >. me, 

Le quiriziime, 

L: i 

Le d ! mi, 

Le dix-huitu 

Le dix-neuviciiit. 

L- m 

Li mngt-unieme, 

Levi ieote, fye. 

Le tt 

Le iv ;, (fee. 

Le Cjuarariieme, 

Le i ' 

Le soixante-et-dixit m e , 
Le quatre-vingiieme, 

Le ceniieme, 
Le cud umcuie, 
Le cent deuxxeme, 

Le deux ceniieme, 
Le m Uli erne, 



The first. 
The second. 
The third. 
The fourth 
The huh. 
The sixth. 
The seventh. 
The eighth. 
The ninth. 
The tenth. 
The eleventh. 
The twelfth. 
The thirteenth. 
The fourteenth. 
The fifteenth. 
The sixteenth. 
The seventeenth. 
The eighteenth. 
The nineteenth. 
The twentieth. 
The twenty-first. 
The twenty-second. Sec. 
The thirtieth. 
The thirty-second. Sec 
The fortieth. 
The fiftieth. 
The sixtieth. 
The seventieth. 
The eightieth. 
mdredth 
The hundred and first. 
The hundred and second 

kc. 
The two hundredth. 
The thousandth. 



These ordinal numbers are declined witn the article 

* Xo elision i? to be made in the article before onze ; onzihne ; huit, 
ktdtieme; for we say. / c . du, cm, la, de la. a la. frc. onze, onzieme, 4'c. 



84 

definite le } la, &c. and are placed before their substan- 
tives * ex. 
J. e premier jour clu mois, The first day of the month, 

EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE RULE PAGE 70. 

On the eleventh of June I received twelve letters, 

do^ Juin ai regu,v. 

but the eleventh 2 has afforded 3 me 1 more 

pro cur e,y.]). ma, pro. pto,adv. 

pleasure than the others. Mrs. B. is the fifth 

autre jf to. Mme 

lady whom I saw to day. The spring 

que^Yo. aivue,p.p. aujourdliui,&d\ T . print enips,ni. 
begins on the twenty-first or twenty-second of 

commence, \. ^cn 

March. He cannot spend the sixth 

Mars ne pent pas,v» depenser,v. 

part of his fortune. The eleventh of No- 

partie,f. sa, pro. fortune y f. 

vemher, which is the eleventh month of the year, 

annee,f. 
was Hhe 3 dullest 4 day 2 of the 6 whole 5 month 7 
fut triste,&d]. touted]. 

Speaking of sovereigns, we use the absolute number hi 
French, though the ordinal be used in English, except the 
first and second ; and we place it after the substantive, as 
in English, without expressing the article the : ex. 
George Trots, George the Third. 

Louis Seize, Lewis the Sixteenth. 

Henri Quatre, Henry the Fourth 

Henri Premier, Henry the First. 

George Second, George the Second, 

and not, Henri Un, George Deux. 

We say, for the following solitary names of an Emperor 
and a Pope, as a distinction from other sovereigns, 

Charles Quint, Charles the Fifth. 

Sixle Quint, Sixtus the Fifth. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Edward the Sixth, the son of Henry the 

Edouard,m. fits 

Eighth, and the grand - son of Henry the Seventh, 
petit, adj. 



was c 'but 9 nine years old when he beg-an 

■7. v. ne que an ^cn quand^c. cammenpa 7 T, 

to reign. Henry the Fifth, king of England, 

d rigner 9 Y. roi.ni. 

the son of Henry the Fourth, and father of Henry 

the Sixth, married Catherine, the daughter of 

epousa 7 y m Catherine 

Charles the Sixth, king of France ; conquered the 

conouiLv. 
greatest part of that kingdom, and died in the) 
partieS. ce,pro. royaume,m. mourut.y. an 

midst of his victories. (Long live; George 

milieu ScS.pro. vicioireS. Vivc.v. 

the third, grand - son to George the Second. 

peiit 7 adj. 
Charles the Fifth, emperor of Germany and king of 

JMemagnej roisn. 

Spain j and Sixtus the Fifth, one of the popes, were 

pape.m. elaient,Y. 
two great men. 

grand y adj. 

The definite article the is also suppressed in French 
before the ordinal number, when it is preceded by a 
noun used to quote a chapter^ article, or page of a b 

should the ordinal number precede the noun, the con- 
struction is the same in French as in English, an the ar- 
ticle is expressed : ex. 

Li Book the third. 

L- troisihne livre, The third book. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

What you look for) you (will find 5 ) it 1 

Ce que.pvo. cherchez,v. trouverez y v. Ze,pro. 

in the Second Book of Samuel, chapter the t 

Samuel, chapitre 
verse the ninth; page the first, and line tenth, 

verset, pagtS. lig 

- We read in Telemachus, book the 

UsonSyV. clans TtUriiaque, 

seventh, page the hundred and twenty-fifth; that 

que 
8 



86 

Mentor pushed Telemachus into the sea, 
poussa,v. mcr,?. 

threw 3 himself 1 (into it 2 ) afterward with 

jeta,v. se,pro. m ?/,adv% ensuite,adv. 

him. Our master forgives the first time, 

7m, pro. Notre, pro. pardonnejt. f°' ls fi 

threatens the second, and always 2 punishes 1 

menace ^v. louj 'ours, adv. punit,Y. 

the third. 

RECAPITULATORY or promiscuous EXERCISES 
upon all the preceding RULES. Review them well, be- 
fore you write. 

Ignorance is the mother of admiration, 
Ignorance,?. esi,v. mere,?. admiration.?. 

error, and superstition. The covetous de- 

erreur,?. superstition,?. auare,adj.pl. me- 

spise the poor. Humility is the basis of 

prisenl,v. * pa-wwe,adj.pl. Humiliie,?. base,? 

Christian virtues. - Pride is generally the effect 
Chretien, &&). Orgueil,m. efi'et,m 

of ignorance. - - Give me some bread, meat, 

Donnez,v* moi,pro. 
turnips, and water. - - Merit and favor are 

navet, Merite,m. faveur,?. sonl,v. 

the two springs of envy. Interest, pleasure, 

source,?. envie,?. Inter et, 

and glory, are the three motives of the actions 

motif, m. action 

and conduct of men. -- Is 2 it 3 mot 4 

conduite,?. Est,v. ce,pro. nepas,ndv, 

Peter's book ? Your father has gone to London, 

allc,p.p. 
where he has bought some horses and cows, which 

vaclie,?. que, pro. 
he intends to send to Canada or Jamaica. 

se propose jV. d'envoyer,v. ou 

The father's house and the son's garden 

maison,?. jardin,n\ 

(are adjoining.) He found the windows 

se joigneniyV irouva,v. 



87 

and the doors shut. Truth is the hond of 

Virile fi. lien,m. 

union, and the basis of human happiness 

union.f. base J, humain y ndj. bonheur y m. 

without it (there is no) confidence in 

sanSjp. e//e,pro. il rtxj a point confiance,f. 

friendship, and no security in promises. - - 

amide,?. 'point, adv. siirete promessefi. 

The love of liberty and independence is the 
amour, m. liberie ,f. 

character of noble minds. Iron, steel, 

caractere,m. ame, Fer,m. acier,m. 

and brass are more useful than gold and 

cuivre,m, Wiz/e.adj. 

silver. - - The smith has (at last) repaired 

serrurier,m m e?j/m,adv. repare,p.p. 

the two jacks, and the cook (is 

tourne-broche,m. cv.isinierefi. fait 

roasting) the meat. - - I have seen the inside of the 

rotir,Y m dedans.m. 

church. Bring me my powder-box, and 

eglise,f. ?}?«,pro. 

my toupee-iron. - - I take a lesson three times 

man, pro. prends 

a week. The study of grammar is 2 J neither 3 so 

etude, f. ne m',c. 

dry nor so dull, as (it is thought.) 

sec. adj. triste,n.d]. on se V Hmagine ; v. 

Have some prudence and patience, and you (will have) 
Jlijez : \. aurez,v. 

success. A good conscience is to the soul 

succes,m. conscience,^. ame,i\ 

what health is to the body. Merit and 

ce que,pro. sante',f. corps,m. 

virtue are the only source of true 

unique, ad]. veritable, adj. 

nobility. Religion, commerce, and arms 

noblesse,^. Religion.i. commerce, m. arme,f. 

are proper instructions for a young prince, - - 

propre,3.d'], instruction,?. a 

Her father has been made a knight 

Soiiypvo efe,p.p fait,p.\), chevalier, m 



ot the order of the Bath, and her grandfather 

ordre,m. Bain,m. 

was a kight of the order of the Garter. 

etait^v. Jarretierefi 

He has not (so much) - profit, but more honour. -- 

taut, adv. profit 
Fortune's favours are seldom the prize of 

faveurfi rarement, adv. prix^m. 

virtue. Gaming is the son of avarice, and the father 

Jew,m. 

of despair. This cloth is equal to some 

desespoir y m. Ce,pro. drap,m. comparable, adj. 

silk. I see the coast of England. - - - The example 

stne,f. vois,v. coie£. exemple^m. 

of a good life is a lesson for the rest of man- 

viefi pour ,p. . reste,m. genre- 

kind. - The French fleet was destroyed 

humain^xn. Frangais, ad], flotte^. fid, v. detntite,\).\). 

by the brave Admiral Nelson, on the first of August, 
Amiral,m. </7> ^out,m: 

one thousand seven hundred and ninety-eight. 

The eldest 2 son 1 of the king of England 

ami, adj. 
bears the title of Prince of Wales, as 

porte,v. titre y m. Galles, comme, adv. 

presumptive heir to the crown. Lewis 

presomptif ad], heritier couronnef. Louis 

the sixteenth was the grand-son of Lewis the fif- 

petit, ad]. 

teenth. William, surnamed the Con- 

Gui llaume , m . sumo mm e , p . p . Co n- 

queror, king of England and duke of Nor- 

qu£rant 7 m. duc,m. Nor- 

mandy, was one of the greatest generals of the 

mandie, 

eleventh century. He (was born) at Falaise, and 

siecle,m. naqidt,v. a 

was the natural son of Robert, duke of Nor- 

naiurel y ad]. Nor 

mandy, and of Arlotte, a furrier's daughter. - - He 

mundie, fmrreur,m, fdle. 



89 

died at Hermentrude, in France, on the ninth of 

mourutyV. a 

September, one thousand eighty-seven. - - - Mrs. Nel- 
son's servant knows the price of all the provisions. 

servantefi. sait,v. prixjn. denreefi 

- She bought yesterday some chickens at one shilling 

pou!et y m. a 
and three pence a piece. - - She came from America 

vintyV. Jhnerique 

in three weeks. Thomas was formerly a rnu- 

e»,p. etait autrefois ,adv. mu- 

sician, now he is a dancing-master, 

», a present : adv. danse maitre, 

tomorrow he (will be) a painter. - - This 

•>;'/*, adv. sera,\\ peintre. Ceffe,pro 

water is very agreeable to the smell. - - - - We 

odorat,m. 

(are going) to Coxheath, to see the camp. 1 

allonSyV. */P voir,v. campjn. 

have in my wardrobe five coats, sixteen waistcoats, 
twenty-two pair of stockings, and forty-six hand- 

mou- 

kerchiefs. The road to Roxbury is very bad 

choir. chemin,m. 

in winter. Bring us good wine, good beer, 

e//,p. hirer. 

and the oil-bottle. -- The front of the king's 

fagadefi 

palace (is not) so beautiful as I thought. Gene- 

n'est pas croyavt 7 v. Gene" 

rosity excites admiration. Charles the second, 

rositefi excite^:, admiration^. 

the son of Philip the fourth, the grandson of Philip 

Philippe 
the third, and the great grand-child of Philip the 

arriere petit -fils 

second, left his kingdom to Philip the fifth. 

laissciyY. son, pro. 
On the eighteenth of February, one thousand four 
jy* FSvrier, 

hundred and seventy-eight, the duke of Clarence 

due 



90 

brother to king Edward the fourth, was drowned in 
frere,m. Edouard fut,v. noye,p.p. 

a butt of malmsey-wine. - The inhabitants of the 

tonneaUyin. malvoisie habitant,m. 

city of Dublin have presented a petition to 

villefi ontjV. presents, p. p. adresseS. 

the King. Good cider is preferable to bad 

cidre 

wine. That man always wears a green hat, a wliite 

a,v. 
shirt, red shoes and black stockings. - - He has 

chemise, f. bas,m. 

many children, and plenty of money. -- The 

bien,&dv.. beaucoup,&dv. argent, m. 

longer the day is, the shorter is the night. - - You have 

jour,m. nuit,f. 

a fine hat. - - Shame is a mixture of the grief 

Hontefi malange,m. chagrin,m 

and fear which infamy causes. - - Religion, 

crainte,f. que,pro. infamie cause,v. 
morality, government, fine arts, in a word 

morale,?. gouvernement,m. beau en,]). 

(every thing) is overturned. - - Homer was the 

tout renverse,^.^. Homer e fut,v. 

first poet who personified the divine at- 
poete,m. personnifia,v. divined], at- 

tributes, human passions and physical 
tribut,m. humain,a.dj. physique, adj. 

causes - - Pride and vanity are often the source 

vanitefi souvent,&d}. 

of the misfortunes of mankind. ■ We sell 

malheur,m. vendons,v. 

good bread, excellent meat, and very large 

grosy&dj. 
fishes ; but 1 we 2 have 4 3 neither 5 gold nor 
poisson; mais,c. avons,v. 

silver. - - (Is there) any beer in the cellar ? - - 

Y a-t-il cave,£. 

Mrs. B. is a good, virtuous, prudent, and 

vertueuXySidj, 
generous Jady : she has a daughter as beautiful as an 

filled 



91 

angel, but she has neither so much docility nor af 
tinge, m. 

lability as her cousin. Pindar (was born) at 

Pindare,m. nciquii,v. 

Thebes, a city of Greece. Malta is a small island, 

Grece. Malthe ?/e,f. 

but it produces some corn, cotton, honey, 

e/7e,pro. produtijr. coton,m. miel,m. 

figs, and the finest oranges in the world. - - The 

jigue, f. 6ca«,adj. o range r f. 

inhabitants of that fine country are all catholics, 

pays 
and go every Sunday to hear high mass. - The 

vontyV. ions les Dimanches <jCt 
pleasure of the mind is greater than the pleasure 

esprit 
of the body, and the diseases oT the mind are 

corps.m. maladiefi 

more pernicious than the diseases of the body. - - 

pernicieux^d']. 
Health, honours, and fortune united together, 

SantSjf. - «??i,p.p. ensemble y n.dv 

cannot satisfy the heart of man. 

ne-peuvent,v. satisfaire,v. cozurjoci. 

(It is) in the sixth page of the second book, chapter 

C'est,v. 

the third. - - Miss W.'s father, a banker in the 

Strand, is one of the richest men in town, but 

Strand y m. * 

she is prouder and more haughty than 

. orgueillenx^d]. /z a ufaui, adj. 
if she were the handsomest woman in Europe. 

etaityV. * 

Their son arrived yesterday at Portsmouth from 

Leur,ipvo. arriva 

Peru and Martinico, in the St. George, a ninety- 
.Perou Martinique , 

gun ship. Hypocrisy is a homage which 

canon vaisseau,m. hommage y m-. que,ipro. 

* See the remarks on the prepositions in and 6y> in the note, in 
the degrees of comparison, page. T-i. 



92 

vice pays to virtue. - - A judicious answer 

t?we,m. rend,v. judicieux,&d). reponse,?. 

does more honour than a brilliant repartee. - - - 

J ait, v. brillant, a.d). repartie,i\ 

Give me a knife and fork. My father has bought 

one-and-thirty fine grey m horses. (He is) an 

grts, adj. & est jr. 
intrepid man, and a man of honour and pro- 
irdrepide^di], pro- 
bity. - - - Mr. C # ** ? the queen's jeweller, has a 

bite joaillier, 

very prudent wife, and the most faithful, indus- 

fidele,adj . indus- 
trious, and honest servant in London. 

trieuxy&d], honneie,a.d}. domesiique 

He found beauty, youth, riches, wisdom, 

trouvciyV. * jeunesse, 

and even virtue, united in her per- 

meme, adv. reuni y p.p. sa,pro. 

son. - Thomas has discretion, but he has no 

discretion ,f. ne point 9 a.dv 

wit. - - They have a quantity of apples and pears. - - 

quanitiefi 
Vienna, the capital of the empire of Germany, 
Vienne, JLllemagne, 

is a fine city. The more pleasing plays 

agreable,tid]. spectacle, m. 
are, the more dangerous they are. - - The rich, 

danger eux, &d]. pi. 

the poor, the young, the old, the learned, and the 

sa^ em/, adj. 
ignorant, are all subject to death. --True friends are 

siye£,adj. mori,f. Frat,adj. 
almost as rare as good writers. - - The famous 

rare, adj. ecrivain,m. fameux, adj. 

mine of Potosi, in Peru, is above two hundred 

mine,f. du plus,<xdv. 

and fifty fathoms deep. - - Henry the first, king of Eng- 

toise Henri 

land, and brother to William Rufus* died the richest 

le Roux, mourutjV 



93 
prince in Europe. - - Paul is taller than you by an inch, 



but Mrs. Nichol's brother is the tallest of all. 
Mme. 



pouce,m. 



SECT. III. 
OF PRONOUNS. 

There are seven sorts of Pronoun's ■ 

1 . Les pronoms personnels, Pronouns personal. 

"2. Les pronoms conjonctifs, Pronouns conjunctive 

3.. Les pronoms possessifs, Pronouns possessive. 

4. Les pronoms demonstratifs, Pronouns demonstrative 

5. Les pronoms relatifs, Pronouns relative. 

6. Les pronoms interrogates , Pronouns interrogative 

7. Les pronoms indefinis, Pronouns indefinite. 

OF PRONOUNS PERSONAL. 

Pronouns personal are those which directly denote the 
persons, and supply the place of them. 

There are three persons : 

The first is the person who speaks : ex. 
Je parle y I speak. 

JYous parlous, We speak. 

The second is the person spoken to : ex. 

Tu paries, Thou speakest. 

Vous parlez, You speak. 

The third is the person spoken of : ex. 
II, or elle parte, ' He or she speaks. 

Us, or elles parlent, They speak. 

Both Genders. 
Singular. Plural. 

Je, or mot, I. Nous, we. 

Tu, or toi, thou. Vous, you or ye. 

Masculine. 
//, or lui, he, it, lis, or tux, they. 

: - See the Note, page 74, 



94 

Feminine. 
Elk, she, it Elks, or eus, they. 

The above pronouns are never to be used but as nom- 
inatives to the verbs. The rest are declined with the ar- 
ticle indefinite : ex. 

First Person for both Genders. 

Singular. Plural. 

G, A. de moi, of or from me, de nous, of or from us. 

Dat. a moi, to me. a nous, to us. 

Ace. moi, me. nous, us. 

Second Person for both Genders. 
Singular. Plural. 

G. A de toi, of or from thee. de vous, of or from you. 
Dat. d toi, to thee. a vous, to you. 

Ace. toi, thee. vous, you. 

Third Person. 

Singular. 
G. A. de lux, of or from him. d?elk, of or from her.* 
Dat. a lux, to him. a elk, to her.* 

Ace. lux, him. elk, her.* 

Plural. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

G, A. d J eux, of or from them, d'elles, of or from them. 
Dat. a eux, to them. a elks, to them. 

Ace. eux, them. elks, them. 

There are two other pronouns of the third' person, 
viz. 

Singular and Plural. Both Genders. 

. . ^ . 7 . r r . ( oneself, himself, herself, 
1 st. G. A. de sot, of or from J 'themselves. 

Dat. a soi, to oneself, himself, &.c. 
Ace. soi, oneself, himself, &c. 

N. B. Though it has been said, that the personal 
pronouns are used for the names of persons, it must not 

* Her, when a personal pronoun is to be rendered by elk, la, or 
lui ; but, when joined to a noun, by the pronoun possessive, son, sa, 

ses. 



95 

thence be concluded, that they are never employed for 
the names of animals or inanimate objects : this seldom 
happens in the first and second persons ; but the personal 
pronouns, il, elle, Us, elks, may denote every object in na- 
ture, either animate or inanimate : ex. 

Ct chien est fort beau, rnais That dog is very handsome, 
il est trop grcL§ 7 but it is too fat. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

This picture is very old, but it is 

Ce,pro. portrait, m. ancien, adj. 

well painted. - - The house which I bought 

6ien,adv. pem£,p.p. que, pro. ai achete,p.\). 

is well situated, but I assure 2 you 1 that it 

situe ,adj. assu-re,v. que, adv. 

costs 2 me 1 much. The books which 

coute,v. ._ me, pro. beaucoup,adv. 

you saw in my library are good 

vites,v. ma, pro. bibliothequej. 

books, but they are badly bound. Your 

ma/,adv. re!ie,p.p. Fos,pro 

buckles (would be) much more in the fashion, if 
boucle,£. seraient,v. a mode,f. 

they were smaller. My hat is quite 

etaient,v. JMbn,pro. tout, adv. 

new, but it is too big. Their 

7ituf/dd}. irop,zdv. grand, adj. Lew, pro. 

coach is old, but it is as good as if 

carrosse,m. vieux,&d]. si,c* 

it were new. 
etait,v. neuf. 

2d. The general and indefinite pronoun, on, one, is al- 
ways considered as a nominative of the masculine gender, 
and can never be used (in French) but in the singUar, 
though the meaning be plural : ex. When we say 
On chante, on mange, we sing, iheij sing ; one eats, or peo~' 
pie eat ; we mean, some men or women sing, eat. 

* Si loses the i before i7, he ; Us, they. 



9G 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

People imagine that when they are 

0/i,pro. sHmagine,v. que quand,'ddv. on est,v 

rich, they are happy ; \ but they (are mistaken) 

on heureuxfid]. on se trompe,v. 

very often ; for, the more one has, the 

/res, adv. souventfidv. car,c. 

more one wishes to have. When we are 

veut,v. ur* avoir. on 

(raised up) to honours, or we are invested 

eleve,p.p. ou que,c. reue/w,p.p. 

with some dignity, we (are to) expect 

de quelque,u.d], dignitej. doit,v. s J ailendre,v 

to be criticised. (Some persons) reported 

a etre critique, p. p. 0/i,pro. rapporta 9 v 

last week, that in France they 

dernier ,a.d] semainefi en 

talk of peace. * 

parle 9 v. 

The word mime, self, is very often joined to the per- 
sonal pronouns, to denote, in a more special manner, the 
person spoken of : as, 

Moi-meme, myself. Soi-meme, oneself. 

Toi-meme, thyself. JYous-memes, ourselves. 

Lui-meme 9 himself. Vous-memes, yourselves. 

Elle-meme 9 herself. Eux-memes, or elles-memes, 

themselves. 

Observations on the Pronouns Je and Moi, Tu, and 
Toi, II and Lui, Us and Eux. 

Je and moi are used in two different senses, though 
both in the nominative case ; Je is always followed or 
preceded immediately by a verb to which it is the nomi- 
native case, and has no need to be joined to another pro- 
noun : but moi always requires to be followed by one 
pronoun or more, either expressed or understood : ex. 

Qui a pris mon livre ? Who took my book ? 

Cest rnoi, It is /. That is, 

C'est moi qui Vai pris, It is / who took it. 

Moi must be used instead of Je before an infinitive 



97 

mood, or at the end of a sentence, when it is intended to 
express something sudden, as grief, fyc. ; when J, in Em 
gishj is followed by the pronoun relative who or whom, or 
is preceded by the verb etre 3 to be, used impersonally, as 
c'esi, it is ; and lastly, whenever any difference or dis- 
tinction is intended between persons ; in which case it 
must be immediately followed by Je : ex. 

Moi lux porter ! I speak to him or her ! 

Moi qui vous aime, /who love you, 

11 etait a pied, et moi, fetais He was on foot, and J was 

a cheval, on horseback. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Who (was calling 2 ) rne 1 ?--It was not 

appelaitjV. me. pro. Ce etait nepas^dv 

I The boy wants to speak 2 (to you 1 .) I 

desire y Y. -jt> parkr.v. vous. 

who am older than he, I, go and speak* 

Age, adj. lui.pro. otter jr. up 

(to him 1 !) No, I will not go, (let him conic! 

fot,pro. */Von,adv. veux,v. y otter, qiCU vientu .v. 

himself. It is I who (am to) be rewarded, 

dois.x. recompensLp.p. 

instead of him. My father commanded the 

an Keif lui.pro. commandail.y. 

horse, and I commanded the foot. He 

eavahrie y f. com man dais infanteritS. 

could not do 2 it 1 in one day, and 7 

t ndy. faire.y. /e.pro. en, p. 

did it in the space of three hours. 

ai fa it, v. dans, p. espace,m.. heure. 

When the enemy appeared, my companions 

parut.y. mes,pro. 
(ran away) and I remained alone. 

priretd Jafuitey. restaiy. seu/,adj. 

The same rule is to be attended to with respect to 
toi, lui, enx, Sec. : as, 

Toi qui me paries, Thou who speakest to me 

Imi que je meprlse, He whom I despise. 

Eux que je respecte, They whom I respect. 
9 



98 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 



How darest 

Comment, adv. oses,v. 



master 



so* 



in 
de 
whom he 
g we, pro. 
so much 

peine,smg. 
(to agree,) were 

s'accoi dxr,v. furent 
It is I who wrote 

ai ecrityf.p. 
who 2 carried 

a portee,p.p. 
thou, nor he, who have 

avons,v 
but it is they who have 2 
ont,v. 



thou answer 

repondre,\. 
insolent 4 a 1 



a,p. 



thy 
fcm,pro. 



manierc,f. 



whom he takes 
gm,pro. prend,v. 



si, adv. insolent, adj. 
loves, thou for 
aime,\. pour, p. 

pains. He and they, not (being able) 

pouvantjV. 

obliged to part. 

oblige,p.p. de se separer,v. 
the letter, but it is he 
lettrefi 

it 1 . It is 2 Neither 3 I, nor 

/a, pro. Ce ne m,c. ni,c. 

broken the windows, 

casse,p.p. f entire J. 

done 3 it 1 . 
yai/,p.p. Ze,pro. 

After these remarks, it is also necessary to observe 
here, thatje, I, and nous, we, never admit of an adjective 
or participle immediately after them, except in in acts or 
deeds, notes, or hills, receipts, and the like : ex. 

Je soussigne demeurant a 1, the undersigned, living in 

London, declare, &c. 

We, the undersigned, ac 
knowledge to have re- 
ceived from Mr. D ## , the 
sum of — 



Londres, declare, Sec. 

Nous, soussignes, reconnects 
sons avoir re$u de Mons. 
D'**, la somme de — 



OF CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS 

These pronouns are called conjunctive, because they 
are always joined to some verb by which they are govern- 
ed, and are generally used for the dative or accusative 
case of the personal pronouns. There are three per- 
sons in the conjunctive as in the personal, which are, 



99 

For the First Person, both Genders. 
Singular. Plural. 

Dat. or Ac. Me, Moi* me, or to me, Nous, us, or to us, 
for d moi, or moi. for d nous, or nous 

For the Second, both Genders. 
Dat. or Ac. Te, Toi* thee, or to thee, Vous, you, or to you, 
for a toi, or toi. for d t'ows, or vous 

For the Third. 
Singular.- — Masculine. 
Dat. Lui, { to him, to it, ) for a lui. 

Ace. Le, ( him, it, $ for Zm. 

Feminine. 
Dat. Lui, ( to her, to it, ) for d elle. 

Ace. La, £ her, it, ) for e/Ze. 

Plural. — Both Genders. 

Dat. Leur, ( to them, ) for d ew£,m. d elles,f. 

Ace. Z*es, ^ them, J for eux,m. elles,L 

r^ . l c ( oneself, himself, > c 

Dat. or Ace. oe, I , ,,.' , ,' > for a soi, or sat. 

? J herseli, themselves, J ; 

Five of these pronouns are used for the dative or accu- 
sative case, and are of both genders, viz. 

Me, or moi, te or ioi, nous, vous, se : ex. 
Vous me parlez, You speak to me. 

11 vous croit, He believes you. 

Vous me priez de, fyc. You desire me to, &c. 

In the first example, me is the dative case, because it 
may be turned by d moi, to me ; in the second, vous is 
the accusative, &.c. 

Lui and leur are used in the dative only, and are of both 
genders : 

Je lui parte, I speak to him or to her. 

Vous leur ecrwez, You write to them. 

The three others are used for the accusative, and may 
be applied to things animate or inanimate, viz. 

* Moi and toi must be used instead of me or te, after the second 
person singular or plural of the imperative mood, conjugated without a 
negative : ex. 

ecoutez-moi. hear me. 

suivez-moi, follow me. 



100 

Le Masc. him, it ; la fern, her, it ; and les masc. and 
fern, them : ex. 

Je le vols tons les jours , I see him every day. 

Je le sais, I know it. 

Nous la connaissons, We know her. 

II les enverra ce soir, He will send Hum to-night. 

The pronoun personal may be placed before or after 
the verb, agreeably to the English construction ; but the 
conjunctive pronouns are to be placed (in French) before 
the verbs by which they are governed, though they come 
after them in English : ex. 

Je parle, I speak. 

Avons-noiis parte, Have we spoken ? 

II me parte, He speaks to me. 

JYous les connaissonsj We know them. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Your brother bought yesterday a very good book, 
acheta,v. 
and after having 2 read 3 it 1 , he gave 2 it 1 

apres^. avoir ft. Zw,p.p. Ze,pro. donna, v. 

to my sister. You speak of my cousin, 

ma,pro. wion,pro. 

do you know him ? I see her, and speak 

ucn connaissez,v. vois,v. parley. 

to her (every day). Do you 2 know 1 your 

tons les jours. </?° savez,v. t?os,pro. 

lessons ? We know them all. I (will carry) 

leconf. savons ,v. touted}. menerai,v. 

them to my brothers, but I (will write) 

cheztf. raes,pro. ecrirai,v. 

to them before. I find him more reason-* 

auparavantytidv. trouve y v. raison- 

able than his sister. - - Your dog (is 

/?r/6/e,adj. sa,pro. chien y m. a 

thirsty,) shall 2 I 3 give 2 him 1 water ? - - They are 

soij) donneraiyV. lid 

tired, and I give them some rest. 

*aligue 7 pjp donneyV, repo$ } m, 



101 

In the second person singular and the first and second 
persons plural of a verb in the imperative mood conjuga- 
ted affirmatively, the conjunctive pronouns come after the 
verb : but if the verb be conjugated negatively, the pro- 
nouns follow the above rule : ex. 
BonnezAui de V argent. Give him money. 

JYe lui donnez pas de pain, Do not give him any bread. 

EXERCISE ON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

Send them some apples, but do not send 

Envoyez,v. ur 

them any plums. - - I give you ;hese books, 

prune, f. donne,v. ces,pro. 

but do not lend them to your brother. 

up prctez,v, votre,pro. 

You may tell it to my father, but do not 

pouvtz,v. dire,v. mon,pro. up 

tell it to my mother. - - Believe me, go 

elites, v. ma, pro. Croyez,v. allez,v. 

and speak to them, but do not insult them. - - 
up parler,y. up insultez,\. 

Have you returned (to her) the handkerchief 

rendu,]). p. mouchuir,m. 

which she has lent you ? - - Send it to-morrow, 

que prete,p.p. demain,adv. 

do not forget it. - - Bring me some cho- 

up oubliez,v. Jlpportez,\. cho- 

colate, but bring 3 me 2 *no 4 sugar. 
colat,m. 

When two imperatives are joined by either of the con 
junctions, et, and ; ou, or ; the conjunctive pronoun or 
pronouns may precede the last imperative by which it is 
governed ; but that construction is not now much used ; 
ex. 
Cherchez le, et lui dites de Look for him and tell him 

veniriei, or dites lui de, &c. to come hither. 

After the verbs se fier a, to trust to, penser a, songer a, 
to think of, riser a, to aim at, courir a, accourir ci, to run 
to, veirir a, to come to, and some of the reflective verbs 
followed by a preposition governing a dative case, the 
pronouns must be placed after the verb-, especially if 
9* 



102 

used in opposition or contradiction to each other ; or 
denote the order in which a thing ought to be done . 
and if there be more than one dative pronoun, the first 
only may be placed before the verb, and the others 
after : ex. 

Fiez-vous a moi, Trust to me„ 

JVous-pensons a vous, We think of you. 

Cela s'adresse a toi, That is addressed to thee. 

Je coars a Jui, I run to him. 

II me park aussi Men qu? a He speaks to me as well as 
vous et a eux, to you and them. 

EXERCISE ON THESE AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

Bring me my hat, or send it to me by 

the carrier. Trust to him, but do not 

voituner,m. Fiez-vous,v. 

trust to them, and do not believe them. Think 

croyeZjV. Pensez y v. 

of us, and write to us as soon as you can. 

ecriveZjV. aussitot,tidv. pourrcz,\. 

Go and see her, and carry her these 

Mlez,v. up* voir,v. portez,v. ces,pro. 

flowers. Send me my cloak, or bring it 

fleursfi pendule ,f. 

io me yourself. - - - Do not give it to 

veus-meme ,pro. donnez,v. 

my sister, give it to ma Why do you prefer her to 

<xs> prefereZyV. 

me, and give her all your affection ? 

When two or more of the conjunctive pronouns come 
together in the same sentence, they must be arranged in 
the following order. 

Singular. Plural. 

Me, m. 8c f me, or to me, JVbus, m. 8c f. us or to us, 
Te, m. 8c f. thee, or to thee, Vous, m. 8c f. you, or to you, 
Se, m. 8c f. oneself, himself, Se, m. 8c f. themselves, 

herself, 
are to be placed before all others ; — next, 
Le, m. him, it, Les } m. 8c f. them, 

La, f. her it, 



103 

And then, 

Lui } m. '& f. to him, to her, Leur, m. & f. to them 

// me le promit, He promised it to me 

Je vous les donnerai, I will give them to you. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

My brother (will send) them to you, or he 

enverra y Y. 

(will bring) them to you himself. He likes 

apportera,v. aime,v. 

your 2 house 3 (very much 1 ) ; for we showed 

votre,pro. fort,&dv. car,c. f fanes voir,v. 

it to him. Carry it to them. He will 2 *not 3 

PorteZyV. veut,v. ne pas 

B ell 6 it 4 to them 5 , but he will give it to 

vendre,v. veut donner,v. 

you. If they ask a favour, will you 

SiyC. demandent,v. gracefi.-jcr* 

refuse it to them ? Why do you 

refuserez,v. Pourquoi,adv. ^cn 

give it to him ? - Had you not promised 

donneZyV, J2viez,v. promts, p. p. 

it to her ? - - - He speaks to me, and not to you. - - - 

parley. non pas 

If they behave themselves well, I will 

comportent,v. 

reward them. He had promised it to 

recompenserai,v. avait,v. 

him, but he gave it to me. 

adonne,p.p. 
N. B. There are three other conjunctive pronouns, 
commonly called particles relative or supplying pronouns; 
they are en, y, and le, and follow the foregoing rules for 
placing them, y taking the precedence of en, when they 
meet together in a sentence. 

En always denotes a genitive or ablative, and relates 
to some object mentioned before : it is rendered in Eng- 
lish by of or from, him, her, it, them, ; about him, her, it, 
Sec. ; with or without him, her, it, &,c. ; at it, &c. ; for if 9 
&c ; upon it, &c. ; any, one, ones, none, some, some of, &c, 
tlience, thereof ; and sometimes it is elegantly understood 



104 

in English, especially when immediately followed by a 
numerical adjective or a noun of quantity, though it must 
be absolutely expressed in French : ex. 
Nous en par Ions, * We speak of him, of her, of 

it , of them ; about him, 

about her, about it, about 

them. 
J'en suis fdche, I am sorry for it. 

TJonnezAui en, Give him some, (of it.) 

Lui-en avez-vous porte ? Did you carry him or her 

anij ? (of them.) 
Ne lui en envoy ez pas, Send him or her none. 

Nous en venons, We come from it or thence. 

Combien avez-vous de do- How many servants have 
mestiques ? Nous en avons you ? We have six, (of 



six, 



them.) 



Jlvez-vous un jar din a la Have you a garden in the 
compagne ? Oui, nous en country ? Yes, we have 
avons un tres-joli, a very pretty one, {of 

them.) 
In the third, fourth, and fifth sentences, it should be 
observed, that the pronouns of it, or of them, &lc are ele- 
gantly understood in English, according to the object or 
objects mentioned before. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I have heard that your uncle is arrived, 

out dire,v. arrive, p. p. 

and I 1 am 3 very 4 glad 5 of it 2 . - - She spoke 3 to 

<xise,adj. parla,v. 

him 1 of it 2 . Talk 3 no 1 more 4 of it 2 , for V 

Parlez,v. ne plus car,c. 

will 3 not 2 hear 6 of it 3 (any more) 4 . - 

v.eux,v. ne entendre parler,v. plus, adv. 

I 1 thank 4 you 2 for it 2 . -- Do you 4 J not 5 see 3 

remercie,v- ^p voyez,v. 

the 6 beauty 7 of it 2 ? - - They are sorry for 

sont,v. fdche, ad}. 
it - - Since you have no pears in your garden, 

Puisque,c. poire 

'1 will send) you some. They 1 have 4 stolen 5 

enverrai,\. ont,v t vole, p. p. 



105 

from us 2 the 6 greatest 7 part 8 of them 3 . - - My 
up partiefi Mon^ro. 

brother has written a letter to your sister, and 

ccrittf.p. 

shown 3 me 1 the 4 two 5 first 6 lines 7 of it 2 . 

a montretf.p. ligne,f. 

Will you lend me some books ? With all 

VouleZyV. preterm . -De.p. 

my heart, I (will lend) you some very pretty 

cceur ,m . preterm, v . 

ones. - - Do you 2 think 1 that 3 she 4 has 7 spoken 

up . xjct croyez,v. a?£,v.subj. parley. p. 

to him 5 of it 6 ? — If I had money, I (would give) 
avais,v. donnerais ,v . 

you some, but you know, as well as I do, 

maiSyC. savez,v. . up 

how scarce 3 it 1 is 2 now. Send 4 

combien,adv. rare, adj. a present, adv. Envoy 'ez,v. 
me 2 ^one 35 . Have 2 you 3 any 1 ? Do Vou 4 

ne en pas Avez,\. up 

remember 3 it 2 ? 
souvenez,v. en. 

Y is used for the dative only : it is Englished by to it, to 
them, of it, in it, upon it, thither, there, fyc. and very often 
not expressed in English, though it must be in French. It 
seldom supplies the place of animate objects, except when 
connected with the verb fier, to trust : penser, to think ; 
and the like, in a reply : ex. 

J J y consens, I agree to it. 

JYous y penserons, We shall think of it. 

Ne vous yfiez plus. Trust them no more. 





EXERCISE UPON THIS 


RULE. 






I 1 


2 never 5 


(will 4 consent) 


(to 3 it,) 


and 1 




ne jamais,&dv. 


consenth 


m,v. 






t 1 2 neither 4 will 3 


speak 6 , 


nor 7 


write 9 


to 


ne ni veux,v. 


parler,v. 


m,c. 


ecrire,v. 




'him 5 


''. Believe me 


> g° 


and 


see them 


, do 




Croyez,v. 


allez,v, 


up 




UP 


not 


4 confide 2 (in 3 


it.) - - - We 1 


have 4 


forced 3 




fkz vous,v. 




avonSjV. force 


,p.p. 



106 

them 2 to it 5 . I (will carry 2 ) my 3 

mineraijV. 

myself 5 - - He 1 (will carry 5 ) them 3 to you 2 thither 4 him* 

porter a jr. y 

self. - - Did you think - of what you had 

Avez,v. pense,p.p. a ce que, pro. aviez,v. 

promised rne ? No, but 1 I 2 will think 4 

promis,p.p. JVbw, ad v. penserm,v. 

(of it 3 .) - - (It is) a good book , we 1 read 3 excellent 4 

y C J est,v. o?i, pro. /if, v. 

things 5 in it 2 . - - Our orchards are very fruit- 

chosefi JVbs,pro. verger, m. fer- 

ful ; we see all sorts of fruits in 

£tZe,adj. on,pro. voit,v. sorleS. fruit 

them. - - Since those people have deceived 

Puisque,c. ces, pro. gens, pi. ~~ irompe,\).p. 
you, do not trust them (any more). - - Often when a 

uon fiez^v. plus, adv. Souvent,n.dv. 

friend is dead we 1 think 4 of him 3 2 no 

mor£,adj. o?z,pro. pense,v. 

(longer 5 .) 
plus, adv. 

Le, which in English is either not expressed, or most 
commonly rendered by so, likewise prevents the repetition 
of one or more words, and supplies the place of the same. 
It is indeclinable when it relates to, and holds the place 
of, one adjective or more, a verb, or a whole member of 
a sentence : ex. 

Vous m'mez cru belle, mais You have thought me hand- 
le ne le suis pas, some, but I am not (so.) 
JYous etions embarrasses, et We were embarrassed, and 
nous le sommes encore, are so yet. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

My brothers were ill yesterday. 

Mes, pro etaient malade,s.dj. hier,adv. 

and are so still to-day . I am 

encore,adv. aujourd'hui,&dv . 

satisfied with my fate, but my sister is not. 

content yO^i de so7i,m. ma.pro. 

I had heard that your sister was married, 

avats v out due, p.p. qu£ eiait,v. marie,]).p 



107 

but my cousin tells me that she is not. 

mon,pro. dit,v. 

Our master rewards us when we deserve 

JYotreflYO. recompense^. meritons,v. 

it Children (ought to) apply to their 

doiventyV. s'appliquer^. Jews, pro. 

studies as much as they can. I thought 

aidant, aftv. peuvent,v. croyais,v. 

your brother was diligent, but I mistook, 

etait,v. me suis irompe,p.j). 

for he is not and *never 4 (will be 3 ) so 2 . 

ne jamais, adv. sera, v. 

On the contrary, le is declinable when it relates to, and 
holds the place of, one substantive or more ; then le is 
used for the masculine, la for the feminine, and les for 
the plural : ex. 
Etes-vous le ftls de mon Are you my friend Mr. D.'s 

ami M. JD** ? Oui, je son? Yes, I am, (him.) 

le suis, 
Etes-vous la mere de ce Are you the mother of that 

bel enfant ? Old, je la fine child ? Yes, I am, 

suis, (her. ) 

Etes-vous les tantes de M. Are you Mr. Brown's aunts? 

Brown ? Qui, nous les Yes, we are, (them.) 

sommes, 
Est-ce Id voire livre ? Oui ce Is this your book ? Y r es, it 

Pest, is, (it ) 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

(It is said) that y©u are the son of my neighbour 
On dit,y. que voisin,m. 

Mr. Peter ; are you so ? Yes, Sir, I 

Pierre, m. Monsieur, m. 

am. Are you the sister of Mrs. Adams ? Yes, 

Mme 
I am. -- She is very amiable, *and so 3 are 4 you 2 also 5 . - - 

aimable, adj. aussi 

Are you the ladies whom my mother expects? 
dame,f. que attend, \. 

Yes, we are. - - 4 Are Hhese 2 young 3 people the 
(Sont-ils) cfs.pro. jeune,&d\. gens^L 



103 

scholars whom you have taught ? Yes, madam, 

ecolier,m. ens eigne s, p. p. 

they are. - - (Is that) the horse which you bought 

Est-ce la cheval,m. que avez achete 

from my brother ? Yes, it is. (Are these) the 

Sont-ce la 
houses which you built ? Yes, they are. 

avez fait batir y v. sont. 

N. B. It must be observed, that the following pro- 
nouns, me, te, se, Ze, Za, and les, can never be used after 
a preposition ; as we cannot say, f etais, avec Ze, avec la, I 
was with him. j with her ; but we must use the personal 
pronouns, moi, toi, soi y lui y elle, and 'eux, or elles, and say, 
f etais avec lui, avec elle, &c. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The nosegay which I gathered in our 

bouquet ,m. que ai cueilli,p.p. 

garden is for her, and not for him. - - He 

powr,p. non pas, adv. 

was with me when we received a letter from 

eiaityV. repimes,v. 

them. - - If he do not come soon, we (will set 

<-#■> vieni v. bientat 9 aAv. park- 
out) without him. Your sisters have dis- 

ronSyV. sans $. Fbs,pro. mecon- 

pleased me; I am very angry with t them. 

tente^.p. suis fache,&d). conZre,p. 

- - Your brothers have broken these windows ; I 

out casse,p.p. ces,pro. 
am sure of it, for I was behind them, and 

sur ,adj. car y c. etais eZerriere,p. 

John was with me. 
Jean etait. 

Y and en always go last in a sentence, except the pro- 
noun of the first person moi, which, in the imperative 
mood of a verb conjugated affirmatively, is placed after y 
and en: ex. 

II vous y en envcrra, He will send some to )ou 

thither. 
JUpfortez-y en moi, Bring me some hither. 



109 

N. B. The above pronouns, when governed by two or 
more verbs must be repeated, in French, before eveiy 
governing verb ; though most generally expressed but 
once in English, and after the last verb : ex. 

Votrefih vous airae et vous Your son loves and fears 

craint, you. 

Je le plains et P encourage, I pity and encourage him 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

You have very fine roses in your garden : when 

avezjr. 
I am in the country, pray send me some thither. 

serai jV. a, de grace envoyezrv . 

- - 3Iay God bless and reward her ! said 

Que Dieu bemsse.v. recompense ft . cliffy 

the prince. - - 1 Neither 3 will 2 sell 6 nor 7 give 10 

ne ni veui\\\ vendre donner y v. 

Hhem 9 ( 4 to you 8 .) - --Our master rewards and punishes 

us when we deserve it. Often beauty seduces 

seduitrv, 

and deceives us* That child has good parents, he 

trompe,v. Cet 

cherishes, honors and respects them. 
chcrii.x. honore,v. respeete,v. 

N. B. Bear constantly in mind the place of these 
words in a sentence, first the preposition, next the negation 
ne, then the pronouns in the order above mentioned : 
ex. 
Faites-moi souvenir de ne Remind me not to give him 

lui en point downer, any. 

OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE. 

These pronouns are called possessive, because they al- 
ways denote property or possession. 

There are two sorts of possessive pronouns, viz. abso- 
lute and relative. 

The absolute are so called, because they must al- 
ways precede the substantive to which they are joined, 
and agree with it (and not with the possessor, as in Eng- 
lish) in gender, number and case. — They are, 
10 



no 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fem. Both Genders. 

Mon, Ma, or Mon, ^ «"£ g - C mon time, Mes, my. 
Ton y Ta, or Ton, \&-iz\t° n ame j Fes, tky. 
Son, Sa, or Son, )^|| (-son ame, Ses, his, her or its 
Both Genders. 
Notre, JSTos, our. 

Fbfrc, - Fas, your, 

ieit-r, Leurs, their. 

They are declined with the article indefinite de, a : ex 
Singular. 
Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. mon pere, my father. 
Gen. Abl. de man pere, of or from my father. 
Dat. d mon pere, to my father. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. ma mere, my mother. 
Gen. x\bl. de ma mere, of or from my mother. 
Dat. a ma mere, to my mother. 

Plural. 

Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. mes freres, my brothers. 
Gen. Abl. de mes freres, of or from my brothers. 
Dat. a mes freres , to my brothers. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. mes sceurs, my sisters. 
Gen. Abl. de mes sceurs, of or from my sisters. 
Dat. a mes smurs, to my sisters. 

The others are declined as the preceding. 
These pronouns ought to be repeated before every 
substantive in a sentence, though but once expressed ii, 
English ; they must agree in gender and number with the 
noun before which they are placed, that is, with ike 
iking possessed and not the possessor ; they must also be 
used in French, when speaking to any of our relations or 
friends, though they be suppressed in English : ex. 

J J ai perdu mon ehapeau et I lost my hat and gloves 

mes gants, 
Bon jour mon pere, Good day, father. 

Eies-vous la ma scenr ? Are you there, sister ? 



in 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Give me my dictionary and grammar. She 

diciionnaire,m. grammaire,i. 

had lost her gloves and fan. Have 

avail, v. perdu,p.p. ei i entail ,m. Avez,v. 

you found your pen ? His daughter is 

trouve,p.ip. plume jf. jille,i. 

older than my son, but her son (is not) 

plus clgee fils,m. rteslpas,v. 

so tall as my nephew. Her brother says 

grand, adj. neveu,m. dit,v. 

that he will 3 x not 4 refuse 3 you 2 what you ask 

refusera,v. ce que demanded jr. 

of him. Dear father, pray forgive me. My 

ur> de grace 

ambition is the only cause of my impru- 
ambiiionfi. seid,adj. cause,?, impru- 
dence. I have seen your father, mother, bro- 

dence,f. ai,v. vu,p-.p. 

thers, and sisters. Her affection for me is 

affection,]). pour,?. 

false. Good night, cousin : I hope that you 

faux, adj. soir,m. espere,v. que 

(will come) soon to see my country 

tiendreZyV. bientot ,adv . dcr voir,v. 

house and gardens. - - - - Your horses and carriage 

cheval,m. carrosse,m. 
are very beautiful ; but the queen's horses and carriages 

6eaw,adj. 
are much more so. 

beaucoup,?Av. 

When, in English, these pronouns are used in a sen- 
tence, speaking of any part of the body, they are not to 
be expressed in French ; but the preposition in and the 
pronoun are rendered by the article definite : the per- 
sonal pronoun being sufficient to determine in French the 
possession : ex. 

Jim mal aux yeux, , I have a pain in my eyes 

and not dans mes yeux. 

11 se cassa le bras, He broke his arm, 

and not son bras. 



112 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

My mother has (a pain) in her head. I have 

a,v. mal a,p. tete,?. 

(a pain) in my ear, and she has (a pain) in her 
oreille,?. 

teeth. When I eat meat, I have always 

dent/. mange, y. toujours,RdY. 

a pain in my stomach. The man who fell from 

estomac,m. tomba,Y. 

the roof of our house, disjointed his wrist, 

toit,m. se demit, y. poignet,m. 

broke his right leg, sprained 

droit, rAj. jambe,f. se donna une enlorse 
his left foot, dislocated his shoulders, 

au gauche, adj. pied,m. se disloqaa,Y. epaule,m. 

and hurt his head. When I run fast, 

se blessa,Y. cours,Y. v1te,RdY. 

I (am afraid) of falling and breaking my 

tomber,Y. de me casser,Y. 

lis, their, having reference to inanimate or irrational 
objects, and placed in another member of the sentence 
from that wherein the object referred to is itself expressed, 
are not made into French by son, sa, ses, &c. but by the 
pronoun en placed before the verb, and the articles le, la } 
les : ex. 

Paris est une grande ville, Paris is a large city, but its 
mats les rues en sont trop streets are too narrow 
etroiteSy (that is, the streets of it.) 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Windsor is a fine town : I admire its 

ville,f. admire,Y. 

situation, walks, and streets. This 

situation,?. promenade,?. rue,?. Celtejpxo. 

house is well situated ; but its architecture 

situe , adj . archite dure , f. 

does not please me much. His coach is 

uc^ plait,v. beaucoup ,adv. carrosse,m. 

beautiful ; (every body) admires its painting 

tout le mo7ide,rn, admire,v. peiniure,i\ 



113 

and ornaments. - - - - The shops of London arc 
(very fine : foreigners especially see their 
superbe,a.dj. Stranger, m. sur-tov.t ,adv. 
riches and cleanliness with much pleasure and astonish- 
ment. The walks of your country seat) are well 

attee,£ chateau,m. 

kept : I like their regularity. 
h nu,p. p. regularity ,f. 

The relatives are never joined to any substantive ; for 
the substantive to which they refer is always implied in 
the pronoun. They are. 

Feminine. 

Sing. Plur. 

la mienne, les miennes, mine. 
la iienne, les tiennes, thine. 
la sienne, les siennes, his or hers. 
Feminine. 

Sing. Plural. 

la noire, les notres, ours. 

Iti voire, les votres, yours. 

la leur, les lairs, theirs. 

They are declined with the article definite : ex. 
-Singular. 

Feminine. 



Masculine. 

Sing. Plur. 

Le mien, les miens, 

Le lien, les tiens, 

Le sien, les siens, 

Masculine. 
Sing. Plural. 
Le noire, les noires, 
Le voire, les v Sires, 
Le leur, les leurs, 



la mienne, mine. 
de la mienne, of or from mine. 
a la mienne, to mine. 
Plural. 

Feminine. 
les miennes, mine. 
des miennes, of or from mine 



Masculine. 
Norn. Ace. Le mien, 
Gen. Abi. I)u mien, 
Dat. Jin mien, 

Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. Les miens, 
Gen. Abl. Les miens, 
Dat. Jinx miens, 

The rest are declined as the preceding. 
When any one of these relative pronouns is used after 
the verb tire, to be, signifying to belong to, it must be 
expressed in French by one of the pronouns personal in 
the dative ; and when joined to a noun substantive, ii 
ought to be rendered by a pronoun possessive absolute, 
and the substantive must be put in the genitive plural : 
ex. 

10* 



114 

Ce livre est a moi, This book is mine, (that is, 

belongs to me.) 

C } esl un de mes amis. He is a friend of mine , (that 

is, one of my friends.) 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Your daughter is handsomer than mine ; but 
beau, adj. 

mine has more wit than yours. Her house is 

esprit 
more convenient than ours ; but yours is not so 

commode, adj. 

well situate as theirs. This hat is mine and 

Ce,pro. 
not yours ; but this sword is yours and 

non pas ceite^ro. 

not his. I lost a book of mine, and a friend 

ai perdu, p. p. 

of yours found it. He sold me a knife ; 

a £roiwe,p.p couteau,m. 

but this knife was not his/ but it was a friend of his 

etait c* etait 

who had lent it to him. 
avail pretiyV. 

OF PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVE. 

These pronouns are called demonstrative, because they 
distinguish 3 in a precise manner, the persons or things to 
which they are applied. They are, 

Singular. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Ce, cet,* cette, this, that. 

Ctlui, he, that, celle, she, that. 

Celui-ciy celle-ci, this. 

Celui-la, celle-lciy that. 

Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Ces, ces, these, those. 

CeuXy celles, they, these, those. 

* Cet is used before a noun masculine beginning with a vowel, or 
/ If mute : ex. cet oiseau, this bird : cet honneur, this honour. 



115 

Ceux-ci, celles-ci, these. 

Ccux-lci celles-ld, those. 

Ce qui, ce que, what. 

Ceci, this ; cela, that.* 

The last two are always of the masculine gender, and 
of the singular number. 

These pronouns are declined with the article indefinite., 
de, a: ex. 

Singular. 
Masculine. 

Nom. Ace. % ce livre, this or that book. 

Gen. Abl. de ce Iwre, of or from this book. 

Dat. a ce livre, to this book. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. ces limes, these books. 
Gen. Abl. de ces livres, of or from these books. 
Dat. a ces livres, to these books. 

Singular. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. cette plume, this or that pen. 
Gen. Abl de cette plume, of or from this pen, 
Dat. a cette plume, to this pen. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. ces plumes, these pens. 
Gen. Abl. de ces plumes, of or from these pens 
Dat. a ces plumes, to these pens. 

Singular. 

Masculine. 
Nom. Ace. celui, he, him, that 
Gen. Abl. de celui, of or from him. 
Dat. a celui, to him. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. celle, she, her, that. 
Gen. Abl. de celle, of or from her. 
Dat. a celle, to her. 

* The word that, coming between two verbs, and followed by a 
noun or pronoun, is then a conjunction, and must be rendered into 
French by que, even when implied in English : ex. 
Je sais que votre frere est marie, I know that your brother is mar- 
ried ; or, I know youi brothei 
is married. 



116 

Plural. 
Blase Fern. 

N. Ace. ceux, cclles, they, them, those, such as 

G. Abl. de ceux, de celles, of or from those, 
Dat. a ceux, to those. 

The others are declined as the preceding. 
N. B. He, she, they, him, her, them, being immediately 
followed in a sentence by who, whom, or that, used in an 
indeterminate sense, not relating to any individual men- 
tioned before, and only implying any person, one, or any 
body, must not be rendered in French by the personal pro- 
nouns, il, elle, &c. but by the above pronouns, celui, celle } 
&c. 

The same rule must be observed with respect to such 
as, such thai, used in English in the same sense as he icho, 
they who: ex. 

Celui ou celle qui pratique He or she who practises vir- 

la veriu vit heureux, tue lives happy. 

Ceux qui raepnsent la sci- Such as despise learning, 

ence, rten connaissenl pas do not know its value, 

leprix, (the value of it.) 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

lie who supports idleness makes himself 

encourage, y. se rend, v. 

despicable, She whom you saw at my 

meprisable, adj. que,pvo. vites,w. chez,p. 

brother's is not yet married. You 

den encore, adj. marie, p. p. 

punish him who is not guilty. Men com- 

punissez,\. coupable^hd}. ordi- 

monly 2 hate 1 him whom they fear. 

nairement,a.dv. haissent,v. que,pro. craignent,v. 

She whom you hate, is my best friend. You 

ha'issez,v. amiefi. 

have punished him who did not deserve it, 
puni,p.p. up merit ait,v. 

and rewarded her who was guilty. We 

recompense ,p.p. 
(ought to) p rj *y for them who persecute 

devonSyV. qui,pro, persecutent^v 



117 

us. Of all virtues, that which most 2 dis- 

qui, pro. le pkis,'ddv. dis- 
tinguishes 1 a christian is charity. This book and 

tingue 9 v. 

that which I lent you are the two best. - - 

que, pro. ai prete,p.p. 
Such as seem (to be) happy, are not 

qui, pro. paraissent,Y. eire,v. 
always so. 

ton jours, adv. * 

Ce, cede, ces, this, that, these, those, must always pre- 
cede the substantive to which they are joined, and agree 
with it in gender, number, aad case. On the contrary, 
celui, celle, celui-ci, celle-ci, celui-ia, celle-la, this, that, Sec. 
either in the singular or plural, are never joined to any 
noun ; for the noun to which they refer is always implied 
in the pronoun : ex. 

J'ai vu le portrait du pere I have seen the father's 
et celui dujils, picture, and that of the 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

She who dines with us, is my brother's wife. 

dine,v. avec,p. femme,f. 

She brought her picture, and that of her 

a apporte,p.p. portrait,m. 

husband. I have seen the king's palace, and 

mari,m. paZais,m. 

that of the queen. - - - - That gold watch, which 

montre,?. que, pro. 
you showed me, is not yours, it is that of 

avez montree,p.p. c'est,v* 

your brother. I have lost my buckles and 

perdu,p.p. 

those of your cousin. Your books and those of 

cousin, m. 

your little sister are torn. I know this 

petit, ad], dechires, p.p. connais y Y. 

cap, it is that of your mother. 

bonnet, m< c-est^v, 

* See the Rule, page 106. 



113 

N. B. The pronoun that, either in the singular or 
plural, is often suppressed in English, and supplied by an 
apostrophe and an s, thus ('s), at the end of the noun sub- 
stantive, as above ; but it must be expressed in French 
by the above pronouns celui, celle, and according to the 
geader and number of the object to which it refeis ex. 
1> a pris man chapeau et He has taken my hat and 

^elui de mon pere, my father'3 (that is, and 

that of my father.) 

EXERCISE UPOtf THIS RULE. 

You have torn my gown, and my sister's'. 

dec/iire, p. p. robe ,f. \ 

I have found my hat and my brother's n| the 

trouvc,\>.j). r \ 

room. The thieves came by night 

chambre,f. voleur,m. enirerent,v. de nuii,a.dv. 

into my father's house : they (broke open) my room 

dans forcerent,w. 

and my mother's, and stole my watch and 

volereni,v. 

my sister's. You may, if you please, take 

pouvez,v. vouleZyY. prendre ,v. 

your grammar and your brother's ; but leave . 

laissez,v 

mine and my friend's.- Our oranges and Mr. 

orange,f. 
Savage's are the best that you can 

Sauvage, on,pro. puisse^v 

find. 
trouver,v. 

Sometimes the particles ci, la, here, there, are also 
joined to the substantive following the pronouns, ce, cette, 
ces, to distinguish with more precision the objects to 
which they are applied : ex. 

Ce chapeau-ci } this hat ; cette ville-ld, that town, Sec 

N. B. The two following expressions, the former 
celui-la,m. celle-lafi. ceux-la,m. celles-la,f. ; the latter, 
celui-ci,m. celle~ci,f. ceux-ci,m. celles-ci,f. referring to 
substantives mentioned in a preceding sentence, are 



119 

elegantly used in French, and Agree with the nouns, in 

stead of le premier, le second, the repetition of which they 
avoid : ex. 

U?i Francois et un Ecos- A Frenchman and a Scotch- 

sais se batiireni kier a man fought yesterday with 

Pepee, celui-la/wf blesse swords ; the former was 

a Pepaule, et celui-ci au wounded in the shoulder, 

bras, and the latter in the arm. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Learn this lesson : it is not so difficult 

Jloprenez,v . ^\ffi c ^ > ac * J • 

as that. I prefer this way to that road. 

prefere,w. chemin,m. route, £. 

This room is much larger than that parlour. 

grancijadj. salon,m. 

These candles are better than those. 

chanclelle ,f. 
(There was) a great battle between George 

II y euf,v. comb at ,m. entre,p. 

and Stephen ; the former had a broken 2 nose 1 , 
Elienne, eut^v. le casse.p.p. nez,\\\. 

and the latter lost a tooth. In the engagements 

perdit,v. bataillej. 

which took place between the Austrians 

qui,pvo. eurent,v. lieu^m. Autrichien.m. 

and the French, the former lost two 

Fran:ais,m. perdirent,v. 

thousand uien, and the latter fifteen hundred - 

homme, 
Among the peaches which you sent 2 me 1 at two 

Parmtjp. peche,f. que, pro. avez envoy ees a 

different times, I observed that the former 

different, o.dj. fois,f. airemarque,v. 
were better than the latter. 
Staieni^y. 

Ce qui, in the nominative case, ce que, in the accusative 
what. This pronoun is never joined to any noun : it al- 
ways may be turned into thai which, or the thing which ; 



120 

and cecij cela, this, that, are only used when speaking of 
things, the word thing being always understood : ex. 

Je sais ce qui est arrive , I know what has happen- 
ed. 
Savez-vous ce que je pense ? Do you know what I think ? 
Ceci me plait, This pleases me; t. e. this 

thing, fyc. 
Cela me fait peur, That frightens me ; i. e. 

that thing) fyc. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

May I know what causes your grief 

puis, v. savoir,v. cause,v. chagrin,m. 

and sadness ? Your father has (a good deal) 

iristessefi beaucoup, adv 

of friendship for you ; for, he *never 4 

car,c. ne jamais ,adv. 

refuses 3 you 2 what you ask of him. 

refuse y v. demandez,v. txr- lui. 

You seem much dejected ; toll me what 

paraisseZyV. bien^dv. abattu,a.dj. dites-moi 

vexes you. Go and tell my father what 

fdche,v. Allezft* <jot* dire y v.a,p. 

has passed here, and do not forget what you 

s^est passe ,v. ici, adv.. *Jon oubliez,v. 

have seen, and what you have heard. Give 

entendu,p.ip. 

me this, and take that. I prefer this to 

prenez y v. prefere,y. 

that. 

OF PRONOUNS RELATIVE. 

These pronouns are called relative, because they have al- 
ways a reference to some other noun or pronoun in the 
discourse, either expressed or implied. They arc declin- 
ed as follows : 



m 

Singular and Plural. 

Both Genders. 

Nom. qui, who, which, that. 

Gen. de qui, or dont, of whom, whose,* of which 

Dat. a qui, to whom, to which. 

Ace. que, qui,t' whom, which, that. 

Abl. de qui, dont, from whom, from which. 

Ace. quoi, que, what. 

Gen. Abl. de quoi, or dont, or from what. 

Dat. a quoi, to what. 

Singular. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Nom. Ace. lequel, laquelle, which. 

Gen. Abl. duquel, or dont, de laquelle, of or from, &c. 

Dat. auquel, a laquelle, to which. 

Plural. 

Nom. Ace. lesquels, lesquelles, which. 

Gen. Abl. desquels, or dont,desquelles, of or from, &e. 

Dat. auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 

The noun, or pronoun, to which the pronoun relative 
has a reference, is called the a/decedent, with which it 
must agree in gender and number : ex. 

Je connais unhomme qui doit I know a man who is to go 
alter voir le camp, and see the camp. 

In this sentence qui has a reference to homme, man, be- 
cause I can say, lequel homme, which man, &.c. 

J \d lu la leltre que vans I have read the letter (that) 
m'avez envoijee, you sent me. 

In this last sentence que has a reference to lettre, letter, 
because it may be said, laquelle lettre, which letter, Sec. 

* Whose, being used interrogatively, must be rendered in French by 
a qui : ex. 

A qui ese ie liore ? Whose book is this ? 

t Qui, whom, is never used in the accusative but when it is govern- 
ed by some of the prepositions : ex. 

Avec qui, With whom. Pour qui, For whom, 

or when it signifies what person : ex. 

Jimenez qui vous voudrez, Brkig whom you please. 
that is, what person vou please. 
11 



122 

The relative que, whom, which, or that, is sometimes 
understood in English, but it must always be expressed in 
French : ex. 

La dame que vous connaissez The lady (that) you know 
est arrivee, - is arrived. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The man who sold me these pens is very 

a,v.vendu,p.p. 

cunning. The lady of whom you speak 

ruse, adj. dame,?. parlez } v. 

is not handsome. Miss D # **, whom you love 

Mile aimez,v. 

so much, is \ery ill. ---The person to 

£a?if, adv. malade, adj. personnel 

whom I wrote last year has answered 

ai,v.ecrit,p.p. passe,p.p. anneefi. repondu,p p. 
me this morning. - - He who was with you, related 

matin, m. Stall ,v. a, v. raconte,p.p 

to me (every thing) that had passed. 

tout ce qui s'etait passe, p. p. 

She will not hear of the lady whom 

veidyV. entendre parler,v. 

he (is going to) marry. Shun vice, and 

va,v. epouser,v. Evitez,v. vice,m. 

love what is good. Who was with 

aimez,v. 6on,adj. etait,v. avec,p. 

you? It was a gentleman, whose 1 name G I 2 

Ce monsieur, m. nom,m. 

know 4 3 not 5 . Men generally 2 love 1 him 

sais,v. generulement, tidv . 

who flatters them. --The man I sent you was 

flatie,v. ai,v.envoye,p.p. 

honest. . - Whose 1 sword 4 is 2 this 3 ? - - You speak 

parlez } v. 
of the lady whose husband has been so ill. 
mariyUi. e/e ; p.p. 

These pronouns, like the personal and conjunctive, 
when governed by two or more verbs, must be repeated 
(in French) before each governing verb, though most 



123 

commonly expressed but once in English, and before the 
first verb: ex. 

Le Dleu que nous aimons The God whom we love 
et que nous adorons, and worship. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The man who caresses and flatters you is 1 the 3 
caresse,v. 

most 4 dangerous 5 being 2 I know. A man 

p/ws,adv. etrejn. connaisse,v. 

whose manners are innocent, and behaviour 

WMBwrs 3 f.pl. innocent,^}], conclude ,f. 

is blameless, is the man whom we (ought to) che- 

irrepirochable 9 aA}. devons,v. che- 
rish and honour. The letters which you have 

rir,v. respecter,v. 

written, and showed me, were tole- 

ecrites.ip.p. montrees,p.p. etaient,v. passa- 

rably well. The woman to whom I have 

blementytidv. femmt,f. 

lent so much money, and spoken so often 

prete,p.p. parley. p. 

is dead. Servants are men or wo- 

mort ,adj. Domestique, m.et.f. ow ; c. 

men whom we keep and reward 

nourmssons ,v ■. 
for the services which they do us. 

2>owr,p. rendent,v. 

When the words to which, to what, at which, at ivhat, in 
which, in what, have a reference to inanimate things, and 
when they can be expressed by where, whereto, whereat \ 
or wherein, they are to be rendered in French by the ad- 
verb of place, oii: ex. 

Je vous montrerai la maison I will show you the house 
ou il demeure, in which he lives ; (that 

is, where he lives.) 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The state of misery to which he was reduced 

Hail reduit } \> p 



124 

has touched me to the quick. The town to 

/oiecAe, p,p. . vif.^m. villcfi. 

which he is gone is precisely the same 

«//e,p.p. precisement ,adv meme, adj. 

place through which we went in (coming up) 

2>lacc y f. pcw,p. oil passames,y. e?i,p. venant,p. act. 

to London. (This is) the door through which 

Foia,adv. 

the thieves went into the house. The pri- 

volcnT^m. entrerentyV. 
son in which they used to shut up 

o?i,pro. avail contumely, de renfermer ,y . 
the prisoners, has been demolished. 
prisonnieVyVa. detruite^.y. 

Quoij what, and sometimes that or which, is never used 
in the nominative case : in the other cases it is generally 
used in an indeterminate signification, and is never ex- 
pressed except in speaking of inanimate things, and espe- 
cially when it has for its antecedent, ce or rien: ex. 

C J est a quoi je vous conseille It is what I advise you to 

depenser, think of. 

II rfy a rien a quoi il ne soit There is nothing for which 

dispose y he is not disposed. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Of what does your sister complain ? What ! 

& se plaint- tilery, 
you dare answer me thus ! • For what do 

osez,y repondre,y. ainsi^dv. Powr,p. ucn 

you 3 call 2 me 1 ? Why did you 

appelez y y. Pourquoi^dy. avcz,y. 

bring that man before me ? what is he 

uraene y ip.]). devant,p. 

guilty of? What is your brother sorry 

coupable^d} fache^dy 

for ? At what were 1 you 2 playing, 1 when I came 

de a jouiez,y. suis 

in ? - - To what shall 2 we 1 apply 2 ourselves ? - 

entre,v. appliquerons ,v . nous, pro. 

{'There 3 is 4 ) 2 nothing 5 for which he is 2 not 1 

// y a,v. ne rie?i ; adv. a soit,y, ne 



125 

fit. In what do you intend to spend 

p*opre,adj. a up proposez-vous,v. de 3 \).passer y v 

your holidays ? 
vacancej.pl. 

When we speak of irrational beings or inanimate 
things in the genitive, dative, or ablative cases, we make 
use o£lequel, laquelle, which, &c. instead of qui ; also af- 
ter a preposition, and when who, whom, or which, re- 
fer to one or more objects on which the choice is to be 
formed : ex. 
Le cheval auquel vous don- The horse to which you 

nez a boire, give some drink. 

La fenetre sur laquelle vous The window upon which 

vous appuyeZj you lean. 

Jlpportez lequel vous von- Bring which you please. 

drez, 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The trade to which you apply, 

commerce jj\. vous vous appliquez,y. 

and the profession to which you are devoted, 

profession^, devoue^.p. 

are very honourable. (Is that) the horse for 

JEsf-,v.ce,p./d,adv. 
which you gave a hundred guineas ? - - Lying 

avez donne^p.p. MensongCjXn. 

is a vice for which young people (ought to) 

gens j pi. doivent,v. 

have the greatest horror. The table upon 

horreur y £. table fi. sur,p. 

which you write, is broken. The reasons 

ccrivez^v* cassee^p.p. 

upon which you ground your system are 

appuyeZjV. systeme,m. 

satisfactory. (There are) four drawings ; which 

satisfaisant,a.dj. Foi/d,adv. dessins,m. 

do you choose ? (Here are) two pears ; which 

up choisissez,v. Fbict,adv. poirefi, 

will you have ? - - They are two sisters ; which 

voulez,v. jon sont } \\ 

do you like the best ? 

up aimeZyV. le mieux,ndv. 

11* 



126 

OF PRONOUNS INTERROGATIVE. 

They are called interrogative, because they are used on- 
ly in asking questions, and have no antecedent : they are 
declined with the article indefinite. 

Singular and Plural. 
Both Genders. 
Nom. Ace. qui, who, whom. 
Gen. Abl. de qui, of or from whom. 
Dat. a qui, to whom, whose. 

Nom. Ace. quoi, or que, what ; * 

Or, qu'esi-ce qui, qiCest-ce que. 
Gen. Abl. de quoi, of or from what. 
Dat. quoij to what. 

Singular. 
Masculine. Feminine. 

N. A. quel j or lequel, quelle, or laquelle, what, which. 
G. A. de quel, duquel, de quelle, de laquelle, of or from, &c. 
Dat. a quel, auquel, a quelle, d laquelle , to what ; which. 

Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

N. A. quels, or lesquels, dequelles, or lesquelles, what, which. 
G. A. de quels, desquels, dequelles, desquelles 7 of or from, &c. 
Dat. a quels, auxquels, a quelleSj auxquelles, to what, which. 

Qui, who, whom, as an interrogative pronoun, always 
refers to persons, and never to things ; and it may be ex- 
pressed by quelle personne 1 what person ? Quoi and que, 
what, have always a reference to things and never to 
persons, and may be expressed by quelle chose ? what thing ? 
According to the French idiom, quoi can never be put be- 
fore a verb as its accusative ; it is always que : ex. 

Qui esl-la ? Who is there ? 

De quoi parkz-vous ? What are you speaking of ? 

Que voulez-vous ? or qu'est- What do you want ? (that is, 
ce que vous voidez ? What is it that you wish ?) 

* When what, in English, signifies How much, it must be expressed 
in French by combien. 



127 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Who was the first king of France? Who can 

fut,v. peutyV. 

give credit to a young man who does not speak 

aj outer yV. foi <£n dityV. 

the truth? Of whom were 1 you 2 speaking 1 , when 

veritefi parlieZyV. 

I came ? To whom did you lend my 

vinSyV. . avezjV. prelijp.y: 

slate ? Whom do you seek ? Who told 

ardoisefi *£n chercheZyV. a dii,v. 

it to you ? From whom do you know it ? What 1 

c^7» saveZyV. 

are 2 you 3 doing 2 ?-- What do you say? What 

faiteSjV. diteSyV. 

do you ask of me ? Who is the man 

demandeZyV. ^cn 

who can boast of being without defect? 

peutyV. se vanteryV. d'etre, v. sans, p. defaut ? 

W'hat is the name of your father? What is his 

nom^m. 

occupation ? What are his amusements ? What 

occupationyf. sontyV. plaisir y m. 

is his business ? In what city does he 2 live 1 ? - - 

sontyV. affaireSyf.pl. vilkyf.u^ demeure^ 

What is the country in which he was born ? 

paijSyTd, a pris naissance. 

In the last instances it may easily be seen, that quely or 
quelhy what, is always joined to some substantive with 
which it must agree in gender and number. 

In order to avoid repetition, lequely laquelle 9 which are 
elegantly used as substantives for quely or quelle, and the 
substantive to which it is joined ; and then lequely must al- 
ways be followed by a genitive, either expressed or under- 
stood : ex. 
Une de mes sceurs est ma- One of my sisters is mar- 

rieey ried. 

Laquelle est-ce ? that is, Which is it ? that is 

laquelle de vos sxurs which of your sisters 

est-ce ? is it ? 



128 



One 



of 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

arrived 



your 



continent ; 
continent } m. 
ill 

malade^]. 
it ? 1 



cousins is arrived from the 
cousin ,m arrive^.]). 

which is it ? - -- - An aunt of yours was 

etait,v. 
week ; which was 

s emetine ,f. 

that two horses of yours 



were 

etaientjV. 

wrote 

ecrivit^v. 

to learn 

apprendre,v 

They 



last 

demiere, adj. 
have heard 

out dire, v. 
lost : 
perdu, p. p. 



tell me which. - • 
dites,v. 



My brother 



to me 5 that two of your sisters (are going) 



vont,v. 
they 



French : which are 

Francais,m. sont,v. 

(were speaking) of a relation of his, and 
parlaientyV. parent,m. 

of one of my friends ; which were they ? 
amiefi. 

OF PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 

These pronouns are called indefinite or indeterminate, 
because they generally are substituted for the name of a 
vague and indeterminate object. Among them some are 
used as nouns adjective, being always joined to a noun 
substantive ; others are sometimes used as pronouns with- 
out a substantive, and sometimes as adjectives with a sub- 
stantive. 



Aucun,m. aucunef. 


None, not any, any one. 


Autre , 


Other, any other. 


Jhrtrui) 


Others, other people. 


Chacun.m. chacunej. 


Each, every one, every 




body. 


CJiaque, 


Every, each. 


Lhin V autre ySing.m. 


One another, each other. 


Les uns les autres, 


$ Some others. 




( home some 


Lhmet Pautre>smg.m. 


Both. 


Lhmou P autre ,sing.m. 


Either. 


JViPun ni P autre, sing.m 


Neither. 


JVW,m. nulleS. 


No one. 



129 



Pas un,m. pas une,f. 

Personne, 

La plupart de, des, 
PlusieurSj 

Quelconque, 

Quelque, 

Quelque chose, 

Quelque — que, 

Quel — gue,sing.m. f 

Quelle — gi«e,sing.f. J 

Quelque chose qui or que, "| 

Quoi que, I 

Quot qwe ce soif gruc, \ 

Tout ce qui, or que, J 

Quelg tt 3 u a.m. quel qu\me,f. 

Quzcoaque, 

Qui que ce soil, or fid, 



Not one. 

Nobody, none, no one, any 
one, any body. 

Most. 

Many, several. 

W hatever, whatsoever. 

Some, any 

Something, any thing. 

Whosoever, whatsoever, 
whatever, however, 
howsoever, though, Sec 



Whatever, whatsoever. 



S 



ome, some one, some. 



body. 



body. 



Wh a t e v er , what so ever . 

Whoever, nobody in the 
world, nobody at all, 
any body whatever, no 
man living, let him be 
who he will, or be who 
he may, kc. 

Whatever, nothing in the 
WT>rld, nothing what- 
ever. 

Nothing, any thing. 

Such a one, such. 

Such as he, she, they, who, 
that, &c. 

Every, every thing. 

Every body, any body. 

As — as, for all, although, 
however, &,c. 

Observations on some of the above Pronouns. 

Jlucun, aucune, is never used but in the singular, and 
always requires ne before the verb ; it relates to a person 
or thing mentioned before ; but in interrogative senten- 
ces, and when it expresses a doubt, it is used without a 
negation : ex. 



Quoi que ce soil, or 'fut, 



Rien, 

Tel, telle, tels, telles, 

Tel qui, tels qui, 

Telle qui, telles qui, 

Tout, 

Tout le monde, 

Tout que. 



you 


saw 




me 




m 


veZyV.vu 


,p.p. 


Of 


all th 


e appl 


es 






pommerf 


, none is 


yet 








encore. 


,adv. 




any 


of you 


who 



130 

Aucun ne s'est encore arise None has yet thought of 
de vous contredire, contradicting you. 

Y a-t it aucun (pu aucune) Is there any of you who 
de vous qui le souffrit ? would suffer it ? 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

None of the books which 

buying, pleases me. 

acheicr,v. plait ,v. 

which you gave me, 

aveZjY.donnees.p.p. 

fit to eat. Is there 

6on,adj. a,p. manger ,v. Y a-t-il, 

applies to study as much as he can ? Among 

s 1 applique, v. elude S. le peut y v. 

all the ladies you know, is there any one who 

dam erf connaissez,v. 

(would have; married him ?-- Phillip is cer« 

eut voida,\).p epouser,v. Philippe cer- 

tainly a very wicked man, for none 

tainement,B.dv. mediant, adj. car,c. 

of his friends speak well of him. Do you 

parley. 
know any news ? No, sir, I know 

savez } v nouvelle monsieur, sais,v. 

none - - I was in trouble, and none of 

etaiSyV. dans, p. embarras,m. 
my friends have relieved me. 
a,v. secouru,]).]). 

Nul, pas, un, are always accompanied by a negation, 
and can only be used as a nominative to the verb : Per- 
sonne is likewise attended with a negation, except in sen- 
tences of doubt, admiration, or interrogation : ex. 

Nul ne peut se flatter d'etre No one can flatter himself 

agreable a Dieu, to be agreeable to God. 

Pas un ne le croit, Not one believes it. 

Personne s'est-il jamais ex- Did ever any body express 

prime avec plus de grace himself with more grace 

que Sheridan ? than Sheridan ? 



131 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

No one in this world is free from 

en,p. monde,m. exempted]. 

fault jVo one can pretend to be per- 

defaut,\n. pr&tendre y v. etre^v. par- 

fectly happy in this land of ini- 

faitement^dv. dans,v. terrefi. 

sery. - - All the sailors perished at sea . 

matelot,m. ont,v.peri,p.p. sur,p. mer 

not one escaped. The soldiers are all re 

a echappe,p.p. soldat,m. re- 
turned ; not one has remained behind. 

venu,p.p. estyV. resfe,p.p. derrtere^dv. 

Nobody can boast of being without im- 

se,vvo.vanter,v. etrejf. sans, p. 

perfections. - - As nobody speaks to you, 

Comme, adv. parley 

you ought not to speak to any bddy. Did 

devez,v. ucn parley ,v. A-t-il 

ever any body know in what happiness 

jamais connujp.ip. en,p. bonheur,m 

consists ? 
consistent. 

Autre refers to persons and things, and is an adjective 
that precedes its substantive, unless used as a noun ; but 
autrui refers to persons only, and is invariable, and can 
only be used in the, genitive or dative case : ex. 
Ceite plume n'est pas bonne, This pen is not good, give 

donnez-lui en une autre, him another. 

JYe prenez pas le bien d'au- Do not take other people's 

trui, goods. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Your brother has lost his books ; shall I 

perdii,ry.p. ur> 

give him others ? As you broke rrry 

donnerai,v. avez cassc,p.p. 

penknife, you will give me another. - - Other peo- 

canif,m. donnerez,v. 

pie's opinions are not the rule of mine. 

sentiment, m. regie,?. 



138 

Do not speak ill of other people, if you 

ucr* parlez 7 v. ma/,adv. 

will have nobody speak ill of you. - - 

vouleZjV. que,c. parley. 

Always 2 remember 1 that principle of na- 

souvenez-vous de ce principe^m. na- 

tural law, do not to others what you 

turel,ad], Zoi,f. faiies,v. 

would not wish that (they should do) to you. - - 
izn voudriezjf. on fit ,v. 

What are other people's troubles, if (they be corn- 

peineyf. si,c. on les com- 
pared) with ours. 
parens aux 

Chaque and chacun are not used indifferently ; chaque 
always requires a' substantive after it, and chacun repre- 
sents a noun not expressed in the sentence, both relating 
to persons or things : 

Chaque langue a ses idiomes Each language has its pe- 

particuliers, culiar idioms 

Chacun a son tour, Eve7~y one in his turn. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Every thing in its time. - - Every virtue has 

chose dans^. temps } m. 

its reward, and each vice has its punishment. - 

recompense ,f. chdtiment y m. 

Let every soldier keep his post, to 

Que se,])vo.tienne y v. a poste,m. pour,\) 

avoid any surprise from the enemy. - 

eviteryV. touted}, surprise^, de la part de Pennemi. 
Every one thinks and acts for himself. - - Do not 

pense,v. agit,v. sou ucr* 

speak all at once, but each in your turn. - - 

a la foiSj adv. a 

England expects (that) every man (will do) his duty 

attend ,.v. fera y v. devoir, m. 

in case of danger. - - Trees bear their fruits 

en Jlrbre^xn. portent^. 

each in its season, - - - (Let us give) to every 

dans^p Rendons,v. 



133 

one what belongs to him. Let every one 

appartienlyV. Que 

meddle with his own business. 

se, pro. mehyV.de prop re, adj. affaires y \A. 

L''unP autre are susceptible of gender and number, and 
express a reciprocity in the action, and may be applied 
to persons or things ; and if there be a preposition in 
English, it must be placed between them : ex. 

Us se haissent Pun l'autre, They hate each other, 

lis parleut mal Pun de They speak ill of one 

l'autre, another. 

Les voleurs se defient les Thieves mistrust one an- 

uns des autres, other. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Fire and water destroy one another. - - My 

se,pro. delrmsentyV. 
sisters can not bear each other. - - 

peuventjV. se, pro. soujJrir y v. 

Love one another, said our Lord 

Aimez-vous,v. dit y v. Seigneur ,m 

to his disciples. The seasons follow each 

disciple y m. saisonfi sc,\)Yo.suivent,v. 

other without interruption. Honest men 

sans^p. geiis 

(ought to) esteem one another. They 

devraient s^es timer 

do justice to one another. It is rare 

se,pro.rendentyV m rare y adj. 

to hear two authors speak well of one 

d' entendre auteur y m. dire y v. dubien y m. 

another. - - Multiplication teaches to multiply 

Multiplication ,f. enseigne,v. a multiplier y r. 
two numbers by each other. - - The columns 

nomhre,m. par,p. colonnefi 

•were close against one another. 
etaientjV. serre y adj. eontre,p. 

lJun et P autre always requires the verb in the plural, 

and may likewiso be applied to persons or things : ni 

Pun ni P autre require the verb to be put in the singular, 

if that pronoun be placed before the verb, and in the 

12 



134 

plural if it come after it ; but in both cases the verb must 
be preceded by the negation ne : ex. 

L'un et 1'autre out raison, Both are in the right. 

JVi Pun ni 1'autre ne repond. Neither of them answer. 

or Us ne reponderd ni 

Pun ni 1'autre. » 

When the preposition relates to both, it must be placed 
before Pun and r autre, and repeated ; and both is not ex- 
pressed in French, when it precedes two nouns or pro- 
nouns united by the conjuction and : ex. 

17 recoil de V argent de Pun He receives money from 

et de 1'autre, both. 

Son frere et sa sceur soul Both his brother and sister 

moris, are dead. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Both serve to the same purpose. ---I 

serveni,v. meme,adj. usage, m. 

called on your cousins, and I heard 

ai passe,p.p chez cousine,t ai appris,v).p 

that both had been married a week be- 

que avaieni,w wmWi,p.p. semains,{. au- 

fore. Honor your father and mother, 

paravant,&dv. Respectez,v 

and endeavour to please both. Do you speak 

tachez,v. de p!aire,\. a up parlez,\ 

of my brother or sister ? I speak of both. - - Apples 

parley. Pommefi 

and pears are good fruits, but peaches are pre- 
poire,f. peche,f. pre- 

ferable to both. - - I wrote to both, but neither of 

ferahle,nd]. ai ecrit,v. up 

them answered my letters. - Yesterday I expected 

up a repaiub(,\).r). a attendois,v. 

my two best friends, but neither of them came. - - 1 

up up vint,v. 

will give it to neither of them. Both religion 

donnerai,v up up 

and virtue are the bonds of civil society 
lien } m. 



135 

Quclque — que. Qitelque immediately joined to a noun 
followed by que, expresses an indeterminate quality or 
quantity ; it is declinable before a substantive, and inde- 
clinable before an adjective, and requires the verb to be 
put in the subjunctive mood : ex. 

Quelques fauies que vous Whatever faults you may 

aijez faites, on vous par- have committed, they 

donnera, will forgive you. 

Quelque grandes que soient However great your faults 

vos fautes, on vous par- be, they will forgive 

donnera, you. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Whatever -efforts people make to hide 

effort ^m. cm,pro. fasse,v. pottiyp. voiler^v 

truth, it (is discovered) sooner or later. - - What- 

se decouvre,Y. tot,hdv. tar d, adv. 

ever services you (may have) done to your 

service,m. ayez y v. rendus,\).-p. 

country, it will reward you for them. What- 

patrie,?. recompensera,v. # 

ever capacity a man may have, he ought not to 
puisse,v, doitjY. se 

boast. - - However equitable your 2 offers 3 be 1 , 
vanter,v. °ff re fi soient, v 

I do not believe they will be accepted. - - though 3 

iX/* crois,v. soientyV. acceptee,p.p. 

kings 5 be 4 (ever so) powerful, 2 . they die 

soient, v. puissant, &d]. meurent,v 

as well as the meanest of their subjects. - - However 

6as,adj. sujet,m. 

learned those ladies may be, they sometimes 2 
savant, a.dj. quelquefois ,a.dv . 

mistake 1 . 
se,pro.trompent,v. 

Quel que, quelle que must be thus divided, when it is 
immediately followed by a verb or a personal pronoun, 
and agree in gender and number with the noun to which 
it relates ; it likewise requires the verb to be put in the 
subjunctive mood : ex. 

. * See the Rule, page 103, 



136 

Quelle que soit voire faute, Whatever your fault may 
on vous pardonnera, be, they will forgive you. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Whatever the enemy be, whose malice 3 you 1 
ennemi,m. malice,?. 

dread,* you ought to rely on your 

apprehendez,v. devez,v. vous reposer,\. sur,p. 

innocence. Laws condemn all criminals, 

condamnent,\. criminel,m. 

whoever they may be. - - Whatever your inten- 

pxdsseniyY. inten- 

tions (may be,) I think that you (are in the wrong.) 
tion,f. soient avez tort 

Whatever the reasons be which you (may allege,) 
raison,£. 4 alleguiez,v. 

they are not sufficient. Whatever these books 

suffisant,a.d}. livre,m. 

be, send them to me. Whatever her fortune be, 

fortune ,f. 
he says he ^ever 4 (will marry 3 ) her 2 . 
dit,v epousera,v. 

Quelque chose qui, or que, quoi que, quoi que ce soil que, 
tout ce qui, or que always relate to things, and never to per- 
sons ; with this difference, that, in French, we generally 
oegin with either quelque chose que or qui, quoi que, or quoi 
quece soit que, with the following verb in the subjunctive 
mood : ex. 

Quelque chose qu'on vous Whatever may be said to 

dise, ne le croyez pas, you, do not believe it. 

Quoi que ce soit qu'ora vous Whatever they may say to 

dise, ne le croyez pas, you, do not believe it. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Whatever may happen to you in this world, 

puisse,v. arriver,v. monde,m. 

against Divine Providence, for 
murmurez,v. contre,n. car,c 

whatever we may suffer, we deserve it. - - What- 

souffrions , v . m eritons,\ . 

ever I (may do,) you always blame me. - - - Who is 
fasse,v. bldmez,v. 



137 

the man who has stolen his money ? I know not ; 

vole ^ 'p. sais,v. 

but whoever he (may be,) and whatever he may say, 

soit, dise,v. 

if my father catch him, he shall be punished. - - - 

attrappe,v. puni,p.p. 

In whatever your master employs you do it 

a emploie,v. faites,v. 

heartily. Whatever you may say, your 

de ban cceur,adv. disiez,v. 

brothers shall be punished, if they deserve it. 
serontyY. * meritent,v* 

On the contrary, we always make use of tout ce qui, or 
que, when whatever can be turned into all that which, or 
every thing which ; and may be placed either at the begin- 
ning or in the middle of a sentence, according to its situa- 
tion in English, with* the following verb in the indicative 
mood : ex. 

llfera taujaurs, tout ce qu'iZ He will always do ichat- 
vous pluira, ever, or every thing, you 

please. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

In whatever you do, be guided by ho- 

f aites, v. guide', p. p. lion- 

nesty and probity ; and in whatever you say, 

netete 9 f. dates, v. 

never deviate m from the path of truth. - - 

vous ecariez,v. sentier 7 m. 

Whatever is pleasing is not always useful. 

agre able, adj. «/i7e,acj. 

Tell me whatever you think of me, and I will 

Dites,v. pensez,v. di- 

tell you whatever I think of you. Never speak 

raijV. 

of whatever has passed between us both. - - She is 

shst passe entre,p. deux. 

so curious, that she will know whatever I 

curieux,B.d]. veui,v. savoir,y. 

do. - - Whatever glitters is not gold. - - - I will pay 
fais,v. luit,v. or paierai,v 

you to-morrow whatever I owe you. 

dois,v. 
* Si loses the i before U, lie : Us, they, 
'■/'■*: ' 



138 

Quelque always expresses an indeterminate significa- 
tion, and is generally joined to a substantive with whioh 
it agrees in number ; and quelouhm, quelquhme, make 
quelques-uns , quelques-unes, in the plural : ex. 
Quelque homme, Some man. 

Quelque femme, * Some woman. 

Quelqu'un m'a dit, Some one has told mc, &c 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

When he comes to see us, he has 

Qaand,adv. vient,v. *jcn voir,v. 
always some tale to tell us. - - He promised 

conte,m. a j aire, v. a promts, p. p. 

to bring me some filberts and chesnuts. Have 

de aveline chataigne. 

you heard any news ?- -'Somebody knocks 

appris,p.p. nouvelle ? frappe,Y, 

at the door \ go and open it. - - Is there 

allez,v. xjot* ouvriryV. Y a-t-il 

any of these ladies who has found my colour-box ? 
dame,f. ait,v.t7*ouve couleur. 

- Have you any (raspberry trees) in your garden ? I 
framboisier,m. 
have some. - - Has he any vines ? Yes, he has some. 
JL-t-il, vigne,f. Oiti,adv. 

Qui que ce soit, speaking of persons only, may be En- 
glished different ways ; but when by whoever, what person 
soever, it must always be followed by the pronouns it, elle, 
or qui, and sometimes by both, unless it be governed by a 
verb or preposition : ex. 

Qui que ce soit qui me Whoever deceives me, shall 
trompe, xl sera puni, » be punished. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Whoever despises the poor, is himself des- 

meprise,\. lui-meme me- 

picable. - - Whoever speaks to you, do not answer. - - 

prisable,a.d). parte & repondez,v. 

Whoever (may presume to) ask you any question 

sera,v. question 



139 

concerning that affair, pretend not 2 to 1 know 5 (any 4 

ton chant ,p. feignezjr. de,p. savoir,v. 

thing) (ahout it 3 ). - - Of whomsoever you speak, 

parliez,v 

always speak the truth. To whomsoever you 

dites,v. vous 

apply, every body (will tell) you the 

voiis adressiez,v. tout le monde,m. dira,v. 

same thing With whomsoever you be, 

chose,f. Jlvec,p. soijez,v. 

always 3 behave 1 well 3 . 

comjiortez-vous ,v . 
When the above pronoun is Englished by nobody in 
the world, no man living, &c. ; it must be attended with 
the negation ne before the verb ; and when speaking in 
vhe past tense, qui que cefut must be used : ex. 

Je n*en parle a qui que ce I mention it to no man 

soit, living, to no one, 

Cesar ne voulait se fier a Caesar w T ould trust to no- 

qui que ce fut, body whatever. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Charity bids us to (speak ill) of nobody what- 
ordonneyV. de,p.mcdire,\\ 

ever, and to do harm to no man living. I 

de,pfaire,v.du mal,m. 
spoke to nobody whatever ; for I saw neither 

aiparle,p.p. ai vu,p.p. 

father, mother, nor children. - - Never speak to any 

parleZyY. 
body whatever of what I told you. --He acquainted 
ai dit jit part a 

nobody in the world with his projects. My brothei 

de projet,xn. 

was so honest that he mistrusted nobody at all. — * 
efar£,v. se defiait de 

Cromwell would trust his life to nobody whatever. 
voulut,w confier,v. vieS. 
The above observation is to be made with respect to 
quoi que ce soit, qnoique cefut only used in speaking of in- 
animate objects. Quiconque is indeclinable, always used 
in the singular, and said only of persons : ex. 



140 

Jt nc me plains de quoi que I do not complain of any 

ce soit, thing whatever. 

Quiconque vous a dit cela Whoever told you that, &c. 
fyc. 

EXERCISE UPpN THIS RULE. 

My brother enjoys so 2 good 3 a 1 health 4 , that 

jouit,v.de, p. si 
(for these) three years he never complained of 

depids,p. . s' est plaint, p. p. 

any thing whatever. He is so lazy that 

he applies to nothing whatever. You 

s' applique y v. 
may go and take a walk in the garden, 

pouvez,v. alleryV. <jCt> vous promeneryV. 

but do not touch any thing whatever. Who- 

taucheZyV.dyp. 
ever believes every thing which (he is told) is 
croityV. on lid dit y v. 

often deceived. He (is ordered) to stop 

/rompe .p.p. a ordre cVarretcr 

every one that shall go that way. 

passerayV. par-la. 
It must be observed, that the numeral adjective one, 
used in English as a pronoun indefinite, and admitting of a 
plural termination, is not to be expressed in French, when 
it immediately follows an adjective of colour, or any 
other expressing the shape or size of the object which it 
implies ; but the adjective must be put in the same num- 
ber and gender as the substantive which is understood in 
English : ex. 

Quel habit ac! tetter ez-vous ? What coat shall you buy ? 

un bleu ou un vert ? a blue one or a green one I 

J^aitrouve deux nids d^oi- I have found two birds' 

seaux y dans Pun il y nests ; there were eggs 

avait des ceufsy et des pe- in one, and young ones 

tits dans Pautre. in the other. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. - 

What kind of a hat will you have? a black 
esptceyt u/* ucr un noiY,adj 



141 

one, or a white one ? a round one, or a 

o/a?ic,adj. rondjcid]. 

cocked one ? My father has sold 

retrousse, ad']. rencfo^p.p 

one of his horses , which is it ? the black one, or 
un ce 

the grey one ? Were there many flowers in 

oris, adj. Y avait-il 

his garden ? Yes, (there were) very fine ones, 

il y en avail tres,zdv. oeau,adj. 
which my father had sent him from Hol- 

envoye,p.p. 

land. (Here are) several pair of shoes ; which 

Voxcx * adv. soldier, m. 

will you have ? the red ones, or the white 

ucr* rouge, adj. 

ones ? I prefer the black ones. 
prefereyV. 
Tout — que. Tout, preceding a noun immediately fol- 
lowed by que, is indeclinable in the masculine and declin- 
able in the feminine, before nouns beginning with a con- 
sonant, and must be repeated before every noun in the 
sentence : ex. 
Tout savant qu'iJ est il se Jls learned as he is, he 

irompe quelquefois, sometimes mistakes. 

Toute savante quelle est. For all she is learned, she 

elle se trompe quelquefois y sometimes mistakes. 

Observe well the above construction. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

For all my sister is ugly, she gets friends 

laid, adj . se fait,v, 

every where. As amiable as she is, she 

par-tout, adv. aimable,ad]. 

does not please me at all. For all they are 

plait, v. du tout, adv. 

rich, they give 2 Nothing 3 to the poor. 

donnent,w. pauvre, adj. pL 

Your mother, although, (or for all) she is young, appears 

parait,v. 
old. - - - As generous as he is, he has not given 
agfe.adj, a,v cZowie,p,p 



142 

me one farthing. - - His aunt, for all she is angry 

liard,m. tante,L f ache, ad], 

with him, will forgive him his faults, as great 
confre,p, pardonnera,v. ltd faute,t 

as they are. As young, amiable, handsome, 

beau,&d]. 
arid rich, as my friend's sisters are, they were 



not yet 


married 


the last time 


etaient,"/ 
1 saw 


encore, adv. 
them. 


marie, p. p. 


foisfi 


vis } v, 



N. B. This will be seen again among the conjunctions. 

To the above pronouns may be added the three follow- 
ing expressions, which are generally used in an indefinite 
or indeterminate manner : 

Je ne sais qui, I know not who, whom. 

Je ne sais quoi, I know not what. 

Je ne sais quel, quelle, &c. I know not which or what. 

Je ne sais qui is only said of persons, and signifies a 
person we do not know. Je ne sais quoi is only said of 
things, and signifies an object which cannot precisely be 
named or defined ; Je ne sais quel is placed before sub- 
stantives, both of persons and things \ lastly, we some- 
times put un before Je ne sais quoi, and indifferently, un or 
le before Je ne sais quoi : ex. 

Je ne sais qui me parle, I know not who speaks to 

me. 
// parle de je ne sais quoi, He speaks of 1 know not 

what. 
Je vis je ne sais quel homme, I saw I know not what man. 
II parle d'un je ne sais qui, He speaks of I know not 

whom. 
J' hi lu une comedie intitu- I have read a play which 
Lee, je ne sais quoi, has for its title, 1 know 

not what. 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Wb^u I paid a visit to my friend, I addressed 

rtndiSyW, up niadressai^v 



143 

myself to I kaow not whom. - - He (keeps company 
<jcn freqaente,v. 

with) I know not whom, and that displeases her. - - 

deplaityV. I hi. 
Whilst she (was speaking) to him, she was 

Pendant que, a. partait,v. ' fut 

accosted by I know not whom. - - There is 

aborde,p.p. par, p. 11 y a, v. 

I know not what mean in that behaviour. 

de bas./dd]. conduite,f. 

He complains of I know not what. When I 

se plaint jr. 
went in, I saw I kaow not what man, what wo- 
entrai,y. 

man, what pictures, what figures. - - She speaks 
portrait ,m. figure,?. 

to I know not whom. There is in that J 

la dedans 7 adv 
know not what that pleases me. 
plait jV. 

RECAPITULATORY or promiscuous EXERCISES 
upon all the PRONOUNS. 

Review well your rules and examples before you write. 
I speak French. - - You speak English. 

parley parlezjr. 

We do not understand what they say to us. - - 

<xr> comvrenons.y. disent,v. 

She speaks to you, and robs you at the same J 

parley. vole,y. en mime 

time. - - We have not seen them. - - Your 

lemps.m. avons,v. vtcr,p.p. 

mother came to see me yesterday, and I 

vinf.Y. <xr voir,y. /nV;\adv. 

twill go to) see her to-morrow. -- Is there any bod) 
irai.v. demain.jicjy. Est-il 

that esteems her more than I do ? - - Attention 

estime 7 Y. up 

cares, credit, money, I have put 2 (every 1 thing! 

soin, ■ mis, p. p. tout 

in use, - - They are happy, . but we arc 

en ; p. usage heuhui\z.(\]. 



144 

not so. --Every body thinks I am the mother of 

# croit 9 v. 

that child ; I assure you I am not - - - - Ladies, 

* Mines, 

are you the companions of Miss le Noir ? Yes, 
etes,v. compagnef. 

we are. My uncle gave me a sword, and 

* a donne,p.p. 

I owe my life to it. Whatever (may be) 

dois la soient, v. 

your troubles, you (ought to) write to me more 

peine,?. devriez,v. ecrire,v. 

frequently. I will lend you the book which she 

soiivent,a.dv. preterai,v. 

has sent me. - - Believe me, he is very 

envoye,p.p. Croyez 3 y. 

Hi. I shall be very glad to go 

malade, adj. serai, v. aise,adj. dealler,w. 

there with you ; for I have something to tell 

avec,p. car,c. a dire,v. 

him. - - I love }%ur sister, and I owe her res- 

♦ aime,v. res- 
pect. - - Give me my hat and cloak. 

pect,m. chapeau t m. mantelet ,m. 

I have dined with your father and mother. - - 

dine, p. p. 
They 1 often 4 procure 3 me 2 that plea- 

souvent, adv. procurent,v. 
sure. - - If it be not an indiscretion on my part, 

ce est, v. f. de part,?. 

pray tell me what passed between you 

de grace, dites s'est passe ,p. p. entre,p. 

and them. - - They have sent you good apples. 

pomme£ 
Yes, there were some good ones and some bad 

il y avait,v. mauvais ,Vid). 

ones. - - Write to me ; do not write to her. 

Ecrivez,v. xjcn 

Carry some to your sister. - - I will do whatever 

Poriez,v. feral,?. 

you please. The Thames is a very fine 

voiidrez,v. Tamise,f. bemi.&dy 

* Look at page 107. 



145 

river ; it divides London into two parts. 

riviere J. divise,v. en, p. par tie. 

London is the capital of England, as Paris is that 

capltale.fi. 
of France ; it is a fine city, but some of its streets 

# rue fi. 

are very inconvenient and narrow Brest 

incommode ,adj . Stroked], 

is a fine sea-port,f in France, but its entrance 

mer port } m. * entree fi. 

is difficult and dangerous. - - Brother, these 

difficile ,adj. 

books are mine, and not yours. Your 

non pas, adv. 
exercise is better than mine, but it is not so 
themejn. 

well written as your sister's. Do you think of 

ecritjQ.p. dcr pensez^.a 

me ? Yes, I do. J You do not know what vexes 

pcnse^w f ache, v. 

me. I will not accept of any of the 

veux,v. accepter,v. *jcn 

terms which they offer me. Whom ought 

condition fi* offrent,v. devons, v. 

we to worship ? God, who is the father of 

up adorer, v. Dieu, 

them that love him, and the protector of those 

aiment.v. 

that tear him. Of all those who contend 

era ignentyV. dispuieni , v 

against religion, some do it because it per- 

conire,n. f. les wns font ,v. parceque,c. em- 

plexes them ; others, because they wish \o 

barrasse,v. les autrcs veident,v. */?» 

have the glory of perplexing its defenders. - - - 

embarrasser,v defenseur,m. 

Those trees are well exposed to the sun, 

arbre,m. expose, n.n sohii y m 

nevertheless their fruits are not good. I behe\> 

cependant^cxv. vroisjr 

your uncle is arrived. - - His ability is not so 

oncle,m. arrive, p. p. habilelefi. 

* See page 112. f See the rule, page 57 % Look at page 105 

13 



146 

great as yours. --- Two rivals are generally 

grand , adj . riv a I , i n . 

enemies of one another. Sister, who gave you 

a do?ine,p.p. 

that letter ? Our uncle's servant. What, does 

lettrefi domestique y m. ucr 

he write to you ? That his library is at our 

ecrityV. bibliothequefi 

service ; and I assure you that he has a very good 

treSyStdy. 
one. - - - His letters please me so much, that I 

* plaisentyV . 

wish to increase their number. - - Both my 

veux,v xjcr* aiigmenter,v. 
father and aunt are now at Rome : the former 

d 'present 
writes once , a week, the latter writes 
Sent , v . une fois , v . 

to me twice a year. He that wants 

deux fois manque 7 v. de,p. 

virtue, wants (all things). That lady pleases 

tout. damefi plailyV. 

you, for you 1 are 3 always 4 speaking 3 of her 2 . 

car y c. parleZyV. 

The beauty of the mind creates admira- 

beaute yf. esviit.m. donneyV. 

(ion ; that of the soul gams esteem, and that 

amef. donneyV. estimeyf. 

of the body love. Most friends are more 

corps yUi. amour An. 

attached to our fortune, x tnan 3 £ they are 

attache yp.p. aue n#,c. 

to our person. VViioever is without virtue 

sariSyp. 
seldom 2 values 1 men , and whoever is 

rarementyadv. estimeyV. 

too g°°d, values them (too much). It 

trop y&dv. tropyadv. Ce 

is she who told me tliat this house is not 

a dityp.p. maisonyf. 

yours - - You believe that Mrs. D. is in your interests, 
* croyeZyY. inUretyin. 

* See the ex. p. 104. t Look at pages 96 and 97 



147 

and 1 believe nothing of.it. Ambition 

crois^v. ne Wen, ad v. 
(tramples upon) wisdom, honor, probity, and on 
foule aux pieds sur^*' 

their ruins; it lays the foundation of its great- 

ruinej. eleve,v. fondement,m. gran* 

ness. Whatever her intention (may be,) I 1 do 

deur 9 f. ' soitjV. up 

2 not 6 love 5 her 4 the less 7 for it 4 , - - - I assure you that 

aime^v. up 

I have answered both her letter and her brother's. - - - 
Nobody in the world has complained of your con- 

s'est,?. plaintjp.p. 

duct. When you read the history of the Roman 

QiiandyC. UreZjV. histoirefi i2omaift,adj. 

emperors, yon will find one (of them) whose name 
empereur y m. troaverez,v. 

was Nero. The study of geography is absolute- 

JSTeron. geograpJikfi absolu- 

\y necessary to him who has a taste for his- 

™<3?if,adv. du goiit,m 

tory. He that sold us this clock did not 

a vendu,p.p. pendule,f.a y v. 

cheat us. -- What do you think ofit?--- 

trompesrf.p. up pensez,v. 

Whoever cheats me shall repent (°fit-) " { 

trompe,w. se repentira y v. en 

Everybody thinks* we shall have peace. When I 

croityV. auronSjV. paixf. 

went in the members of the assembly were 

entraiyV. etaient.v. 

seated every one in his place. I, who did not 

ftssis, p.p. a up 

know that they were reconciled, was much 
s avals, v. que ,c reconcilies ,p.p . fus ,v . fort, adv. 

surprised to see them together. England owes 

eionne de voir^v. ensemble, adv. doit,v. 

her riches to her naval strength, and the encourage- 

for ces,f. pi. 
ment she gives to her commerce. - - - We speak 
donne,\. parlous, v 

*See the note at the bottom of page 115. 



148 

of what has happended to him. Well ! if ho 

est y VMrrive,p.f>. Eli bien,\nt. 

spend other people's money, he does not spend 

depense^v. 

yours. This illness \ is much hid ; nevertheless 

maladiefi fort cachee,p.p cependant,a.t\v. 

] know its origin and effects. She who 

connais,v. * 

(was speaking) to you is not yet mar- 

parlaitjV. encore, ad v. 

ried . - - Her father, mother, brothers, sisters, uncles, 

oriele,m. 
and aunts ; in short, all her relations are dead, 

ianief. enjin,c. parent ,m. 

and have left her a considerable fortune. 

ont)V. Zaisse,p.p. 



Those gentlemen 


have fine 


horses, 


but mine are 


finer 


messieurs 
than theirs. 


- - Do you 


chevalyXn. 
know 




any 


of 


those 


ladies ? 


Yes, I know 


connaisseZyV 
some 


of thei 


m. - - 


— — 


For 


all they 


are 


connaiSyY. 

young and handsome 


, they 


have 


(a 



great deal) of modesty and virtue. That German 

Allemand 

nobleman is both poor and proud. Desire 

gcnlilhomme orgneilleux^dj. Priez,v. 

him to bring ^ them here. Is that the gown 

de amener 9 v. Est-ce robefi 

for which you gave five guineas ? If I 

powr,p. avez donne y \>.p. 

had been in your place, I (would have) 

cusse y v. e/e,p.p. a aurais,v. 

preferred the white one to the black one. 

V refere y p.p. 

How many books are there in that library ? There 

y a-t-il bibliothequef. 

are three thousand seven hundred and twenty -seven in 
the library, fifty-two upon the table, and nineteen in my 
roon. - - Whose house is this ? It belongs 

appartientyV , 
* See page 112. 



149 

to I know not whom. There is I know not what 

llya x y. 

in the colour, which pleases much. To what 

dans, p. plasty. 

(does he apply himself ) ? This apple, and that he 

s J appliqiie-i-il,v. * 

gave you, are very good. Give me either 

donna, v. donnez 3 v. 

of them. I will send you some thither. 

i/7> enverfaijV. 

I cannot sell it to you for so 2 small 3 a 1 

. ne penx pas,v.vendre 3 v. pour, p. 

sum 4 . - - I prefer the beauty of the mind to that 

sonimeX prejtre,\\ 

of the body. Some like music and some dancing. 

Les uns aimeni 3 w. danse£ 

- - She says she hates that man ; many think she 

dit 3 v. hait 9 y m credent 

loves him. - - He whom nobody pleases, is more 

a line, v. a plait 3 v. 

.unhappy than he who pleases nobody. - - I 

malhe ureux, adj. a 

was near your sister when that happened 

etais,\. aupres de,p. quand,c. arriva,v. 

to her. - - Both his father and mother died 

mourtirentyV. 

on the same day.-' As covetous as he is, he 

*jrp avare, adj. 

gave me a guinea. There ,are many people 

a doftn£,p.p. 11 y a 

whom we esteem, because we do not know them. - • 

parceque,c. connaissons 

Whatever has happened to you, ■ I am very sorry 

soit, y.flnw,p.p. fach e, adj. 

for it. -- He would do it in spite of any 

vouh.rf,v. faire,v. en,p. depiijn. 
body whatever. - - Learning is preferable to riches 
Science, f. 

and virtue to both. Some philosophers have 

philosophe 3 m. ont 3 v 

* Seethe Rule, page 122. 
13* 



150 

thought that the fixed stars were so many 

crUjp.p. jixe, fid]. etoile y t\ etaient y v. aidant 

suns. - - See with what care, attention, and per- 

Voyez,v. 
severance, every animal {rears up) its (young ones.) 

eleve,v. peiit^d]. 

- - (Here are) two grammars, which do you pre- 
Voiciy adv. «/7> 

fer ? I prefer this to that. Both are very 

good. He believes nothing of what you 

croityV. ne rien, adv. 

told him. You blame him who does 

avez dit,p.\> blamez,v. 

not deserve it. Friend, to whom did you 

merite y v. avez } v. 

speak ? I spoke to nobody ; for I saw 

par/e,p.p. ai parle y p.p. car,c. ai tm, p.p. 

neither of them. - - Each country has its peculiar 

• parlicuiier, adj. 
customs ; in France, they* eat with the fork, in England, 
coutumefi <m,pro. 

we eat with the knife ; in France, they eat the meat 
on, pro. 

well done ; in England, we eat it half raw. 
cuite } p.p. a moiiie erne, adj. 

SECT. IV. 
OF VERBS JUYB THEIR DIFFERENT SORTS 

Verbs are usually divided into seven sorts, viz. 
1 Lcs verbes auxiliaires, auxiliary. 

2. Les verbes achfs, active. 

3. Les verbes pass if s, passive. 

4. Lcs verbes neuires, neuter. 

5. Les verbes rejiechis^ reflective. 
G. Les verbes personnels, personal. 

7. Les verbes unipersonnehs , impersonal. 

Some of them are regular, that is to say, they follow 
the general rule of the conjugation to which they belong; 
others do not, and are called irregular. 

The auxiliary verbs are avoir, to have, and elre y to be. 

* See pa go 95. 



151 

These two auxiliaries are used to conjugate all the com- 
pound tenses of the other verbs. 

The active verbs. — In this class, the action is transitive, 
that is, it passes from the subject to the object : ex. 

Le maitre punit les ecoliers The master punishes the 
paresseux, lazy scholars. 

The active verb sometimes governs two cases : one 
to which the action directly refers, or which is the di- 
rect object of the action, and is therefore called the 
direct or absolute case ; the other, to which the action 
refers but indirectly, and is called the indirect or relative 
case : ex. 

Voire sceur a ecrit line Your sister wrote a long 
tongue lettre a mon frere, letter to my brother. 

A long letter is the direct or absolute case, and to my bro 
their, the indirect or relative case, of the verb wrote. The 
direct case can be no other but the accusative of a noun or 
pronoun ; but the indirect is either the genitive , dative, or 
ablative. 

In the passive verbs, the action is received or suffered 
by the subject : ex. 

Les ecoliers paresseux Lazy scholars shall be 
seront punis, punished. 

In the neuter verbs, the action is intransitive, thai is, it 

remains in the a^ent : ex. 



Jc dors, I sleep. 

Nous etudions, We study. 



Vous voyagez, You travel. 
Elle soupire, She sighs. 



In the reflected verbs, the action returns upon the agent 
that produces it : ex. 

Jl se repent, He repents himself. 

Elle se hue, She praises herself. 

These verbs have always se before their infinitive, and 
are conjugated with a double pronoun. 

The personal verbs are those which are conjugated with 
three persons, in the singular and plural, throughout all 
their tenses. 

The impersonal verbs have only the third person of the 
singular number. 

JV*. B. There is a kind of verbs which may be distin- 



152 

guished by the name of reduplicative, always expiessing a 
repetition of the action : ex. 

Recommencer, To begin again. 

Refaire, To do again, &c. 

In these verbs, the English word again is to be render- 
ed in French by the syllable re prefixed to the radix of the 
verb, and not by encore. 

All the above verbs may be simple or compound. 

A verb is simple which cannot be divided without losing 
its meaning : as, 

Jlppeler, To call ; Voir, To see ; • 

Bdtir, To build ; Prendre, To take ; 

Meniir, . To lie ; Vivre, To live ; 

which would mean nothing, if they were divided. 

A verb is compound when it is preceded by one or more 
syllables : as, 

Rappeler, To recall. Rrevoir, To foresee. 

Rebatir, To rebuild. 'Entreprendre, To undertake. 
Dementir, To telie. Smvivre, To outlive, &c. 

These last verbs are generally formed by prefixing to 
them part or the whole of a preposition. 

CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 

To conjugate verbs is to give them different inflections 
or terminations, according to their moods, tenses, persons 
and numbers. 

MOODS 

Mood or mode, in the sense it is taken here, is a gram- 
matical term, which means the manner of affirming, or de- 
noting, in the verbs, by different inflections. 

There are, in the French language, four moods, abso- 
lutely distinct from each other, by the several inflections, 
or by some other difference. They are, 

IJinjiniiif, The infinitive. 

L/indicatif, The indicative. 

Uimperatif, The imperative. 

Le subjonctif, ou The subjunctive, or con- 
conjonctij, junctive. 



153 

Of the Infinitive Mood. 
This mood is so called, because it only expresses 
the action or signification of the verb in an indefinite and 
indeterminate manner, that is, without affirmation, and 
without any relation as to time, number or person : ex. 
Farler, To speak. 

Chanter 7 To sing. 

Danser, To dance. 

Of the Indicative Mood. 
This mood is thus called, because it not only indicates 
the affirmation in the different tenses of the verbs, but 
likewise the time, number, and person ; without being 
preceded or governed by either a conjunction or verb : 

J^ecris line lettre, I write a letter. 

// chante une chanson, He sings a song. 

Ecris and chante are two verbs in the indicative mood, 
because they do not require to be preceded by a conjunc- 
tion* or another verb to 'make a complete sense. The 
definition of this mood will be better understood by com- 
paring the little that has been said with what is going to 
be said with respect to the subjunctive mood. 

Of the Imperative Mood. 

The name which has been given to this mood, is de- 
rived from a Latin word which signifies to command ; and 
the imperative is in fact but a manner of denoting in the 
verbs the action of commanding, entreating ,p raying, exhort- 
ing, and sometimes forbidding : ex. 

Ne meprisez, pas les avis Do not despise the advice 
que je vous donne, which I give you. 

It is easy to perceive that this manner of speaking is 
but an exhortation ; as if I had said, 

Je vous exhorie, je vous prie I exhort, I entreat you, not 
de ne pas mepriser mes to despise my advice. 
avis, 

This mood has no first person in the singular, because 
it is impossible for a man to command himself ; and if it 

*Among the conjunctions, some govern the indicative, others the 
subjunctive : this will be explained hereafter. 



154 

have the first person plural, it is because we speak as 
much to others as to ourselves ; as when we say, 

Evitons lout ce qui pourrait Let us avoid every thing 
offenser les autres, that might offend others. 

The second person singular and the first and second 

plural admit of no pronouns before them ; as to the third, 

in both numbers, it is always preceded by the pronoun il 

or elk, &c. and the conjunction que. 

Of the Subjunctive, or Conjunctive. 

The name of subjunctive, or conjunctive, sufficiently 
conveys what its use is in a sentence. It may be defined 
thus ; a manner of expressing the different tenses of the 
verbs without any affirmation. In fact, the subjunctive 
never affirms ; it is always preceded by, or subject to 
some conjunction ; and if it should be met with in a sen- 
tence containing an affirmation, that affirmation can only 
be expressed by the verb that precedes the subjunctive, 
which is used only to modify that affirmation. In the 
subsequent sentence, 

Je travallle ajin que vous I work, that you may rest 
vous reposiez, yourself \ 

the affirmation is only expressed by je irkvaUk 9 I work, 
and what follows only expresses the end which I propose 
by working, viz. to procure you some rest. Again, 

Je desire que vous fassiez I wish that you may do 

voire devoir, your duty ; 

I affirm that I wish ; but it is clear there is no affirmation 
in these words, that- you may do your duty, since I do not 
say that you do, that you have done, that you will do your 
duty ; but only that I wish you may do it. My wish is 
not doubtful ; but it is very doubtful whether you will or 
may do your duty. 

XLj i > O Scj O . 

There are, strictly speaking, but three natural and 
oroper tenses in the verbs : viz 

Le passe, The past. 

Le present, The present., 

Leftdiir, The future. 



155 

In the French language, the tenses are divided in the 
following manner, viz. five in the infinitive mood ; three 
of them are simple, the two others compound. 

In the simple tenses, the verb is expressed in one word: 
ex. 

Parler, To speak 

Chant ant. Singing. 

Danse, Danced. 

The compound tenses are conjugated with some one 
of the auxiliary verbs, avoir, to have, or etre 7 to be, joineo 
to a participle passive : ex. 



Avoir parte, 
Jlyani chant e, 
Eire aline, 
Ettant aime, 



Le present, 

Le participe aciif, 

Le participe passif, 



To have spoken. 
Having sung. 
To be ioved. 
Being loved. 
Simple Tenses. 

The present. 
The participle active. 
The participle passive. 
Compound. 

The preterite. 
Le participe passe ou com- The participle past or com 

pose, pound. 

There are ten tenses in the indicative mood, viz. five 
simple, and jive compound: they are, 

Simple. 

Le present, The present. 

LHmparfait, The imperfect. 

Le preterit, The preterite. 

Lefutur, The future. 

Le condiiionnel, The conditional. 

Compound of 
Le present, The present. 

LHmparfait, The imperfect. 

Le preterit, The preterite. 

Le fuhir, The future. 

Le condiiionnel, The conditional. 

JV*. B. The imperative admits of no tense but the pre- 
sent. 

The subjunctive mood has four tenses : two simple, and 
two compound. 



Le preterit, 



15G 

Simple. 
Le present. The present. 

Le preterit, The preterite. 

Compound of 

Le present, The present. 

Le preterit, The preterite. 

Before we proceed any further on the conjugations, it 
has been thought proper to explain the different uses of 
the above tenses, as one of the most important articles in 
a language, the precision of which partly depends on the 
difference which custom sets between one tense and an- 
other with regard to the sense of the sentence. We shall 
endeavour to be short and concise, and say nothing but 
what is useful, in hopes that the following explanation will 
be sufficient to remove a difficulty which constantly puz- 
zles the learner. 

TENSES of the INDICATIVE MOOD 

Simple. 

Present. 

This tense is used when the state, action, or impression, 
mentioned by the verb, is existing, doing, or happening, at 
the very time we are speaking : ex. 

Je me porte hien, I am well. 

Voire sceur est malacle, Your sister is ill, 

Nous nous promenons, We are walking. 

Votes ecrivez, You are writing, 

lis jouent, They are pi (tying, fyc. 

The present is also used, 

1. When speaking of actions or things which we habit- 
ually do, are accustomed to do, or can do : ex. 

Nous din oris toujours a We always dine at tsvo 

deux hcures, o'clock. 

Elte etudie Vhisloire, • She studies history 

Vous parlez Francais. You speak French. 

Lit-il V Jlnglais , Does lie read English. 

2 When speaking of actions which are to be done in 



157 

a very short time, we generally u c e this tense instead ot 
the future : ex. 

Je pars ce soir pour la I set out this evening for 

campagne, the country. 

Que faites-t?otfs de-main ? Vs hat do you do to-morrow? 

Instead of 
Je partirai ce soir pour la I shall set out this evening 

carnpagne, for the country. 

Que ferez-4JO«s demain ? What ?n// you clb to-mor- 

row ? 

3. This tense is also constantly used in French, instead 
of the preterite and compound of the preterite, especially 
in orations, or set discourses, and in poetry, in order to rep- 
resent a past action or event as present to the mind of the 
hearers or readers. 

Imperfect. 

This tense has two uses ; in the first, which probably is 
the origin, of its name, it expresses an action present or do- 
ing at the time of an action that is past : as when I 
say, 

Man frere apprenait sa My brother was learning 
lepon quand . vous am- his lesson when you ar- 
vates, rimed. 

In the nhove sentence, the act of learning, though past 
respect to my narration, was present at the moment 
your arrival took place ; therefore this tense is but imper- 
fectly preterite and imperfectly present. 

In the second, the imperfect is employed every time we 
speak of actions of habit, or actions reiterated at a time 
which is not defined : ex. 

Quand j'etais a Londres, When I was in London, 1 
j'allais souvent voir mes often went to see my 
amis, friends ; 

that is. I often used to go, or I frequently went, &c. 

The imperfect is likewise used when we speak of the 
character, or some inherent and distinctive qualify ^ of persons 
or things no longer existing ; and after the English con- 
junction if, though the verb be preceded by should, could, 
would : ex. 

14 



153 



cT Alexan- 



pere 

Grand ', etait le 



Philippe, 

dre le 

plus Jin politique de son 

temps, 
Cesar avaitj/6 ne sais qupi 

de grand dans la phy- 

sionomie, 
Carthage faisait un pro- 

digieux commerce par le 

moyen de ses vaisseaux, 

qui allaient jusgu'aux 

Indes } 
Palmire et Persepolis etaient 

de grandes et belles villes, 
JS'il venait, je le paie- 

raisj 
George II etait d\me 

taille plutot petite que 

moyenne ; il ayait les 

yeux tres-saillans, le nez 

grand, et une belle com- 
plexion; il etait doux, 

modere ethumain ; sobre et 

regidier dans sa maniere 

de vivre: il se plaisait 

dans la pompe et dans 

V appareil militaire, et etait 

naturellement brave; il 

amait la guerre comme 

solclat, Z'etudiaifc comme 

une science, et avait sur ce 

sujet, une correspondance 

etablie avec quelques-uns 

des plus grands generaux 

que V Allemagne ait pro- 

du its, 

From the above instances it might confidently be be 
lieved, that every difficulty attending the use of this tense 
will be .entirely removed ; I shall however add, as a fur- 
ther illustration, that whenever the verb, which in En- 
glish is in the preterite, can be rendered by the past 



Philip, the father of Alex- 
ander the Great, mm the 
deepest politician of his 
time. 

Caesar had I know not what 
of great in his physiog- 
nomy. 

Carthage carried on a pro- 
digious trade by the 
means of her ships, 
which went as far as the 
Indies. 

Palmyra and Persepolis 
mere large and fine cities. 

If he would come, or came, 
I would pay him. 

George II. ivas in his per- 
son rather lower than 
the middle size ; he had 
remarkable prominent 
eyes, a high nose, and a 
fair complexion ; he was 
mild, moderate and hu- 
mane ; in his way of liv- 
ing, sober and regular : 
he delighted in military 
pomp and parade, and 
was naturally brave . 
he loved war as a sol- 
dier, studied it as a 
science, and had, on this 
account, a settled cor- 
respondence with some 
of the greatest generals 
that Germany has pro- 
duced. 



159 

tense of the verb to be, and that preterite changed into 
the participle active, or when that preterite can be 
turned into the verb in the infinitive mood preceded by 
I, thou, fee, §c. used to, that past tense must be made in 
French by the imperfect : ex. 

Je lisais, I used to read ; or I was reading. 

Preterite. 

This tense is so called because it always expresses an 
action done at a time determined or specified by an adverb, 
or some circumstance in the speech, and so entirely 
elapsed, that nothing more remains of the time when 
that action was doing : ex. 
Je fus malqde hier pendant I was ill yesterday for two 

deux heures, hours. 

La derniere fois que nous 3A- The last time we went to 

lames le voir, nous eumes see him, w T e had a kind 

un accueil favorable , reception. 

Vous ecrivites a voire frere You wrote to your brother 

il y a hu it jours, eight days ago. 

lis essuyerent de grandes They underwent great 

peries Pannee, passee, losses last year. 

Future. 

This tense simply expresses that an action will be done 
at a time that is not yet come : ex. 
Je vous verrai demain a I shall see you to-morrow in 

Londres, London. 

Mon frere vous ecrira la My brother will write to 

semaine prochaine, you next week. 

In French, as well as in English, we sometimes express 
an action that is to be done instantly, by the verb aller, or 
s'en alter, to go, immediately followed by an infinitive : ex. 
Je vais, or je m'en vais I am going to write to my 

ecrire a ma tante, aunt. 

Je vais, or je m'en vais I am going to set out. 

partir, 

Which signify, 
Je hi, ecrirai tout presen- I will write to her immedi- 

tement, ately. 

Je partir ai dans V instant, I will set out instantly. 

To express an uncertainty in a future tense, that is, to 
express that it is not decided that such a thing will be 



160 

done, we make use of the verb devoir, immediately follow- 
ed by a verb in the infinitive mood ; and that is the only 
instance wherein devoir does not imply obligation, necessi- 
ty, c]x. : ex. 

Le roi doit partir pouv The king is to set out for 
Cheltenham vers le mi- Cheltenham about the 

lieu dii mots de Juillet, middle of July, and is 

et ne doit revenir qu'ti not to return till the lat- 

lafin dyumois d\dout, ter end of August, 

that is, 
On suppose que le roi par- It is supposed that the king 
tira ; &c. et qv?il ne re- will set out, fyc. and will 
viendra qu'a, &c. not return till, &x. 

Conditional. 
The name of this tense is the true definition of it : in 
fact, it is always used to express some condition or sup- 
position, and has always a reference to the present, be- 
cause, by supposing the condition effected, the action, 
mentioned by the conditional, becomes present : ex. 

Je lirais, si f avals des I should read, if I had 

llvres, books. 

Vous auriez la fievre si You would have a fever if 

vous mangiez de ce you ate of that fruit* 

fruit, 

Je serais mortiJie,s J ll per I should be mortified, if he 

dait son proces, should lose his law-suit. 

It is sometimes used, instead of the future, after the 
conjunction que : ex. 
II a promts qu'iZ men He has promised to come, 

drait, or that he would come. 

This tense is often called the uncertain tense, because it 
expresses an action made uncertain by the conditional 
that follows it ; and some grammarians place it among the 
tenses of the subjunctive mood, though it is very certain 
that it never is governed by any of the conjunctions 
which require a subjunctive mood after them. 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

Compound of the Present. 
The compound of the present is employed in two differ- 
ent in aimers. 



161 

1. It expresses an action past in an indeterminate time, 
out not very far distant fiom the time we speak : thus we 
must say, 

J'ai vu mademoiselle voire I have seen your §ister, and 
scsiir et lid ai parle, spoken to her. 

Le vol de Prusse a conquis The king of Prussia has 
la Sites ie, conquered Silesia. 

Cela s'est passe avanla- That has passed SLdY&nta.- 
geusement pour voire cousin, geously for your cousin. 

In the above sentence, the action is certainly past, but 
the time when it passed is neither determined nor specified. 

2. It expresses a time definite and determinate, but of 
which there yet remains some part to elapse : ex. 

Lcs fruits ont tres-bien Fruits have very well sue- 

reussi, cette annee, ceeded this year. 

jYous n J &vor>s pas eu beau- We have not had much snow 

coup de neige cet hiver 3 this winter. 

// a plu touie ceite semaine, It has rained all this week, 

tout ce mo'tSy all this month. 

Nous avons vu d?eiranges We have seen strange things 

chases dans ce siecle, in this century. 

In the above sentences, this year, this weeh y this toiler, 
kc. are times which still last, and are not yet elapsed. 

To express an action recently past, we sometimes make 
use of the verb venir, immediately followed by de, and the 
verb in the infinitive mood: ex. 

Je viens de le voir passer, I have just seen him go by, 
Le vox vient d'arriver, The king is bid just arrived 

Elle vient d'expirer, She is but just dead. 

T\\e same tense may be expressed by the verb faire. 
preceded by the negation we, and followed by the conjunc- 
tion que, with an infinitive preceded by de : ex. 

// ne fait que d'arriver, He is but just arrived. 

Je ne fais que de soriir, I have bid just gone out. 

a 

N. B. This particle de is here indispensable, because, 
without it, the expression would have quite another sense, 
and would express a continuation or a frequent reiteration 
of the action : ex. 

14' 



16<2 

Vans ne faites que sortir, You do nothing but go out. 
Elle ne fait que jouer el She does nothing but play and 
danser, dance. 

Compound of. the Imperfect. 
This tense expresses an action passed before another 
which is past also ; but with* this difference, that the ac- 
tion expressed by this tense is the principal object of the 
person who speaks, and the following sentence is subor- 
dinate to that expressed by the compound of the imper- 
fect. So that, though the time of that subordinate sen- 
tence be defined, that of the principal sentence is not the 
less indeterminate, because the former has no influence 
on the latter. As when we say, 

Nous avions dine lorsquHl We had dined, when he ar- 
arriva, rived, 

our principal object is to express the action of dining as 
past, without determining at what time, but only before an 
action which is past also, without, however, the latter be- 
ing a consequence of the former : for, we do not mean to 
say, that he stayed, or waited, till we had dined, to arrive 

Compound of the Preterite. 
This tense also expresses an action past or done before 
another which is likewise past : and it is determined by 
the following sentence, which is the principal object of 
the attention. Thus when we say, 

Quand Us eurent acheve When they had done play- 
de jouer, Us se mirent a ing, they began sing- 

chanter, ing. 

We mean at first to convey that they began singing, and 
that it was not till they had done playing: in which case, 
the action of having done playing, is subordinate to*this, 
they began singing, and consequently the latter determines 
the time of the other. 

The following observation is very plain, and will in 
some manner fix the use of the above tense, viz. that it is 
hardly ever used except after the conjunctions. 

Jlussitot que, ) ( Apres que, After * 

Wabord que, > As soon as 5 < Lorsque, ) « r , 

Des que, ) ( Quand, ) 



163 

which never precede a compound of the imperfect, unless 
the verb express a custom or habit. 

Lastly, we must use the compound of the preterite when 
the adverb bientot, soon, precedes or follows the yerb was 
or had, to express an action or tiling as done and accom- 
plished : ex. 

Ij affaire fut bientot faite, The business was soon over 
J'eus bientot Jini de man- I had soon done eating. 
ger, 

Compound of the Future. 

The name of. this tense seems at first to convey a con- 
tradiction : what is meant by it is, not that an action can 
be future and past at the same time, but only that the ac- 
tion, which is to come, will be past when another action 
shall happen, or even before it happens : ex. 

Je serai parti quand vous I shall be gone when you 

reviendrez, (shall) come back. 

Quand vous aurez fini vos When you (shall) have done 

affaires, vous viendrez me your business, you shall 

trouver, come to find me. 

In the first sentence, / shall be gone, which is a 
future time with respect to the present we speak in ? 
will be a past time by the time you will or purpose to 
arrive, &.c. 

Compound of the Conditional. 

This tense generally supposes a condition, as the con- 
ditional present, with this difference, that the condition 
taking place, the action expressed by the verb in the 
conditional is accomplished, and consequently in a past 
time : ex. 

Je vous aurais ecrit il y a I icould have ivrilten to you 
un mois, si feusse su a month ago, if I had 
voire adresse, known your direction. 

The indicative mood has another tense, formed by the 
compound of the present of the verb avoir, joined to a 
participle passive, which has not been inserted in the pre- 
ceding tenses, on account of its being seldom used : ex, 



1G4 

Qucmd j'ai eu dine, je suis When I (have) had dined, 

parti, I set out. 

But it is more elegant and natural to say, 
Jlpres avoir dine, je suis After I had dined, I set 

parti, - out. 

TENSES of the SUBJUNCTIVE or CONJUNCTIVE 
MOOD. 

The subjunctive or conjunctive has no future distin- 
guished from the present, because the present of the sub- 
junctive likewise expresses a future tense : ex. 

Je ne brois pas quHl vieime, I do not think he will come 

4dd the following observations to the latter : 

1. When the verb which precedes the conjunction is in 
the present or future of the indicative, and when we do 
not mean to express an action passed in the second verb, 
we must put this last verb in the present of the subjunc- 
tive mood : ex. 

Je souhaite que vous reus- I wish you may succeed in 

sissiez dans voire cntreprise, your undertaking. 
J'attendrai qu r il vienne, I will wait till he come. 

2. When the verb which is before the conjunction is in 
some of the past tenses, or conditional, and we wish not 
to designate by the second verb a past time more distant 
than that of the first verb, we must put this second verb 
in the preterite of the subjunctive : 

Alexandre ordonna que ions Alexander ordered, that all 
ses sujets Z'adorassent his subjects should wor- 
comrae un dieu, ship him like a god. 

Je voulais que vous ecrivis- I unshed you to write to 

siez a voire sxur, your sister. 

11 souhaiterait que vous He ivould wish you to take 

more becoming meas- 
ures. 

3. The compound of the present of the subjunctive 
mood is used- when we speak of an action past and accom- 
plished with regard to the tense of the verb" which pre- 
cedes the conjunction ; and this tense is generally the pre- 
sent, compound of the present, or future of the indica- 
tive : ex. 



165 



h doute qu'avcun philo- 

sophe ait jamais bien 

connu P union cle Pame 

avec le corps , 
11 afallu quefaie consul- 

te tous les medecins, 
Je n'aurai garde d^y oiler, 

que je ?i'aie recu quel 

que assurance, d'etre 

bien accueilli, 

4. After the imperfect, preterite 



I doubt whether any philo- 
sopher have ever well 
understood the union ol 
the soul with the body. 

I wets obliged to consult all 
the physicians. 

I shall by no means go thi- 
ther, till I have received 
some assurance of being 
welcome. 

compound of the 



imperfect, of the indicative, or one of the two condition- 
al.-, we use the compound of the preterite of the sub- 
junctive mood ; likewise after the conjunction if, when 
preceding a compound tense : ex. 



J'ignorais que vous eussiez 
embrasse cette profes- 
sion Id, 

Vous w'avez pas cru que je 
fusse arrivee avant voids, 

Nous aurions ete f aches que 
vous vous fussiez adresse 
a (Pautres qu?a nous. 



I 



did not know you had 
embraced that profes- 
sion. 

You did not believe I 
should Juive arrived be- 
fore you. 

We should have been sorry 
if you had applied to any 
others but us. 



NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 

A tense is composed of numbers ; that is, the singulai 
and the plural. 

That there are three persons has already been observ- 
ed under the personal pronouns ; we have only to remark, 
that some of these three persons are always joined to the 
verb as its nominative case, therefore the verb must agree 
with that nominative in number and person : ex. 



Nousfaisons, We do. 
Fous faites, You or ye do 
lis font, They do. 



Jcfais, I do. 
Tufais, Thou dost. 
II fait, He does. 

The pronoun vous, you, denotes the second person sin- 
gular and plural, with this difference, that when we speak 
to a person onlv, the attribute, or qualifying noun must bG 
put in the singular : ex. 



1G6 

Vous etes marie, and not You are married. 

maries, 

Vous eliez general de Var- You were general of the 

mee, and not generaux, army. 

But we must say maries. and gineraux, if we speak to 
many. 

When the verb has two or three nouns or pronouns as its 
nominatives, it must be put in the plural, though all these 
nominatives be in the singular ; because two or more nouns 
in the singular are equivalent to a plural, with regard to 
verbs as well as to adjectives and participles passive : ex. 

Mon frere ei ma sceur sont My brother and sister are 
partis , gone. 

This has already been mentioned in the adjectives. 

If, among these nominatives, one is of the first person 
and the other of the second, or one is of the second and 
the other of the third, the verb must agree with the first 
in preference to the second, and with the second in pref- 
erence to the third ; observing that, in French, the person 
spoken to, must be named first ; and the person speak- 
ing, is to be mentioned the last : we must therefore say, 

Cest vous et moi qui avons It is you and I who have 

decouvert tout ce complot, discovered all that plot. 

Ce rtest ni vous, ni ma It is neither you, nor my 

sceur qui avez ouvert la sister, who have opened 

parte, the door. 

Vous, mon pere, et moi, You, my father, and I will 

partirons, demain, set out to-morrow. 

The pronoun relative qui, in these and the like senten- 
ces, always takes place of the first or second person, and 
only agrees with the others in number ; it is for this reason 
we must say, 
Cest moi qui suis cause de It is / who am the cause 

ce malheur, of that misfortune. 

Cest vous qui avez revile It is you who have revealed 

ce secret, that secret. 

Ce rtfest ni lui, ni moi qui It is neither he nor 1 who 

/'avons fait, have done it.. 

There are four conjugations in the French language. 
Each is distinguished by the termination of the verb in 
the infinitive mood 



1G7 



The first makes er, 
The second ir, 

The third evoir : 

The fourth re, 



as dormer, to give, 
as pumr, to punish. 
as receuoir, to receive, 
as rendre, to render. 



N. B. It is necessary that the learner should be well 
acquainted with the manner of conjugating the two fol- 
lowing verbs, because of the frequency of their occur- 
rence in sentences, and in forming the compound tenses 
of all other verbs. 

CONJUGATION of the AUXILIARY VERB 

AVOIR, TO HAVE. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Compound of the Present. 
Avoir eu, to have had. 
Compound of the Past 



Present. 
Avoir, to have. 

Participle active. 
Ay ant, having. 

Participle passive 
*Eii, had. 



Ay ant eu, having had. 



Indicative 
Singular. 



Present. 
J'ai, I have 
Tu as, thou hast, 
II a, he has. 
Elle a, she has. 

Imperfect. Singular. 
J'avais, I had. 
Tu avais, thou hadst. 
// avait, he had. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Jhus, I had. 
Tu ens, thou hadst. 
11 eui, he had. 

Future 

Taurai, I shall or will have. 
Tu auras, thou wilt, fyc. have 
// aura, he will, fyc. have. 



they have. 



Mood. 

Plural. 
Nous avons, we have. 
Vous avez, you or ye ha e 
lis out, 
Elles ont, 

> Plural. 
Nous avions, we had. 
Vous aviez, you had. 
lis avaient, they had. 

Plural. 
Nous eumes, we had. 
Vous elites, you had. 
lis eurent, they had. 

Singular. 



* Pronounce eu like the French letter u, tnroughout this verfc 



. 108 

Plural. 
Nous auronSy we shall, Sfc. have. 
Vous aurez, we will, fyc. have. 
lis auronty they will, fyc. have. 

Conditional. Singular. 
J'aurais, I should, could, would, or might have 
Tu auraisy thou wouldst, <^c, have, 
iZ aurait, he would, 4"c. have. 

Plural. 
JVbws. aurions, we should, <^c. have. 
Vous aufieZy you would, <^c. have. 
lis auraienty they would, tyc. have. 

Compound Tenses. 
They are formed by adding the participle passive, eu, 
had, to the preceding ■ 

Compound of the Present. 
J J ai eiiy Sec. I have had, fyc. 

Compound of the Imperfect. 
J J avals eu, Sec. I had had, fyc. 

Compound of the Preterite. 
J'eus eu, Sec. I had had, tyc. 

Compound of the Future. 
J^ aural eu, Sec. I will or shall have had, &c. 

Compound of the Conditional. 
J'aurais eu, Sec. I would, should, could, or might have 
liad,4ff. 

We say, also : 
J'eusse eu, &c. 

Imperative Mood. 

Present. Singular. 
Ate, have thou. 
Plural. 
Ayons, let us have. 
Ayez, have ye or you. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Que fate, that I have, or may have. 

tu aies, thou may est have. 
Halt, he may .have. 



169 

Plural. 
Que nous ayons, that we may have. 
votes ayeZj you may have. 

ils aient, they may have. 

Preterite. Singular. 

Que feusse, that I might have or had. 
tu eusses, thou mightest have. 

il euty he might have. 

Plural. 

Que nous eussions, that we might have. 
vous e-ussiezy you might have. 

ils eussenty they might have. 

Compound Tenses. 

They are formed by adding the participle passive ca, 
had, to the two preceding : ex. 

Compound of the Present. 
Que faie eu, Sec. that I may have had. 

Compound of the Preterite. 
Que feusse eu, Sec. that I might have had. 

The learner ought to conjugate the preceding verb with 
a negation : ex. 

Je n'ai pas, I have not ; 

Now n'avons pas, We have not ; 

always placing ne before the verb, and pas after it. 

CONJUGATION of the AUXILIARY VERB 

ETRE. to be. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Compound of the Present 

Etrey to be. Avoir etSy to have been. 

Participle Active. Compound of the Past. 

Elanty being. Jlijant etSy having been. 

Participle Passive. 
Etty been. 

15 



Present 
Je suis, I am. 
Tu es, thou art. 
11 est, he is. 

Imperfect. Sing. 
Tetais, I was. 
Tu etais, thou wast. 
11 etait, he was. 

Preterite. Sing. 
Jefus, I was. 
Tufas, thou wast. 
llfut, he was. 



170 

Indicative Moos 
Singular. 



Plural. 
Nous sommes, we are. 
Vous etes, you are. 
lis sont, they are. 

Plural. 
Nous etions, we were, 
Vous eliez, you were. 
lis etoient, they were. 

Plural. 
JYous fumes, we were. 
Vous Jutes, you were. 
llsfurent, they were 



Future. Singular. 
Je serai, I shall or will be. 
Tw ser«s, thou wilt, &c. be. 
11 sera, he will, &c. be. 

Plural. 
JVbiis serous, we shall, &c. be. 
Poms serez, you will. &c. be. 
Us seiont, they will, Sic. be. 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je semis, I would, cou ] d, should, or might be. 
Tu serais, thou wouldst, &c. be. 
7/ setaxt, he would, &c. be. 

Plural. 
Nous serious, we should, &c. be. 
Vous seriez, you would, &c. be. 
7/s seraient, they would, &.c. be. 

Compound Tenses. 
They are formed by adding the participle passive of 
this verb, ete, been, to the simple tenses of the Indicative 
Mood of the verb avoir : ex. 

Compound of the Present. 
Tax ete, &,c. I have been, fyc. + 

Compound of the Imperfect. 
Tavais ete, &c. I have been, fyc. 



171 

Compound of the Preterite. 
J'eus ete, &c. I had been, &c. 

Compound of the future. 
J 'aural ete, &c. I shall or will have been, &c. 

Compound of the Conditional. 

J'aurais ete, &c. I should, could, would, or might have 

been, &c. 

We say, also : 

J'eusse ete, &c. 

Imperative Mood. 

Present. Singular. 

Sois, be thou. 

Plural. 
Soyons, let us be. 
Soyez, be ye. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Que je sots, that I be, or may be. 
tu sols, thou mayest be. 
il soit, he may be. 

Plural. 
Que nous soyons, that we may be. 
vous soyez j you may be. 

Us soient, they may be. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que je fusse, that I might be, or were. 
tu fusses, thou mightest be. 
il jut, he might be. 

Plural. 
Que nous fussions, that we might be. 
vous fussiez, you might be. 

Us fussent, chey might be" . 

Compound Tenses. 
They are formed by adding the participle past of this 
verb ete, been, to the two simple tenses of the subjunctive 
mood of the verb avoir: ex. 

Compound of the Present. 
Que faie ete, that I may have been, fyc. 

Compound of the Preterite. 
Que feusse ete. Sec. that I might have been, &e. 



172 

Tins verb, as well as the preceding, is to be conjugated 
with the negation: ex. 

Je ne suis pas, I am not. 

Nous ne sommes pas, ^ We are ?2o£. 

N. B. Here it is peculiarly necessary to observe, that 
the two above verbs, avoir, to have, and etre, to be, are 
only auxiliaries when they are joined with some participle 
passive of another verb ; otherwise, etre may properly be 
called a substantive verb ; that is, a verb which only ex- 
presses the affirmation, without any inherent quality ; and 
the verb avoir is an active one, which signifies to possess. 

EXERCISES on the two AUXILIARY VERBS. 
GENERAL OBSERVATION. 

Every verb must agree with its nominative case in per- 
son and number ; but after collective nouns, such as, amas, 
foide, infinitey nombre, la pliqiart, &c, followed by a geni- 
tive, the verb must agree with that genitive in number: ex. 

La plupart de ses amis Tout Most of his friends have for- 
abandonnSy saken him. 

In order to ease the learner, the different simple tenses 
are marked in the following exercises as far as the irregu- 
lar verbs, when it is hoped every difficulty will be remo- 
ved by practice and. attention. The second person singu- 
lar, being seldom, or never used in conversation, has been 
omitted throughout the exercises on the verbs. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I have a book. 1 am happy. He has 

heureux,&&]. 

a hat which is too big. We have no 

trop,ndv. grandad}. 

money. We are not ambitious. You have 

argent. ambitieux, adj. 

a sword. You are very proud. Those girls 

orgueilleuX)'d.dj. 
have modesty ; they are virtuous. 

modesiiefi. vertueux,'ddj. 

Imp. I had a friend. - - - - I was grateful. My 

reconnaiss ant, adj . 

sister had no work ; she was lazy. We had 

ouvrage, paresseux } a.dj 



173 

a holiday ; we were very glad of it. You had 

xjcn conge j case, adj. 

company ; but you were not ready. - - Your brothers 
compagniej. mais,c. j>re/,adj. 

had learning ; they were loved by every body. 
savoir 7 m. aime,p.p. de 

Pret. (As soon as) I had a fine horse, I was 
Des que,c. 

merry. My cousin had a little garden *, he 

de bonne humenr. consilium. 

was ingenious. As soon as we had bread, wc 

eiait adroit 5 adj. pain,m. 

were satisfied You had fine weather ; you were 

rassasHyp.jp. temps 

pleased. - Your friends had beautiful flowers ; 

content ? adj. 

they were very careful of them 

soigneuXyOd]. 
Fut. I shall have discretion ; I shall be prudent. 
discretion^. 
- - Miss White shall have a bird which will be very 

oiseau,m. 

tame. We shall have no books, we shall not 

apprivoise. didj. 

be learned. You shall have pens and paper ; you 

savant, adj. 

will be busy. The English will have a good 

occupe^d]. 

admiral ; they will be victorious. 

amiraLm. victoneax, adj . 

Co.nd. I could have a pretty dog. I would 

jo/i, adj. chien.m. 

not be troublesome. Mr. Thomas would have 

importuned]. 
good wine : it would be a delicious thing. We 

ce . delicieux ,adj. chose,?. 

would have a dictionary : we would not be negligent 

. y u would have good officers ; you would be 

invincible. These ladies would have a better 

ini incible, <idj. 

reception ; they would be thankful. 
a c c if til, in . re c onn ais s a nl, adj . 

15* 



174 

Imperative Mood. 

Have patience and be indulgent.* Let her have a 

gown ; let her be happy. Let us have at least 

au moins, adv. 

some gratitude ; let us be diligent. Let thern 

reconnoissancefi 
have partridges ; let them be merry. 

perdrixf. joijeux^d]. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. That I may have riches. That I may 

he charitable. That he may have scholars. 

That he may be attentive. That .we may have a 

altcntif^d]. 

good house. That we may be well lodged. - - 

bien^dv, loge y p.p. 
That you may have your money ; that you may 

argefit,m. 

be paid. That they may have apples ; that 

paye,ip.p. ; 
they may be ripe. 

mwr, adj. 

Pret. That I might have generosity. That I 

generositefi. 

might not be poor. That he might have no 

pauvre y ad]. 

pleasure. - That he might be uneasy. That 

plaisir. - inquiet^d], 

we might have our share. That we might not 

partfi 
be deceived. - - - That you might have a couple 
irompes,p.p. couple fi 

of fowls. - - - That you might be pleased. That 

content j adj. 

they might have no pension. That they might 

not be rewarded. 

recompenses ? p.p 

Promiscuous EXERCISES upon the COMPOUND 
TENSES. 
I have had (a great deal) of trouble ; I have not 
bien peinefi 

* Remember the last observation, page 172. that the second per- 
son plural must be used throughout the imperative mood. 



175 

been rewarded. Your brother would nave had 

leave if he had been diligent. If you had 

permission, 

married him, you would have had a tyrant, 

epousejp.j*. tyran, m 

instead of a husband ; you never could have been 

au lieii,p. mari y m. ne jamais 

happy. If we had fought, we could not 

combattu^.ip. 

have been conquered. Thomas has had two 

vaincus,p.p. 

holidays, because he has been very active. 

conge, parceque,c. actif,a.d]. 

If your friend could have had a better watch, he 

montrej. 

would not have been cheated. Your uncle and 

trompSyip.p. 

my brother have been wet. You could have 

mouilles ,]).]). 
killed a hare if you had had a gun. 
tue,ip.p. lievre ,m. fusil ,rn. 

After these exercises the learner ought to conjugate 
the two foregoing verbs, throughout the several tenses of 
the indicative mood only, first with an interrogation affir- 
mative, and then with an interrogation negative : ex. 

? CO 

Singular. 
Affirmatively. 
Jii-je ? have I ? Suis-je ? am I i 

Jl-t-il ? has he ? Est-il ? is he ? 

Monfrere a-t-il ? has my brother ? 

Sa fille est-elle ? is her daughter ? 

Negatively. 
J^ai-je pas ? have I not ? Ne suis-je pas ? am I not? 
JV a-t-il pas ? has he not ? JS^est-il pas ? is he not? 
Ma sceur rCa-t-elle pas '? has not my sister ? 
Voire cousin rtest-il pas ? is not your cousin ? 
Plural. 
Affirmatively. 



Jlvons-iwus' ? ha\e we ? 
Jhez-vous ? have you ? 
Gnt-Us ? have they ? 



Sommes-nous ? are we ? 
Etes-vous ? are you ? 

Sont-ils ? are the v r 



176 

Vos j rares onl-ils ? have you brothers ? Sec. 

Ses filles sont-elles 1 are his daughters ? &c 

Negatively. 

JY\ivons-nous pas ? - have we not ? 

JY\ivez-vous pas ? have you not ? 

J^Pont-ils pas ? have they not ? 

Ses enfans n'ont-ils pas ? have not his children ? 

JYe sommes-nous pas ? are we not ? 

N* ctes-vous pas ? are you not ? 

JYe soni-ils pas ? are they not ? 

Mes samrs ne sont-elles pas ? are not my sisters ? &c. 

N. B. In the interrogations, it must be observed, that 
when there is a. noun standing as a nominative to the verb, 
the pronouns il, elle, nous, vous, Us, elles, though not ex- 
pressed in English, must be expressed in French imme- 
diately after the verb, according to the person and num- 
ber ; and when the verb terminates with a vowel, a -t- is 
to be added in the third person singular between the verb 
and the pronoun, to avoid the hiatus, the noun beginning 
the phrase: ex. 

Votre oncle a-t-il des en- Has your uncle any Chil- 
eans ? dren ? 
that is, Your uncle, has he any children ? 

Mon cousin aura -t-il conge'! Will my cousin have a holi* 

day? 
that is, My cousin, will he have a holiday ? 

The same rule must be observed in the conjugation of 
the other verbs : ex. 

Votre frere joue-t-i\ du vi- Does your brother play on 

olon ? the violin ? 

Sa soeur dinera-t-elle ici Will her sister dine here to- 

aujourdliui ? day ? 

But if the sentence begin with que interrogative, or an 
adverb followed by a noun, the pronoun is not to be ex- 
pressed, and that noun is to be put after the verb : ex. 

Que fait votre $ceur ? ' What is your sister doing ? 

Comment se porte Monsieur How does your brother ? 
voire frere ? 

When, in French, we make a general interrogation 



177 

concerning a sudden pain, misfortune, accident, he. we say, 
QiScst-ce que chst ? What is the matter ? 

But if speaking to, or of a. person, we must use the verb 
avoir, and follow the above rule : ex. 

What, is the mailer 



Q?.t'avez-vous ? 
QitVt-il ? 

Qw'aviez-vous ? 

Qw'avoit vatre 
matin 1 



you 



the matter 



Wltll 

ivith 
with 



What is 

him 1 
What was the matter 
you ? 
ur ce What was the matter with 
your sister this morning ? 

The learner will have no trouble in going through the 
other simple tenses of the indicative mood. ; and as for 
the compounds, it needs only to be remembered, that eu, 
had, or tie, been, is to be added to the simple tenses of 
the verb avoir, to have : ex. 

Jli-je eu ? have I had ? 

JSHai-je pas eu ? have I not had ? &.e. 

Jli-je ete ? have I been ? 

JWai-je pas ete ? have I not been ? &.c. 

Promiscuous EXERCISES on the preceding RULES. 

Have I my books ? - - Am I not unhappy to 

malheureux,3.(\] de 
have lost his friendship ? - - Has he no money ? 

penfo,p.p. amitie ,f. 
Is my sister arrived ? - - Has not your father a great 
arrivee,p.p. 

deal of friendship for you ? What is the matter 

with you ? - - Have not your parents sent you 

envoy e, p. p. 

all the money which you wanted ? Have we 

demt aviez,v. besoin. 

not a garden ? Are we not very happy ? 

Have you a good gun ? Are you dexterous ? 

a droit, adj. 
Have not my brother and sister a beautiful coach > - - 
Are not Paul and Thomas two pretty children ? 

jo/i,adj. 



178 

Are your brothers arrived ? Are you not glad 

to see them ? What is the matter with him ? 

de voir,ir. 

Have they not spoken to him ? - - Had you not a 

par/e,p.p. " 
little dog ? - - Was not your paper very good ? - Are not 
the English ladies generally handsomer than 

generalement, ad v. 
the French ? - - Shall you have occasion for your dic- 

besoin,m. de 

tionary ? Shall I not have the pleasure to see 

de 

you to-morrow ? Were you not in the room ? 

demain } Sidv. chambrej. 

Shall we not have leave ? Will they not be 

Singly ? Could you not have had a better watch ? 

fdche sad}. 

If France were as rich as England, would 

$i,c. eiait 

it not be the best* country in the world ? 

ce,pro. 

Will you not be ashamed ? Has not your 

honieiix^d]. 
friend had bad weather ? - - What was the 

r.iauvais^d]* temps ? 
matter with him this morning ? - - - - Had not our 
admiral better seamen than yours ? - - Has he been 
mate lot 

victorious ? - - Would not your hat be too big ? 

« iciorieux,ad] . grandad] . 

Is not your sister older than mine ? - - Are you 

&ge&&]- 
not happier than if you were married ? Shall 

mart£,p.p. 

not John have a holiday, if he be diligent ? - - Has not 

Jean est 

your cousin more money than you ? - - Was not your 
wine very dear ? 

The learner will soon be convinced how necessary it is 
to know these two verbs perfectly well ; because, inde- 

* See the Degrees of Comparisons p. 60 S.c, 



179 

pendeiitly of being constantly used, the compound tenses 
of all the others are formed with them. When he is well 
acquainted with their usage, he will only have to add the 
participle passive to any of their tenses : ex. 

J'ai aime, I have loved or I did love. 

Je n'aipas chante, I have not sung or I did not sing. 

Ai-je parte ? have I spoken ? or did I speak ? 

JVai-je pas etudie ? have I not studied ? or did I nol 

study ? 
Avez-vous danse 1 have you danced ? or did you dance ? 
JY } avez vous pas ecrit ? have you not written ? or did you 

not write ? 
Je suis pum, I am punished. 
Je ne suis pas attendu, I am not expected. 
Suis-je aime ? am I loved ? 
Ne suis-je pas perdu ? am I not undone ? 
Etes-vous marie ? are you married ? 
Netes-vous pas convaincu ? are you not convinced ? 

REMARK on the Verb ETRE, to be. 

In English, when this verb immediately precedes any 
noun signifying old, hungry, thirsty, cold, hot, cr afraid, it 
should be rendered in French by avoir, to have, and the 
adjective must be changed into its substantive : ?x. 

Quel age avez-ruows ? How old are you ? 

*/*'ai sept ans, I am seven years old. 

Avez-roHS faim ? Are you hungry ? 

Non, mats j'ai soif, No, but I am thirsty, &c. 

EXERCISES. 

How old is your daughter ? She is seven 

Q*ieZ,pro. jillefi 

years old. My son will be eleven years old 

an,m. <xn fils 7 m. 

(in the) month of April.--- I was very 

au mais,m. JfitvrU. grand, adj. 

hungry when I arrived. Were you not 

quand,c. suis arrive,p.p. 

very thirsty ? - - He is not afraid. - - You will 

grand, adj. peur. 

soon be warm. Are you not cold ? - - 

bientot,B.dv. chaud, froid ? 



180 

Mow old are these two young children ? The 

enfant y vt\. 
one is three years old, and the other is not yet 

encore>n.dv. 

four. Was not my sister more than ten years old 

when she died ? 
yuandyzdv. mourut^v. 

FIRvST CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Parl-er, to speak. 

Participle active. # ar<i, speaking. 

Participle passive. e,m. ee,f. spoken. 

Compound Tenses. 
Present. Avoir parte, to have spoken. 

Past. Ay ant parte, having spoken. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. Singular. 
Je parl-e, 1 speak, or I do speak, or I am speaking. f 
Tu eSj thou speakest. 
12 e, he speaks. 

Plural. 
Nous *onSj we speak. 
Vous ez y you speak. 

Its ent, they speak. 

Imperfect. Singular. 
Je parl-*ais 9 I was speaking, spoke, or did speak 
Tu %is, thou wast speaking, 8cc. 
11 *ait, he was speaking, &cc. 

* Verbs in this conjugation, the root of which terminates in g or c, 
immediately succeeded by a or o, require, for the softening of their 
sound, that an e be added to the g, and a cedilla to the c. Stars are 
placed where these alterations are required. 

f When in English, a participle active is joined to any of the tenses 
of the auxiliary verb to be, to express the continuation of the action, the 
auxiliary must be left out in French, and the participle put in the same 
tense, &c. with the auxiliary that is suppressed ; 



Je priais, I was desiring ; 
Nous chanlions,we were singing, 
lis ecriraient, they would be 
dancing ; writing ; 

And not Je suis parlant, vous etes parlant, j'etais priant a &c. nous 

Bcrons dtijisant, ils seraient tcrivant, &c. 



Je parte* I am speaking 

Vous parlez, You are speaking ; 

JVbwi danserons, we shall be 



Abies 

r V,?/.s 
lis 



181 

Plurnl. 
ions j we wore speaking, &c 
i z, vnu were speaking, ke. 



*aten/ 3 they were speaking, Sec*. 
Preterite. Singular 
Je-parl— <7?. I spoke, or did speak. 
Tm *aSj thou spokest. 
7/ # «j he spoke. 

Plural. 
J, we spoke. 
Vaus "'-fiics. you spoke. 
lis er&ni. they spoke. 

Future. Singular 
Je parl-erat, I shall or will speak. 






M\ us 
Faus 

lis 



a as, thou shalt or wilt speak. 
he shall or will speak. 

Plural. 
we shall or will speak. 



alJ c;- will speak 

tall or will speak. 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je parl-emis, I should, would, or might speak 
era's, thoo shouldst, §■<:. speak. 
eroil ; he should, eak. 

Plural. 
ms, we should, eye. speak 
r. you shoulc : Cv, : , speak. 
eratent, they should, kc. speak. 

Compound Tenses. 

J\il parle, I have spoken 

J'ui:.is parte. I had spoken. 

Teus parte , I had spoken. 

J'aurai parlL I shall or will have spoken. 

J' a 16} 1 should,, would, or could 

have spoken. 

We say, also : 
. J'eusse,parle, d 

Imperative Mood. 
Present . Singular 
Pari-': -peak thou. 
16 



It 

JVoMS 

Vi ItS 

lis 



Present. 

Imperfect 

Preterite. 

Future. 

Conditional 



132 

Plural. 
*ons, let us speak' 
ez, speak ye. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. Singular. 
Que je parl-e, that I may speak, or I speak. 
tu es, thou mayest speak. 
il e, he may speak. 

Plural. 
nous ions, that we may speak. 
vous iez, you may speak. 
ils entj they may speak. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que je pari-* asse, that I might speak, or I spoke. 
tu * asses thou mightest speak. 

il # city he might speak. 

Plural. i 
nous * cessions, that we might speak. 
vous * assiez y you might speak. 
ils * assent, they might speak. 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. Que fate parley that I may have spoken. . 

Preterite. Que feusse parley that I might have spoken. 

After the same manner are conjugated about 2700 reg- 
ular verbs. The following are excepted : viz. 

Alter, being very irregular, will be seen among the ir- 
regular verbs. 

Envoy er is only irregular in the future and conditional 
present : as, instead of saying fenvoyerai, I will send, Sfc. 
j* envoy erqisy I would send, fyc. according to this conjuga- 
tion, we say, 

Future. 

Singular. Plural. 

J'enverrai, I will send Nous enverrons. 

Tu enverraSy Vous enverrez. 

II enverray lis enverront 



183 

Conditional- 
Singular. Plural, 
tPenverraiSi I would send. Nous enverrions. 
Tu cnverrais, Vous enverriez. 
II enverrait, lis enverroient. 
Puer (sentir mauvais.) This verb is only used in the infinitive 
mood, present *,ense, imperfect, future of the indicative, and condi- 
tional. Formerly this verb was irregular in the three persons of 
the present tense of the indicative mood ; as je pus, tu pus, il put ; 
custom has, however, reformed the abuse, and will have it, Jepue, 
tu pues, il pue. 

Verbs ending in ayer and oyer, as essayer, to try, envoy er, to 
send, change y into i wherever the letter y is immediately followed 
by an e mute : ex. fessaie, tu essaies, il essaie, fenvoie, tu envoies, il 
envoie, Sfc. 

In the verbs ending in ger, the g must always be followed by a 
mute e before the vowels a, o : Manger, je mangeafs nous mange- 
ous, il mangea. 

Verbs ending in cer take a cedilla under the c before the vowels 
a, o: Percer ; jepergai, tupcrcas, nous per cons. 

Verbs ending in er, which have the final syllable of the infini- 
tive preceded by a close e, change this close e in open e before a 
mute syllable: Repeter, je repeterai ; erperer, jesplre, regner, tu 
regnes, vous regnerez. 

Verbs ending in er, which have the final syllable of the infinitive 
preceded by a mute e, change this mute e in open e before a mute 
syllable : Lever je leve, je lever ai ; semur, tu seines, vous seiner er. 

Verbs ending in eler or eter, double the consonants I and t be- 
fore a mute e : Appeller, fappelle, jappellerai, nous appellerons, 
jeier, tujettes, tu jeiteras. vous jcticrer. 

The learner having conjugated a verb affirmatively, and nega- 
tively, ought to conjugate two others with an interrogation, affirma- 
tive, and negative, in the indicative mood only, and so on through 
the other conjugations, before he attempts the exercises : ex. 
Affirmatively. 
Manges-tu ? dost thou eat ? 
Mange-t-il f dost he eat ? 
Parlons-nous ? do we speak ? &c. 
Negatively. 
JVe parle-je pas ? do I not speak ? 

Ma soeur ne chante-t-elle pas ? does not my sister sing ? 

JV. B. In many verbs, common usage does not admit an inter- 
rogation in the first person singular present, of the indicative 
mood. — Instead of saying Mange-je°£ Do I eat? Punis-je ? Do I 
punish? &c. we say, 

Est-ce que /e mange? Est-ce qaejepunisf &c. 

Some verbs ending in e mute, in the first person singular pre- 



184 

Bent of the indicative mood, change the e mute into acute e with an 
acute accent, and/e after it ; as, parle-je. 

It has before been observed, that the compound tenses are easily 
formed, by adding the participle passive of the verb to any of the 
tenses of the auxiliaries avoir to have, or etre, to be, as they have 
been conjugated, either affirmatively, negatively, or interroga- 
tively : ex. 

Anrmatively. 

Tax danse, I have danced, or I did dance. 

Je rtai pas parle, I have not spoken,- or I did not speak. 

Interrogatively- affirmatively. 
Avezvous chante? Have you sung, or did you sing? 
Interrogatively-negatively. 
N*a-t-il pas mange? Has he not eaten, or did he not eat ? 
Observe that we make use of 

Mener, To take, to carry, 

Amener, To bring, 

Emmener. To carry, or take away 

and all the compound verbs of mener, whenever we speak of 
rational, or irrational beings to which nature has given the fa- 
culty of walking, if they be not deprived of it through illness 
or accident: in all other cases we make use of 
Porter. To carry, to take, 

Apporter, To bring, 

importer, To carry, or take away, 

and all the compounds of porter. 

N. B. It must be necessarily observed here, previously to the 
learner's translating the following exercises that the English aux- 
iliary verbs, have, am, do, did, will, shall, can, yet, may, icould, 
could, should, might, and often ought, are most commonly used, in 
that language, to avoid that repetition of a preceding verb, or in 
answer to a question or foregoing sentence ; to avoid the repetition 
of that verb, and often of one or more pronouns; But in French, 
the verb, expressed in the first number, or part of the sentence, 
must always be repeated, as well as the pronouns which it may 
govern : ex\ 

Je vous prie de porter de- I beg of you to carry that 

main cette letire a Mon- letter to-morrow to Mr. 

sieur D. D. 

Je la lui porterav avec plai- I will, with pleasure, (carry 

sir, it io him,) understood. 

Vous ne poumez pas ap- You could not learn that 

prendre cette legon en dix lesson in ten days. 

jours, 



135 



// me semble que je pour rais 
Vapprendre, 

Jittendez-vous ros* sceurs au- 

jour cV hui ? 
Out, nous les attendons, 

Voire frtre ecrit-il a M. 

voire pere ? 
Old, il lid ecrit a present, 

Jtpprenez-vous le Frangcds ? 
Ouiyje Papp rends, 

Avez-vous achete les livres 
doni vous nfavez parte ? 



It seems to me as if I 
could (learn it,) under- 
stood. 

Do you expect your sisters 
to-day ? 

Yes, we do, (expect them,) 
understood. 

Is your brother writing to 
your father ? 

•Yes, he is now, (writing to 
him,) understood. 

Are you learning French ? 

Yes, I am, (learning it,) un- 
derstood. 

Have you bought the 
books which you mention- 
ed to me ? 

No, I have not yet, (bought 
them,) understood. 

Ought they not to let their 
father know that their 
brother is in distress ? 



Certainly, they ought, (to lei 
him know it,) understood. 



Won, je ne Ics ai pas encore 
achetes, 

J\"e devraient-ils pas faire 
savoir a leur pere que 
. leur frere est dans la de- 
tresse ? 

Certaiiiement, Us devraient 
It lu i faire savoir, 

EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 
Pres. I play sometimes but I ne- 

jou-er,v. quelqucfois,adv. mais,c. ne ja- 

win. How much does your brother 

gagn-erjV. Combien 7 a.dv. ^r- 

for his board ? We do not command ; 

pension,?. up command-er,v. 



ver 

mens, ad v. 
give 

donn-er.v. 
we entreat 



- - You always 



borrow 



you 



pri-er,v. 
never lend. 



toujours.adv. emprunt-er,Y. 
- You are always speaking when 
pret-er,v. quand,adv> 

I write. Why do you not grant 

eciis,v. Pourquoi,5.dv. ucr accord-er } v. 

him that favour ? What do they ask 

grace,?. dcmand-er,v. 



yuu 



16* 



136 

Imp. I was desiring them to sing a sonn\ - 

pri-er y v. de chant-erf?. chanson y (. 

She was not speaking to you. Were we not jok- 

badi- 

ing ? Were you not scolding them when I came ? 

n-er^w grond-er 7 v. vins y v 

Yes, I was. They were eating fish. 

mang-er^r. poisson,m. 

Pret. I spoke to them (a long while.) Did 

long temps, adv. 
not the king forgive them ? - . - No, he did not. 

rpijUi . pardonn-er 7 v. 

We wept for joy when we found her. 

pleur-erjt. de joie, trouv-er^. 

Why did you not play on Friday last ? They 

*& Vendredi e?ermer,adj. 

fastened the man to a tree, and then 

li-er,v. arbre,m. msuite^dv. 

lobbed him of his watch,* gold ring, and all the 
vol-er,v <£n montrefi< b ague ,f. 

money he had in his pocket. - - The soldiers first 

pochefi d\ibord,&dv\ 

pillaged the town, and then slaughtered without 
piU-er,v. puis egorg-er } v. 

pity, the old men, women and children. 
pitie vieillardyixi. 

Fut. I will buy a watch the first time I 

achet-er y v. foisfi 

go to London. Will not your father send 

irai y v. envoy-er^v. 

you to school this winter ? What shall we give 

ecolefi hiver y m. 

him ? - - - Will you not carry the children to the 

men-eVyV. enfant } m. 

play ? They will empty the bottle if you 

comedie y L vid-er,v. bouteilte } £. 

do not take it away. 
xjcr* eMport-er,v. </7> 

Cond. I would lend them money, if 

pret-er,v. leur 

they were not so idle. - Wouid not your 

paressettXy&dj. 



187 

mother despise such 2 a 1 conduct ? - - Why should 

mepris-cr,v. fe/,adj. conduitefi. 

we send them thither ? I am sure you would 

sur jadj. 

marry her, if she were rich. Would they 

epous-er,v. etait Wc/ie,adj. 

not pay us, if they had money ? 

paij-cryV. 

Imperative Mood. 
Bridle my horse and bring him to 

Brid-er,v. cheval.m. amen-erjv. 

me. Give a chair to that lady. - - Let her not 

chaise,f. damef. 

(come up,) for I am engaged. Let us carry those 

mont-er,v. c«r,c. occupe,p.p. 

peaches to Mrs. D # **. Do not neglect your 

peche£ Mme neglig-er,v. 

affairs. J promise that I will not.- Let them hunt. 

affaire ,f. promets,v. chasser^v. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Pres. That I may help you. - - Though* he 

aid-er y v. Quoique 3 c. 

do not approve of my plan. Provided* 

approuv-er^v. *&•> plan y m. Pourvu qw ,c 

we avoid their company. That you may 

evit-cr, v. compagnie :,f. 

try that gun. - - - That they may not com- 

eprouv-er,v, 
mand. 

Pret. That I might changef my opinion. - - 

chang-er aV opinion. 

That he might eat| an apple. That we might not 

pomme,?. 
fall into their hands. - - - That you might 

tomb-er,v. dans, p. main. 

encourage! the industrious. - - - That they might 
enc o urag-er y Y . industrieux, adj . 

* Conjunctions which require the subjunctive mood, as will be seen 
hereafter. 

t See the notes, page ISO. 



138 

exercise their talents, -- That I might pronounce. - 
c,xerc-er,v. talent ,m. prononc-er,v. 

That we might begin. * 

commene-er ,v . 
Promiscuous EXERCISES on the COMPOUND 
TENSES. 

I have forgotten to bring your penknife. 

oubli-er,v. de canif^n. 

lie has not yet spoken to us. - - Has she brought 

encore, adv. vcn 

her work with her ? - -Yes she has. - - Have we not gain- 

ed our cause ? - - Why have you not yet begun 

er 9 v. commenc-er,v. 

your exercise? You had taken the mustard 

theme, m. emport-er,v. moutarde,?. 

away. You would have judged more favour- 

•Jor* juger } v. favo- 

ably of him. - Stay here till* 

rablement,a.dv. Rest-er,v. ici, adv. jusqu J a ce que,c. 

we have dined. Could we not have assisted 

din-er, v . subj . aid-er,Y. 

that family ? - - They have broken all the panes 

famillefi cass-er,v. carreau,m. 

of glass in their windows, because they had 

nitre de : p. fenetre,f. parceque^c. 

not illuminated as it had been ordered*. - - 

illumin-er ,y . comme, ad v. ordonn-erjV. 

I shall have 2 dined "-soon. We would have 

bientotjadv. 
sent* them to prison, if they had resisted. - - 

cnv-oy-er,v. en prison f. resisi-er } v. 

That we may have denied the fact. Had you 

ni-er,v. fait,m. 

not imitated their manners ? - - - They had not exe- 
hnit-er,v. manicrej. exe~ 

cuted his commands. Had I not light- 

cut-er,v. commandement,m. allu- 

ed the fire ? They would have carried him to 

mer,v. feu,m. 

the concert if I had not hindered* them 

empech-er,v. 
* For the agreement of these, see the rules on participles. 



189 

(from it). - - - We might have accepted of his 

en accept-er,y ^r* 

offers. - - Why did you not ? 
offre,f 

SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Vun-ir, to punish. 

Participle active. issant, punishing 

Passive z,m. ie,f punished 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. Jlvoir puni, to have punished. 
Past. Aiyini puni, having punished. 

Indicative Mood 

Present. Singular. 
Je pun-fs, I punish, I do punish, or I am punishing 
Tu is, 
II it, 

Plural 
Nous issons, we punish, kc. 

Vous issez, 
lis is sent, 

Imperfect. Singular. 
Je pun-hsais, I did punish, or I was punishing, &,e. 
Tu issms, 
II is sail, 

Plural. 
Nous issions, we did punish, 8cc. 
Vous issiez, 
Tls issaicnt, 

Preterite. Singular. 
Je pun-is, I punished, or I did punish* 
Tu is, 
II it, 

Plural 
Nous hues, we punished, &,e 
Vous ites, 
lis ire nl, 



190 

Future. Singular. 
Je pun-tYai, I shall or will punish 



Tu 


iras, 










II 


ira. 






Plural. 




Nous 


irons, 


We 


shall 


or will punish. 


Fous 


irez, 










lis 


iront. 














Conditional. Singular. 



Je pun-inns, I should, would, could, or might punish 
Tu irais, 

11 irait, 

Plural. 

JYous irions, we should, fyc. punish. 
Vous iriez, 
lis haienty 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. J\ii punt, I have punished. 

Imperfect. J' avals puni, I had punished. 

Preterite. Tens puni, I had punished. 

Future. J'aurai puni, I shall, fyc. have punished. 

Conditional. J'aurais puni, I should, 4^. have punished 

We say, also : 

J } eusse puni, &c. 
Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Pun-zs punish thou. 

Plural. 
issonsj let us punish. 
issez, punish ye. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Que je pun-issc, that I may punish, or I punish. 
tu isses. 

il isse, 



nous 

VOUS 



191 

Plural. 
issions, that we may punish 
issiez. 



Us issenty 

Preterite. Singular. 

Que je pun-zsse, that I might punish, or I punished. 
tu isses, 

il it, 

Plural. 

nous issions y that we might punish. 
vous issieZy 
Us issenty 

Compound Texses. 
Present. Que faie puni, that I may have punished 
Preterite. Que feus se puni, that I might have punished 
After the same manner are conjugated about two hun- 
dred regular verbs : the following are excepted, as heing 
irregular : 



JxcautriVy to acquire. 
AssaillvTy to assault. 
Bouillir, to boil. 
Couriry to run. 
Cueilliry to gather. 



Bo 



to sleep. 



FaiUir, to fail. 
Fuir, to flee, to avoid. 
Mentir, to lie. 
MovrtTy to die. 
Offrir, to offer. 



Ouvriry to open. 
Partiry to set out. 
Se repentiry to repent. 
SerUtTy to smell. 
Serviry to serve. 
Soriiry to go out. 
Souffriry to suffer. 
Tenir, to hold, 
Pentr, to come. 
Vetiry to clothe. 
And their compounds 



EXERCISES UPON THIS CONJUGATION 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I always finish. my work 

toujour Sy<idv. fin-ii\v. overage ,ni 



before the others. Your friend does 

avantyip. 



not succeed 
reuss-i:\v 
in his undertaking. - - Do we not furnish arms 

dansrf*. enlreprisefi foiirn-ir 7 v. armeS 

against ourselves ? - - Why do vou hate him ? - - 



ainum. 
Do we not 



contre^. 



UF 



ka- 



,v. 



192 

They cure the diseases of the body, and 

guer-ir,v maladie y f. corj)s } m. 

not those of the mind. 

Imp. I was building my house when 

bat-ir 7 v. maisonfi quand^dv. 

you demolished yours. - - - Was he not enjoying 

demol-ir,v. jou-iv de,v. 

a good estate ? - - - We hated him, because he did 

bien y m. parceque y c. 

not act kindly towards us. - - On 

ag-ir y v. honnelement^dv. enversjp. Sur^. 

what were you reflecting ? - - The mountains were 

reflech-ir,v. montagnefi. 

resounding with their cries. 
retent-ir y v. de cri,m. 

Fret. I warranted them very good. - Did not 
garant-ir,v. 

your master accomplish his promise ? We (leap- 

accompl-ir\v. promesse y f. fran- 

ed over) the ditch, and seized the guilty. 

ch-iVyV. fosse,rn. $ais-ir,v. coup able ,adj. 

Why did you not applaud that pretty act- 

applaud-ir,v. a joH,adj. ac- 

all my might. --- Did not the sol- 
forcesfipi. soZ- 

the commands of their gene- 

aux coiamandement,m. 

shall I banish all these 

bcmn-ir,v. tout, adj. 

thoughts from my mind ? - - This plant will soon 

penseefi • . planteS. 

blossom, if you water it often. We shall 

jteur-ir,v. ■ arroser y v. souvent y Vidv. 

warn your relations of it. Shall you not 

avert-ir y v. parent ,m. 

enjoy, as we do, the pure plea- 

jou-ir comme, adv. *jcp des pur, adj. 

sures of the country ? Her children will bless 

ben-irff. 
her for it. 

Cond. I would choose this cloth, if I 
chois-ir^v. drap,m. 



ress ? I 


did, with 


trice ,-f. 


c/e,p. 


diers 


obey 


dat y m. 


obe-ir,v. 


ral? 




Fut. 


When si 



193 

wore in your place. Would he not blush, if he 

a roug-iryV. 

acted so ? - -• We would not punish them, if they 

ainsi, ad v. 
were diligent. - - Would you not act with less 

avecyp. moms, adv. 

severity ? They could furnish us with arms and 

stvevite 

troops, if we wanted any. (write, if we* had need 

troupe fi avoir besoin,v. 

of any.) 
en. 

Imperative Mood 

Do not fill the glasses. Let him enjoy 

rempl-ir,v. verve, m. 

the fruit of his labours. - - Well ! let him, I do not 
du travail^m. Eh bien,mt. 

hinder him from it. Let us reflect on what we 

empech-eVyV. 

have to do. Let them define the question. 

a f aire, v. dtfin-ir,\\ 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. That I may not perish. I wish 

per-ir 9 Y. souhait-er, v. 

he may succeed. That we may not (bear hard- 

rtuss-ir,v. pat-ir 7 v. 

ships.) - That you may not hate us. Provided they 

do not (grow tall.) 
grand-ir^v. 

Pret. That I might refresh my memory. 

rafraich-irjV. memoirefi 

That she might not roast the meat. - - That we might 
rdt-ir,\. 

(become younger.) That you might punish the 

rajeunrir,v. 

idle. That they might not (grow old.) 

vieill-ir,v. 

Compound Tenses. 
I have filled my cellar with good wine. - - • 

rempl-ir,v. caveat dt 

17 



194 

Has he not (leaped over) the ditch ? - - We hatl iiniBiiv.(i 

our work. They would have seized him. 

ouvrage,m. 
We should have perished without any assistance. - - 

* sans,p. aucun secours. 

When shal] I have built my house ? I have 

bat-ir,v. 
(very much) weakened his courage. - - Though 

beaucoup,Sidv. af)aibl-ir,v. Quoique,c 

they have adorned their gardens to dazzle 

aient embell-ir,v. jardin,m. pour eblou-ir,v. 

the vulgar, they have not succeeded, because 

vulgaire,m. reuss-ir,\. parceque.v 

they have disobeyed their father and mother 
desobe-ir,v. a 

THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Hec-evoir, to receive. 

Part, active. evant, receiving. 

Part. pass. %,m. ue,{. received. 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. Avoir regit, to have received 

Past Ay ant regit, having received. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. .Singular. 
Je re<j-ois ? I receive, I do receive, or I am receiving. 



Tu 


ois, 


11 


Olt, 




Plural. 


JYous 


evons, we receive, fyc. 


Vous 


evez, 


Us 


oivenf, 




Imperfect. Singular. 


Je rec 


-evais, I did receive, or I was receiving. 


Tu 


evais, 


II 


evaii, 



* Verbs of this conjugation, the root of which terminates in c, require 
for the softening of their sound, that a cedilla be added to the c, so (f) 
whenever it is followed by o or u 



195 

Plural. 

Nous evions, we did receive, &.c. 

Votes eviez, 
Us evaient, 

Preterite. Singular 

Je rectus, I received, or I did receive. 
Tu us, 
II ut, 

Plural. 

Nous innes , we received. Sec. 
Vous utes, 
lis went, 

Future. Singular. 

h vec-evrai, I shall or will receive. 
Tu evrasj 

11 evra, 

Plural. 

JVous evrons, we shall or will receive, 
Potts eures, 
Us evronij 

Conditional. Singular. 

Je rec-evrais, I should, would, could; or might receive 
Tu evraisy 
11 evrait* 

Plural. 

Nous evrions, we should, &,c. receive. 
Poms evriez, 
Us evraienty 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. <Pai regit, I have received. 

Imperfect. J 1 avals rem, I had received. 

Preterite. Jhus rem, I had received. 

Future. J\iurai rem, I shall, Sec. have received. 

Conditional. Jhiufais rem, I should, &x. have received 

We say, also : 

J'eusse recu, (Sec. 
Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
llcr-ols, receive thou. 



Que je 
iu 
il 



IDG 

Plural. 

evonSj let us receive. 
evez, receive ye. 
Quails oiveniy let them receive. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. Singular. 

req-oive y that I may receive, or I receive. 



oives, 
oive* 



Plural. 

nous evioriSy that we may receive. 
vous eviez i 
Us oivenl, 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que je re^-tissey that I might receive, or I received. 
tu usscs, 

il id, 

Plural. 
nous ussionSy that we might receive. 
vous ussieZy 
Us ussenty 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. Quefaie repu, that I may have received 
Preterite. Que feusse regu, that I might have received, 
Recevoir des nouvelles de To hear from somebody. 

quelqu'un. 

After the same manner are conjugated seven verbs on- 
ly : the following are excepted, being irregulars : 



Jlsseoiry to sit down. 

Dechair, to decay. 

FalloiVy (verb impersonal,) 

to be needful. 
Mouvoiry to move. 
Fleuvoir } (v. imp.) to rain. 



PouvoiTy to be able. 
S avoir, to know. 
Valoiry to be worth. 



Voir to see. 
Vouloiry to be willing. 
And tbeir compounds. 

EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION 

Indicative Mood. 
Pres. I entertain great hopes from iua 

conc-evoir ; v . esperance f ( 



197 

conduct. I (am to) write to your brother to- 

conduiteS. * ecrire^v. 

marrow, to let him know that your father is 

pour faire y v. lid savoir y v. 

arrived. A commander (ought to) be intrepid 

commandant, m. devoir ,v. # 

in the midst of dangers. He (is to) go 

au milieu,m. f. allergy. 

and breakfast at my uncle's next Sunday, 

up* dejeuner y v cJiez^. ucn 

and he (is to) come and sup with us. We 

venir,v. ^cr* souper } v. 
fsometimes entertain a hatred for persons who 

quelquefois ? adv . de la hainefi. 
deserve our friendship. Do you not per- 

center, v. amitiefi a- 

ceive a mountain beyond the tree ? - - Yes, 

perc-evoir.v. dernere,p. 

I do. - - We (are to) remit him the value in 

remettre,v. valeurf. en,p. 

goods or in money. - - Are you .not to dine 

marchandises 
with my father and mother to-morrow ? - - Men com- 

demain/ddv. 
monly owe their virtues or their vices to edu- 

devoir,v. 

cation (as much as) to nature. Are these young 

aidant quc,c. f. 

ladies to go to the ball ? No, they are not. - - 

aller,v. bal,m. 

A. young man (ought to) love the society of those who 

societefi. 
are the most learned and modest. 

Imp. I owed four guineas to your aunt when she 
guinee 

* When the verb to be to, is used in the present or imperfect tense? - 
of the indicative mood, and precedes another verb in the infinitive 
mood, denoting a futurity in the action, it is to be rendered in French 
oy the same tenses of the verb devoir, and not by etre ' 

Je dois aller au pare, I am to go to the park.- 

Nous devious lui ecrire, We were to write to him. 
f See note, page 46, and remember to place compound adverbs after 
the participles passive. 

17* * 



193 

died Was not your brother to receive that mo- 

mourut) v. 

ney last 2 Thursday 1 ? We received his tiresome 

Jeudiyin. ennuyant^ad']. 

visits, because we were obliged to it. Were you 

obliger,v. 
not to let 3 them 2 know 4 it 1 sooner ? - - They were 

f aire, v. savoir y v. 

not to stay above six weeks. 
r ester 9 v. plus cfe,adv. 
Pres. I received yesterday, with (a great deal) 

bien,3.dv. 
of pleasure, the books you sent me. - - As soon 

envoyer,v. 
as we perceived the danger, we warned him of it. 
aperc-evoir avertir,v . 

They heard* yesterday from your brother. 

Fut. I shall entertain a bad opinion of 

conc-evoir mauvais, adj. f. 

you if you do not avoid Mr. R****^ company. 

eviter y v. 
We shall owe him 2 nothing ^ore, after this 

apresjf. 
month. - - I hope you will receive all my letters dur- 

pen- 
ing my absence, and they will hear # from their 

dantjp. 

father (in a short time.) 
dans peu y R(\v. 
Cond, I should answer your brother's 

j" repondre y v.a 

* See the phrase following the verb recevoir, 

•f When the word should expresses a duty or necessity, or can with pro- 
priety be turned into ought to, it is rendered in French by the conditional 
present of the verb devoir: ex. 

Je devrais alter le voir, I should or ought to go and see him. 

Vans devriez le secouHr dans sa You shouid or ought to help him in 

mis^re, &c. his misery, &c. 

The word should or ought, when joined to the verb to have, immediately 
followed by a participle passive, must be rendered by the conditional past of 
the above verb, with the participle passive turned into the present of the in- 
finitive mood : ex. 
y'aurais du Vobliger a tester ict, I should or ought to have obliged 

him to stay here. 
Nous aurions du revenir plutht. We should or ought to have come 

back sooner 



199 

letter, but I have not time. Ought not 

le temps, m. J 

your sister to give your mother 3 (an account 1 ) 

rendre,v. compte, d,p 

of all her actions ? She would soon per- 

bientot^dv. 
ceive the danger, if she knew the consequences 

s avail, v. 

of it. Children should every day learn 

apprendrc,v. 

something by heart. You should not despise 

cwurjn. mepriser^v. 

the advice that he gives you. Should they, 

avis^m. 
after what they have done, expect to 

apres.p. fait^.p. s^attendre^v. a 

receive favours ? Grammar, geography, history, mu- 
sic, are sciences and arts which ladies should never ne- 
glect. 

Imperative Mood. 
Receive this small present as a token of my 

marque f. 
friendship. 

Subjunctive 3Iood. 
Pres. and Pret. Though I perceive ships 

Quoique^c. vaisseau.m. 

(afar off,) I cannot distinguish them. He 

de loin, adv. nesaumis^y. 
wrote to us by the first post, so that we might 

icriviijV. ordinaire ,m. afin que,c. 

receive his orders (in proper time.) 
a temps,adv. 

Mind these Coxlpouxd Texses well ! 

I have not yet received his answer. 

encore, adv. reponsefi. 

You should have (been making) vour theme this 
* jaire^Y. 

morning, instead of playing. He has entertained 

matin,m. au lieu.p. 

the hope of living here all his life. She ought 

vivrejV. *ci,adv. rzV,f. * 

*£ce the note, on preceding page. 



200 
lo have thanked . him for the good advice he 



de,p. 



gave her. When did you hear from your sister ? 

we have not heard from her since her de- 

depuis,\). de- 

parture. - - - Your uncle should not have obliged 
partem. oncle,m. * 

him to pay half the expenses. We should 

a moilie, f. des frais,m. 

have owed him one hundred livres. I beg 2 

Ziwe,f. demander,v. 

your 1 pardon, I ought not to have made you 
vous faire^v. 

wait so long. Ought not we to have 

attendre,v. long-temps, adv. * 

employed our time better than (we did ) ■ 

e rap loyer , v . nous rfavons fait 

You ought to have been less presumptuous. 

presomphieuXy adj . 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Vend*- re, to sell. 

Part. Active. ant, selling. 

Part. Passive. u,m. ue,f. sold. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Je vend-s, I sell, I do sell, or am selling 
Tuvend-Sy 
11 vend, 

Plural. 
Nous oris, we sell, fyc. 
Vous ez, 
lis ent, 

Imperfect. Singular. 
Je vend-tfis, I did sell, or was selling. 
Tu ais, 
11 ait, 

Plural. 
Nous vend-ions, we did sell, <§'c. 
Vous iezy 

Us aicnt 



201 
Preterite. Singular, 
Je vend-is, I sold, or did sell. 

Til 1.9, 

Plural. 

Notts hneSy we sold, 8$c. 
Vous ttes, 
lis irent, 

Future. Singular. 
Je vend-rm, I shall, or will sell. 
Tu ras y 

tl ra y 

Plural. 

Nous rons, we shall, or will sell. 
Vous rcZy 
Us rontj 

Conditional. Singular. 

Je vend-rais, I should, could, would, or might sell. 
Tu mis, 
11 rait, 

Plural, 
Nous rions, we should, <^*c. 
Vous riezy 
Us raienty 

Compound Tenses. 

Present. J'ai vendu, I have sold. 

Imperfect. J' avals vendu, I had sold. 

Preterite. J' ens ^endu, I had sold. 

Future. J\mrai vendu, I shall, fyc. have sold. 

Conditional. J'aurais vendu, I should, fyc. have sold 

We sajr, also ; 
J'eusse vendu , &c. 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Vend-s, sell thou. 

Plural. 

ons, let us selL 

ex, sell ye. 



202 
Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 

Que je vend-e, that I may sell, on I sell. 
hi eSj 

il e, 

Plural. 

nmis ions, that we may sell. 
vous iezy 
its ent 7 

Preterite. Singular 
Que je vend-isse, that I might sell, or I sola 



ia 



nous 
vous 
Us 



zsses y 
it. 

Plural. 

issions, that we might sell, 

issiez, 
issent, 



Compound Tenses. 



that I may have sold, 
that I might have sold. 



Present. Que faie vendu, 
Preterite. Que feusse vendu, 

After the same manner are conjugated about forty verbs, 
The following are excepted as being irregular. 



Jlhsoudre, to absolve 

Battre, to beat. 

Solve, to drink. 

Circoncire, to circumcise 

Conclure, to conclude. 

Conduive, to conduct. 
And all the verbs ending in 
uire. 

Confive, to preserve. 

Connaitre, to know. 
And all those ending in 
oiire. 

Coudve, to sew. 

Craindre, to fear 



ending 



And all those 

indve. 
Cvoive, *o believe. 
Dive, to tell. 
Ecvive, to write. 
Faive, to make, to do. 
Fvive, to fry. 
Lire j to read. 
Metlre, to put. 
Moudre, to grind. 
Naitre, to be born. 
Paiire, to graze, to feed. 
Plaire, to please. 
Prendre, to take. 



ill 



<203 

Hire, tr> laugh. 

Suffire, to suffice, to be 

sufficient. 
Suivre, to follow. 
Sc taire, to hold one's 



tongue. 
Traire, to milk. 
Vaincre, to conquer. 
Vivre, to live. 

And their compounds. 



JV*. i>. Verbs of this conjugation, the root of which 
terminates in p, as romp-re, corromp-re, &c. take a t in 
the third person singular, of the present tense, indicative 
mood : ex. je romps, tu romps, Us rompt : the rest are 
conjugated as vendre. 

EXERCISES ON THIS CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 
Pres. I do not mean to wrong 

prttend-re,v. <jot> faire tort, v. 

him. Is your mother coming down ? We 

/?a,pro. descend-re,v. 

expect our friend, Mr. A***. Do not you 

altend-re,v. 

forbid her to go there ? They sell 

defend-re,v. de alter, y. 

bad fruit. 

mauvais^dj. 

Imp. Did I not interrupt him, while 

inter romp -re, v. pendant que^c. 

he was answering them ? She was melting into 

repond-re,v. leur fond-re, v. en,p. 

tears, when you arrived. - - Were we not losing 

larme, a r river, v. perdre,v 

our time ? - - You were not spreading your nets. - - 
temps, m. 6iend-re 9 v. filet,m. 

Did they corrupt our manners ? 

corromp-re,v. mosurs,?. pi. 

Pret. (As soon as) I had received my money. I 
Des que,c. 

returned them what they had lent me. Did 

re?id-re,v. prefer, v. 

he not hear you ? We (waited for) them a 

entend-re ,v. attencl-re,v. 

month. - - (For how much) did you sell it to them ? - 
mois,m. Combien,a.dv. 



204 

They spilled all the wine. 

repand-re,v. 
Fur. I shall shear my flock (in the) 

tond-re,v. troupeau^m. au 

month of May. If you do not take care, 

Mai. prenez,v. garde, 

the dog will bite you. - - Shall we not lose, if 

mord-re 3 v. 
we play ? - - You will melt it, if you put 

fond-re t v. mettez,v 

ft into the fire. No, I will not. -- They 1 shall 3 not* 

dansrf. 
hear 3 5 of me 7 (any 4 more.) 

entend-re parlerj?. plus^dv 

Cond. Should I not do him the jua- 

rend-reff. 
fice he deserves ? - - Would he not interruot you ? - - 

meriter,v. 
We would defend them if we cjould. - - Why 

'defend-re,v pouvions,v. 

would you not answer, if I were speaking to 

repond-re 9 v. 

you ? Your hens would (lay eggs) every day, if 

poulej. pond-re,v. 

they were not so fat. 

gras,adj. 

Imperative Mood. 

Give 1 God 3 thanks 2 . Let her not come 

Rend-re,v. Dieu grace a 
down. - - Let us (give in) our accounts faith- 

rend-re^v. compte,m fidele- 

fully. Do not lose my book. Let them he-ar 

wienf,adv. 
he voice of the Lord. 

voix, f. Seigneur y m . 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. and Pret. Speak loud, that I may hear 

haul, adv. 

what you say. - - She plays (upon th^) harpsichord 

diles v. du clavecin^m. 



205 

though you forbid her to do it- - - * 

quoique,c. lid defaire,v. 

He wrote to us ; that we might not expect him. 

ecrivitjV. 

Co3ipouxd Tenses. 

I have lost my book ; have you found 

perd-re,v. * (rower, 

it ? She has broken her fan Have you 

romp-re -V evented! ,m. 

not interrupted me several times ? I had not 

then answered his letter. If they (had 

c/ors, adv. a etaient 

gone) there, would they not have lost their time ? 

a//es,p.p. 

Yes, they would. - - He says he would have sold us 

dit^v. 

very £ood wine. Had you not forbidden her to 

de 
speak ? That they might have (waited for) us. 

Hi capitulatory EXERCISES on the regular verbs of the 
four CONJUGATIONS. 

Review before you write.) 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I love attentive scholars, but I punish 

atttnlij]D.d]. ecolier,m. metis 7 c. 

severely laziness and inattention. Your 

sever ement 7 adv. par esse,?. 

brother does not receive this news with plea- 

nouvellej. 
sure, - - - Do we not expect your mother to day ? - - . 

mercyf. 
We hope (that) you will succeed in your un- 

esperer,y. 

dertaking. Why do you not fulfil 

Pourquoi^dv. accomplir.v 

v r our promise ? Are you to expect the least 

promessef. 

favour from your parents and friends ? They per- 

g race J. « 

13 



20G 

ceive the clanger, and they do not endeavour 

percevoir,v. lacker y v, 

to shun it 
de eviter,v. 

Imp. I was speaking of your aunt when you 

tantefi 
(came in,) and was doing her the justice she 

entrer,v. rendre,v. lid 

deserves. Mr. N. did not act towards your 

meriterft. agir,v. envers,p. 

son with much tenderness. Mr. P. and I were 

JilSyin. tendresse. 

answering your letters when you arrived. You 

arrwer y y. 
undoubtedly entertained great hopes from his 

sans doute y a.dv. concevoir y v. 

last voyage. They were spending their 

dernier y R(ij. depenser^v. 

money in trifles, instead of buying 

en,p. bagatelle y an lieu de,adv. acheter 7 v. 

books. 

Pret. I built this house in one thousand seven 
maison.f. 
hundred and seventy-nine. - - Your father yesterday 
</7* hier^ndv. 

leceived agreeable news. She burst into tears 

fond-re, v. en 
after your cousin was gone. - - - We sent him 

agres que,c. parii,p.ip. 

(a great deal) of money unknown to your mo- 

a Pinsu y ]). de 

ther. Why did you not finish your work soon- 

ouvrage^n. 
er ? - - (As soon as) they perceived us, they (ran 

Des que 7 c. pnrent la 

away.") 
fuite. 

Fur. I will (give in) my accounts (at the) be- 
at* 

ginning of next week. My friend, 

prochain^d}. semainefi unite, 

Mrs. R. will dine with me next Wednesday. We 

Mine Merer edi } m. 



207 

shall seize the first opportunity to thank him 

saisir y v. occasion,?, pour remercier,v. 

for his kindness. - - You will soon entertain 

de bontefi. bientoty&dv. 

a better opinion of him. - - Will not your sister 

samrfi 
(come down stairs) to-day ? 
descendreyV. 
Cond. I would lay two guineas that your 

gager,v. 
uncle is not yet arrived. - - If my father were rich, he 

arriver^w. etait 

would rebuild his country-house. - - Should we not 

rebatir,y. Devoir jr. 
express our gratitude toward those who 
c.vprimer 3 v. reconnaissance, f. envers^. 
do us good ? - - If you would, you could ren- 
foniyV. bien y m. voidieZyV. ren- 
der great services to your country. I am cer- 

dre,v. f. paySyin. 

tain (that) they would reward you, if you 

recompenser y v. 
deserved it. 
meriteryV. 

Imperative Mood. 

Discharge with equity the duties of your 
Remplir y v. e quite devoir 7 m. 

office. Let him receive the punishment due 

charge,?, puniliouj. df/,p.p. 

to his crime - - Let us give 2 God thanks 1 for the 

rendreyV. grace a de 

good news we received yesterday. - - Imitate the great 

feier,adv. 
actions of your ancestors. - - Let them enjoy the 

anceireSym. jouir yV.de 

fruit of their labours. 
travail yin. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. Write to me by the first post 

Ecrkez , v . ordinaire y\n 

that I may receive your letter before my de- 

afin queyC. avantff. de- 



208 

parture from London. - - He does not understand you, 
pctrt y m. comprendre y v. 

though he hear what you say. 

quoique y c. entendre ,v. subj. dites y v. 

She is never pleased, - though we obey her in 
content y(id]. lui en; p. 

(every thing.) I will tell it to you, pro- 

tout dirai 9 v. pour- 

vided you do not speak of it to your sister. 

vu que,c. 

He will pay them, provided they wait a little 

attendre y v. 
longer. 
plus long-temps ,adv 

Pret. I wrote to your father (some time ago) 

ecrivis y v. il y a quelque temps 

that he might engage Mr. W. to come and 

ajin que y c. up 

spend the holidays with us. That she might 

passer jr. vacancefi 

reflect on her own conduct, and not on that of 

propre, adj. 
others. - - He would not come to see us, lest, 
voulutyV. up de peur que y c. 

we should perceive his bad designs. - - Your uncle 
ne onckjin. 

ordered that you should sell his two horses to 

or dormer y v. 

Mr. B. - - I should be very sorry if they fell 

que s c. iomber y v.$uty. 
into bad hands. 
en 

Promiscuous EXERCISES on the COMPOUND 

TENSES. 
1 have spoken to my father of it, but he has not 
yet given me any answer. - - Have I not faith- 

c/icore, adv. de 

fully executed your orders ? Has your sister suc- 
ceeded in her undertaking ? - - Yes, she has, and I 
have congratulated her (upon it.) - We have not yet re- 

feliciier,v. en 

ceived any remittance from America, - - Mrs, N. told 
remise. 



209 

me you had already sold the half of your 
deja,a.dv. moitie y f. 

goods. Why did you not pay those poor 

marchandises. 

people? He would have been punished, if 

gefi&,iii.&f.pl. 

t had not defended his right. They have sold 

droi£,m. 
dim four dozen of handkerchiefs at an exorbitant 

mouchoir, a 

price ; but they have warranted them fine and 
prix 7 m. garcrntu^y. fin 

well worked. We thought you would have 

t~ravailkr,v. crayions^v. 

brought your brother with you. Have we not 

frere 

been obliged to (wait for) Miss A. ? If vnu had 

(PattendreyY. 
trusted them with your goods, they would have 

confier ,v.leur ay marchandise, 

stolen the greatest part of them. - - It is for 

petrtiefi Ce,pro. 

that reason that my father has not. (thought fit) 

juger,v.a-propos 
to send them to you. Mr. D. had represented to 

him all the danger of it. - - Mrs. F. has gained her 

gagner,v. 
cause, but she has lost all her wealth. - - Had I 

perdrejV. bien,m. 

not finished my work when she came in r 

ouvrage.n). erdrer,v. 

You would have received your money (a month ago,) 

il y ei un mois 
i£ the mail had not been robbed. - - Mrs. P. told me 

malleS. ro/er,p.p. 

she would have paid you (some time ago,) if she 

il ij a quelque temps, 
had sold her goods. 

CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE YERBS. 
Verbs passive are very easily conjugated ; it requires 
only that the participle passive of the verb, which is to 
18* 



etre 


aim-e, 


etre 
etant 


pun-i, 
aim-e, 


etant 


pun-i, 


avoir ete 


aim-e, 


avoir ete 
ayant ete 
ayant ete 


pun-t, 
aim-e, 
pun-i, 



210 

he conjugated, be joined to the auxiliary verb Ure % to be, 
through all its moods, tenses, numbers, and persons. 
It is to be observed, that in French the participle passive 
varies according to the gender and number of the noun 
or pronoun, which stands as the nominative to the verb: ex. 

Infinitive Mood. 

ee, to be loved, 
ie, to be punished, 
ee, being loved, 
ie, being punished. 
ee y to have been loved. 
ie, to have been punished. 
ee, having been loved, 
ie, having been punished 

Indicative Mood. 
F. 

ie } Sic. I am loved, 
Je suis pun-i, ie, &c. I am punished. 

Plural. 
Nous sommes aim-es, ecs, Sic. we are loved. 
Nous sommes pun-is, ies 3 Sic. we are punished. 

Compound Tenses. 

M. F. 

J J ai ete pardonn-e, ee, 1 have been forgiven. 

J y ai ete pun-i, ie, I have been punished. 

Nous avons ete aim-es, ees, we have been loved, Slc 

OF NEUTER VERBS. 

The conjugations of the above verbs are, like all oth- 
ers, distinguished by their terminations, and conjugated in 
the same manner. 

Learners may easily know a neuter verb from an ac- 
tive one ; because the latter generally has, or can always 
have, a direct case after it ; whereas the neuter verb nev- 



Singular. M 
Je suis aim-e, 



er has, nor can have, but an indirect case : 
Dormir, to sleep, 
Venir^ to come, 
Voyager, to travel, 

are neuter verbs ; because we cannot say, 



for instance. 



Donnir une maison, to sleep a house. 

Vemr un livre, to come a hook. 

Voyager la chambre, to travel the room, &.e 
In the same manner, 

Jouir, to enjoy, 

Profiler, to profit by, to take advantage of, 

Parvenir, to attain, to reach. 

are neuter verbs, because they can only govern an indi- 
rect case : ex. 

Jouir (Tune grande repula- To enjoy a great repu'a- 

lion, tion. 

Profiler du temps, To take advantage of tlit 

weather. 
Parvenir a son bid, To attain one's end. 

As it is impossible for the neuter verbs to* govern an 
absolute case, it follows that every verb of this kind, which 
governs an absolute case, can no longer be looked upon 
as a neuter : ex. 

Pleurer, to weep, to bewail, 

Sortir, to go out, 

Monter, to go up, or come up, 

Plaider, &.c. to plead, 

are neuter verbs, but become active when they govern 
any object in the absolute case, or accusative : ex. 
Elle plevre ses peches, She bewails her sins. 

Sortez ce cheval, Bring out that horse. 

11 plaida sa cause lui-meme, He himself pleaded his cause 

But there are some neuter verbs which can never have 
an active signification, and which we are obliged to con- 
jugate with the verb faire, when we wish to express an 
action passing from the subject who acts : ex. 

Ferai-je bouillir ou rotir Shall I boil or roast that 

celte viande ? meat ? 

FaiteS'la bouillir, Boil it. 

Some of the neuter verbs conjugate their compound 
tenses with the auxiliary verb avoir, to have ; others with 
the verb etre, to be. 

The general rule to know what neuter veros conjugate 
their compound tenses with the auxiliary avoir, and which 



214 

urc the others that are conjugated with the verb tire, is 
to pay attention to the participle passive of the neuter 
verb which is conjugated. 

If this participle be declinable, that is, if it can be ap- 
plied to a man or a woman, or any other animated object, 
the compounds of its verbs are conjugated with the verb 
etre : ex. 



Jl.rr'wer, to arrive. 



Tomber^ to fall, 
Venir, to come, fyc. 



JWourir, to die, 
JVaitre, to be born, 
take the auxiliary verb, etre ; because we can say, 

Un homme arrive, a man {who is) arrived. 

Unefemme movie, a woman dead. 

Un enfant ne, a child born. 

Un cheval tombe, fyc. a horse fallen. 

If, on the contrary, the participle be indeclinable, that 
is, if it cannot be said of any animate object, the compound 
tenses of that verb must be conjugated with the verb 
avoir : ex. 



Regner, to reign, 
Vivfe, to live, fyc 



.Dormir, to sleep, 

Languivy to languish, to linger. 

take the auxiliary verb avoir ; because we cannot say, 

Un homme dormi, a man slept, (part, pass.) 

Unefemme languie, a woman languished, or lingered. 
Un enfant rigne, a child reigned. 

Un cheval veca, &c,. a horse lived. 

The verb courir is in the last class, when it signifies 
the rapid motion of the body, moving in a certain direc- 
tion with all the swiftness of its legs \ as we cannot, in this 
sense, say, 

Un homme couru, a man run, (part, pass.) 

Unefemme courue, a woman run. 

nor je snis couru, fetais couru, &c. but fai couru i favais 
couru, &.C. 

When we say in French, un homme couru, une femme 
courue, we mean a man or woman much sought after, a 
person or thing we are very eager to see or hear : ex. 

Ce predicaleur est fort couru ; 

Celte danseu&e est fori courue \ 



213 



that is, people are very eager to hear that preacher, to 
see that dancer. 

In the above general rule are not incline;? some neuter 
verbs, which sometimes take the auxiiiaiy avoir, and 
someti-mes the auxiliary etre: these are, 



Demeurer, to live, to dwell. 
Perir, to perish. 
Passer, to pass, to go by. 
Echapper, to escape. 



Mo rder, to go or come up. 
Descendre, to go or come 

clown. 
Soriir, to go out. 
Hester, to stay, to remain. 

Monter and descendre, often govern an absolute regi- 
men, in which case they are considered as active verbs, 
and conjugated with the auxiliary avoir: ex. 

J 1 ai monte les degres, I have ascended the stairs, 

or gone up the stairs. 
Nous avons descendu la We have come down the 

rnontaghe, mountain. 

When the above verbs are employed without regimen 
their compounds are conjugated with etre : ex. 
Je suis descendu, I am down. 

Elk est deja montee, She is up already. 

Sorlir is conjugated with the verb etre, when it signifies 
cO quit, to leave the place wherein one was dwelling, or 
living ; but it is conjugated with the verb avoir, when we 
wish to convey the idea that we have been from home, and 
that we are come back again : ex. 
11 est sorii de prison, 
J'a.i sorti ce matin a 



at 



He is out of prison. 
I went out this morning 

ten o'clock. 
Did you go out this morn- 
ing ? 
We have not been out all 

day. 
The king has not been out 
of his room. 

Demeiirer and rester take the auxiliary avoir, when we 
mean that we were, but are no longer in a place : ex. 
J'ai demeure deux ans a la lived two years »n the 



dix 

h cures, 
Ayez vous sorti ce matin ? 

Nous n'avons pas sorti de 

tout le jour, 
Le roi w'a pas sorti de sa 

chambre, 



campagn 



country. 



214 

II a resle vingt ans a Rome, He resided twenty years at 

Rome. 

On the contrary, they take the auxiliary etfe, while the 
person or persons are still in a place : ex. 
11 est demeure a Londres He has remained in Lon- 

pour y sollicker un eveche, don to solicit a bishopric. 
Nous somrnes restes a York We have tarried at York to 

pour y finir nos affaires, conclude our affairs. 

P£rir indifferently takes either the auxiliary avoir or 
eire: ex. 

11 est pfai deux vaisseaux Two ships have been lost at 

sur mer, sea. 

Trois homines ont peri par Three men have perished 

cetie temp tie, by this storm, 

La plupart des equipages Most of the crews perished 

sont peris dans les ondes, in the waves, the rest per- 

le resle est peri de misere, ished through misery. 

It seems, however, that the auxiliary avoir is more gen- 
erally used. 

Passer sometimes governs an indirect case, or is imme- 
diately followed by the preposition par, or some other, . 
attended by a noun or pronoun ; in which case its com- 
pounds are conjugated with the auxiliary verb avoir, 
whether it be used inks proper signification or in a figura- 
tive sense : ex. 
Le roi a passe par Ken- The king went through 

sington pour oiler a Kensington to go to 

Windsor, Windsor. 

Nous avons passe devant We went by the church. 

Peglise, 
Elle a passe pres du Pare She went by St. James' 

St. Jaques, Park. 

La couronne de Naples a The crown of Naples 

passe dans la maison de passed to the house of 

Bourbon, Bourbon. 

In all other cases, passer takes the auxiliary etre: ex. 

Le roi est passe, vous n The king is gone by, you 

sauriez le voir, cannot see him. 

Le beau terns est passe, The fine weather is over. 

Vos chagrins sont passes, Your sorrows are over. 



215 

We sometimes say, re mot est passe, when we mean that 
it is no longer in use ; but when we say, ce mot a passe, 
we understand has passed into the language, which signi- 
fies that it has been received or adopted. 

Passer is often a reflected nassive verb ; then its com- 
pound tenses follow the rule of the reflective verbs. 

Passer, in several cases, becomes an active verb ? and 
governs an absolute case : ex 

Passez cela sur le feu, Pass that over the fire. 

Les ennemis out passe la The enemies have crossed 

riviere, the river. 

Passer Z'epee, cm travers du To run one through the 

corps, body. 

Echapper has two significations : sometimes it is used 
in the sense of eviter, to avoid, when it is conjugated with 
the auxiliary avoir, and governs the dative case ; some- 
times it signifies to come or go out by force or stratagem 
from a place in which one was confined or shut up ; in 
this case, it takes the verb elre for auxiliary : ex. 

Vons avez echappe la a un You have escaped a great 

grand danger, danger. 

II a echappe a la niort, He has escaped death. 

Us sont echappts de lew They have escaped from 

prison, or, their prison, or, made 

lis &e sont echappes de leur their escape. 

prison, 

On la tenoit depvis quel- They had her for some 

ques jours, metis elle est days, but she has es- 

echappee, or, elle s'est caped, or, made her 

echappce, escape. 

N. B Exercises on the neuter verbs will be found 
among the irregular, whenever they occur. 

REFLECTED VERBS. 

We call reflected, or reflective, a verb whose subject and 
object are the same person or thing ; so that the subject 
that acts, acts upon itself, and is at the same time the 
agent and the object of the action : ex. 
Je me connais, 1 know myself, 

Tu te hues, Thou praisest thyself, 

II se blesse, He wounds himself, 

Nous nous chaujfonSy We warm ourselves, 



216 

are reflected verbs, because it is T who know, find who 
am known ; thou who praisest, and who art praised ; he 
who wounds, and who is wounded, &c. 

In order to express the relation of the nominative to 
the verb with its regimen -or object, we always make use 
of the conjunctive pronouns, me, te, se 3 myself, thyself, 
himself, herself, itself, for the singular ; nous, vous, se % 
ourselves, yourselves, themselves, for the plural. But it 
frequently happens, that in English, the second pronoun is 
implied, though it mnst be expressed in French : ex. 

Je me souviens, I remember. 

Elle ne vent pas se marier, She will not marry. 

Nous nous plaignons, Sfc. We complain, &.c. 

The reflected verbs may be divided in the following 
manner, viz. 

Verbes rejlechis par la sig- Verbs reflective by signifi- 
nification, cation. 

Verbes rejlechis par Vex- Verbs reflective by ex- 
pression, pression. 

Verbes rejlechis directs, Verbs reflective direct. 

Verbes rejlechis indirecis, Verbs reflective indirect, 

Verbes rejlechis passifs, Verbs reflective passive. 

A ve*rb reflected by signification is properly a verb 

wherein the person or thing that acts, is at the same time 

the object of the action : ex. 

Je me chauffe, I warm myself 

Elle se blesse, She wounds herself, &c. 

A verb is reflective by expression when we add to it the 
double pronoun, without the person or thing that acts be- 
ing the object of the action : such as, 

Je me repens, I repent, 

11 $'en va, He is going away, 

Elle se meurt, She is dying, 

JVous nous apercevons de no- We perceive our error, 
tre erreur, 

which merely signify Je suis repentant, il va, elle meurt } 
nous apercevons notre erreur. 

When the conjunctive pronoun is the objective case of 
the verb reflective by expression, we say it is a verb re- 
flective direct ; when the same conjunctive pronoun is the 



217 

indirect regimen, (that is, governed in the dative case,) 
we call it reflective indirect : thus, 

Je inuflatte, I flatter myself, 

Tu te vantes, Thou boastest, 

11 sefelicite, He congratulates himself, 

&c. 
are verbs reflective dwect. — On the contrary, 

11 se donne des louanges, He gives himsetf praise, 

Nous nous promettons un We promise ourselves good 

bon succes, success, 

. Vous vous arrachez une You draw one of your 

dent, teeth, 

are verbs reflective indirect, because it is as if we said, 11 
donne des louanges a soi, Nous promettons un bon succts & 
nous, Vous arrachez une dent a vous, Etc. 

Verb reflective passive. This verb is so called, because 
it not only expresses a passive sense, but that sense cau 
only be rendered by a passive verb : ex. 
Cela se voit tous les jours, That is seen every day. 
Cela ne se dit point, That is not said. 

Ce livre se vend bien, That book sells well. 

Ce bruit se repand, That rumour is spread. 

Ces fruits se mangent en These fruits are eaten m 

hirer, winter. 

Cet homme s'est trouve in- That man has been found iri- 

nocent du crime dont on nocent of the crime with 

Paccusait, ' which he was accused. 

It is as if there were cela est vu tous les jours, cela iicst 
point dit, &c. which exactly correspond with the idiom of 
the English language. 

This last verb is of great use in the French language, 
because, as it has been observed before, there are prop- 
erly no passive verbs in that language, and we are often 
obliged to supply the want of them by the above verb, 
or by the pronoun general on, to avoid ambiguity or 
false sense : if, for instance, instead of saying, ces fruits 
se mangent en hirer, ou, on mange ces fruits en hirer, I 
said, ces fruits soul manges en hirer, one might under- 
stand that those fruits are already eaten ; whereas, f 
only wish to express the proper season for eating those 
fruits, 

19 



213 

Some authors call reciproque, reciprocal, all those re- 
flected verbs ; but this denomination to me has appeared 
insufficient to determine accurately the nature and use of 
these verbs. Others limit the reciprocal verb to signify 
what two persons or two things reciprocally do to each 
other : thus, 

Pierre et Jean se battent, Peter and John are fighting, 

or beating each other , 

Paul et Robert s'aiment, Paul and Robert love each 

other, 

Le feu et Veau se detrui- Fire and water destroy 
sent, each other, 

are reciprocal verbs, because it is as if we said, Pierre et 

Jean se battent reciproquement Pun P autre y Paul et Robert 

Raiment reciproquement Pun P autre. 

This distinction of the reciprocal verbs may be adopt- 
ed, observing at the same time, that we often prefix the 
preposition entre to the verb, the better to express the 
reciprocitv : ex. 
Pierre et Jean s'entr'ai- Peter and John love each 

ment, other. 

lis s'entrelouent, They praise each other. 

Elks s'entrehaissent, They hate each other. 

Le feu et Peau s^entvede- Fire and water destroy each 

truisent, &c. other. 

All the reflected and reciprocal verbs, without ex- 
ception are conjugated with the auxiliary verb tire , 
hence it may be supposed how much French people are 
shocked to hear any one, who has learned that language, 
say, 

le wi'ai achete un cheval, I bought myself a horse ; 

Je wi'avais blesse, I had hurt myself ; 

// s^afait mal, He has hurt himself; 

Elle s'avait moque de moi, She had laughed at me ; 

&c. 
expressions too commonly made use of by many English 
people, who speak without knowledge of the principles 
of the language ; whereas we must say, 
Je me suis achete un cheval, 
Je w' eta is blesse , 



219 

II s' est fait mal, 

s'etait moqi/.e de moi, 

nous sommes infamies, We have inquired, 

r sont promenes, They have walked. 

U s'est passe tPetranges Strange things have hap- 
choses depuis voire de- pened since your depart 
7, ure. 

5st passe bien des armies Many years have elapsed 
is que fed oniparler since I heard of that ai- 
de cctte affaire, fair. 

It must be owned, that in the compounds of most part 

of these verbs, the verb itrt is but the substitute of the 

avoir : but it is impossible to use avoir as auxiliary 

to a verb which has for its objective case a conjunctive pro- 

: relates to the principle of the action of that verb, 

;n precedes the auxiliary ; for, though we say, 

1: a voulu se iuer, He would kill himself ; 

yet 3 if we change the place of the pronoun, we must say 3 
H rest voulu tuer. which is the idiom of the language. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED TERES. 

The conjugation of the following verb may serve as a 
model for all the reflected or reciprocal verbs, of the four 
conjugations. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Se promener, to walk, 

Part. act. Se proracnant. walking. 

31. Sing. F. 
Part, pass. promen-e ee. walked. 
31. Plural. F. 
Part. pass, promen-is. ees. walked. 

Compound Tenses. 

Pres. S^'etre promenL to have walked. 

Past. S'eiant pronune. having walked. 

Indicative 3Iood. 

Present. Singular. 

J me promhit. I walk ; or do walk, or am walking. 
To. I 



220 

Plural. 
Wous nous jiromcnons, we walk, do walk, or are, &.c. 
Vous vous promeneZj 
Us sq prominent* 

Imperfect. Singular. 
Je me promenais, I did walk, or walked, or was walking. 
Tu tepromenais, 
11 se promenait, 

Plural. 
JYom-s nous promenionSy we did walk, walked, or were 
Vous vous promeniezy walking, 

//s se promenaient, 

Preterite. Singular. 
Je me promenai, I did walk, or walked. 
Tu te prome?ias, 
11 se promena, 

Plural. 
JVbws nous promenames j we did walk, or walked. 
Fotjs vous, promenates, 
lis se promenerenty 

Future. Singular. 
Je me promeneraiy I shall, or will walk. 
7w te promeneraSy 
11 se promeneray 

Plural. 
A'ows nous promeneronsy we shall, or will walk. 
Ferns vous promenerez, 
lis se promeneronty 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je me promenerais y I would, should, or could walk. 
T& te promeneraiSy 
V se promeneraity 

Plural. 
vYows nous promenerions, we would, shoiJd, &,c. walk. 
Fows vous promeneriezy 
Us sepromeneraienty 

Compound Tenses. 
Present, Je me suis promen-e y ee y I have walked 

Imperfect. Je m^etais promen-t eey I had walked 



221 

Preterite. Je me fits promen-c, ee, I had walked. 
Future. Je me serai promen-e, ee } I shall or will have 

walked. 
Conditional. Je me serais prom en-e } ee, I should, fyc. have 

walked. 
We say, also : 
Je me fusse promene , &c. 

Imperative Mood. 
Present. Singular. 
Promine4xn*, walk thou. 

Plural. 
Promenons-nous*, let us walk. 
JPromen ez-vous*, walk ye. 
Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. Singular. 

Que je me promene , that I may walk 
tu te promems, 
il se promene, 

Plural. 
nous nous promenions, that we may walk. 
vous vous promeniez, 
its se promenent, 

Preterite. Singular. 

Que je mepromenasse, that I might walk. 
tu te promenasses, 
il se promenat, 

Plural. 
nous nous promenassions, that we might walk. 
iws vous promenassiez, 
Us se promenassent, 

Compound Tenses. 
M. F. 

Present. Que je me sois promen-e^ ee, that I may havp 

walked 
Preterite. Que je me fusse promen-e, ee, that I might 

have walked 

* When the verb is conjugated with a negation, these three pro- 
nouns are put before the verb : ex. ne vous jwomenez pas, do not 
walk ; and toi is changed into te : ne te promene pas. 
19* 



222 

The learner may here be again reminded, that it is ne- 
cessary to conjugate this verb with a negation and inter- 
rogation : ex. 

Je ne me promene pas, I do not walk. 

Vous promenez-vous ? Do you walk ? 

Ne se promene-t-il pas ? Does he not walk ? 

Compound Tenses. 

Mo suis-je promene ? Have I walked ? or did I 

walk ? 
Ne vous etes-vous pas Have you not warmed 
chanffe ? yourself ? or did you 

not warm yourself ? 
Mon cousin s^est-il infor- Has my cousin inquired ? 
me ? or did my cousin in- 

quire ? 
Voire frere ne s'est-il pas Has not your brother re- 
repenii 1 pented ? or did not your 

brother repent ? 
We say in French, 

Se promener a cheval, en To take a ride, an airing on 

carosse, horseback, in a coach. 

Se promener sur Veau, sur To go upon water, on the 

la riviere, river. 

EXERCISES UPON THE REFLECTED VERBS. 

N. B. Verbs marked thus * are irregular : see the ir 
regular verbs alphabetically arranged under each conju- 
gation. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I rise (early) every 

Se lever, v. de bonne heurc,Vidv. tous les 

morning. Does not your brother remember 

martn, rn.pl. se r 'es souvenir,? .* 

to have seen me ? - - My sister is not well ; she 

dp r«,p.p. scewr,f| se porter, 

applies herself (too much) to study. We 

8-nppliqur,v. trop, ad v. 

t When we mean to express the state of a person's health, instead 
of the verb etre, we must use the reflected one, se porter : 
Ma sceur ne se porte pas bien, My sister is not well. 



223 

rejoice at the good news (which) he has brought 

se rejouirjr.de nouvelle,?. apporte,p.\> 

us. - - When do you intend to go and see 

se proposer jr. de alter yv. *jot> voir,v. 

Mrs. H. ? Do you not repent what you 

se repentirjr* de 

have done to her ? - - I believe your brothers 

fait,p,p. croire,y* 

are not well ; for I have not seen them this 

t car,c. iw,p.p. 

week. 
semaine y {. 

Imp. I was riding on horseback in the park, 

se promenerjr. parc,m. 

when I met him. - - Was he not warm- 

qiiandyC. rencontrerjr. se chatif- 

ing himself when you (came in) ? We did not 

fer,v. enirerjr. 

imagine he would succeed so well. - - You were 

sHmaginer 3 v. reussirjr. 

boasting (too much) of what you have done for 

se vanterjr. trop fait^.p. 

him. - - - They did not expect that they should 

s'attendre,v. a ^ ^ 

meet us. 

Pret. I inquired after you yesterday. - - 

s' } informer jr. de hier,adv. 

iJid not my son behave well in the last 

se comporterjr. dermer 7 adj. 

war ? - - Corn was sold yesterday for twelve shil- 
guerrefi. se vendrejr. *jgt> 

lings a bushel. - - We saw ourselves surrounded by 

se voir jr.* entoure^.p. 

more than twenty persons in an instant. JDid you 

e»,p. 
not find yourselves obliged to go 

se trouverjr. oblige, p.p. de aller,v. 

there ? They did not stop one minute. 

s'' arreter jr . 
Fut. I will not complain of .you, if you 

se ptaindrej/* 
* Remember that verbs marked thus are irregular. 



224 

promise me to behave better. - - Will your 

promettre,v* de mienx,a.dv. 

bird (grow tame) ? - - Shall we submit our- 

oiseau^m. s'apprivoiser,v. se soumettre y v* 

selves to his judgment. -- You will ruin your- 

jugeme?it,m. se miner ,v. 

selves if you continue (gaming). Will they not 

conti7iuer,v. dejouer y v. 

perceive it (as soon as) they come into the 

s^apercevoirff. en des que^c. entrer, v. fut. 

room ? 

Cond If I were in your place, I would 
etais a 

not vex myself. Would she not (make her 

se chagriner,v. s'echap- 

escape) ? - - We would embark (this day) 

per, v. s'embarquer,v. aujourd y hui,adv. 

if the weather (would permit.) Would you embark «o 

temps ,m. le permettait,v. 

soon ? Why would you expose yourselves to their 

£o£,adv. s } exposer,v. 

fury ? - - They would agree very well, 

fureiiTyV. s'accorderjt. fcien, adv. 

if they were not so proud. 

orgueilleux,a.dj. 

Imperative Mood. 

I give you leave to go out, but 

donner^w. permission de sortir,v. mais,c. 

do not overheat yourself. - - Let him amuse him- 

s'echauffer,v. s'amuser,\. 

self a little in my garden. Let us remem- 

impeUyZiAv. jardin,m. se ressou- 

ber what we are to do. Endeavour to 

' venir cJe,v. # t faire,y. S'efforcer,v. de 

please your master, and do not so often mis- 
plaire,v. a maitre^m. se from- 

take in the tenses, numbers, and persons of the 
per,v. temps 

verb. Let them (fall asleep.)* 

s^endormirjV. 

t See the note, p. 197. 



225 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. I must a PPl v myself to the 

Ilfaui que, s*appliquerfr. 

French language. - - I will hide it, lest 

langnej. cacher, de peur quefi. 

she should perceive it. Provided 

ne s'apercevoir,v. era,pro. Pourvu qut,c. 

we rememher to ask him how his 

de demandeVyW lui, comment, adv. 

mother does. (In order that) you may not 

se porter ft. Jifin que^c. 
boast (so much.) - - I have told them who you 

se vanter,y. tant^dv. cZi£,p.p. 

are, that they may behave better another time. 

afin que,c. fois,f. 

Pret. That I might not ruin myself. 

se miner ,v. 
That he might not meddle with my affairs. 

se meter ,v. de 

That we might excuse ourselves. That you 

s'excw56r,v. 

might not go away. That they might no 

s'en s/fer,v. # 
repent too late, 

se repentir,v* trop tare?, adv. 

Compound Tenses. 

(Read with attention the remarks, p. 218.) 

I have inquired after you and your sister. - - - 

s 'informer ,v. de 
He says you have not been well while you 

dit,v. pendant que,c. 

were in the country. Has not your cousin 

a campagne } £. cousinjn. 

laughed at me ? Did we not get up at six 

se moquer,v. de se lever, v. 

(o'clock) ? They have perceived the trick, but 

heure du tour y m. 

it was too late. Did you remember * me 

ce se ressouveniryV. de 



226 

I had not applied myself enough. Had 

s'appliqucr,v. assez y o.dv. 

not your sister imagined, that they would havo 

sHmagineVyV. 

found themselves .obliged to go to France. 

se trouver,v. oblige,]).]), de | 

He has wounded himself in attempting to injure 
se btesser ? v. essayer,v. de nmre y v. 

me. We had thought ourselves able 

se croire,v* capablt^d]. 

to resist them, »but we have (been deceived.) 

de resister ,v . leur mais y c. se tromper,v. 

Did you not hide yourselves (in order) 

se cacherjW. afin 

to surprise them ? When . (I shall) 

de siwprendreft. • Quand^adv. 
have walked five or six minutes in the gar- 
s minute jar- 
den, I will rest myself. - Why did you 

din,m. se reposer,v. 

exhaust yourself as you have done ? Our 

s^epuiseryV. fait,p.j>. 

sailors would have behaved with more reso- 

matelot,m. 

lution. - - Would you not have excused yourself ? - - 

s'excuser^v. 
When they| have repented their faults, I 

se repentir,v*de 
will forgive them. - - If I had been in your place, I 

avals a 

would not have meddled . with their affairs. 

se meler,v. de 

Your friend would not have complained of vou, 

se plaindre,v.* 
and you never would have (fallen out) for so small 

se brouiller,v. si pen 
a matter. 
de chcL^e 

CONJUGATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS 
These are called irregulars because their conjugation 

* See the N. B. P . 54. 

f After when and a few other conjunctions will, and shall, signs 
of the future, are implied m Ew*]\m. 



007 

deviates from the general rule, either by their termina- 
tions, or the want of some of their moods, tenses, persons, 
or numbers. The personal pronouns must now be supplied 
in French by the student. 

VERB OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
ALLER, to go. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Aller, to go. 

Part. JLllanty going. 

Part. pass. AUe, ee, gone. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing Fats, vas, ua, I go, do go, or am going 
Plur. Allons, allez, vont, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Allais, allais, allait, I did go, or was going, 
Piur. Allions, alliez, alliient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Mlaiy alias , alia, I went, or did go. 
Plur. Jlllames, allates,allerent, 

Future. 
Sing. Irai, iras, £ra, I shall, or will go. 
Plur. Irons, irez, iront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Irais, iratSy trait, I should, could, would, or 
Plur. Jrions, iriez, iraient, might go. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Va, go thou ; 

qiCil aUle, let him go. 
Plur. JlllonSy allez, quMIs, aillent. 

Subjunctive Mood 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing J&tte, allies, mile, that I may go. . 

Plur Allions 9 alliez, alllenf. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Illasse, allasses, all at, that I might go. 
Plur. JHlassiom, allassiez, atlasserd. 



228 

N. R. The preterite of the verb etre, je,fus, tufas, he. 
has been used by respectable authors and in conversation 
for fallal, tic alias, but now it is thought unnecessary. 

Among the compound tenses of this verb, it is to be re- 
marked, that those which ^are formed by the participle alle } 
signify that we are or were yet in the place mentioned at 
the time we are or were speaking. Whence it follows, 
that the first person of the compound of the present, 
Je suis alle, I have gone, &c. 

Tu es alle, fyc. 
can seldom be used in discourse ; for we cannot naturally 
say that we are still in a place which can only be men- 
tioned in a past time, after we have left it ; therefore we 
make use of the compound tenses of the verb etre, as fai 
tie, tu as ete, feus ete, f avals ete, faurals ete, &cc ; for when 
we say, 

11 est alle d Londres, He is gone to London. 

we give to understand, that he is still in London, or is on 
his way, going to London : on the contrary, 
// a ete a Londres, He has been at London, 

means, that he has been to London, but is returned. 

The above verb is also conjugated as a reflected one, 
with the particle en : ex. 
&'en alter, to go away. 
Je m'en vals, I go or am going away. 
Tu t'en vas, thou goest or art going away. 
II s'en va, he goes or is going aivay. 
Nous nous en allons, we go or are going away. 
Vous vous en allez, you go or are going away 
lis s'en vont, they go or are going away. 

Negatively. 
Je ne m'en vals pas, I am not going away. 
11 ne s'en va pas, he is not going away. 
Nous ne nous en allons pas, we are not going away. 
Vous ne vous en allez pas, &c. you are not going aivay, &c 

Interrogatively. 
S'en va-t-ll ? Is he going away 1 
V T ous en allez-vous ? fyc. are you going away ? &c. 
Ne s'en vont-lls pas ? Sfc. are they not going away ? Sec 

The Imperative Mood is thus conjugated : 



229 

Singular, 
TVt'en, go thou away. 
Q a'U s'en aille, let him go away. 

Plural. 
AHons-nous en, let us go away. 
Allez-Yous en, go away. 
Qu'ils s'en aillent, let them go aicay. 

Its compound tenses are, 
Je m'en suts alle, I have gone away. 
Je in' en elais, alle, I had gone away. 
Je m'enfus alle, I had gone away. 
Je ni'en serai alle, I shall have gone away, &c. 
Je m'en serai's aZt 7 e, I should have gone away. 

We say, also : 
Je m'en fusse alle, &c. 

VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
acquerib. to acquire. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present Acqucrir, to acquire. 

Part act. Acquerant, acquiring. 

Part pass. Acquis se, acquired. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Acquiers, acquiers, acquiert, I acquire, or am 
Plur. Acquerons, acquerez, acquierent, acquiring. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Acquerais, acquerais, acquerait, I did acquire, or 
Plur. Acqutrions, acqueriez, acqueraient, was acquiring. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Acquis, acquis, acquit I acquired, or did 

Plur. Acquimes, acquites, acquire/it, acquire. 

Future. 
Sing. Acquerrai, acquerras, acquerra, I shall or will 
Plur. Acquerrons, acquerrez, acquerront, acquire. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Acquerrais, acquerrais, acqiierrait, I should, would, 

or could acquire, 
Plur. Acquerrions, acquerriez, acquerraient, 

Impeeative Mood. 
Sing. Acquiers, acquire thou 

Plur. Acquerons, acquerez. 
20 



230 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing Jlcquiere, acquieres^ acqidere, that I may ac- 

Plur. JLcquerions , acqiCeriez, acquierent, quire. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Jlcquisse, acquisses, acquit, that I might ac- 

Plur. JLcquissioriSy acquissieZy acquissent 7 quire. 

QUER1R, TO FETCH. 

The primitive of the above verb is never used but in 
the present of the infinitive mood : ex. 

Envoy ez-moi, querir, Send for me. 

CONQUERIR, to conquer ; REQUERIR, to re- 
quire ; are conjugated like J1CQUERIR. 

BGUILLIR, to boil 

Infinitive Moon, 

Present. Bouillir, to boil 

Part. act. Bouillant, boiling 

Part. pass. Bouilli } ie, boiled. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing, Bous, botiSy bout, I boil, or am boiling. 

Plur. Bouillons, bouillez, bouillent } 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Bouillon's, bouiUaiSy bouillait, I did boil, or was 
Plur. Bouillions, bouilliz, bouillaient, boiling. 

Preterite. 
Sing Bouillisj bouillis, bouillit, I boiled, or did boil. 
Plur BouiUimeSy bouilliies, bouillirent, 

Future. 

Sing. Bouilliraiy bouiilirasy bouilliray I shall, or will boil 
Plur. BouillironSy bouillirez, bouillironty 

Conditional. 
Sing Bouilliraisy bcuillirais, bouilliraity I should, would, or 
Plur, BouillirionSy bouiliinez, bouilhraient, couul boil. 



231 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Bons, bouille, boil thou 

Plur. Bouillons, bouillez, bouillent, 

SubjUx\ctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing Bouille j bouilles, bouille, that I may boil 

Plur. Bouillions, bouilliez, bouillent, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Bouillisse, bouiliisses, bouillit, that I might boil. 
Plur. Bouillissions, bouillissiez, bouillissenl, 

This verb, as well as its compound rebouillir, to boil 
again, is but seldom used, except in the third person sin- 
gular or plural, and in its infinitive mood, which is com- 
monly joined to the verb Faire, to render it active, and use 
»t in all persons : ex. 

Faites bouillir cette viancle, Boil that meat. 

COURIR, TO RUN. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Courir, to run. 

Part. act. Courant, running. 
Part. pass. Count, ue, to run. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Cours, cours, court, I run, or am running. 
Plur. Courons, courez, courent, 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Courais, courais, com-ait, I did run, or was run- 
Plur. Courions, couriez, couraient, ning. 

Preterite. 

Sing Courus, counts, courut, I ran, or did run. 
Plur. CourumeS; courutes, coururent, 

Future. 
Sing. Cojrrai, courras, courra, I shall, or will run. 
Plur. Courrons, courrcz, courront, 



232 

Conditional. 

Sing. Courrais, courrais, courrait, I should, would 

Plur. Cournons, couryiez, courraient, or could run 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Cours, coure, run thou. 

Plur. Courons, courez, convent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Coure, coures, coure, that I may run. 

Plur. CourionSy couriez, courent y 

Preterite. 
Sing. Courusse, courusses, courut, that I might run 
Plur. CourussionSy courussi°,z, courussent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Jlccourir, to run to. 
Concouriry to concur. 
Discourir, to discourse. 
Encounr, to incur. 



Parcourir, to run over. 
Recourir, to have recourse 

to. 
Secourir, to succour, t<? 

assist. 



COUVRIR, TO COVER. 
See OUVRIR, to open. 



CUEILLIR, TO GATHER. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Cueillir, to gather, 

Part. act. Cueillant, gathering. 

Part. pass. Cueilli, ie, gathered. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing Cueille, cueilles, cueille y I gather or am gathering. 
Plur Cueillons, cueillez, cueillent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Cueillais, cueillais^ cueillait, I did gather, or wa3 
Plur. Cueillions, cueillieZj cueillaitnt, gathering. 

Preterite. 
Sing. CueilJiSj cueillis, cueiUit, I gathered, or did gath- 
Plur. Cueillimes, cueiUites } cueiUirent, er. 



233 



Future. 
Sing. Cueillerai, cueilleras, cueillera, I shall, or will 
Plur. Cueillerons, cueillerez, cueilleront, gather 

Conditional. 
Sing. Cueillcrais, cueillerais, cueillerait, I should, would, 

or could gather 
Plur. Cueillerions, cueilleriez, cueilleraknt, 

Imperative Mood. 
Cueille, gather thou. 
cueillez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
que que 

ciieiHes, cueille, that I may gather. 
Cueillions, cueilliez, cueillent, 
Preterite. 
rag. CueiUisse, cueiUlsses, ciieiUit, that I might 
Plur. Cueilllssions, cueillisncz, ciieillissent, gather. 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Si 



Cueillons, 



Que 
Cueille. 



Accueillir, to make wel- 
come. 



Recueillir, to gather 
gether. 



to- 



Present. 
Part. act. 
Part, pass 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 



fcing. 

Plur. 



Dors, 
Dormons, 

Dormais, 
Dormions, 

Dormis, 
Dormimes, 

Dormirai, 
Dormirons* 



DORMIR, to sleep. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Dormir, to sleep. 
Dormant, sleeping 
, Dormi, slept. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
dors, dort, I sleep, or am sleeping. 
dormez, dorment, 

Imperfect. 
dorraais, dormait, I did sleep, or was 
dormiez, dormaimt, sleeping 

Preterite. 
dormis, dormit, I slept, or did sleep. 
dorniites, dormir ent, 

Future. 
dormiras, dormira, I shall, or will 



iormirez, dormironi ) 
20* 



si 



eep. 



234 



Sing. 
Plur. 


Dormirais, 
Dormirions, 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Dormons 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Que 
Dorme, 

Dormions, 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Dormis.se, 
Dormissions 



Conditional. 
dormirais, dormirait, I would, could, or 
dormiriez, dormiraient, should sleep. 

Imperative Mood. 
Dors, sleep thou. 

dormez. 
Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
que que 

dormes, dorme, that I may sleep. 
dormiez, dor merit, 
Preterite. 
dormisses, dormii, that I might sleep. 

dormissiez, dormissent, 
The compounds of this verb are, 



Endomir, to make sleep 
S'endormir, to fall asleep, 

FAILLIR, to fail. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Faillir, to fail. 

Part. act. Faillant, failing. 
Part. pass. Failli, ie, failed. 
Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Faux, faux, faut, 
Plur. Faillons, faillez, faillent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Faillais, faillais, faillail, 
Plur. Faillions, failliez, faillaient. 

Preterite. 
fa His, faillit, 
failliles, faillirent. 
Future. 
faillir as, faillir a, 
Faillirons, faillirez, failliront. 
Conditional. 
faillirais, , faillir ait, 
faillir iez, fa illiraient. 

Imperative Mood. 
Faille, 
faillez. 
Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
que que 

failles, faille, 
failliez, failleno. 



Se rendormir, to fall asleep 
again. 



Sing. Faillis, 
Plur. Faillimes, 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Faillirai, 



Sing. Faillirais, 
Plur. Faillirions, 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Faillons, 



Que 

Faille, 
Faillions, 



,£€) o 

Preterite. 
Sing. Faillisse, faillisscs, faillii, 
Plur. Faillissions, faillissiez, faillissent. 

The compound of this verb is ; Defaillir, to Decay, of which 
the three persons singular of the present of the indicate mood 
are not used. 

EXERCISES ON the foregoing VERBS 

AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Where are you going ? — I am going to the 

Ot/-,adv. 

play. 1 would go with you, if I had time. Why 

corned ie,f. le 

are they going away so soon ? - - - Will not your father 

be angry, if you go there without him ? - - We were 

fache,oAj. 

going to Miss D 's, when we met you. 

cJiez,ip. <*# avons rencontre, p. p. 

- - These men went yesterday from house to house. - - 
Believe me, sir, do not go to see them. - - Your father 
Croire, v. *»voir, v. 

told me {that) you will go to France and Italy as soon 
dire, v. 

as the war (is over.) - - My sister and I, went last 

serafinie. dernier, adj. 

Wednesday to Yauxhall, - - . - - If you had gone thither, 

an hour sooner you would have heard fine music 

plutot, adv. entendre, v. 

- - Your uncle has acquired a great name in America. 

no?n,m. 

- - My father went to pay your 2 uncle 3 a visit 1 

°^rendre,v. w 

last week, and lie did not welcome him (as a) friend 

en, p. 

Did he not? I am sorry for it. - - Mr. Dubois, 

the king's silversmith, has brought the watch : it 

orfevre 
now goes very well. - - - Go and fetch me 

maintenant,&<iY. ^ 

the letter I left in my room. - - I have (sent for) 

laisser,\, [envoy e querir) 

him. Boil this chicken, and roast that goose. 

poulet,m. rotir,v. oie,f. 

At last we have conquerred. This 

Enfin, adv. 



236 

water will soon boil. - - - - Buil that meat 

bientdt,a,dv, 

again ; it is not done enough. Do not run so 

cuit,]).]). 

fast; you will be tired. They always run, 

vite,zidv. fctiigul,j>Jp. 

when they go to see their aunt. Your brother 

<** tante,f. 

runs faster than I. When he heard that his . 

apjjritjV. 
friend was in danger, he ran instantly to him. - - 

etait aussiiot,v. ■ a 

Let us not discourse any more on that subject. I 

<*>= sujet,m. 

would assisst him with all my heart, if I could. This 

pouvais 
gentlemen is a great traveller : he has run over all 
lions ieur voyageur, m . 

Europe. Let him go away, for I do not wish to 

EuropeX car,e. veux,Y. ^ 

speak to him. If you do it, you will incur your 

jhire,v. 

father's displeasure. That would concur to the pub- 

depla is ir, m . Cela 

lie good. - - When children are guilty, they generally 

bicn,m. coiq)aule,&d'), 

have recourse to some falsehood. - - For whom are you 

quelque mensonage. 
gathering those charming flowers ? - - I gather them for 

fleur,f. 
my mother, - - - Why do they not gather some roses ? - - 

rose,f. 
Mrs. P. would have gathered some, but the gardener 
Mme jardinier, m . 

told her he would gather them himself. - - Of all nations 
none has welcomed the poor French clergy better 

clergejn. 

than the English nation. Do not make any noise, 

faire.jV. 
for my sister (is asleep.) - - I hope she will sleep better to- 
car,Q ce 

night. - She would sleep much better, if she were in her 
soir,m. 

V4- - - If I do not walk a little, I shall fall asleep. 

Z//,m. se pwpmener,v 



237 



- - My mother, Bister, brother, and I, went yesterday to Med- 
furd, to Bee Misa Keen. Did you go thither on foot ? 

•-^ a 

N ), my mother and sister went in a coach, and my 

brother and I on horseback. 
a checal.m. 



bing. 

Phir. 

Sing. 
Plur. 



Fa is, 

Fui/oas, 

Fuyais, 
Fui/ions, 



Sing. Fids. fiiis, 
Plur. Fuimes, fuites. 



FUIR, TO SHUN, TO AVOID, TO FLEE. 

Isilsttive Mood. 
Present. Fair, to flee. 
Part. act. Fuyant, fleeing. 
Part. pass. Fid. ie, fled. 
Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
fait. I flee. 
lent, 
Imperfect. 

fuyait, I fled, or did flee. 
fuyaient, 
Preterite. 
fait, 
fuirent, or we may 



fitis, 
fuyez, 

fuyais. 



say, Je pris la 

fuiie, <£c. 



Sing. 
Piar. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



F ad red, 
\ ,is, 

Fuirais, 
Fair ions, 



Fuyons, 



Future. 

fairas, fuira, I shall, or will flee. 
fairez, fuironi, 
Conditional. 
fuirais, fvdrodi. I should, would, or could 
fuiriez, fuiroderd, flee. 

Imperative Mood. 
Fids, Jute, flee thou 
fuuez, fide at, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
que 



Que que que 

Fide, Jules, fuie, that I may flee. 

Fuyions, fuyiez, fuient, 

Preterite. 

que que 

Fuisse, fuisses, fad. that I might flee. 

Fvissions, fuissiez, fuissient, or 
Je prisse la fuite, &c., that I might flee, & 

S'enfuir, to run away! 







ftOQ 








Hair, to Hato. 








Infinitive Mood. 






Present. Hair, to Hate. 






Part. act. Haissant, Hating. 






Par 


t. pass. Hair, hate, Hated. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 




Sing. 


Hals, 


hais, halt, 




Plar, 


Hals sons, 


haisser, haissent. 
Imperfect. 




Sing. 


Haissais, 


haissais, hdissait, 




Plar. 


Haissions, 


haissiez, liaissaient. 
Preterite. 




Sing. 


Hals, 


hats, Jiait, 




Plar. 


Haimes, 


liaites, lidirent. 
Future. 




Sing. 


Hairaie, 


hair as, hair a, 




Plur. 


Hair oris, 


hairez, hairont. 








Conditional. 




Sing. 


Ha'irals, 


hdirais, hdirait, 




Plur. 


Hair ions ; 


hdiriez, hairaient. 
Imperative Mood. 




Sing. 




Hais, 




Plur. 


Haissons, 


hdissez. 
Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 






Que 


que que 




Sing. 


Hdisse, 


luiisses, hdisse, 




Plar. 


Haissions, 


hdissiez, haissent. 
Preterite. 




Sing. 


Haisse, 


haisse, ha'it, 




Plar. 


Haissions, 


hdissiez, haissent. 






MENTIR, to lie. 








Infinitive Mood. 






Present. Mentir, to lie. 






Part. act. Meniant, lying. 






Part. pass. Menti, lied. 








Indicative Mood. 








Present. 




Sing. 


Mens, 


mens, ment, 1 lie. 




Plar. 


Mentons, 


mentez, mentent, 
Imperfect.. 




Sing. 


Mentals, 


mentais, mentait, I did lie or was 


Plar. 


Mentions, 


mentiez, mentaient, 
Preterite. 




Sing. 


Mr ntis, 


mentis, mentit, I lied, or 


did lie. 


Plar. 


Mentimes, 


mentiles, mehtirent. 





Mn£. 



239 



mentira, I shall, or will lie. 
mentiront, 



Future. 

Mentirai, meniiras, 
Mentirons, mentirez, 

Conditional. 

Mentirais, mentirais, mentircdt, I would, could, or 
Mentirions, mentiriez, mentiraient, should lie. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Mens, lie thou. 

Plur. Mentons, mentez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
♦ Present. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



king. 
Plur. 



que 

mente, that I may lie. 

mentent, 



Que que 

Sing. Mente, mentes, 

Plur. Mentions, mentiez, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Mentisse, mentisses, meniit, that I might lie. 
Plur. Mentissions, meniissiez, mentissent. 

The compound of this verb is 
Dementir, to give one the lie, to belie, to contradict, 



Sing. Meurs, 
Plur. Mourons, 



Sing. Mourais, 
Plur. Mourions, 

Sing. Mourns, 
Plur. Monrumes, 

Sing. Mourrai, 
Plur. Mourrons, 



I die, or am dying. 



MOTFRIR, to die. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Mourir, to die. 
Part. act. Mourant, dying. 
Part. pass. Mort, te, died, or dead. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

meurs, meurt, 

mourez, meurent, 

Imperfect. 

mourais, mourait, I was dying. 

mouriez, mouraient, 

Preterite. 

mounts, mound, I died. 

moirutes, moururent, 

Future. 
mourras, mourra, I shall, or will die, 
mourrez, mourront, 



Sing 

Plur 

Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur 



240 
Conditional. 
Mourrais mourrais y mown ail y I should, could, or 
MourrionS) mourriez, mourraient, would die. 

Imperative Mood. 

MeurSy die thou. 
MouroriSy mourez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Meiire, meures, meure, that I may die. 
MourionSy mouriezy meurenty 

Preterite. 
Monrussey mourusses y mourutythai I might die. 
MourussioriSy mourussiezy mourussenty 
Se momiry to be dying 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur 



Offre, 

OjfronSy 

Offrais 
OffAonSy 

OJfriSy 
Off rimes y 

Offrirai, 

Offrirons 



OffriraiSy 
Offririons 



OFFRIRy TO OFFER. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Offriry to offer. 

Part. act. OJfrant, offering. 
Part. pass. Offerty te y offered. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
offreSy offre y I offer, or am offering 

offrez, ojfrenty 

Imperfect. 
offrais y offraily I 
offriezy offraienty 

Preterite. 

offrisy offrity I offered, or did offer 
offriteSy offrirent, 

Future. 

offriras, offrira y I shall or will offer 
offrireZy offrironty 

Conditional. 
offriraisy offnraii, I would, could, or 



did offer, or was 
offering. 



off,- 



imeZy ojjrn aient } 



should offer 



241 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. QfF re > °^ er thou. i 

Plur. Ojfrons, offrez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present 
Que que que 

Sing. Offre, ojfres, offre, that I may offer. 
Plur. Offrions, offriez, offreni, 
Preterite. 
Sing. Offrisse, offnsses, offrit, that I might offer. 
Plur. Offrissions, offrissiez, offrissent y 



OU1R, TO HEAR. 

This verb is never used but in its participle passive 
joined to some of the tenses of the verb avoir, to have 
preceding the verb dire, to say : ex. 

J'ai oui' dire que, I have heard that, &c. 

♦ In general we make use of apprendre, irr. v. 

OUVR1R, TO OPEN. 

This verb, as well as its compounds, 
Couvrir, to cover. Recouvrir, to cover again 

Decouvrir, < . ' > is conjugated like OFFR1R. 

' } to uncover, t J ° 



PJIRT1R, TO SET OUT, TO GO AWAY. 

And its compounds, 



Departtr, rr'partir, to dis- 
tribute, to impart. 



Repartir, to set out again, to 
reply. 



Se REPENT1R, to repent ; 
SENT1R, to feel, to smell, 
And its compounds, 



Consentir, to consent, to 
agree, 



Rcssentir, to be sensible of, 
to resent, 



Pressenfh\ to have a foresight or presentiment, 
are conjugated like JWentir, 
21 



242 

EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS 
AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

As soon as they saw us coming, they ran awny. 
Aussitot que voir y venir^v. 

- - Avoid bad company. - - He does not love your 

compagnie,f. 
sister, because she lies. - If you forgive me this time, 
parceque y c. fois y t\ 

I never will lie any more. - - I cannot believe him ; 

tjGn pouvoir y v 

for he contradicts himself at every instant. - - Tell 
car,c. a tout moment. Dire y v 

me what she has done to you ; but above all, do not lie. 

$ur y p. 

- - If you do not behave better, your mother will 

se comporter^v. 
die with grief. - - Mrs. S. died at Paris on the seventh 

de chagrin.m. a ur> 

of August, one thousand seven hundred and eighty. 

Aoid y m. 

- - Misfortune often* seeks those who avoid it, and 

Malheur,m y chevcher^v. 

sometimes avoids those who seem to seek it. - - 

quelquefois ,adv . sembler y v. <& 

Were I in your place, I would not offer her aay money. 
Sifetais a 

- Why do you not open the door for your sister ? 
Pourquoi, adv. cl 

- - Your brother was no sooner arrived in London, than 

pluiot^adv. a 

I offered him my services. - - Your actions never belie 
your words. - - Open the window. - - I had heard you 

paroles. 
were going to Holland (at the) beginning of next 

au commencement ,m. 
month. - - I }iope you will never discover what I have 

esperer^v. 
told you. --Cover my hat, and put it upon that 

(lively. meitre,v. 

chair - - I will set out to-morrow morning at sever 
(o-olock.) - Do not set out without me - - Let us go and 
heures. *&* 

*3ee note, page 46. 



243 

see Mrs. D* # , I have heard she is dying. -- Ycu-r sister 
repents much of having sold her books. - - Gather that 

d? avoir 
pink, it smells charmingly. - - Her mother says she 

<sillet,m bien &on,adv. 

never will consent to it. If you do not take 

prendre,* 
care, you will repent (of) your imprudence soon or 

p;arde, £or,adv. 

late. - - Let us die for our country, and our death will 
tard.adv. pcitriejt. 

be glorious. - - Every citizen (ought to) be disposed to 

glorieux , adj . doit, v. 

sacrifice himself for the public good : it is at this 

6ien,m. ce,pro. d 7 p. 
price only that (a man) acquires a lawful right 

on legitime ,adj. droit ,m. 

to the advantages of civil society. 1 should die 

satisfied, if I knew (that) you were happy. - - 

contented}. savoir,v. (bythesubj.) 

You soon felt the effect of it. My cousin set o*it 

effet.m. 

from here yesterday morning at nine o'clock. I 

rr:i,adv. 

offer you my house : it is at your service. You 

may rely upon her : she will never discover 

pouvoir,v. compter ,v. 

your secrets. - - I will never offer you my 2 horse 3 any 

more 1 . He will feel it in his turn, when he 

a tour y m. 

is old. 

(by the fut.) 

REVET1R, to invest 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Revetir, to invest with, to give other clothes. 
Part. act. Revetant, investing. 
Part. oass. Revetu, ue, invested. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Revets, revets revet, I invest. 
Plur. Revetons, revetez, revetent, 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



211 
Imperfect. 
RevetaiSy revetais* revetait, I did invest 

Rtvetions, revehcz, Revctaient, . 

Preterite. 

Revetis, revelis, revctily I invested, or did in 
RevtthneSy revetites, revetirent, vest 

Future. 

Revetirai, revetiraSy revetira, I shall, or will in- 
Reveiirons, revetirez, revetiront, vest. 

Conditional. 
Revetiraisy revetirais, revetirait, I should, would, 
RevetirioriS) revetirieZy revetiraient, &c. invest. 

Imperative Mood. 



Sing. 

Plur. RevetonSy 



Revets, invest thou. 
revctez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 



Que 
Sing. Revete, 
Plur. Revetions, 



que que 

revetes 9 revetey that I may invest 

revetiez y revetent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Revetisse y revetisses, revetit, that I might invest 
Plur. RevetissionSy rev etissiezy rev etis sent. 



Sing SerSy 
Plur. Servons, 



SERVIRy TO SERVE, TO help to. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Serviry to serve. 

Part. act. Servant, serving. 
Part. pass. Servi, ie y served. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

serty I serve, or am serving . 



serSy 

servezy serventy 







245 






Imperfect. 


Sing- 


Scrvais, 


servais, scrvaii, I did serve, or was 


Plur. 


Sei'vions, 


serviez, servaient, serving. 
Preterite. 


Sing. 


ServiS) 


servis, servit, I served, or did serve. 


Plur. 


Servimes, 


servites, servirent, 
Future. 


Sing. 


Servirai, 


serviras, servim, I shall, or will serve. 


Plur. 


Servirons, 


servirez, serviront, 
Conditional . 


Sing. 


Servirais, 


servirais, servirait, I would, should, or 


Plur. 


Servmons, 


serviriez, serviraient, could serve 
Imperative Mood. 


Sing. 




Sers, serve thou. 


Plur. 


Servons, 


servez. 






Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 




Que 


que que 


Sing. 


Serve, 


serves, serve, that I may serve. 


Plur. 


Servions, 


serviez, servent, 
Preterite. 


Sing. 


Servisse, 


servisses, servit, that I might serve. 


Plur. 


Servissions 


, servissiez, servissent, 



The compounds of this verb are, 
Desservir, to do an ill office, to clear a table. 
Se servir, to make use, to use. 



SORTIR, TO GO OUT, 
is conjugated like MENTIS. 



SOUFFRIR, TO SUFFER, 

is conjugated like OFFRIR, 

ten1r, to hold, to keep. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Tenir, to hold. 

Part. act. Tenant, holding. 
Part. pass. Tenu, ue, held. 
21* 



246 

< Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Tiens, tiens, iient, I hold, or am holding. 
Tenons, tenez, tiennent, 

Imperfect. 
Tenais, tenais, tenait, I did hold, or was holding. 
Teutons, teniez, tenaient, 

Preterite. 
Tins, tins, tint, I held, or did hold. 
Plur. Tinmes, tintes, tinrent, 

Future. 
tiendras, tiendra, I shall, or will hold. 
tiendrez, tiendront. 

Conditional. 
tiendrais, tiendrait, I should, could, or 
Plur. Tiendrions, tiendriez, tiendiaient, would hold 

Imperative Mood. 
Tiens, hold thou. 
tenez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 



Sing 
Plur 

Sing 
Plur 

Sing 



Sing. Tiendrai, 
Plur. Tiendrons, 

Sing. Tiendiais, 



Sing. 

Plur. Tenons, 



Que 
Sing. Tienne, 
Plur. Teutons, 

Sing. Tinsse, 
Plur. TinssionSy 



que que 

iienneSy tienne, that I may hold. 
teniez, tiennent, 
Preterite. 

tinsses, tint, that I might hold. 

tinssiez, tinssent. 



The compounds of this verb are, 



8'abstenir, to abstain. 
Jippartenir, to belong. 
Contenir, to contain. 
Detenir, to detain. 
Enlreienir, to keep, to en- 
tertain. 



Maintenir, to maintain. 
Obtenir, to obtain. 
Retenir, to retain, to keep. 
Soutenir, to maintain, to 
hold, to support. 



TKE S SJIILL1R, to start, to leap for. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Tressaillir, to start. 

Part. act. . Tressaillant, starting 
Part. pass. Tressailli, ie, started. 



R 



247 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing Tressaille, tressailles, tressaille, I start 
Plur. Tressaillons, tressaillez, tressaillent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Tressaillais, tressaillais, tressaillait, I did start. 
Plur. Tressaillions, tressailliez, fressaillaient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Tressaillis, tressaillis, tressaillit, I started. 
Plur. Tress aillimes, tressaillites , tressaillirent, 

Future, 
ing. Tressaillirai, tressailliras } tressaillira^ I shall, or 

will start. 
Plur. Tressaillirons, tressaiUirez, tressaillironty 

Conditional. 
Sing. Tressallirais, tressaillirais, tressaillirait, I should, 

would, &c. start. 
Plur. Tressaillirions , tressailliriez, tress ailliraient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Treissaitte, tressailloiis, tressaille. 
Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Tressaille) tressailles, tressaille, that I may start. 
Plur. Tressaillions , tressaillitz, tressaillent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Tressaillisse, tressaillisses } tressailltt, that I might 
Plur. Tress aillissions } tressaillissiez, tressaillissentj start. 



J1SSJ11LLIR, to assault, is conjugated as above. 

SAILLIRj to jut, to jut out, (term in architecture,) 
is conjugated like TRESSJHLL1R, but is only used in 
the third person of some tenses and its infinitive mood. 

N. B. SJ1ILL1R, to gush out, (speaking of any 
liquid,) is regular, and conjugated like PUNIR. 

VEJY1R, to come, 
and its compounds. 



Ccnvenir de } a, to agree, to 
become, to fit, to suit, 



Revenir, to come back ; to 
return, 



248 



Contrevenir a, to infringe, 
Devenir, to become,* 
Disconvenir de, to disagree, 
Intervenir a, to intervene. 
Parve?iir a, to attain to, 
Prevenir, to prevent, to 

prejudice, to anticipate, 

to prepossess, 
Provenir, to proceed, 

are conjugated 



Se souvenir de, to remember, 
to remind,| 

Se -ressonvenir de, to recol- 
lect, 

Subvenir a, to relieve, to 
assist, 

Survenir, to befall, to hap- 
pen unexpectedly, to 
come to, 

like TEJYIR. 



VETIR, TO CLOTHE. 

This verb is seldom used but in the present of the infini- 
tive mood, and participle passive, vetu y clothed 5 therefore 
the conjugation of its compound RE VETIR, to invest 
with, to give other clothes, has just been given in 
lieu of it. 

EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS 
AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Your friend Mr. H ### , does not serve me well. - - - 
ami,m. <£n 

Shall I help you to a little bit of lamb, 

morceau,m. agneau, 

or a wing of that chicken ? We would 

ailefi poidet,m. 

serve him with all our heart, if we could. I 

de pouvoir y v. 

* This verb in English is most generally accompanied by the preposition 
of governing the noun or pronoun : but it must be observed, that, in French 
the preposition must be suppressed, and the noun or pronoun becomes the 
nominative to the verb devenir : ex. 
Ne vous informez point de ce que Do not inquire about what will be- 

je deviendrai, come of me. 

Que deviendra votre cousin si son What will become of your cousin t if 

pere Vabandonne ? his father forsake him 1 

Si cela arrivait, je ne'sais ce que Should that happen, I know not 

nous deviendrions, what would become of us. 

f When this verb, in English, governs a noun or pronoun in the accusa- 
tive case, it must be put in the infinitive mood, and preceded by the verb 
faire in the same tense, number and person, as the verb to remind : ex. 
Faites-moi souvenir de passer chez, Remind me to call upon your aunt 

votre tante., 
Oui, je vous e* ferai souvenir, Yes, I will remind you of it 



240 

shall go out in half an hour. - - If we go to-day 

aiyoMrc/Vmi, adv. 
to Richmond, we will (make use of) your coach. - - My 

se servir de carrosse,m. 

sister went out # this morning at nine o'clock, and is not 

matin,m. 
yet returned. - - Nobody knows what we suffered in our 

revenir,v. s avoir, v. 

last voyage. - - If 1 were as ill as you, I would 

voyage,m. ?na/ade, adj. 

not go out of my room. Why do not you 

chambref. Pourquoi,a.dv. 

serve your friends, since you may do it ? 

puis que , c. pouvoir,v . 

Shouldf they forsake you, what would become of 

ahundonner,v. 
you ? - - I would make use of your horse, if you (were 

chevalyVn. avoir 

so kind as to) lend it to me. The more we are 

la bonte de 

above others, the more it becomes us to be 

au dessus de,p. 

modest and humble. - - My aunt and I came yester- 

tante,f. 

day to see you, but you were not at home. 1 

hope you will keep your word, and come 

tenir. parolefi 

to-morrow. - - I assure you Mr. R* # 's father holds 
demain,adv. assurer, v . 

the first rank in the town, but the son will never 

rang, in. 
attain his father's reputation. - - Men acquire, by 

Homme,m. 
long labours, knowledge which often becomes 

travail,m lumiere,£. 

fatal to them. I maintain, and will always 

fwieste,ad]. 

maintain, that you will not be happy without 

heurenx, adj. sans, p. 
virtue. - - We were coming to see you, but you have 
anticipated all my designs. - - She leaped for joy when 
prevenir,v. de 

* See page 161. t Turn, if they should, &c. 



250 

sho saw her. - - At last she has agreed to pay hel 

-E?i/m,adv. # de 

an annual pension of twenty pounds. - - Her mother 
started up at these words, and beearne furious. - - - 
*jGn a,p. parole J. furieux fid]. 

Come on Friday morning at nine o'clock. 

KjCn Vendredi 
This house will belong to me after her death. - - 

apresfl. morlj. 

You will obtain leave to go out another time, 

permission de f°^ 3 S 

if you come back soon. - - This box contains all 
bientot 

my jewels. 1 agree Miss N. is the prettiest of the 

bijoux ,rri. 
family ; but she is so proud that I know not what will 
become of her. - - Who knows whether they will re- 

savoir,v. si } c. 
member, (of)it or not ?- They assaulted the town (in the) 

au 
middle of the night, and all their officers, even 2 
milicu,m. meme } 'ddv. 

the general 1 , agree that they have acquired much 

acquerirjV, 
glory. - - Remember that, if you infringe the law, you 

will incur the punishment decreed by the law. 

peine ,f. porte,p.p. 

Your illness proceeds from a great heat. The 

chaleurfi 
first time (that) you come to see me, I will keep you 

(by the fut.)<^ 

two or three days. Mr. B. desired me to tell you 

prier^v. de 

that he will not come back to-day. When the 

surgeon had opened his vein, the blood gushed 

chirurgienjon. sang,m. 

out with an extraordinary impetuosity. - - That poor 
man will bless you, if you (give 2 him 1 other 2 dothes 2 .) 

beniryV. rev£tir,v. 

He is so prepossessed against me, that he will not 

contrejp. voidoirjV. 

* See the neuter verbs for the formation of the compound tenses, 
^age 213. t See observation, p. 162. 



251 

agree he (is in the wrong.) - -We should certainly 

avoir tort. certaincment ; adv 

have come back yesterday, had we had time. - - You will 

Ater,adv.si le temps, 

become a great man, if you continue to study with 

continuer,v. de 
the same assiduity. - - He would have come to see us 

assiduitefi etre y v. 

last week, if it had not rained. - - The first time 

semaineX plu y p.ip. fois 3 C. 

"I go out, remind* me to call on your bro- 

(by the fut.) de passer, v. chezjp. 

ther. That hat would suit you very well, if you 

were a little taller. Do not go out to-day, you 

will suffer much if you do. - - I should not suffer 

beaucoup, Sidv. 
(so much) if it were fine weather. - - Why do not 
iantjVidv. faisait,v. 

you abstain from drinking ? - - The king has invested 
boire,v. 

that nobleman with all his authority. You may 

seigneur jn. de Pouvoir,v. 

set out this morning, but remember to come back 

at night. Were I in your place, I would detain 

ce soir s m. a place. ,f. 

him here a little longer ; for he always keeps 

long-temps, adv. car,c. 

himself shut up in his house. I do not think that 

e nferm e , p . p . croire : v . 

colour suits your sister. - - When will she return 

(by the subj.) Quand,adv. 

from the country ? - - She wrote she would come next 

camvaomeS. 
Saturday, if the weather were fine. 



VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION 

ASSEOJR, TO SIT DOWN. 

Infinitive Mood, 

Present. Jlsseoir, to sit down. 

Part. act. Jlsseyant, sitting down. 

Part pass. Jlssis, ise, sat down (or seated.) 

* See the last note, p, 247. 



252 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Assieds, assieds, assied, I sit down 
Plur. Asseyons, asseyez., asseyent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Asseyais, asseyais, asseyalt, I did sit, or was sitting 
Plur. Assseylons, asseylez, asseyaient, down 

Preterite. 
Sing. Assis,; assis, assit, I sat down, 
Plur. Ass'imeSj ass'ites, . assirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Asslerai, assleras, asslera, I shall, or will sit down. 
Plur. Asslerons, assierez, assleront, 
Conditional. 
Sing. Assierais, assierais, asslerait, I should, would, or 
Plur. Asslerlons, assleriez, assieraient, could sit down, 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Assieds sit down. 

Plur. Asseyons, asseyez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Asseye, asseyes, asseye, that I may sit down. 
Plur. Asseyions, asseyiez, asseyent, 
Preterite. 
Sing. Asslsse, assisses, assit, that I might sit down. 
Plur. Asslsslons, assissiez, assissent, 

Asseoir is active, but is most generally conjugated as a 
reflected verb, which may easily be done, by the learner 
adding a double pronoun to the different tenses, and form- 
ing the compound ones by the verb etre, as in sepromener, in 
page 219 : ex. 

. Je m' assieds, tu t' assieds, il hassled ; 

Nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, Us $? asseyent. 

Compound Tenses. 
Je me mis assis, tu t'es assls, il sest assis ; 

Nous nous sommes assls. vous vous etes assls, &c. 



The compound of this verb is, 

Se rasseoiVy to sit down again. 

SE01R, to fit well, to become, to fit, the primitive 
of asseoir, is never used in the present of its infinitive 
mood ; and in its other tenses is conjugated only as fol- 
lows : 

Part, act Seyant, fitting well, fitting, or becoming. 

Part, pass Sis, (never used but in the sense of situate , 
or lying.) 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
// siedy Us sieent, it becomes, they become, fyc. 

Imperfect. 
It seyait, Us seyaient } it was becoming, &c. 

Preterite wanting. 
Future. 
// siera Us sieront, it or they will become. 

'Conditional. 
11 3ici\M Us sieraient, it or they would become. 

Subj. Pres. 
Qu r il siee, quails sieent, that I may, &c. 
The other tenses are never used. 

SURSEOIR, to supersede, to put off, a compound 
of seoir, is only used in law, and is thus conjugated : 

Part. act. Sursoyant. 
Part pass. Sursis, ise. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Je sursois, &c. nous sursoyons, &c. 

Imperfect. 
Je sursoyais, &c. nous sursoyions, &c. 

Preterite. 
Je sursisj Sec. nous surshnes, &c. 

Future. 
Je ourseoirai* &c nous surseohvns, Sec 
22 ' 



254 

Conditional. 
Je surseoirais, &,c. nous surseoirionsy &c. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sursois } jkc. sursoyons, &c. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que je surseoie, &,c. que nous sursoyions, &c. 

Preterite. 
Que je sursisse, &c. que nous sursissions, Sec 

DECHOlR y TO DECAY, TO DECLINE. 

Infinitive Mood. . 

Present. Dechoir, to decay. 

Part, act, Dedieant, decaying. 
Part. pass. Dechu, ue, decayed. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Dechois, dechois, dechoit, I decay. 
Plur. Vechoyons, dechoyez, dechoient, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Je dzchoyais, &c. Plur. Nous dechoyions } &c 

Preterite. 
Sing. DechuSy dtchus, dechut, I decayed, or did 

Plur. Dechiimes y dechutes, dechurent, decay 

Future. 
Sing Decherrai, decherraSy dtclierra, I shall, or will 
Plur Declierrons, decherrez, decherront, decay 

Conditional. 
Sing. Decherraisy dechsrraisy decherPait 1 1 should, would. 

or couid decay 
Plur DecherrionSj decherriez^ decherraient y 
Imperative Mood. 
Dechois, dechoyons, cUcJioi/ez, 
Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sinn. JJechoie, deehoies y de'choie, that I may decay. 

Vim*. Dechoyiom, dechoyicZj dechoient, 



255 

Preterite. 
Sing. Dechusse, deckusses, dechut, that I might decay 
Plur. Dechussions, dechussiez,dechussent, 

CHOIR, the primitive of the above verb is obsolete. 

ECHOIR, to fall out, to change, is conjugated 
iike DE CHOIR. Its part. act. is echeant, ec/iu,p.p. 

MOUVOIR, to move. 

Present. Mouvoir, to move. 
Part. act. Mouvani, moving. 
Part. pass. Mil, ue, moved. 
Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Mens, mens, meui, I move. 
Piur. Mouvons, mouvez, meuvent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Mouvais, mouvais, mouvait, I did move 
Plur. Mouvions, mouviez, mouvaknt, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Mus, mus, mut, I moved, or did move. 
Plur. Mimes y mides, murent, 

Future. 
Sing. Mouvrai, mouvras, mouvra, I. shall, or will move. 
Plur. Mouvrons, mouvrez, mouvront, 

Conditional. 
mouvrais, mouvrait, I should, could, or 



Sing Mouvrais, 
Plur. Mouvrions, 



mouvriez, mouvi aient 



would move 



Sing. 

Plur. Mouvons ^ 



Que 
Sing. Meuve, 
Plur. Mouvions, 

Sing. Masse, 
Plur Musswns, 



Imperative Mood. 

Meas, meuve, move thou. 
mouvez, meuvent, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
que que 

meuves, meuve, that I may move. 
mouviez, meuvent, 
Preterite. 
musses, mid, that I might move.. 
mussiez, uiussenl } 



256 

The compound of this verb is, 

Emouvoir, to stir up, to move. 

POUVOIR, TO BE ABLE, TO HAVE IN ONe's POWER. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Pouvoir, to be able. 
Part, act, Pouvant, being able. 
Part. pass. Pu s been able. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Puis ^ or peux, peux, pent, I am able, I can or 

Plur. Pouvons, pouvez, peuvent, may 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Pouvazs, pouvais. } pouvait, I was able, or I could 
Plur. PouvionSy pouviez, pouvaient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pus, puSy pid, I was able, or I could. 

Plur. Fumes, pules, purent. 

Future. 

Sing. Pourraiy pourras, pourra, I shall, or will be able 

Plur. PourroriSy pourreZy pourront. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Pourrais, pourrais, pourrait, I should, be able, 

Plur. PourrionSy gourriez, pourraient, could, or might. 

Imperative Mood. 

Pussiej Pussions, Pussiez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Puisse, pidsses, puisse, that I may be able, ot 
Plur. PuissionSy puissiez, puissenty I may 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pusse, pusses, put, that I might be able, or 
Plur. Pussions , pussiez , pussenty I might. 

When the words can, may, coiddy or might, express an 
absolute or permissive power, or a possibility of doing a 
thing, can and may are rendered by the present tense of 
the indicative of this verb : ex. 
Je puis vous vendre un bon I can sell you a good horse, 

chevaly si vous en avez if you want one. 

besoin d\m y 



257 • 

Vous pouvez allcr au bol, You may go to the ball, 
mais revenez a dix heaves, but come back at ten o'- 
clock. 
N. B. May, expressing a wish, is rendered by the 

present tense of the subjunctive: ex. 

Puissiez-iws etre heureux ! May you be happy ! 

Could is rendered by one of the following tenses, viz. 
the imperfect, preterite, definite or indefinite, or condi- 
tional present ; and might by the last tense : ex. 
Je ne pouvais pas mieux I could do no better, 

faire, 
ll ne put pas venir avec nous He could not come with us 

la semaine passee, last week. 

Vous pourriez vous tromper You might mistake as well 

aussi hien que lid, as he. 

Could or might, being joined to the verb to have, imme- 
diately followed by a participle passive, must be rendered 
by the conditional past of the above verb, with the parti- 
ciple turned into the present of the infinitive mood : ex. 
J'aurais pu vous le dire hier I could have told it to you 

au soir, last night. 

Vous auriez pu le faire, en You might have done it in 

trois jours, three days. 



SAVOIR, to know something. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Savoir, to know. 

Part. act. Sachant, knowing. 
Part. pass. Su, ue, known. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Sais, sais, sait, I know. 
Plur. Savons, savez, savent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Savais, savais, savait, I did know, or knew 
Plur. Savions, saviez, savaient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Sus, sus, sut, I knew, or did know 
Plur, Shines, sides, surent, 



99* 



258 
Future. 



Sing. 


S aural, 


sauras, saura, I shall, or will know. 


Plur. 


Saurons, 


saurez, sauront, 
Conditional. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Samais* 
Saiirions, 


saurazs, saurait, I should, would, or 
sauriez, sauiaient, could know 

Imperative Mood. 

Present. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Sachons, 


Sache, know thou. 
sachez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Que 
Sacherf 
Sachions, 


que que 

saches, sache, that I may know. 
sachieZj sachent, 
Preterite. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Suss e , 
Sussions, 


susses, suty that I might know. 
sussiez, sussentj 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 



VauXy 
ValoiiSy 

Valais, 
Falions 



vjiloir, to be worth. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Valoir, to be worth. 
Part. act. Valantj being worth 
Part. pass. Value, been worth. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
vatiXj vaut, I am worth. 
valez, valent, 

Imperfect. 
Calais, valait, I was worth. 

, valiez y valaient. 



* This tense, conjugated negatively, is often Englished by cannot : ex. 
Je ne saurais vous le dire, I cannot tell it to you. 

f We sometimes employ the present of the subjunctive of this verb in- 
stead of the indicative ; but it is never to be used without the negation pai, 
and most commonly in answering a question : ex. 

Z»« roi ira-t-il-d la comcdie ? Will the king go to the play ? 

Pas queje sache, Not that I know of. 



259 

Preterite. 
Sing. ValuSj red us, valid, I was worth. 
Plur. Valiums, valides, valurerd, 

Future. 
vaudraSy vaudra, I shall, or will be 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Vaudraiy 
VaudronSy 

Vaudraisy 
Vaudrions, 



v a u dreZy v a udronty 

Conditional. 
vaudraisy vaudrait, I should, 
vaudrieZy vaudraient, 
Imperative Mood. 
VaiiXy vailhy be thou worth. 



worth. 

Slc. be 
worth. 



ValoiiSy valeZy vaillent, 



Subjunctive Mood. 



Que 

Vailhy 

Valions, 



que 
vailleSy 

1 : 1 . 3 



que 



vailhy that I may be worth. 

vaillent. 



Sing 
Plur 



vaiiez, 

Preterite. 

Valusse, valusseSy valid, that I might be worth. 
ValussionSy valussiezy valmsent, 

The compound of this verb is, 
Prevaloir, to prevail, is conjugated as V&LOJR : but 
we say in the present tense of the subjunctive, 

Que je preval-e, es, e, : ions, iez y cnt. 

VOlRy TO SEE. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Voir, to see. 

Part. act. Voyanty seeing. 
Part. pass. Vuy ue, seen. 
Indicative Mood. 
Present. 



Sing. 


Vols, 


voisy v-dity I see. 


Plur. 


VoijonSy 


vtrtjez, voienty 

Imperfect. 


Sing. 


VoyatSy 


voyaiSy voyait, I did see. 


Plur. 


VoyionSy 


voyxeZy voyaienty 
Preterite. 


Sing. 


Vis, 


vis, v'd, I saw, or did see, 


Plur 


VimeSy 


vUc3y virenty 



2G0 

Future. 
Sing. Verrai, verras, verm, I shall ; or will see. 
Plur. Vcrrons, verrez, verront, 
Conditional. 
Sing. Vermis, vermis, -verrait, I should, fyc. see. 
Plur. Verrions, verriez, verraieni, 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Vols, see thou. 

Plur. Voyons, voyez. 

Subjunctive Mood 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Vote, voies, voie, that I may see 

Plur Voyions, voijiez, voient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Visse, visses, vil, that I might see. 
Plur. Fissions, vissiez, vissent, 

Entrevoir, to have a glimpse of. Prevoir, to foresee. 
Revoir, to see again. Pourvoir, to provide. 

PREVOIR differs from VOIR in the future : ex. 
Sing. Prevoirai, prevoiras, prevoira. 
Plur. Prevoirons, 'prevoirez, prevoiront ; And, 

Conditional. Present. 

Sing. Prevoirais, prevoirais, prevoiiait. 
Plur. Prevoirions, prevoiriez, prevoiraient. 

POURVOIR makes in the Preterite, 
Sing. Pourvus, pourvus, pourvut. 
Plur. Pourvumes, pourvutes, pourvurent. 

Future. 
Sing. Pourvoirai, pourvoir as, pourvoira. 
Plur. Pourvoirons, pourvoirez, pourvoiront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Pourvoirais, pourvoirais, pourvoirait. 
Plur. Pourvoirions, pourvoir%ez i jwurvoiraieiit. 
Subjunctive Mood. 
Preterite. 
Sing. Pourvusse, pourvusses, pourvut. 
Plur. PourvussionSy pourvussicz 7 pourvitsseril. 



261 

VOULOIR, TO BE WILLING. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Vouloir, to be willing. 

Part. act. Foulard, being willing. 
Part. pass. Voulii, v.e, been willing 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sing. Veux, veux, veut y I am willing, or I will. 

Plur. Voulons, voukz, leident, 

Imperfect. 

Sing.- Vouhis, voulais, voulait, I was willing, or I would. 

Plur. VoulionSj vouliez, voidaientj 

Preterite. 

Sing. Youlus, voulus, voidut. I was willing, or I 

Plur. VoulumeSj voulutes, voidureat, would. 

Future. 
Sing. Voudraij voudras, voudra^ I shall be willing, or 
Plur. Foudrons, voudrez, voiulront, I wiil. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Voudrais, voudrais, voudrait, I should be willing, 
Plur. Voudrions, voudricz, voudraient, or I would 

Imperative Mood. 
Veux, Toulon s, Voulez ; and 
Yen die, Venillons, Venillez. 
Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que 

Sing. VeuiHe, veuUles, 
Plur. Foulions, voidiez, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Voidusse, voulusses, voulut, that I might be wil- 
Piur. Voulussions, voidussiez, voulussait, lino-. 

When the words ivdl or would signify a will, choice, or 
deliberation in the agent, and can be expressed by choose 
or chose, wittis rendered in French by the present of the 
indicative mood, or future of this verb": ex. 



que 












veuille, 


that 


i 


may 


bo 


wil- 


veuillent. 


i 








ling. 



202 

Je veux y aller, ct lui parler J will, or choose to, go there, 

moi-meme, and speak to him myself * 

11 ne veut pas manger, He 7«?iM not eat, or does not 

choose to eat : 
and would by one of the following tenses, viz. the Imper- 
fect, Preterite, Conditional, or Compound of the Present. 
Si je voulais, je vous clivals If I would, or chose, I could 
oil elle demeure, tell you where she lives. 

11 voulut absolument partir He would, absolutely, or ab- 
hier, solutely chose to, set out 

yesterday. 
Que voudriez-voMS que je "What would you have me 
jisse ? do ? 

When would is joined to the verb to have immediately 
followed by a participle passive, they are to be rendered 
by the compound of the imperfect or compound of the 
conditional of the above verb, with the participle passive 
turned into the present of the infinitive mood : ex. 
Si j'avais voulu lui parler, If I would have spoken to 

him, or had I chosen to 
speak to him. 
Vous n'auriez pas voulu You woidd not have taken 

prendre les armes, si, &c. up arms, if, &c. - 
Nous aurions pu Varreter, si We could have stopped 
nous eussions voulu, him, if we had been wil- 

ling, or had chosen. 
EXERCISES ON the foregoing VERBS 

AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Why do not you sit down, sir ? - - You 

Pourquoi,&dv. 
come to see me very seldom. - - Let us sit down, upon 

rarement, adv. 
the grass. - - Do not make (so much) noise, I cannot 

herhe,f j aire, v. frm£,adv. 

learn my lesson. - - Do you know what has hap- 

apprendre,v. est arri- 

pened to her ? - - No, I do not. - - As soon as he saw 
ver,v. Aussitot que,c. 

he could not make her hear reason, he went 

entendre, v. s'en 

away, will he be able to follow me ? What will you 

allcr,v suivre,v. 



2C3 

do ? - - - We went there ourselves, and soon knew 

bientol,&dv. 
what she asked. - - See the letter she wrote me. - - We 

ecrire,v, 

will not sit down till you have determined to 

que ne se determiner y\ T . sub'], a 

set out. - - The first time I saw your sister, she pleased 

fois,f. plaire^v. 

me. - - 1 would sit down upon the grass, if it were not so 

damp. Mrs. P. desired me to tell you she could 

humide^d]. prier,v. de dire^v. 

not come to see you this week, but (that) she would cer- 
semainefi cer- 

tainly come (at the) beginning of next 

tainementjudv. au commencement y m. 

month. Cannot you lend me three or four 

mois^m. prefer yV. 

guineas ? If I would, I could soon know 

gzdnee hientot,&dv. 

whether Mrs. I). has seen your aunt or not. 

siyC. tcmtef. non. 

The last time I was in the park, I could not distinguish 
her, on account of the trees that were between 
a causey. 

her, and me ; (I had only a) glimpse of her. 

je n\ii fait que <& 

This cloth is not worth five shillings a yard, but the 
drapjin. 

colour becomes you very well. Do you not see the 

defects of it ? When you know your lesson 

defautym. (by the fat.) 

come and repeat it to me. - - Did you not know that 
*^ repeteryV. 

Mr. A. (was to) marry Miss B. ? I knew it, but 

epouseVyV. mais 9 c 

I was not willing to tell your brother of it. - - I be- 

parler,v. 
lieve you could learn your lessons much bet- 

apprendreyV. beaucoup, adv. 

ler, if you would. - - Could you lend me your horse 

prefer 9 v. 
for two or three days ? - - If your brother come with us 
jour*m avec.D 



204 

I lay that he will not come without his sister ? - - Thin 

parier,v. 

room can contain about a hundred people. - - Could 

environ,]), personne, 

they* see so great an- alteration, without being 

changement yin. sans,]). 
vexed (at it) ? - - (It is) better to be unfortunate than 
f ache ,p. p. en, pro. valoir,v. malheureux ,Rd]. 

criminal. He who cannot command himself, is inca- 
se 
pable of commanding others. - - His best coat was not 
aux habit ,m. 

worth two-pence when he arrived from Germany. 

sou Mlemagne. 

We saw them yesterday. - - - They did not foresee 

Aier,adv. 
what would happen to them. - - - - We ought to 

arriverjV. devoiryV. 

make a judicious choice of those friends, to 
f aire, v. judicieux,a.dj. choix,m. * ur> 
whom we intend to give our confidence. - - Do you 

vouhir,v. confiancefi 

know where Miss B. lives ?--■-- Yes, I do (know it,) 
oiiytidv. dcmeurer,\. 

and I see her every day at her window. Why will 

feneirefi. 
you not tell it me ? - - - She would marry him, in 

epouser,v. en,]). 
spite of all her relations. - - It is for this reason 
depityCn. parent,m. Ce,pro. 

her father says he wiL never see her again. 1 

dire, v. 
have spoken of your wine to two friends of mine : 
one has money, but he will not buy : the other would 

buy, but he has no money. Some told me that 

your brother could not pay me, others told me that 

lie would not ; in short, I find that, when people 

enfin,n.dv. genSy pi. 

vill not pay, we have much trouble. We regularly 

pay all that we owe ; but he says, that he wHl pay no- 
body. All the finest talents united are not 

reumr,v. 
worth one virtue? - - Virtue is a quality which we can- 



2G5 

not (too much) praise. Severity and rigour may 

trcVjEidv. touer 9 y. Severite y f. rigueurfi 

excite fear, but not love. You saw with what 

crainte , f. amour, m . 

goodness she received him. I would not tell bor 

bontefi recevoir,v. 

*vhat I think about it, for fear of giving her the least 
de,p. inf. 

subject of complaint. If you foresee the danger, 

plaint e. 

why do you not endeavour to avoid it ? They were 

t acker, v. deeviter y v. 
willing to withdraw, but your brother hindered 

se retirer,v. empecher,v 

them (from it), and desired them to sit down again 
prier,v. de 

You can speak to Mr. B. whenever you 

parler,v. quand, 

please, but I may not take . that liberty. - - - 

voidoir,v. prendre,?. 

Why may you not ? You know the esteem 

estimfjL 
and friendship that I have for him : you know 
that his father is one of my oldest friends r 

rttteiVn,adj. 

you know yourself the merit of both. He would 

not sell me these buckles under four 

vendrc,v. bouclefi. & moms de,p. 

guineas. I will not see (any more) your brother 

plus,zdv. 
but I will see you again as soon as I can. 

(by the flU.) 
Every body thinks, that, if they would have pursued 

* pow*suivre,v. 

the enemy briskly, they might have ended 

v igou retirement, adv. Jl uir, v . 

■«. he war on that day. --- Should we see ourselves re- 
^n re- 

duced to so great difficulties ? - - If I would have be 
didre,v. * 

tieved him, he would have persuaded me to go to Italy 
eroire,v. de 

* After tho conjunction Si, always use the imperfect ; see p. 157 and 
2iO 



26G 

with him. - - He could have done his work in Ies3 

f aire, v. en, p. 

than ten minutes, if he had not amused himself in 

s J amuser,v. a 

reading. - If you want' that book, you may take 

lire y v. avoir besoin de 

it, it is at your service. - - If he sold all his horses now, 

a 
the best of them would not be worth ten guineas. - - - 

We might have danced till (twelve o'clock) if 

jusqiSatf. minuit, 

that had not happened. - - Oh! my children, may you 

be happy, and never bewail the moment of your 

heiireux, adj . pie urer,v. 

birth! — I spoke to her (a long while,) but could 
naissance , f. long-temps, adv. 

not persuade her to come with me. May I go 

de 
and see him ? Yes, you may, but come back 

as soon as you can. 
aussitot qne,c. (by the fut.) 

VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

ABSOUBRE, to absolve, to acquit. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Jlbsoudre, to absolve 

Part. act. Absolvant, absolving. 

Part. pass. Absous, oule, absolved. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Jlbsous, absous, absout, I absolve. 

Plur. Jibsoluons, absolvez, absolvent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Jlbsohais, absolvais y absolvait, I did absolve. 
Plur. MsolvionSy absolviez, absolvaknt. 

Preterite is wanting. 

Future. 
Sing. Msoudrai, absoudras, absoudra, I shall, or will 
Plur. Jlbsoudrons, absoudrez, absoudrord, absolve. 



267 

Conditional. 

Sing. Absoudrais, absoudrais, absoudrait, I should, &c 

Plur. Absoudrions, absoudmez, absoudraient, absolve 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing Absous, absolve thou. 

Plur. Absolvons, absolvez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Absolve, absolves, absolve, that I may absolve. 

Plur. Absolvions, absolviez, absolvent, 

Preterite is wanting. 

SOUJDRE, to solve, (the primitive of this verb,) is 
\sed only in the present tense of the infinitive mood. 

The other compounds are, 

Dissoudre, to dissolve. Resoudre, to resolve. 

Dissoudre has the same tenses wanting as absoudre. 

Resoudre has its participle passive, resolu : its preterite is, 

Sing. Resolus, resolus, resolid. 

Plur. Resolumes, resolutes, resolurent 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Resolusse, resolusses, resclut. 
Plur. Resolussions, resolussiez, resolussent. 



ATTEINDRE, to reach, to hit, to attain, 

to overtake, and 

ASTREIJYDRE, to oblige ; 

AVEINDRE, to reach, to fetch out, 

are conjugated like CRAINDRE. 

The two foregoing verbs are growing obsolete 



BATTRE, TO BEAT. 

L\finitive Mood. 

Present. Battre, to beat. 
Part. act. Battant, beating, 
Part. pass. Battu, ue, beaten. 



268 







Indicative Mood. 


Sing 
Plur 


Bats, 
Batlons, 


Present. 
bats, bat, I beat, or am beating. 
battez, -battenty 


Sing 
Plui 


Baitais, 
Bat lions ^ 


Imperfect. 
battais, batlait, I did beat, or was beat 
battiez, batlaient, ing 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Battis, 
Bedtimes, 


Preterite. 
battis, batlit, I beat, or did beat. 
battiteSy battirent, 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Battrai, 
Battrons, 


Future. 
battras, baltra, I shall, or will beat 
battrezy battronty 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Battrais, 
BattrioiiSy 


Conditional. 
battraisy battraity I should, &c. beat 
battrieZy battraienty 

Imperative Mood. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Bats, batte, beat thou. 
Baltons, Battez, battent, 






Subjunctive Mood. 






Present. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Que 
Batte, 
Battions, 


que que 
batteSy batiey that I may beat. 
batlieZy battenty 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Battisse, 
Battissiom 


Preterite. 
battissesy battity that I might beat. 
?, battissiez, battissent, 




The 


compounds of this verb are, 



Jlbattrey to pull down, to 

throw down. 
Combattrey to fight. 
Deb at tre y to debate. 



Se debattrey to struggle. 
Rabattrey to abate, to beat 

down. 
Rebattre } to beat again. 



BOIREy TO DRINK. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Boitc, to drink. x 
Part. act. Buvanty drinking , 
Part. pass. Bii, ue } 



Bo 



269 
Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
bois y baity I drink, or am drinking. 



Plur. Buvons } buvez, boivent. 
Imperfect. 



Sing. 
Plur. 


Buvais, 
Buvions, 


buvais y buvait, I did drink, or was 
buviezy buvaienty drinking. 

Preterite. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Bus, 
BumeSy 


bus, buty I drank, or did drink. 

bides, burent, 

Future. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Boiraiy 
BoironSy 


boiraSy boira y I shall, or will drink. 
boireZy boiront, 

Conditional. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Boirais, 
BoirionSy 


boirais, boiraity I should, §c. drink 
boirieZy boiraient. 

Imperative Mood. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


BuvonSy 


BoiSy drink thou. 
buvez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Que 
Boive, 
Buvions, 


que que 
boiveSy boive, that I may drink. 
buviezy boiveniy 

Preterite. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


BltSSCy 

Buss ions, 


busses, buty that I might drink. 
, bussieZy bussenty 



N. B Boire dans quelque chose, is, To drink out of 

something. 



BRAIRE, TO BRAY. 

This verb is seldom used, except in the present 
tense of the infinitive mood, and the third person singular 
and plural of the present, future, and conditional of the 
indicative mood 



270 



Infinitive. Braire, to bray. — Present, indicative. II brait, 
Us braient. — Future, II braira, Us brairont. — Conditional. II 
brairait, Us brairaient. — This verb expresses the discordant cry 

of an ass. - 

BRUIRE, TO ROAR, TO MAKE A GREAT NOISE. 

This verb is used only in the present of the infinitive mood 
and in the third person of the imperfect, indicative, II bruyait 
Us bruyaient. Its participle active, bruyant, is often but a mere 
adjective. 



CEINDRE, to gird, 

And its compound, Enceindre, to enclose, to encompass, 

are conjugated like CRAINDRE. 



CIRCONCIRE, to circumcise, 

is conjugated like CONFIRE, 
but has its participle passive ending in is, ise, instead of it. 







CLORE, TO SURROUND. 






Infinitive Mood. 




Present. 
Part. act. 
Part, pass. 


Clore, to surround. 
Closant, surrounding. 
Clos, close, surrounded. 






Indicative Mood. 








Present. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Clos, 
Closons, 


clos, 
closez, 


clot, 
closent. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


i 
Clonals, 
Closions, 


closais, 
closiez, 


Imperfect. 

closait, 

closaient. 

Preterite. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Closis, 
Closimes, 


closis, 
closites, 


closit, 
closirent. 

Future. 


Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 


Clorai, 
Clorons, 

Clorais, 
Glorious, 


cloras, 
clorez, 

clorais, 
cloriez, 


clora, 
cloront. 
Conditional. 
clorait. 
cloraient. 






Imperative Mood. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Closons, 


Clos, 
closez. 



271 



Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

Que que que 

Sing. Close, closes, close, 

Plur. Closions, closiez, closent. 

Imperfect, or Preterite. 
Sing. Closisse, closisses, clvsit, 

Plur. Closissions, closissiez, closissent. 

The compound of this verb is : Enclore, to surround with 

"walls, &c. 

CONCLTJRE, to conclude 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Conclure, to conclude 

Part. act. Concluant, concluding. 
Part. pass. Conclu, ue, concluded 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
conclus, conclut, I conclude 
concluez, concluent, 

Imperfect. 
concluais, concluait, I did conclude. 

coacluiez, concluaient, 

Preterite. 
conclus, conclut, I concluded or did conclude' 

conclutes, conclurent, 

Future. 
concluras, conclura, I shall or will conclude. 
conclurez, concluront, 

Conditional. 
conclurais, conclurait, I should, §c. conclude. 
concluriez, concluraient, 

Imperative Mood. 

conclus. conclude thou. 

concluez, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

que que 

conchies, conclue, that I might conclude. 

concluiez, concluent, 

Preterite. 
conclusses, conclut, that I may conclude. 
conclussiez, conclusscnt, 



Sing. 
Plur. 


Conclus, 
Concluons, 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Concluais, 
Conclu'ions, 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Conclus, 
Conclumes, 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Conclurai, 
Conclurons, 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Conclurais, 
Conclurions, 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Concluons, 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Que 

Conclue, 
Concluions, 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Conclusse, 
Conclussions, 



272 

C0NDU1RE, TO CONDUCT, TO lead, to carey. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Conduire, to conduct. 

Part. act. Conduisant, conducting. 
Part. pass. Conduit, te, conducted. 
Indicative Mood. 
Pres'ent. 
Sing. Conduis, conduis, conduit, I lead, SfC. 
Plur. Conduisons, condnisez, conduisent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Conduisais, conduisais, canduisait, I did lead. 
Plur. Conduisions, conduisiez, conduisaient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Conduisis, conduisis, conduisit, I led, fyc . 
Plur. Conduisimes, conduisites, conduisirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Conduirai, conduiras, conduira, I shall, or will lead. 
Plur. Conduirons, conduirez, conduiront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Conduirais, conduirais, conduirait, I should, <J'c, lead. 
Plur. Conduirions, conduiriez, conduiraient, 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Conduis, lead thou. 

Plur. Conduisons, conduisez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Conduise, conduises, conduise, that I may lead. 
Plur. Conduisions, conduisiez, conduisent, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Conduisisse, conduisisses, conduisit, that I might lead. 

plur. Conduisis sions, conduisissiez, conduisissent, 

Its compound is 

Reconduire, to lead again. 



CONFIRE, to preserve. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Confire, to preserve. 
Part. act. Confisant, preserving. 
Part. pess. Confit, te, preserved. 
Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Confis, confis, confit, I preserve. 
Plur Confisons, confisez, confident, 



273 







Imperfect. 


Sing. 


ConfisatSj 


confisais, confisait, I did preserve 


Plur. 


Confisions, 


confisiez, confisaient, 
Preterite. 


SiDg. 


Confis, 


confis, confd, I preserved. 


Plur. 


Confimes, 


cojifites, confix ent, 
Future. 


Sing. 


Confirai, 


co?ifiras, confira, I shall, or will preserve. 


Plur. 


Confirons, 


confirez, confiront, 
Conditional. 


Sing. 


Confirais, 


confirais, confirait, I should, $*c, preser 


Plur. 


ConfirionSy 


confixicz, confiraient. 
Imperative Mood. 


Sing. 




Confiis, preserve thou. 


Plur. 


Confisons, 


confisez. 
Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 




Que 


que que 


Sing. 


Confise, 


confises, confi.se, that I may preserve. 


Plur. 


Confisions, 


confisiez, confisent. 
Preterite. 


Sing. 


Confis se, 


confisses, confit, that I might^preserve. 


Plur. 


Confissions. 


, confissiez, confissent, 



CONNAITRE, to know, to be acquainted with, 

somebody. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Connaitre, to know. 
Part. act. Connaissant, knowing. 
Part. pass. Connu, ue, known. 
Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Connais, connais, connait, I know. 
Plur. Connaissons, connaissez, connaissent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Connaissais, connaissais, connaissait, I did know. 
Plur. Connaissions, connaissiez, connaissaient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Connus, connus, connut, I know. 
Plur. Connumes, connut es, connurent, 

Future. 
Sing. Connaitrai, connaitxas, connaitra, I shall, &c. know 
Plur. Connaitrons, connaitrez, connaitront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Connaitxais, connaitxais, connaitxait, I should, &c. know 
Plur. Connaitxions, connaitriez } connaitxaient, 



274 



Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Connais, know thou. 

Plur. Connais sons , connaisscz. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
- Present. 



Que 
Sing. Connaisse, 
Plur. Connaissions, 



que que 

connaisses, connaisse, that I may know. 

connaissiez, connaissent, 

Preterite. 

connusses, connut, that I might know. 

connussiez, connusscnt, 

The compound of this verb are, 

Meconnaitre, to take for I Reconnoitre, to acknowledge, to 

another. know again. 



Sing. Connusse, 
Plur. Connussions, 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 



CONSTRUIRE, to construct, to build, 
is conjugated like CONDJJIRE. 



CON TRAIN DRE, to constrain, to compel, 
to force. 
is conjugated like CRAINDRE. 
COU.DRE, TO sew, to stitch. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Coudre, to sew. 

Part. act. Cousant, sewing. 
Part. pass. Coicsu, ue, sewed. 
Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
coucl, I sew, or am sewing. 
cousent, 
Imperfect. 

cousait, I did sew, or was sewing. 
cousaient, 
Preterite. 
cousit, I sewed. 
cousirent, 
Future. 

coudra, I shall, or will sew. 
coudront, 
Conditional. 
coudrais, covdrait, I should, &c, sew. 
coudriez, coudraient, 

Imperative Mood. 
Couds, sew thou. 
Cousons,. cousez. 



Couds, 
Cousons, 

Cousais, 
CousionSj 

Cousis, 
Cousimes, 

Coudrai, 
Coudrons, 

Coudrais, 
Coudrions, 



couds, 
cousez, 

cousais, 
cousiez, 

cousis, 
cousites, 

coudras, 
coudrez, 



275 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present . 
Que que que 

Sing. Couse, couses, cause, that I may sew. 
Plur. Cousions, cousiez, consent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Cousisse, cousisses, cousit, that I might sew 
Plur. Cousissions, cousissiez, cousissent, 

Its compounds are, 
DecQudre, to unsew. Recoudre, to sew again. 

EXERCISES OX THE FOREGOING VERBS 
AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

I know several persons in this country who 

plusieurs ,'dd] . pays, ml 

speak as good French, as if they had been (brought up) 
6£en,adv. Sieve, p. p. 

in France. Do you know Mr. A. ? 

Yes, we know him very well ; and, though he is 
Oui,adv. soit 

rich, I assure you he is not the more charitable for 

it. He has been beaten (soundly). --- If you 

comme ilfaut, 
knew the question, you would resolve it in two 
question,?. en 

words. I will soon conclude, if you think as 

mot,m. comme,?idv. 

your brother does. We should beat them, if they 

did not fight in their own country. Do not 

propre,adj, 

beat him any more, he acknowledges his fault. - - - 

dor* faide. 

We ran for above two hours, but at last 

pendant, p. plus de, adv. enfin,a.dv. 

your brother overtook him, and brought him back. - - 

ramener,v. tzn 

You would never see him again, if you knew him. 

He struggled a long while, but he was soon obliged 

kjCp temps, m. 

to (cry for) mercy. This mortification ha* pulled 

de demander,v. grace. 



27G 

oown his pride, I assure you : however, the judge 

ccpendant,adv. 
has acquitted him of the accusation falsely 

faussement y adv. 
brought against him. - - Mr. R. told me some time 
inteniSjp.p. contre^. 

ago, that he would build a ship on a new plan. - - 
What will you drink ? - - I will drink (nothing but) 

ne que 
water. - - Do not drink so much. - - If your father 

frm£,adv. 

were here, you would not drink (at all.) 

du tout. 
Let us fill our glasses, and drink our friend's health. - - 

verre,m. santefi 
We beat them because our troops were better dis- 
parceqiie,c. dis- 
ciplined than theirs. Come with us ; we shall 

eripZine,p.p. 

^ee whether- we shall know you again or not. - - If you 
sijC . non. 

knew her, I am certain she would please you. 

plaire,v. 
The English drink as much tea as the Venetians 

autant,a.dv. the Venitien y m. 

drink coffee. After tea, we conducted the ladie9 

cafe. 

to the concert. When they had explained to us 

all that had passed, we acknowledged we (were in the 
se passer, v. avoir 

wrong.) Your brother's coat was torn, 

ort. dechirer,v. 

but our tailor sewed it up again so skilfully, 

tailleur,m. up adroitement,adv. 

that his father did not perceive it. - — Unsew 

that gown. I will sew it to-morrow. The 

Jews and the Mahometans circumcise their 
Juifcm. Mahometan ,m. 

children a few days after their birth. Why 

i^r* pew, adv. naissancef. 

do not you preserve some fruits this year ? lie 

anneej. 
would not know you, if he saw you now. - - - Did 

a present adv. 



you ask him whether he (was acquainted with) any of 
si jc . 

these ladies ? - - I know 3Ir. Y. but I do opt trust 

« .sefinw 

to him. - - You will force your father to punish you, 

a 

if you do not behave better. The last 

se comporter,v. 
time we went to Yauxhall we drank three bottles of 
Champaigne wine. - - The enemy beat us on the 

eighteenth, but we beat them again two days after. 

le 
- - What will you drink, ladies ? - - We shall willing- 

01 esda m esS. vo hil- 

ly drink some wine ; for we have not drunk 

tiers, adv. 

any since our departure from France. 

depuis , p . dip a rt.m. 

Drink, said she to. me, (out of) that cup, the 

dans coupe S. 

only token which your father has left 

se?//,adj. marque J. ait lais8er,v 

us of his love. Virtue in indigence is like 

affection,?. dans,]). eomme 

a traveller whom the wind and rain compel to 

pluief. de 

wrap himself up in his cloak. I would have 

envclopper y v. -jt- de manteaujn. 

preserved some fruits this year, but sugar is too 

£rop 9 adv. 

dnar. Thence we concluded you could not come 

De /«, adv. 
to-day. - - 1 know nobody in this neighbourhood - - I 

voisiTUipce.m. 
knew your sister again as soon as I saw her. - - Though 

Quand.c. 
you should take three dozen of them, I could 

douzaine, 
not abate a farthing. - - Trie wind was so great that 

lidrdyOL vent,in. J ur ^ 

U has thrown down one or two trees in our garden. 
24 



278 

crj1.1jydre, to fear, to be afraid 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Craindre, to fear. 

Part, act Craignanty fearing. * 

Part. pass. * Craint, ainte y feared. 
Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Grains , crams, craint, I fear ? or am afraid 

Plur. Craignons, craignez, craignent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. CraignaiSy craignais, craignait, I did fear, o? 
Plur. Craignions, craigniez, craignaient, was afraid. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Craignis, craigniSy craignit, I feared. 

Plur. CraignimeSy craignites, craignirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Craindrai, craindraSy craindra, I shall, or will 
Plur. CraindronSy craindreZy cralndronty fear 

Conditional. 
Sing. CraindraiSy craindraiSy craindrait, I should, &c 
Plur. CraindrionPy craindriez, craindiaient, fear 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. CrairiSy fear thou. 

Plur. CraignonSy craignez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Craigney craignes, cmigne, that I may fear. 
Plur. CraignionSy craigniez, craignent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Craignissey craignisseSy craignit, that I mighi 
Plur. Craignissions , craignissieZy craignissent, fear 



CROIREy to believe. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Croire, to believe. 

Part. act. Croyanty believing. 
Part. pass. Cm 3 ue y believed. 



270 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. CroiSj crois, croit, I believe. 
Plur. Croyons, croyez. croient, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Croyais, croyais, croyait, I did believe. 
Plur. Croyions, croyiez, croyaient y 

Preterite. 
Sing Crus, crus, crut, I believed. 
Plur. Crumes, crutes, crureni, 

Future. 
Sing. Croirai, croiras, crtrira, I shall, or will believe 
Plur. Croirons, croirez, croiront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Croiiais, croircis, croiraii, I should ; §*c. believe, 
Plur. Croirions, croiriez, croimient, 
Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Crois, believe thou. 

Plar. Croyons, croyez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing, Croie, croies, croie, that I may believe. 

Plur. Croyions, croyiez, croient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Crusse, crosses, crirf, that I might believe. 
Plur. Omissions, crussiez, crussent, 



CROITRE, to grow, 
and its compounds, 

Jlccrottre, to accrue, Recroitre, to grow again 

Decroitre, to decrease, to 
grow less, 

are conjugated like COWA1TRE. 



CUIRE, to bake, to boil, often Englished by 

TO DO, 

and its compound Reeuire, to bake again ; 



280 , 

DEDU1RE, TO DEDUCT, TO ABATE, 

and DETRUIRE, to destroy. 
are conjugated like CONDU1RE. 







DIRE, to say, to tell. 






Infinitive Mood. 




Present. 


Dire, to say. 




Part. act. Disant, saying. 




Part. pass. Dit, ie, said. 






Indicative Mood. 






Present. 


Sing. 


Dis, 


dis, dit, I say, or am saying. 


Plur. 


Disons, 


dites* disent, 
Imperfect. 


Sing. 


Disais, 


disais, disait, I did say, or was saying 


Plur. 


Distorts, 


disiez, disaient, 
Preterite. 


Sing. 


Dis, 


dis, dit, I did say, or said. 


Plur. 


Dimes, 


dites, dirent, 
Future. 


Sing. 


Dirai, 


dims, dira, I shall, or will say. 


Plur. 


DironSy 


direz, diront, 

Conditional. 


Sing. 


Dirais, 


dirais, dirait, I should, $c. say. 


Plur. 


Dirions, 


diriez, diraient, 

Imperative Mood. 


Sing. 




Dis, say thou. 


Plur. 


DlS07lSy 


dites.* 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 




Que 


que que 


Sing. 


Dise, 


dises, dise, that I may say. 


Plur. 


Disions, 


disiez, diseiit, 
Preterite. 


Sing. 


Disse, 


disses, dit, that I might say. 


Plur. 


Dissions, 


dissiez, dissent, 



* All the above compounds (ReHire excepted, which is conjugated 
like its primitive^ makes isez instead of ites, and Maudire doubles 
its $ through the whole verb ; ex. JVous }naudisso7is, voU6 maudis 
sez, Us maudissent, &c. 



281 
The compounds of this r<*rb are, 
ConlredirCy to contradict. 
Se dedire, to unsayj to re 



Redire, to say, or tell 
again. 



Inter dire, to interdict, to 

forbid. 
Pre'dire, to foretell. 
Medire de, to slander^ to 

speak ill. 
Maudire, to curse. 



ECLORE, TO HATCH, TO OPEN, TO COME TO LIFE. 

This verb is seldom used but in the infinitive mood, 
present tense, and the third person of the following tenses*. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Eclore, to open, to hatch, to come to life. 
Part. pass. Eclos, ose, 

Indicative Mood 

Sing. 11 ecloi. 
Plur. lis eclosent. 

Future. 
Sing. 11 eclora. 
Plur. lis ecloront 

Conditional. 
Sing. U eclorait. 
Plur. lis ecloraient. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. QuHl eclose. 
Plur. QuHls eclosent. 

It is only used when speaking of oviparous animals, or 
of flowers. 

The primitive of the above verb is Clore, to shut, to 
surround ; and another compound, Enclore. to shut in, to 
surround with walls, hedges, or ditches. 

ECR1RE, to write. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Ecrire, to write. 
Part. act. Ecrivant, writing 
Part, pass Ecrit, ite } written. 
24* 



282 
Indicative Mood 
Present. 
ecw, icrit, I write, or am writing. 



Sing. Ecris i 

Plur. Ecrivons, ecrivez, ecriventy 

Imperfect. 



Sing Ecnvais, 

Plur EcrivionSy 

Sing. Ecrivis, 
Plur, 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur 



ecrivais, ecrivait, I did write, or was 
ecrivieZy ecrivaient, writing 

Preterite. 
ecrivis, ecrivity I wrote, or did write 
EcrivhneSy ecriviteSy ecrivirenty 

Future. 
ecriraSy ecrira, I shall, or will write 
ecrirezy ecrironty 

Conditional. 
ecAraiSy ecriraity I should, fyc write 

ecririeZy ecriraienty 

Imperative Mood. 

Ecrisy write thou. 
ecrivez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
que que 



Ecriraiy 
Ecrirons, 

Ecrirais, 
EcririonSy 



Sing. 

Plur. EcrivonSy 



Que 
Sing. Ecrivey 
Plur. Ecrivions, 



ecrives, ecrive, that I 



may write. 



ecrivieZy ecriventy 
Preterite. 
ecrivisses, ecrivity that I might write 



Sing. Ecrivissey 

Plur. EcrivissioriSy ecrivissiezy ecrivissenty 

The compounds of this verb are, 



Decrire y to describe. 
Inscrirey to inscribe. 
Prescrirty to prescribe. 
Recrirey to write again. 



Proscrire, to proscribe, to 

outlaw, to banish. 
Souscrirey to subscribe. 
Transcrirey to transcribe. 



EJYDUIREy to do over, 
is conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



ETEWBREy to extinguish, 
is conjugated like CRJ1IJYDRE 



283 • 

EXCLURE, TO EXCLUDE, 

is conjugated like COXCLURE. 
Its participle passive is exclus. 



fa1re, to make, to do. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Faire, to make. 

Part. act. Faisant* making 

Part. pass. Fait, te, made. 
Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Fais, fats, fait, I make, or am making 
Piur. Faisons,* faites, font, 

Imperfect. 
faisais, faisait, I did make, or was 
faisiez, faisaient, making 

Preterite. 

fit, I made, or did make. 

firent, 

Future, 
/era, I shall, or will make. 
feront, 
Conditional. 
ferais, ferait, I should, 4" c - make. 
feriezy feraient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Faisy make thou. 
faites. 



Sing. Faisais , 

'Plur. Faisions, 

Sing. Fis, 

Plur. FimeSy 

Sing. Feraiy 

Plur. FeronSy 

Sing. Ferais, 

Plur. FerionSy 



fis> 
fUeSy 

ferasy 
fereZy 



&mg. . 
Plur. FaisonSy 



Suejunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que <j"we gite 

Sing. Fasse, f asses, fasse, that I may make 

Plur* Fassions, fassiez, f assent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Fissey fisses, jit, that I might make. 
Plur. FissionSy fissiez, fissenty 

* In the whole of the imperfect, and in the othei cases marked 
with a*, ai is silent. 



284 
The compounds of this verb are, 



Conlrefaire, to counterfeit;, 
to mimic. 

Defaire, to undo, to de- 
feat. 

Se defaire, to get rid of, to 
part with. 



Refaire, to do, or mame up 

again. 
Redefaire, to undo again. 
Satisfaire, to satisfy 
Surfaire 

too much. 



to exact, to ask 



FEINDRE, TO FEIGN, TO DISSEMBLE, TO 
PRETEND, 

is conjugated like CRAIJYDRE. 

FRIRE, TO FRY. 

This verb is more elegantly used in its present infini- 
tive with the verb faire conjugated : ex. 

Faites frire ce poisson, Fry that fish. 
Its participle passive is/m, ite, fried. 



IJYDUIRE, TO INDUCE. 
1JYSTRUIRE, TO INSTRUCT, 

and IJYTRODUIRE, to introduce, 
are conjugated like COJYDUIRE. 



JOIJYDRE, to join, 

and its compound, Enjoindre, to enjoin^ 

are conjugated like CRJlINVRE. 



Present. 
Part. act. 
Part. pass. 



Sing, Ias, 

Plur. Lisons, 

Sing. Lisais, 

Plur. Lisions, 



LIRE, to read. 
Infinitive PyIood. 
Lire, to read. 
Lis ant, reading. 
La, ue, read. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
lis, lit, I read, or am reading 

UseZj lisent, 

Imperfect. 
lisaiSy lisait, I did read, or was reading 

lisieZy lisaient, 



285 







Preterite. 


Sing. 


Lus, 


lus, hit, I read, or did read. 


Plur. 


Liimes, 


lutes, Invent, 
Future. 


Sing. 


Lirai, 


livas, lira, I shall, ov will read. 


Plur. 


Lirons, 


livez, liront, 

Conditional. 


Sing. 


IAvais, 


lirais, limit, I should, would, S?c, 


Plur. 


LirionS) 


liriez, UruieJit, read, 
Lmperatiye Mood. 


Sing. 




Lis, read thou. 


Plur. 


Lisons, 


lisez. 

Sukjuxctive Mood. 
Present. 




Que 


que que 


Sing. 


Lise, 


Uses, Use, that I may read. 


Plur. 


Lisioas, 


lisiez, lisent, 
Preterite. 


Sing. 


Lusse, 


lusses, lut, that I. might read. 


Plur. 


Lussions* 


lussicz, lussent, 
Its compounds are, 


Elive, to elect 


Relive, to read again. 



LUJRE, TO SHINE, - 

and its compound Reluive, to glitter, 

are conjugated like CONDUIRE ; 

but take no t at the end of their participle passive : 

ex. Lui, shined. 

METTRE* to put. 

IXFINJTIYE MOOD. 

Present. Mettve, to put. 
Part. act. Meitant, putting. 
Part. pass. Mis, se, put. 

* Mettre, when conjugated as a reflective verb, expresses the be- 
ginning or continuation of an action or application ; it is then constantly 
followed by the particle a, and an infinitive mood. It is rendered, in 
English, by the verb to begin: ex. 
Toutev les fois quHl la voit, il se Every time he sees her, he begifis 

met a rire, laughing. 

II s'est mis tuui de bun a etudier, He has beg un io study in earnest 



286 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Mets, mets, met, I put, or am putting. 
Plur. MettonSy metlez, meltent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Metiais, mettaisy mettaity I did put, or wa? putting 
Plur. Mettio7iSy mettieZy mettaienty 
Preterite. 
Sing. Mis, mis, tnit, I did put, or put. 
Plur. Mimes , mites , mirenty 

Future. 
Sing. Mettraiy mettraSy metirciy I shall, or will put. 
Plur. MettronSy metireZy meitronty 
Conditional. 
Sino;. Mettraisy metfraiSy m-ettrait } I should, would, &c 
Plur. 



Sing. 



MettrionSy mettrieZy meitraienty 
Imperative Mood. 
MetSy put thou. 
mettez. 
Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
que que 
metteSy mettey that I may put. 
metlieZy mettent, 
Present. 

Sing. Misse, misses, mtf, that I might put. 
Plur. Missions y missieZy missenty 



put 



Plur. Mettons, 



Que 
Sing. Mettey 
Plur. MettionSy 



The compounds of this verb are, 



Jldmettrey to admit. 

Commettre y to commit. 

Compromettrey to compro- 
mise. 

Demettrey to turn out, to re- 
move. 

Se demettre de y to resign. 

Omettrey to omit. 



Permettrey to permit. 
Promettrey to promise. * 
Remettre, to deliver up, 
to put back again, to re- 
collect, to put off, to de- 
fer. 
Soumettre, to submit, 
Transmettre, to transmit 



*The participle active of this verb (promising,) when used adjective- 
ly, and expressing the mental qualities of somebody, is rendered in 
French by qui promet or promcttait beaucoup, or dont il y a, or 
avait beaucoup d esperer : ex. 

Le Major A. etait un officer qui Major A. was a very promising 
promettait beaucup, on dont il officer. 

y avait beaucoup a esperer, 



2&7 

MOUDRE, TO GRIND, 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Moudre, to grind. 
Part. act. Moulant, grinding. 
Part. pass. Moulu, ue, ground. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing Mauds, mouds, moud, I grind, or am grinding. 
Plur. MoulonSy moulez, moulent, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Moulais, moulais, moulait, I did grind, or was 
Plur JYloulions, mouliez. moulaient, grinding. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Moulus, moidus, moulutj I ground, or did 

.Plur. Mouliimes, moiduits, moulurent, grind. 

Future. 
Sing. Moudrai, moudras, moudra, I shall, or svill grind. 
Plur. Moudrons, moudrez, moudront } 

Conditional. 
Sing. MoudratSj moudrais, moudrait, I should, would, 
Plur. Moudrions, moudriez, moadraienl, §c. grind 

Imperative 3Iood. 

Sing. Mouds. grind thou. 

Plur. Moulons, moulez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Moule, monies, movie, that I may grind. 
Plur. Moulions, mouliez, incident, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Moulusse, moniliases , moulv.t , t\\aX I might grind 
Plur Moulussions, moulus siez, moulussent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Emoudrt, to whet. Remoudre, to grind again. 



EXERCISES ox the foregoing VERBS 

AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Do not fear to tell her what you think of it. I 

de lid penserjr* 



288 

mf speak to her to oblige you, but I know she 

pourjp. 

does not fear me. Why do you not believe me ? - -•- 

They [are afraid) of being exposed to some dangers. 

eire,v. 
~ - - We would not believe him, though he should tell 

quundyC. 

the truth. Why would you not ? You should not 

v trite fi. devoir 

speak so imprudently before I know not whom, 

devantrf. 

who slanders every body. These flowers would 

jlewrfi 

grow much better if you watered them oftener. 

arrose.TyV. 
Put out the candle, and do not pretend to sleep. 

eteindre^v. de 

Were I in town, I would tell them all that 

en y \-). 

I think (about it). Say nothing to her; believe 

penser, en,pro. ne run 

me. - - I will tell it to you to-morrow. I esteem 

estimer^v. 
your daughter much, because she told me sin- 
cerely that she would do neither. They who 

say all they know, will readily say what they 

* volordierSjiidv. 

do not know. - - Tell the truth with modesty : they 

who do not love it, will always respect and fear it. 

Lf I see your father, shall I tell him you are afraid of 

lid 

aot succeeding ? Do you think me capable of 

reus sir " 

forgetting my friends so soon ? No, I do not. You 

juhlier^v. 

always contradict me when I speak. It is pru- 
dent and humane not to speak ill of any body . 

de 
but it is a meanness to speak ill of your bene 
ce,pro. bassessefi de hicn 

* See the rule, page 137. 



239 

factore. - - We often do good to those who 

fail cur ytt\. souvent, adv. bien^m. 

are not worthy of it, and harm to those who 

mal,m. 
do not deserve it. - - - Will you tell me, after 

merit er, v. 
this, that I am not your friend ? - - - 1 hope she 

que,c. 
will not tell them what happened to me yester 
leur 

day. I was telling it yesterday to several friends of 

mine, and every body began crying. 1 do not 

* pleurer. 
like Miss D. because she speaks ill of every body. 

parceque,c. 
- - Her father has transmitted her all his fortune, but 

lui 

not his virtues. Sylla proscribed about four 

plus de,adv. 

thousand Roman citizens. Does Mr. R. write to 

Romain citoyen,m. 

you (now and then) from Paris ? Do you 

de temps e7itemps,a.dv. 

know his direction ? Would you not write to him 

adressefi 
if you knew it ? -- - We were writing while 

pendant quc y c. 

they slept. If your brother come here, detain him, 

and tell him I have something to show him. 

a J aire voir 

The last time they wrote to him, they desired 

prier^v. 
him to send them the invoice of the goods, and lie 
de leur facturefi marchandiscSj 

has still omitted it in his letter, What are you 

encore, adv. , 

doing now ? I am making a cap for your sis- 

maintenanty adv. 

ter. - Do not do that ; I will do it myself. 1 would 

do it with all my heart, if I could. What would 

de 
_ m * See the note, page 197. 

25 



290 • 

you have done, if you had been in my place ? - - « 
si,c. a, p. 

Why do you not fry that fish ? The first time 

/aw,f 
you come to see me, I will show you some 

(by the fut.) 
flowers in my garden which will surprise you.--- 

--Silk-worms generally hatch at the end of the 

Les vers d, sole 
spring. - - These rose-trees grow perceptibly, 
printemps m. rosier, m. a vue eT(£t/,adv 

and those tulips would soon open, if it were a 

faisaityV. 

little warmer. Though they should deduct ten 

chaud^dj. Quand,c. 
per cent, they would get still enough 

pouf gagner,v. encore, adv. 

- - I never buy (any thing) at Mr. P**-*'s ; for, he 

acheter,v. rien chez car,c. 

always (asks too much for) his goods. I will 

surf aire , v . marchandise, f. 

undo my gown to-morrow, and do it up again immc- 

sur-ie* 

diately. The first time you mimic any 

champ, adv. (by the fut.) 

one, I will punish you severely. *I would introduce 

presenter ,v . 
your sister to Mrs. F. if I knew her. She would 

consent to that, if you would promise her to come 
* vouloir lui de 

here. They were playing while you instructed 

them. - - You truly join what is useful to what is 
vraimeni,adv. 

agreeable. Did not our soldiers join dexterity 

adresse,?. 

to valour ? If you do not take great care of 

prendre,w. 

your flowers, the frost will destroy them. Mr 

gelee,t. 
S. says he will get rid of his horse (at the) begin 

an commence 



291 

iiln^. of next month. - - You would put out the fire, if, 
mental. 

&.c. Undo that, make it up agaia before dinner, 

avanttf, 
and never defer until to-morrow what you can do to- 

a,p ; 
day. Your daughter joins to the love of study the 

desire of surpassing her companions. Alwavs 

compagnefi 
virtuous, still handsome, she makes herself 

touj ours, adv. 
more enemies than friends ; but a day will come 

when every body will do • her the justice she 

qw,c. rendre,v. ltd 

deserves. -- She reads the history of England every 

m£riter 9 v. 

day, from three o'clock till five. - - I will read 

depuis, heure jusqu'a^. 

your letter as soon as I am dressed. - The 

(by the fut.) habille y \>.p. 
inhabitants of W*** have elected Mr. V. W. for 

their representative in parliament. - - I was reading 
representant,m. au 

Marmontel's Tales when you came ill. Mr. 

Conte,m. entrer^. 

R. wrote to me some time ago, tnat when he 
was in London, the Earl of E*** told him 

Comte^m. 
we should soon see a great change in the 

changement ,m. 
ministry. - - - He often writes to me, and always con- 
ministere,m. 
eludes his letter thus : (Be so kind as to) send me 

Avoir la bonte de 
gome news, whatever it may be. - - Put these books in 

en 
their places again. - - - I believe he did it through 

par,p. 

spite. Shall I put another tririiming to your 

ilc pit garniture ,f. 



292 

gown ? - - I read last year, a very good book, but I 
eannot remember the author's name. - - - - What 

grammar do you read ? Whatever merit a master 

has, he cannot succeed in teaching young people 

reussir «,p. 
if he do not join practice to theory. I would put 

all your china in that closet, if I had 

porcelainefi cabinet, m. 

the key of it. - - You could not do it in ten days, if 

en 
I did not help you. - - We could not permit him 
aider.y. 

to go out, though they would. Why do not you 

de quandyC. 

abstain from wine, since it hurts you ? 

puisque,c. faire m«/,v. 
He promised to pay me the tenth of this month, 

de 
but he has now put me off to the third of Decern 

ber. - - - He submitted to it with the greatest pa- 

se soumettre 
tience. - - You promise enough, but you seldom 

rarement, adv. 

keep your word. Mr. D. is a very promising 

tenir,v 

young man - - It is he who told me, that, be- 

Ce,pro * a- 

fore the invention of water and wind-mills, the an- 
vant 

cients used to grind their corn in mor- 

avait coutume y v. de grain,m. dans mor- 

tars. - - Will they not admit Mr. Z. in their society ? - - 
iier,m. 

No, they told me that they would not. - - The Eng- 
lish fleets have performed actions worthy to be 

f aire, v. de 

transmitted to posterity. Your brother promises 

uie every day to amend ; but, &.c. Were I 

de se corrigerjV. 

* See rule in page 96. 



293 

(heir master, I would not permit them to go cut to 

leur de 

day. I was writing to you, when your servant 

brought me your letter. 



Naissant. being born, rising. 

■a ■» " 

/Vcj ee, been born. 



Sing, 
riur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing. 
Plur. 



naitre, to be born, to rise. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Native, to be born. 

Part. act. 
Part. pass. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
nciis, naitj I am born. 
naisseZj naissent, 

Imperfect. 
naissais, naiss&it, I was born 
naissiez, naissaient, 

Preterite. 
naquis, naquit, I was born. 

naquites. naqvirent, 

Future. 



Mais , 
Naissons, 

JVaissais, 
Naissions, 

JVaquis, 
JYaquimes, 



Sing. 

Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 

Sing 

Plur. 



Nattrai, ndtiras, naitra, I shall, or will be born. 
JYaitrons, naztrez, naitront. 

Conditional 
JNaitrais, naitrais, natirait, I should, eye, be born. 
JVaitrionS) naitriez, ncniraxent, 

Imperative Mood. 

Nais, be thou born. 
Naissons, naissez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Naisse, naisses, naisse, that I may be born 
lYaissions, naissiez, naissent, 

Preterite. 
Naquisse, naquissrs, nciquU, that I might bo 
Naquissions. naqidssiez, naquissent, born 

The compound of this verb is 
Reimttrp, to be born again, to revive 



204 

JYU1RE, TO HURT, 

is conjugated like CONDU1RE, but makes, in its partici- 
ple passive, nui. 

OINDRE, TO ANOINT. 

This verb is seldom used, except in speaking of sacred 
ceremonies wherein oil is made use of. It is conjugated 
like CRAIJYDRE. 

PJ11TRE, TO FEED, TO GRAZE, 
PJ1RA1TRE, TO APPEAR, TO SEEM, 

and its compounds, 



Comparative, to appear, to 
make one's evidence, 



DisparaHre, to disappear, 
are conjugated like COJYNA1TRE. 



PEIJYBRE, TO PAINT, TO DRAW, 

PLJ1LYDRE, to pity, 

and Se Plaindre, to complain, 

are conjugated like CRMJVDRE 



PLJ11RE, TO PLEASE. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Plaire, to please. 

Part. act. Plaisani, pleasing. 

Part. pass. Pin, pleased. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Sing. Plais, plais, plait, I please. 
Plur. Plaisons, plaisez, plaisent, 

Imperfect 
Sing. Plaisais, plaisais, plaisait, I did please, or was 
Plur. PlaisionSy plaisiez, plaisaie7it, pleasing 

Preterite. 
Sing Plus, plus, plut, I pleased, or did please. 
Plur. Plumes, plutes, plurent, 

Future. 
Sing. Plairai, plairas, plaira, I shall, or will please 

Plur. PlairoiiSj plairez, plairont, 



295 

Conditional. 
Sing. Plairais, plairais, plairaU, I should, would, fyc- 
Plur. PlaitionS) plairiez, plairaient, please, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Plats, please thou. 

Plur. Plaisons, plaisez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sing Plaise, plaises, plaise, that I may please. 
Plur. Plaisions, plaisiez, plaisent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Plusse, plusses, pint, that I might please. 
Plur. Plussions, plussiez, plussent, 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Completive, to humour, Dcplaxre, to displease. 

PRENDRE, TO TAKE. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Prendre, to take. 

Part. act. Prenani, taking. 

Part. pass. Pris, ise, taken. 
Indicative Mood. 
Present. 

Sing. Prendsy prends, prend, I take, or am taking, 
Plur. Prenons, prenez, prenncnt. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Prencds, prenais, prenait, I did take, or was taking. 
Plur. Prenions, preniez, prenaierdj 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pris, pris, prit, I took, or did take. 
Plur. Primes, prites, prirent, 

Future. 
Sing. Prendrai, prendras, prendre^ I shall, or will take. 
Plur. Prendrons, prendrez, prendrant, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Prcndrais, prendmisj prendrait, I should, would 
Plur. Prcndrions. prendricz, prendraicnt, §•£ take 



Sing. 



Plur. Prenons, 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Que 
Premie, 
Prenions. 



Si 



Pli 



ing. 



risse* 



296 

Imperative Mood. 

Prends, take thou. 
prtnez. 

SubjuxXctive Mood. 

Present. 
que que 

prennes, premie, that I may take. 

preniez, prennent, 

Preterite. 
prissesy prit, that I might take. 
prissiez, prissent, 



The compounds of this verb are, 



.ipprendre, to learn. 
des nouvelleSy 



to 



hear of. 

Comprendre, to apprehend, 
to understand, to in- 
clude. 

Desapprendre, to unlearn. 



Entreprendre, to under, 

take. 
Meprendre, to mistake, to 

be deceived. 
Reprendre, to take again, 

to chide, to rebuke. 
Surprendre, to surprise. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



PROBU1RE, TO PRODUCE, 
REDU1RE, TO REDUCE, TO BRING TO, 

are conjugated like CQNDU1RE. 

RESTRE1JVBRE, to restrain, 
is conjugated like CRA1JYBRE. 

r1re, to laugh. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Rire, to laugh. 

Part. act. Riant, laughing. 
Part. pass. Ri, laughed. 

Indicative Mood 
Present. 
fit, I laugh, or am laughing. 
rientj 

Imperfect. 
nail, I did laugh, or was laughing 

riaieid 



Ris, 
Rions, 



ns, 

riez. 



Rials , 
Riions 



riais 

riiez 



Sir 



Ris 



Plur Rimes, rites, 

Sing. Rirm, riras, 
Plur. Rirons, rirez, 



297 

Preterite. 
rit, I laughed, or did laugh. 

rirent, 
. Future 
riraj I shall j or will laugh. 

riront, 
Conditional. 



Sing. 


Rirais rivals, rirait, I should, could, &.c. 


riur. 


Ririons, ririez, rimient, laugh, 




Imperative Mood. 


Sing. 


Ris, laugh thou. 


Plur. 


Rions, riez* 




Subjunctive Mood. 




Present 




Que que que 


Sing. 


Rie, lies, rie, that I may laugh. 


Plur. 


Riions, riiez, rient, 




Preterite. 


Sing. 


Risse, risses, ril, that I might laugh. 


Plur. 


Rissions, rissiez, ris sent, 


The compound of this verb is, Sourire, to smile. 




SEDUIRE, TO SEDUCE, 




is conjugated like COJYDVIRE. 



SUFFIRE, TO SUFFICE, TO BE SUFFICIENT, 

is conjugated like COJYF1RE ; but its participle passive 

is suffi. 

SU1VRE, TO FOLLOW. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Suivre, to follow. 

Part. act. Suivant, following. 
Part. pass. Suivi, ie, followed. 
Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Suis, sins, suit, I follow, or am following. 
Plur. Suivons, suicez, suivent, 

Imperfect, 
Sing. Suivais, suivais, suivoif, I did follow, or was fol- 



Plur, Suiuiom, suiviez, suivaient, 



lowing 



298 

Preterite. 
Sing. SuiviSy suivis, suivit, I followed, or did follow. 
Plur. SuivhneSy suivites, suivirent, 

I uture. 
Sing. Suivrai, suivras, suivra, I shall, or will follow 
Plur. Suivroiis, suivrez, suivront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Suivrais, suivrais, suivrait, I should, fyc. follow 
Plur. Suivnons 9 suivricz, suivraient, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. .Suis, follow thou. 

Plur. Suivons, suivez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Suive, suives, suive, that I may follow. 

Plur. Suivions, saiviez, suivent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Suivi3se, suivisses, suivii, that I might follow 
Plur. SuivissionSy suivissieZy suivissenty 

The compounds of this verb are, 
S J ensuivre } to follow from. Poursuivre, to pursue 



Se TJLIREy to hold one's tongue, 
is conjugated like PLJ1IRE. 



TEIJYDREy to die, 
is conjugated like CRJ1WDRE. 

TRJWUlREy to translate, 
is conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



TRMREy to milk. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Traire, to milk. 

Part. act. Trayant^ milking. 

Part pass Trait, aite 7 milked 



299 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing. Trais, trais, trait, I milk, or am milking. 
Plur. TrayonSy trayez, traient, 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Trayais, trayais, trayait, I did milk, or was milking 
Plur. Trayions, trayiez, trayaient, 

Preterite is wanting. 
Future. 
Sing. Trairai, trairas, tvaira, I shall, or will milk. 
Plur. Trairons, trairez, trairont, 
Conditional. 
Sing. Trairaisy irairais, trairait, I should, 8$c. milk 
Plur. Trainons, trainez, trairaient, 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Trais, milk thou. 

Plur. Trayons, Irayez, 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Traie, iraies, traie, that I may milk. 

Plur. Trayions, trayiez, indent. 
Preterite is wanting. 
The compounds of this verb are, 



Rentraire, to fine draw. 
Soustraire, to subtract. 
Rdraire, to milk again 



Mstraire, to abstract. 
Distraire, to distract. 
Ex [retire, to extract. 

VJ11JVCRE, TO VANQUISH, TO CONQUER. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Present. Valncre^ to conquer. 

Part. act. Vainquanf, conquering. 
Part. pass. Vaincu, ue y conquered. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present. 
Sing Vaincs, vaincs, vainc,* I conquer. 
Plur. Vainquons, vamquez, vainquent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Vainqmis, Vainquais, vainquaii, I did conquer. 
Plur. Vainquions, vainquiez y vctinquaient, 

*The singular of this tense and the imperfect are very little used- 



300 

Preterite, 
Sing VainquiSy vainquis, vainquit, I conquered. 

Plur VainquimeSy vainquiteSy vainquirenty 

Future. 
Sing. Vaincraiy vaincraSy vainer ay I shail, or will con- 
Plur. VaineronSy vaincrez } vaincront, quel 

Conditional. 
Sing. VaincraiSy vaincraisy vaincraity I should, Etc. 
Plur. VaincrionSy vaincrieZy vaincraienty conquer 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. VaincSy vainquey conquer thou. 

Plur. VainquonSy vainqueZy vainquent, 

Subjunctve Mood. 

Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Vainquey vainqueSy vainquey that I may conquer. 
Plur. VainquionSy vainquiezy vainquent , 

Preterite. 
Sing. Vainquisse, vainquisses, vainquit, that I might 
Plur. VainquissionSy vainquissieZy vainquissenty conquer. 

The compound of this verb is, 
Convaincre, to convince. 





FlVREy TO LIVE. 




Infinitive Mood. 




Present. Vivre, to live. 
Part. act. Vivant, living. 
Part. pass. Vecu, lived. 




Indicative Mood. 


Surg. 
Plur. 


Present. 
VtSy vi-Sy vity 1 live, or am living. 
VivonSy viveZy viventy 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Imperfect. 
Vivais, vivais, vivaity 1 did live, or was living. 
Vivians y vivieZy vivaicnt, 


S ; ng. 
Plur. 


Preterite. 
VecuSy vecus, vecut, 1 lived, or did live. 
VtcumeSy veculeSy vtcurenty 



301 , 

Future, 
Sing. Fivraij vivras, vivra, I shall, or will live, 
Plur. Vivrons, vivrez, vivront, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Vivrais, vivraisj ■ viumit, I should, would, &c 
Plur. Vivrions, vivriez, viv7*aient, live. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Vis y live thou. 

Plur. VivonSy vivez. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Que que que 

Sing. Vive j vives, vive, that I ma} live. 
Plur. Vivions, viviez, vivent, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Vecusse, vecusses, vecut, that I might lire. 
Plur. Vecussions, vecussicz, vecussent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Revivre, to revive. Survivre, to outlive. 



EXERCISES on the foregoing VERBS . 
and their COMPOUNDS. 

My brother was born in Paris, on the eighth of Feb- 
a Kjjn Fe- 

ruary, one thousand seven hundred and eighty-one. - - 
vrier^ 

The same men who seem not to fear death when 

jcp lorsque,adv. 

they are in good health, often dread it when 

en redouter,v 

they are sick. - - What does your sister complain of ? 

The swallows generally disappear towards the 

hirondellefi. vers, p. 

end of autumn. You do not seem to pay anj 

automm.fi. f aire, v. i&* 

attention to what 1 say to you. This man paints 

very well, I assure you. Why would you 

assurer ,v, 
hurt him ? he never did you any harm. I should 

lid fairejr. maLm 

26 



^ 302 

pity and succour him, if it were not his fault. ■ - 

ce,pro. 

You shall disappear as soon as you have ex- 

(by the fut.) 
ecuted my orders ; and take care not to speak 

ayez,\). soin,m. de 
to any body, for you know that walls have ears 

car,c. mur 

The last time I saw your sister, she ap- 

pU- 

peared to me thoughtful and melancholy. She 

raitre pensif^d], melancolique y Sid]. Ce 

is a lady that pleases every body. ----She appears 
a 

quite* young : how old is she ? Does she not 

touty&Av. 

learn drawing ? Your brother has not included his 

dessein,m. 
tailor's bill in the account which he has 

tailleur^m. meinoirejm. compte y m. 

given me. - - - I see you do not complain of him 
rmdre 3 v. 

without a cause. I really am surprised (at it,) but 

Kjcn en, pro. 

he always smiles at (every thing) I tell him. - - As sur- 

de tout ce que 
prising as this seems to you, yet it is true. - - 

cependant.sdv. ce 
At last the enemy surprised and defeated them in the 
Enfin, adv. 

space of twelve days. - - - If they had wished, they 
espace.m. 

might have taken the town three days sooner, but the 
soldiers were so exhausted with fatigue, that they 
epuisSSyf.j*. de,p. 

could not even hold their guns. May these 

meme y Q.dv. Puis sent 

brave men long enjoy the glory which they have ae- 
jouir de 

quired. - - I sincerely wish they may. Children sel- 

rare* 

* Tout, adv. before an adjective beginning with a consonant or ou 
h mute, agrees with it 



0V0 

dom forget, when they continually 

ment^dv. lorsque,c. continuellement, a.dv. 

exercise their minds to study. - - If my brother do not 

exercer,v. 

come this week, as he promised me ; if you will, we 

will go and see him in the country. Does not 

ucr a 

Mrs. H. appear much concerned at her daugh- 
Mme bien a ffligee,p.p. de 

.er-s death ? When you see Mrs. B. I am 

(by the fut.) 

certain she will please you. Did you never see 

swr,adv. 

her ? The children who (shall be born) from this 

happy marriage, will be the delight of their 

deliceSyf.pl. 

father and mother. - - - She joins to the qualities of the 

body those of the mind. - - Take some pears, and carry 

them to your brother. Every time I see him. I take 

him for a foreigner. My sister and I learn French, 

etranger,m 
and understand very well all that (is said) to us in that 

on dit 

language. Though you should learn all the rules, 

la ague , f. . Quandfi. 

they would not (be sufficient) without practice. - - I did 

suffire,Y. 

not understand what you said. Do not undertake to 

de 
undeceive her ; believe me, you will lose your time 
detromper^v. 

Virtue procures and preserves friendship, but 

obtenir^v. conserver,v. 

vice produces hatred and quarrels. If you 

vicejn. haine,f. querellefi 

complain to the master, I will complain to the 

mistress. Though you should undertake to prove 

Quand de 

the contrary, she would not believe you. Why did 

not you take the same road as we ? He (is not 

que 



304 

pleased) in his situation, now he sees all the dangers 

se plaire,v. 

of it. - - He has suffered much, and none of his friends 

has pitied him. The idea of his misfortune pur- 

ideefi malheur,m. 

sues him every-where. When did you hear of him ? 

par-tout, adv. apprendre des nouvelles 

Captain D. told my father that he had seen 

d 
him, and spoken to him at Madras. We often 

mistake when we judge of others by ap- 

se meprendre^y. juger y y m 

pearances ; and often a person displeases us by the 

very* quality by which another has pleased us. 

meme,&d]. 

The people who oiten seem the most zealous 

genSyin. zele } a.d]. 

are not always the most constant. Leave me 

Laisser^v. 

that book a little longer, do not take it again. 

peu 

That apple-tree produces no fruit. They retook 

pommier,m. 

our ship. Go and speak to Mr. ; but above all 

ucn sur,p. 

do not laugh. Would you not laugh, if you were 

in my place ? We laughed much yesterday at 

the play. She was an agreeable lady, she was 

ever smiling when any one had the honour 

toujours^adv. 

of speaking to her. He seduced her by his fine 

promises. Whatever he may undertake, he never 

will succeed, he is (too much) addicted to the 

trop 5 adv. adonne,p.p. 

pleasures of this world. Young people tell 

gens ,m.&f. 
what they do, old people what they have done, 
vieillard y m. 

* Verify adv. is used here adjecthelyj and signitiea same, 



305 

and fools what they intend to do. We 

sot>m. se proposer 7 y. de 

learn much more easily the things which 

facUement } a.dv. 

we understand than those which we do not. If we 

comprendre 
go together to my brother's, shall you be able 

chezjp. 

to follow us ? I will follow you step by step. 

jjr> pas apas,a.dv. 

Why do you follow me as you do ? - - You may set 
comme 

out when (you please,) we will follow you. Hold 

il voas pi air a 

your tongue, you do not know w T hat you say. 

What books do you translate ? My master says I 

shall soon translate Marmontel's Works. We should 

(Euvre^f. 
have conquered them if we had fought ; and, believe 

combatively. 
me, vou (might have 1 ) done 4 much 2 better 3 , if you had 
auriez 

followed the advice which he gave you. - They 

have debated the question a long time without 

(being able to) resolve it. They were quite trans- 

pouvoir 
ported with joy when they (heard of) the happy 

de,p. apprendre,\ r . 

news of the peace. - - Every thing smiles in 

nouvelle 5 f.sing. dans y p. 

nature (at the) return of the spring. As long 

au retour 3 m. printemps 3 m. Tant 
as her father and mother live, they never 
^we,adv. (by the fut.j 
vvill consent to her marriage w r ith Mr. R. You 

will not live long if you drink so much. - - - - She lived 

about four years after her husband's death. 

mviron, p . ap r es,p . 

George III. the eldest son of Frederick. Prince of 
ame>dj. 



30G 

Wales, was born on the fourth of Jane, 1738, and 

Galles, x/r* 

was proclaimed king of Great Britain on the twenty- 

proclamer y v. 
sixth of October, 1760. In whatever country a 

man may live, he is sure to be respected and 

de 
well treated every where, if his behaviour and 

manners are regulated by the principles of a 
mm wrs,f.pl. regler,v. 

sound policy, and the laws of the country he 
satn,adj. politique y f. 

lives in. 

oil. 

OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Verbs which relate to no person or thing, and which, 
as has been before observed, are only conjugated in the 
third person singular , are called impersonal verbs: they 
generally are preceded by one of the following pronouns^ 
il or on : of this number are, 

11 tonne. It thunders. * 

II pleutj It rains. 

On dit, People say, or it is said, fyc. 

To which may be added several other verbs, which be- 
come impersonal when employed in the same manner : ex. 

// vous convient d'etre mo- It becomes you to be mo- 
dest, dest. 

Tlfait beaUyfroid, 8$c. It is fine, cold, Sfc. 

II fait grand vent, The wind blows high. 

11 semble, It seems. 

12 s'ensuit que. It follows that. 
II vaut mieux, It is better, &c. 

These verbs, like others, whether regular or irregular, 
have their different tenses, and are conjugated in the same 
manner as the personal verbs from which they are deriv- 
ed. The learner having gone through the other conju- 
gations, the verbs of this class may the more easily be dis- 
pensed with. It will only be necessary to select one that 
is not derived, and show the manner of the conjugating it. 



only premising, that the compound tenses are formed, like 
others, by joining the participle passive to one of the 
tenses of the auxiliary verb avoir, to have. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
Infinitive 3Iood. 

Present. Pleuvoir, to rain. 

Part. act. Phuvant, raining 
Part. pass. Phi, rained. 

Indicative Mood. 

Affirmatively. 

Present. 11 phut, it rains, it does rain, it is raining. 

Negatively. 
11 m phut pas, it does not rain. Sec. 

Interrogatively. 



Phut-il ? 

JVe phui-il pas ? 



Imperfect 
Preterite. 
Future. 
Conditional 



11 pleuva.it, 
II pint, 
11 pleuora, 

II phuvrait, 



does it rain ? 

does it not rain ? 
it rained, it was raining. 
it rained, or did rain, 
it shall, or will rain, 
it would, should, Sec. rain, 



Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. QiCil pleuve, that it may rain. 

Imperfect. Quit pint, that it might rain. 

The following being of the first conjugation, I shall on- 
ly give the third person, present tense, of the indicative 
mood : the learner may easily find out the rest. 
// arrive, it happens ; from arrives, to happen, 



11 bruine, it drizzles ; 
II eclair e, it lightens ; 
11 geh, it freezes ; 
11 grele, it hails ; 
11 neige, it snows ; 
11 tonne, it thunders ; 
It importc, it matters, 
it concerns, 



bruiner, to drizzle. 
eclair er, to lighten. 
geler, to freeze. 
greler, to hail. 
neiger, to snow. 
former, to thunder. 
importer, to concern. 



EXERCISES UPON THESE VERBS. 

Docs it rain ? - - It rained just now, 

tout-a-Pheure,adv, 



but 



308 

it docs not rain at present. Was it not raining 

maintenantjixdv. 

when you came ? I advise you not to go out 

conseiller,v. de 

tills morning ; I think it will soon rain. - - I am 

bientot,3.dv. 
sure it would rain ; if the 6 wind 2 was Viot 3 so 4 high 5 . — - 

s^ildcr f aire, v. grand. 

Do you know what happened to my cousin 

savoir,v. 
whilst he was in town ? - - I foresaw w r hat 

pendant qne,c. en prevoir 

would happen. The roads were very slippery 

chemin y m. glissant^d], 

yesterday, because it drizzled the whole day. Did 

you observe how it lightened last 

remarquer,v. comme, ad v. 

night ? If it did not freeze, J would go to see them 

oon voir ,v. 
to-clay. - - - - It hailed this afternoon, and it will 

apresmidi^m, 

certainly snow to night. It thundered much 

cette nuit. beancoup y wdv. 

yesterday, and I think it will still thunder to- 

croire 9 v. encore y ad v. 

day. It matters little whether you do your ex- 

que (subj.) 

ercise now or later, provided it be well 

pourvu qne,c* 

done. It greatly concerns children to 

beaucoupj&dv. aux de 

avoid idleness, because it is the parent of all vice, 
eviterjV. • merefi 

and destroyer of all virtues. 
destrtictricefi 

The verb Avoir 9 to have, conjugated impersonally with 
t/ ; adverb of place. 

Infinitive Moon. 
Y avoir. 

Indicative Mood. 
Affirmatively. 
Present. 11 y a, there is 3 there are, 



309 

Negatively. 
// nhj a pas, there is not, there are not. 
Interrogatively. 
Y a-t-il ? is there ? are there ? 

J\Hy a-t-il pas ? is there not ? are there not $ 
Imperfect. 11 y avail, there was, there were. 
Preterite. 11 y tut, there was, there were, 

Future. II y aura, there shall, or will be. 

Conditional. 11 y anrait, there should, would, Slc. be. 

Imperative Mood. 

Qu^il y ait, let there be. 

Subjunctive Mood 

Present. QuHl y ait', that there may be. 

Imperfect. QuHl y tut, that there might be. 

Compound Tenses. 

11 y a tu, there has, or have been. 

11 y avait tu, there had been. 

// y tut tu, there had been. 

// y aura tu, there shall, or will have been. 

// y aurait eu } there should, &.c. have been 

QuHl y ait tit, that there may have been. 

QuHl y tut tu, that there might have been. 

EXERCISES UPON THIS VERB. 

There are three ladies who (are waiting for) you 

attendrt,v. 

m your brother's study. Is there any fire in the 

cabinet, m. 

parlour ? - - No, Sir, there is none. There were two 

salleS. 

men below who asked to speak to you. - - Was 

tn b as, adv. a 

there not formerly a (coffee house) at the 

autrefois, adv. cafe,m. 

corner of this street ? There were great re- 

coin,m. rut,f. rt- 

joicings in France when peace was proclaimed. - - 
joiiissance,f. proclamtt,p. p e 

I was telling you- that there will be a grand concert 
dirtyV 



310 

and afterwards a ball and supper in the course 

ensuiie,a.dv courant,m. 

of this month - - There would be no harm if you 

mal,m. 
would learn* your lesson better. - - My brother says 

mieux,&dv. 
diat there has been a bloody engagement between 

sang lard, ad], combat, m. 
an English frigate and a French one, and there 

f regale,?. f re gate 

have been many men killed on both sides. There 

depart el d' ) autre. 
would have been a great riot yesterday in the 

emeute,i. 
Strand, if the magistrates had not sent many constables, 

connelables,m. 
who dispersed the mob. 
populace,?. 
There is, immediately followed by the negation no and 
a participle active must be rendered by on ne pent pas, on 
ne saurait, with the participle in the infinitive mood ; the 
other tenses, as there was, there will be } there ivould be, 
used as above, and made by the same tenses of the verb 
pouvoir only : ex. 

On ne peut pas, or on ne There is no going out, to- 
saurait sortir aujour- day, because of the rain ; 
dPhui a cause de la pluie, that is, one cannot, &c. 
On ne pouvait Pappaiser, There was no pacifying 

him. 
On ne pourra pas jouer de- There will be no acting 
main ; mon pere est Ires to-morrow ; my father is 
malade, very ill. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

There is (such a deal) of snow that there is no going 
tant,adv. 
out of the house. - You speak so low and so quick 

bas, adv. vite,ndv. 

that there is no hearing nor understanding what 
entendre,^. comprcndr^,v. 

* The conjugation Si, if, is used only before the present or iinper 
feet of the indicative mood and their compounds ; and sometimes elo 
gantly before the compound of the imperfect of the subj. mood. 



311 

you say. - - My brother runs so fast that there is 

V2te,adv. 
no following him. - - There was no walking yesterday 

hier, adv. 
in the streets of London, on account of the dirt. - - His 

a cause, p. boue,f. 

arguments were so convincing that there was no re- 

rc- 
plying to him. - - There will be no skating in the 
pliquer,w. patiner,v. 

park to-morrow, because it thaws. - - There will bo 

degeler,v. 
no going to the play next month, be- 

comedie,f. pro chain, adj. puree* 

cause the play-house will be shut. There would 

que,c. theatre,m. 

be no living with you, if you were always in the same 

eiieZjV. de 

humour. - - If a horse knew his strength, there 

le connaiire,v. force,?. 

would be no mastering him. 
dompler,v. 

This verb il y a, when used to denote a quantity of 
time, is sometimes rendered in English by it is, it was, &c 
when the English preposition since is rendered (in French) 
by que : but in all cases where the English phrase can be 
rendered negatively, que must be accompanied by the 
negation ne : ex. 

II y a trois semaines que -It is three weeks since 
voire per e est arrive, your father arrived. s 

11 y a long-terns que je ne It is a long while since I 
vous ai vu, saw you, or I have not 

seen you this long while, 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

How long is it since we (saw one another ?) It is a 
Combien,a.dv. se i'oir,v.refl. 

year since I met your brother in Italy, and 

rencordrer,v. en 

it is six months since I heard of him. - - 

entendre parler,v. 
How long is it since you wrote to your mother ? - - ^ 



312 

Ft was but two months. It* is a week since I had 

ne que semaine,f 

seen your brother, when I met him by chance in 

par hasard^Av. 

a (coffee room.) How long was it since your friend 

cafe,m. 

had left France, when he wrote to you ? It was 

quitter, v. 
three months. - - It may be two years since Mr. Robert 

set out for the Indies. How long is it since you 

partir,Y. • hides. 

were in England ? It is (such a) long while since F 

si 
learned German, that I almost forget it. 

Jili em and, m. 
It often happens that the verb there is, or it is, &c. is un- 
derstood : in this case, one of the words, ago, these, or for 
these, is expressed as a substitute : ex. 
II y a trois mois que fe- I was in France three 
tais en France, or felais months ago. 
en France il y a trois 
mois* 
II y a quatre ans que mon My brother has been dead 
frere est mort, these four years. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

He is the 3ame man whom we saw a quarter of an 
Cest quart ^cn 

hour ago. When did you see my father ? I saw 

him (a fortnight) ago. - - We have not heard | from my 
quinze jours 

brother these two years. You do not seem to 

paraitre,v. 

be so lively as you were three years ago. I would 

enjoue,&d). 

* From this instance it may be observed, that, if the verb il ?/ <7, 
&c. begin the sentence, the word que must immediately follow the 
noun of number ; but, if it be transposed, que must be omitted. The 
first construction is to be preferred. The learner must at the same time 
observe, that in the above sentence, the verb, which, in English, is i:i 
the compound of the present^ is rendered in French by the present of 
the indicative, and when in the compound of the imperfect, by the 
imperfect of the same mood. 

f See page 197. 



have written to you a month ago, if I had known 

s avoir jV, 

your direction. I have not seen your sister these 

adressej. 

four months. My father has been ill these 

malade, adj. 

six weeks. He has been in London these five years, 

a 
and (it is said) he there enjoys a considerable fortune 
Von dit,v. 

We have neither seen you nor your sister these 

three days. 

It also happens, that neither the verbs, nor any of 
the words, ago, these, or for these, are expressed in the 
sentence : ex. 



II y a neufans que ma (ante 

demeure dans ce voisi- 

nagc, 
II n't) a pas plus aVune heure 

que nous pechons ici, 
11 y avait deux arts que ma 

sozur eiait en France 

quand fy aJlai, 
JS/^y avait-il pas six mots 

qiCelle demeurait avec 

nous quand elle mound 1 
11 y aura six am a Noel 

que voire frere est chez 

Mens 0. 
N*y aura-t-il pas u:i an au 

mois d'Aout prochain que 

voire soeur est a Paris ? 



My aunt has lived nine 

years in this neighbour- 
hood. 
We have not been above 

an hour fishing here. 
My sister had been two 

years in France when I 

went there. 
Had she not lived six 

months with us when she 

died ? 
Your brother will have been 

at Mr. G.'s six years at 

Christmas. 
Will not your sister have 

been a year at Paris 

next August ? 



their 



poc 



EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE 

Some people* have no pity 

gens.pl 
fellow creatures. - - - Some people* 
semb la b le , pe rsonneS. 

that they can learn a 

pouvoir,v. 

* The sentences are the same as there are some people who, &c. 
Tl y a des gens qui, &c. 
27 



on 
de 

fancy 

9 l imaginer J v. 
anguage without 



314 

studying. My brother has been four years at 

ttudier,v. 

Mr. W.'s academy , # and my father told him that he 

should stay there two years more. - - I had been three 

rester,v. 
years in England when that happened. - - I had not 

arriver 7 v. 

been three months in France, when my brother returned 

from America to London. Mr. N. had only 

ne que 
learned French seven months when he wrote me 

a letter in that lauguage. Had not Mr. David 

been four years and a half in Spain when his sister 
up 

was married ? - - - My father and mother had not been 

(gone out) above a quarter of an hour when 

soriir,v. plus c£e,aclv. ur 

he arrived. We had been playing at caids 

aux carle ,f. 

for two hours when you came in. Thomas will have 

entrer,v. 
been at the college two years the tenth of next 

college ,m. - 
month. 

The verb etre\ to be, becomes impersonal when follow- 
ed by a substantive, or one of the pronouns personal, pos- 
sessive, or demonstrative , and is always conjugated with 
the pronoun demonstrative ce, whether speaking of per- 
sons or things : ex. 

C y est la loi qui Pordonne, It is the law that pre- 
scribes it. 
(Vest moi qui Vaifait, It is 1 who have done it. 

Cest mon bienfaiteur. It is my benefactor. 

Ce sont eux, qui me Tout It is they who have related 

rapporte, it to me. 

From the last instance, it appears that it is, &c. ; fol 

* All the sentences in this exercise, should begin with the impersonal 
verb, II y a, il y avait, &c. 



315 

lowed by a pronoun of the third person plural, must be 
rendered in French by ce sont, and not by c'est. 

EXERCISE UPOX THIS RULE. 

It is prosperity which commonly 2 makes 1 

prosperitefi. rendre' 9 v. 

men haughty and proud ; but it is adversity 

j/ier,adj . drgueUleux,adj . 

that makes them wise. It was the custom 

re n dre , v . coirfum e , f. 

among the Spartans to inure their 

chez,p. Sparliate 7 m. de endurcir,Y. 

children early to the fatigues of war. 

de bonne fte«re,adv. travail,m. guerreS 

- - It is not I who occasioned the quarrel : it is 

causer 7 v. querelle,f. 

you who began first. It was envy 

avez commence le envie,£ 

which caused the first murder. Is it not you who 

causer y \. mewire^m. 

wrote to Miss A. ? No, it is Miss Rose's sister. 

avez ecrityV. 

- - If you do not succeed, it will not be my fault. 

reussiryV. fautefi 

- If you happened to lose the friendship of your 

venir a perdre,v. 

parents, it would be the greatest misfortune which 

nutiheur 7 m. 
ever 2 might 1 happen to you. - - It is my friend 

jamais,a.dv. pouvoir,\\ arriver,v. 

who told me that it was your father whom we saw 
dire,v* 

yesterday. Speak to my brothers, for it is they 

car,c. 

who told me. Why Co you not accuse 

Pourquoi^'&dv. 
my sisters ? - - It is they who have done all the 

mischief You blame my aunts, but is it they 

viaLm. blamer 7 Y taniefi 

who have offended you ? 
offenserjf 



31G 

He, she, they, immediately followed by who, whom, or 
that, and suck as, whether separated in English or not, but 
implying people in general, are often made into French by 
the impersonal c'esl, with an infinitive followed by que de 
before a second infinitive, and if the sentence be negative, 
c'esi ne pas must be used : observe well these examples, 
C'est etre fou que " de He is a fool who loses his 

perdre le temps a ces time in those trifles. 

bagatelles, 
C'est ne pas gouter les Such as love nobody, do 

plaisirs de Pamtiie que not enjoy the pleasures of 

de Maimer per Sonne y friendship. 

C'est trop presumer de soi- They are too conceited who 

meme que d'agir ainsi, act so. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

He is a blind man who does not 

up aveugle,a.d}. >& 

perceive all the dangers which surround U3 

environner,v. 

in this deceitful world. Such as are satis- 

trompeur,Rd]. con- 

tied with their lot are happy. - - He 

/enf,adj. de son,pro. sort,m. 
does not know the court, who relies 

connaitre,v. cour,f. sejier,v. 

(on the) promises which (are made) there. They 

aux on fait, v. 

are strangers to the charms of society who shun 

societe,f. fuir,v. 

company. - - They are idle who do not know the 

paresseux,ad}. connattre 

value of time. They obey the commands of God 

temps,m. aux 

who love their neighbours, and do not reproach 

son pro chain, sing. 

them with their small defects. He is not a Chris- 

lui dcr ses 

tain who seeks to hurt his neighbour, and speak? 
a voisin,m. 

ill of him on all occasions. They do not under- 

dans, f. 

stand their own interest who neglect study. 

propre,h.d] t 



317 

The verb etre, to be, becomes also impersonal evevy 
time it is followed by a noun adjective used in a vague in- 
determinate sense, and relates to no particular object ; in 
which case the verb is generally preceded by the pronoun 
il ; and when used to denote the state of the weather, it 
is rendered by the third person singular of the verb faire, 
to make or do : ex. 

11 est extraordinaire , Sec. It is extraordinary, §c. 
11 fait beau temps. It is fine weather. 

Ne faisait-iZ pas chaud ? Was it not hot ? 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

It is surprising to see you so lazy and in- 
etonnant^A]. de 
attentive after having been punished severe- 
apres^D. avoir severe- 
ly for these faults. It is always dangerous 

merit, adv. 

to (keep company with) people without any prin- 

de frequenter , v. personne aucun prin- 

ciple of religion, Does it rain ? No, Sir ; 

clpe^m. Monsieur y m. 

it is fine weather. - - Was it not very cold ? It will 

froid } m n 

neither be cold nor hot. It has (been a) high 

7ii, c. m,c. faire,v. granddad}. 

wind, and I think it will soon freeze. — - It is not so 

penser 7 v. 
cold as it was (at the) beginning of this month. 

an commencement jn\. 
Do you think (that") it is hotter in Italy than here ? 
pr eSjSiibj. 
The learner must observe, that the following verb is ab- 
solutely impersonal throughout all its tenses, and that no- 
thing is more disagreeable than to hear young people say, 
Jc faux, vousfaut, onfaut, &,e. : to prevent which, as much 
as possible, some examples are here set down. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present. Falloir, to be needful, requisite, necessary. 

Part. pass. Fallu, been needful, &c. 

Indicative Mood. 

A ffi r m a 1 1 v e 1 y Sing. 

Present. // fa id que jefasse, I must do. 



318 



11 f aid que tuj asses , thou must do. 

11 f aid qifJilfasse, he must do. 

iff aid qu'ellefasse, she must do. 
Plural 

llfavt que nous fas sions, we must do. 

llfaut que vousfassiez, you must do. 

II f aid quHls, or elles j assent , they must do. 

Negatively. 

// nefautpas que jefasse, I must not do. 

11 nefautpas que vousfassiez, you must not do, fye 

Interrogatively. 

Faid-il quejefasse V must I do ? 

Faut-il que vous fassiez ? must you do ? 

JYe faut-il pas quejefasse ? must I not do ? 

JYe faut-il pas que vousfassiez ? must you not do ? 

Imperfect, llfallait quHl ecrivit, 



Preterite. 

Future. 

Condit. 



llfattut quHl partit, 



It was necessary, &c 

for him to write, 
he was obliged to set 
out. 
Ilfaudra quHl vienne, he must come, he shall 

be obliged to come. 
llfaudrait, quefallasse, I should go, or it 

would be necessary 
for me to go. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. QiCil faille , that it may be necessary, &c. 

Imperfect. QuHlfallut, that it might be necessary. 

As to the compound tenses of this verb, they are form- 
ed by adding its participle passive to the third person 
singular of any of the simple tenses of the verb avoir, to 
have : ex. E afallu, il avail fallu, &c. 

From the foregoing instances, it is easy to see, that, 
when the \erb falloir is used in the present or future tense 
of the indicative mood, the following verb must be render- 
ed by the present of the subjunctive ; but when it is used 
in the imperfect, preterite, or conditional present of the 
indicative, the verb following must be rendered by the 
preterite of the subjunctive : ex. 



319 

fl fault, or il faudra que I must do, I shall be obliged 
je fasse, to do, or, it will be neces- 

sary for me to do. 
Ilfallaitj or, il fallut que I was obliged, or, it was rre- 

je parlasse, cessary^brwie, to speak, 

llfaudrait que^e vendisse, I should be obliged, or, it 

would be necessary fot 
me, to sell. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

If you go to Coxheath to-day, you must 

aujourd'hui,adv. 

(come back) to-morrow. You may go to 

revenir,\. pouvoir,v. 

London this morning, but remember that you must 

souvencz-vous 

be (back) at three o'clock. You must get 

de retour se 

up to-morrow morning at four o'clock. 

iever,v. 

Custom must not always prevail over reason. 

sur,p. 

Shall I be obliged to carry them there? 

falloir,v. mener,v. 

Must I not show you my work ? You 

montrer,v. ouvragejn. 

must have been well (acquainted with) the places, 

connattre,v. endroit,m. 

to expose yourself in that manner. - - If he 

pourfi. de,p. 

wished to pay his debts, he would be obliged 

voulaityV. ucn dette-yf. 

to sell all his property If your brothers had not 

bien y m. 
ceased to quarrel, it would have been ne- 

cesser,v. de quereller,v. 

cessary* for them to part. You must not 

se separeTyV. 

* After the words better, necessary, needful, expedient, good, irn- 
•possible, &c. joined to the verb to be, conjugated impersonally, the 
preposition for is to be rendered by que, with the following verb in the 
subjunctive mood, either present or preterite, according to the tense of 
the preced'iig verb. 



320 

leave your country so soon : all your friends op- 
quitteVjV. pays,m. o op- 

pose it. 
poser, v. y. 

The same observation is to be made on the verb valoir 
mieux, to be better, used impersonally ; and the adjectives 
bon, difficile, impossible, necessaire, apropos, &.c. joLied to 
the verb etre, used in the third person singular only : ex. 

// n'esi pas bon que vous It is not good for you to 

soyez seul, be alone. 

// vaut mieux que vous ayez It is better for you to have 

Cl mpagnie, company. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

It is difficult for you to improve, if you 

faire des progres, 

do not apply better to study. It was impossible 

s^ appliquer ,v . etudefi 

for you to have succeeded, unless • you had taken 

amoins que,c.ne. (by the sab.) 

more convenient measures. It would be expedient 

conv enable, adj. apropos 

for you to read this book from the beginning 

depuisyip. 

to the end. Believe me, it is better 

jusquWtf. jinfi valoir mieux,v. 

for you to go there to-morrow, for it will snow 

car,c. 

soon. Will it not be better for me to be at 

bientot,cidv. 

school too soon than too late. - - - Would it not 

tot, adv. tard,adv. 

be better for him to go and speak to them himself, 

than to send his servant ? It is good for us 

de domestique,m.hf. 

to help one another in our troubles. 

s\iider,v. peine. 

The above verb falloir, being used before the verb to 
have, followed immediately by a noun substantive, may be 
rendered without expressing the auxiliary verb ; instead 
of whichj insert cie of the following conjunctive pro- 



321 

nouns, me, te, lui, nous, vous, or lew t according to tho 
number and person : ex. 

I! mefaut des livres, I must' have, or, I want books. 

// lui fautun chapeau, He must have, 01^ he wants a 

hat. 
// \\i\faut un bonnet. She must have, or, she wants 

a cap. 
N. B. If the verb to have be expressed in French, it 
must be rendered by the subjunctive mood : 

11 f aid quefaie des livres, I must ha:e, or, I want books. 
This method, however, is not so elegant as the former. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I shall want paper, pens, and ink. What do 

falloir,v. 

you want ? I want nothing (for the) present, but I 

a 
think I shall soon want a French grammar. - - - - 
penser,v . 

My brother has an old hat, and he will soon 

vieux,Sid]. 

want a new one. If you like to 

neuf,adj. era,pro. aimez,v. & 

speak much, you must have (a good deal) of 

6ie?i,adv. 

circumspection not to (speak ill) of others. 

retenue,?. pour ne pas medire,v. 

Since I cannot find my book, I must have 

Puis que, c. 

another. If we wish to succeed in our under- 

vouloir,v. 

taking, we must have (a great deal) of patience. - 

beaucoup, adv. 
My brothers have lost their buckles, they must have 

bouclefi. 
others. 

Before the conclusion of this section, it will be proper 
to say something about the pronoun indefinite on, which 
commonly precedes a verb used impersonally (viz. in the 
third person singular) in French, and in English is gener- 
ally made by a passive voice : ex. 



322 

On nva permis de chanter , I have been allowed to 

sing. 
People have allowed me, 
£tc. 
On lid a defendu de sortir. He has been forbidden to 

go out. 
One has forbidden him, &c. 
In this case, the verb which, in English, is in the pas- 
Rive voice, must, in French, be turned into the active, 
when the English nominative becomes the regimen of the 
verb in French, the sentence beginning with on, and trans- 
lated as if the English were, one has allowed me to sing r 
one has forbidden him to go out. 

In French, passive verbs are seldom used. 
It is the same with, 



On dti. 




It is said, or people say. 


On me dit, 




I am told. 


On dit avotrefrere, 




Your brother is told. 


On disait, ) 




It was said, or people said, 


On dit y ) 
On dira, 




or were saying. 
It will be said, or people 


On dira a nos enfans, 




will say. 
Our children will be told, or 
one will tell, &c. 


On a dity 




It has been said, or people 
have said. 


On nous a dit } 




We have been told, or one 
has told us. 


EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE.* 


In time of war, pe 
En,p. 
Where is your brother 


ace is always spoken of. - - 
? It is not known. 






savoir.v. 


The death of the 


invincible Admiral Lord Nelson 


mortfi. 






is daily 


lamented, and will be 


tous les jours, adv. 
so a long. time. - 


regr 


letter, v. 

-I was told yesterday thai 


UP 






* It is very important al 


ways 


to beat in mind the preeeding rules and 


examples. 







your brother has been punished for his idleness , 
had your father been told of it, he would have been 

very angry with him. People will be eager 

contrejp. s^empresser^v. 

in buying your book, and it will be read with avidity. 
de,p. 
- - Learned men are found in villages, as well as ir 

towns It is reported on all sides that we shai 

cle eote,m. 

soon have peace, but the news has not yet been 

received, though it be ardently (wished for ;) 

ardemmentj3.dv. souhaiter,v. 

however, it is thought that the secret expedition 

will sail in a few days. It will be be- 

mettre a la voile up pen de 
lieved that you blame me. it would not be supposed 

tjiat you praise us. I have been assured that he has 

threatened him. 

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES on the 
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

(Review them carefully before you write.) 

There is no going out to-day : it rains apace. 

a verse^dv. 
Do not make so much noise : there is no hearing 

s J eniendre,v. 

one another. Is it cold this morning ? Yes, Sir, it 

ss> . or- 

is very cold ; however, I am told it is not so cold a3 

cependant 
it was yesterday. - - - The weather is very inconstant 

in this country : it was very hot yesterday : it is 

pays,m. '* 

excessively cold to day : it did freeze this morning : 
fres,adv. 

it hailed at noon : it rained in the afternoon, and 
midi, up apres-midi) 

now it drizzles It sometimes lightens when it 

quelquefois ,adv. 



doe?? not thunder, but (as often *> as) it thun- 

toutes lesfois, que,c. 

tiers, it lightens. If it be fine weather next week, 

1 shall go to London ; but if it be bad weather, I 

shall stay at home. It is a pleasure to see 

r ester, v.au logis. de 

bees (coming out) of their hives when it is 

abeille,f. sortir,v ruche, f. f aire, v. 

a sunny day. Had I known you were returned 

6 ri/Zanf, adj. revemr,v. 

from the continent, I would have gone to see you 

etre,v \ <jcn 

long ago. My father and mother were told you 

were in England ten years ago ; but you neither saw 

nor wrote to them. Every body agrees there 

convenir,v. 
are fine women in Great-Britain, but there is not 
dans Bretagne,f. 

such good wine as in France. It greatly 

si en beaucoup,txdv. 

concerns children to avoid bad company. - - 

aux de eviler,v. 

If there were any real virtue in the world, should 

we (meet with) so many false friends ? If he 

trouver,v. 
behaved well, there would not be a man 

se comporter,v. x/jr> 

(in the world) that I should esteem more. No 

au monde, estimer, v. subj. 

object is more pleasing to the eye than the sight of 

plaire,v, vue,f. 

a man whom you have obliged, nor* (is) any music 

est-il 
so agreeable to the ear as the voice of a man 

oreille,f. 

who owns you for his benefactor. Such 

reconnaiire,\. 
as support the conduct of idle and obstinate 

encourager,w. 
scholars, make themselves contemptible. - - They are not 

meprisable,a.dj 

* 11 est and est-il ? are often used elegantly in French, for il y a, 
and y a-t-il 1 



325 

acquainted with the human heart, who rely upon 

faire fondy. 

the vain promises of men. You have alreadv been 

<£e/d,adv. 

told that ( nobody in the world) has prepossessed me 
f.gainst you : how many times must I repeat it 

contvejp. combien,?idv. falloir^v. 

to you ? I was told yesterday that you were very 

ill, and I am truly glad to see you so well. 

de bien portanl 

There is no persuading you when you have a mind 

up envie 

not to believe what you are told. More virtue is 

de 

requisite to support good fortune than bad. 

pour 3 v. 
Much art and nicety are requisite to 

delicaiesse po«r,p. 

please every body. It matters little whether it be 

a que ce 

my servant or yours who carries the letter to the 

porter, v. 
post. ----- You must honour your father and mother, if 
posief. 

you will live long and happy. It is more glo- 

voidoir^v. 
rious to conquer one's passions than to conquer 

de vai?icrc,v. ' ses conquerir,Y 

the whole world. Sir, I want a pair of boots : 

oilier, adj. 
you have some in your shop that will suit 

boutique^ ccnvenir,v. 

me. It is reported that the Russians have beaten 

Russe } m. 
the Turks : it is said so, but it is not yet known as a 
Turc,m. 

certain fact. It is thought Sweden has declared war 

faitjn. Suede ,f. 

against France. It is true ; but it is much 

a rrai,adj. 

feared lest the Swedes should be 

craindre,\\ que,c. Suedoisne (by the pres. subj.) 

beaten, though they fight most courageously. 

2g se bcdire,v. tres 



32G 

- - - - Have the letters been received which were 
expected yesterday ? No, but the mail is ar- 

altendre,v. mallefi. 

rived, and they will be delivered this morning. 
distribuer ,v . 



SECT. V. 
OF PARTICIPLES. 

Participles are either active or passive. The partici- 
ple active, in French, always ends in ant : ex. parlant, 
punissant, and in English in trig*: ex. speaking, punishing, 
•&c. It is always in its own nature, indeclinable : ex. 
Je vois des homines et des I see men and women 

femmes venant a nous, coming to us. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The persons whom you saw with us are people 

gens,\A. 

fearing God and loving virtue. She met your 

father and sister (as she was) coming here. My 

en tot, ad v. 

mother was told (the day before yesterday) that 

avantkier^&v. 
your sister, remembering the injuries she had 

se rcssouvenir,v. des 
received from your brother, refused to 

regues ,p.p. de la part de, de 

see him, and we are all glad to hear it. 

de apprendre,?. 
Your aunt, having given the necessary orders to your 

cousins, (set out) immediately for London. Did 

partir-jV. 
you not see them coming to us ? How many oxen 

sheep, and horses I hear afar off lowing, 

6re6isjf.pl. entendre, v. de loin } ndv. mngir,y 

bleating, and neighing ! - - Do you not admire these 
beler,v. hennir,y. 

lambs, skipping in your father-in-law's meadow ? 

agneau 3 rn. bondir 7 v. prairie 7 £. 



327 

N\ B. In order to distinguish between active par- 
ticiples, and many adjectives which are spelt alike, but 
which must agree with the nominative, consider whether 
there is an action expressed, or whether the word implies 
merely an attribute of the noun, thus, in these two sen- 
tences, 

Je vois des agneaux bondis- I see lambs skipping in the 

sant dans la plaine, plain. 

T'aime a voir les agneaux I like to see skipping lambs, 

bondissans, errer dans la wandering in the plain. 

piaine, 

The first conveys this idea, that the lambs are now 
skipping, whilst the second implies that an attribute of 
lambs is to skip. 

When the participle active in English is preceded by 
another verb, an article, or a preposition, it must be ren- 
dered in French by the verb in the infinitive mood, and it 
is. sometimes used as a substantive : ex 

Faut-il que je parte sans Must I set out without 
lui parler ? speaking to him ? 

La pauvrete du corps est Tfie impoverishing of the 
la richesse de Vame y body is the enriching of 

the soul. & 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I assure you there is a great deal of pleasure in 

teaching diligent scholars, TV e are told there 

enseigner^. 

will not be so much danger in travelling, as there 

a voyager,v, que 

was before. Lewis the Great had especially the su- 

surtout,&dv. 
perior and rare talent of knowing and choosing men 

of merit. He left the house without seeing his 

father, and even without speaking to his mother. 

meme^dv. 

« \ should despise a man who is capable of 

xjon mepriseryV. 
deceiving his friends. - - - - After having (waited for) her 
(romper } v attciidre } v, 



328 

a long while, she (^sent me word) that she was not 
op* envoy er dire, v. 

ready to (go out.) She spends all her time in 

pret y ad']. a passer, v. a 

reading or writing. My mother takes an infinite 

pleasure in admiring the situation of your house. - - The 

a situation,?. 

grace of God will always keep us from sinning. 

empecher,v. pecher,v. 

- - I often admire the rising and setting of the sun. 

lever } m. coucher,m. sohil y m. 
The defending of a bad cause is worse than 

defense ,f. mauvais 3 adj . 

the cause itself. 
merae. 

The participle passive is sometimes declinable, and 
sometimes indeclinable. 

It is declinable, 

First, when it is joined to the verb etre, to be, forming 
a passive verb, and agrees with the nominative case of 
the verb in gender and number ; and when it is not attend- 
ed with any auxiliary verb ; in this case, it becomes an 
adjective or atieast performs the same office. 
Monfrere est aime, My brother is loved. 

Ma sceur est aimee, My sister is loved. 

Mes cousins sont partis, My cousins are gone. 

Mes cousines sont parties, My cousins are gone. 

EUe parait afRigee, She appears afflicted. 

Ei'es p araiss ent affligees, They appear afflicted. 

N. B. There is no exception to the above rule , but 
it is very important to remember that in the compound 
tenses of the reflected verbs, the verb etre is employed 
for the verb avoir ; all such cases will come under the 
next rule, as if the verb etre were the verb avoir 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

I have been told your brother-in-law is gone to 

beau-frere,m. 

the continent. I have not seen your mothei 

w«,p.p. 
since she arrived from France ; does she appear 

denuis que,c. 



329 

satisfied with her journey ? My brothers are gone to 

de voyage, m. 

Dover, and intend to pay you a visit when 

se proposer, v. de rendre,v. x/r* 

they are (come back.) The houses which are 

(by the fut.) revenir,w. 

built in the winter are not so wholesome as those 

sam;adj. 
which are begun (in the) spring, and finished (in the) 
au au 

middle of summer. The wicked are always tor- 

ete,m. mechant ,,adj.pl. bour- 

mented, and the righteous are comforted by their 
reler,v. juste, adj. consoler, v. 

own conscience. Virtuous people are esteemed 

personnel 

and respected by those who are so. I assure you 

de 
that Mr. Brown's wife appears much afflicted 

femme,f. fcrt 3 &dv. 

at the death of her husband, but her son^ appear 
de marijin. 

as much affected by it as she. 
toucher,v. 

Secondly, with the verb avoir, the participle instead of 
agreeing with the nominative, must agree with the di}*ect 
object, which is a noun, or (in this instance) a pronoun 
governed in the accusative case ; but that direct object 
must precede the participle, otherwise that participle does 
not agree with it : thus in this phrase, j'ai vu ma sceur, the 
participle does not change, because ma sceur, which is the 
direct object, does not precede, but in this phrase c^est 
ma sceur que j'ai vue, the participle agrees, because que 
relative pronoun, which represents ma sceur is placed before 
that participle. 

In the compound tenses of the reflected verbs, where 
the auxiliary eire is employed instead of avoir, if you 
suppose this last verb to exist where etre is used, the 
above-mentioned rule must direct you. By the same 
reason that we say il Pa tuee (he has killed her) we 
say elk s'cst tuee, which is the same as if we could say elle 
a soituee,she has herself kitted } she killed herself. 
28* 



330 

Tai vu Madame Wright, et I saw Mrs. Wright, and 

Vai entendue chanter, heard her sing. 

JVi lu tons les livres que I have read all the books 

vous nCavez pretes, which you lent me. 

Jlvcz-vous vu les marchan- Did you see the goods 

dises que 'fax revues, which I have received. 

Vous Yavez souvent priee You often desired her tc 

de passer chez vous, call at your house. 

Elles se sont repenties de They have repented of 

leursf antes, their faults. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The resolution which she has taken of going into 

a 
the country surprises me very much : I have spoken 

etonner,v. tres fori,s.dv. 

to her myself, but I have not (been able to) learn 

pouvoir,w. 

the reasons which have induced her to it. Miss 

engager, y. Mile 

Farren was an excellent actress : I have seen her 

actrice 3 f. 

play several times. I am very sorry for the 

j ache, adj. de 

trouble that affair has given to your aunt. If you 

peine, f. tante,{. 

can come with me, I will show you the lady 

montrer,v. 

whom I have heard sing. What stuff have 

entendre 9 v. eioffe,?. 

you chosen ? The letter which you have written to 

c/iom ? p.p. 
me in French was tolerably well ; I have shown 

en passablement,&dv. 

it to your aunt who is much pleased 

tres,&dv. contented] 

(with it.) I have not yet received the goods, 

en, pro. marchandise,f. 

which you sent me by the ship Good- 

vaisseau,m. 

Will. Ladies, have you returned him the letters 

Mesdames, rendre,v. 

which he had desired you to read ? Where 

jmer,v. de Ot« ; adv 



q q i 
ool 

did you buy those gloves ? I bought 

acheter,V; 

them iu France. Alexander conquered Asia with 

Asie 
the troops which his father Philip had disciplined. 
troupe J. 

The faults which he had committed, greatly 

beaucoup^dv. 

increased his prudence. He has spent all the 

augmenier,v. 

treasures which his father had amassed w^ith so much 

tresor y m. 

care and labour. I shall nevei forget the good 

oublier y Y. 
services which you have done to my mother 

service, m. rendre,v. 

Of all the letters which my brother has received 

to-day, there is not one (of them) for 

ctujourd > hm J n.dv. 

me. The reasons, which you have given us, have 

satisfied us. What books have you lost ? The 

satisfaire^v. 

fine actions your brothers have done in 
beau, ad), action J. faire 7 v. en 

America deserve great praises, and (ought to) be 
Amerique meriter y v. louange,f. devoir^?. 

transmitted to posterity. The three country 

houses, which your father is said to have bought, 
maison, 

are extremely fine and well situated. The 

situijp.p. 
soldiers, whom they obliged to (set out,) are 
soldai,m. a 

(come back) already. My sisters have 

revenirjr. 

quarrelled the whole day, and are now reconciled. 

se querellerjr. 

The participle passive is indeclinable when the parti- 
ciple is not preceded by a direct object, or pronoun gov- 
erned in the accusative case. 

This happens when the object follows, as in this 
phrase J'ai vu ma sceur, or when another verb governs 



332 

the pronoun, as in this phrase, // nefalii jamais s'ecarter 
de la bonne route que Von a commence a suivre : here 
suivre governs que, and not commence. 

La maison que fat fait batir, The house I have built. 

C'est une belle chanson, je It is a fine song : I have 

Pai entendu chanter plu- heard it sung many a 

sicursfois, time. 

Ty suis alle avec elk el Pai I went there with her, and 

vu peindre, saw her picture drawn. 

La langue que fai com- The language I have be* 

mence d'apprendre est gun to learn is very 

fori utile , useful. 

In the above instances, the pronouns are not governed 
by the participle passive, but by the verbs chanter, pein- 
dre. and apprendre. 

EXERCISES UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULE. 

I have given him a fable to translate. I cannot 

a traduire,v. 
forget the good actions, which I have seen 

you do. The goods which you ordered me to 

de 
send, are arrived ; permit me to show you the letters 

de 

which he has seen me open from Germany. 

Jillemagneyf. 
Have you already read the books which I saw* you 

buying ? 1 have bought the clothes for 

habit, m. a7* 
which you saw me bargaining. - - - - The history 

marchander 7 v. 
which I have begun to read is not entertaining. - 

a amus ant ,adj. 

She has written more books than you ever have 

jamais,&Av. 
read. --The lady whom I saw singing is hand- 

* Observe that the participle, though it should not agree with books?, 
Zivres, it should agree with the pronoun vous, so that it should be. spelt 
v ue, if addressed to a female. 



333 
some and young, but the song which I have heard 

is the best, as to words and music, that 

quant 

your brother ever wrote. 3Iiss B. has spent 

passciW 
two or three days with your sisters, and saw their 

voir,?. les 

-tire drawn) : their cousins were in the next 
peindre,v. 

i, and my sister saw them painting in miniature. 

t/2.p. 

It is often difficult to ascertain which is the direct ob- 
ject ; a method is. to add one of these pronouns 
who or what to the participle, and then the answer will 
point out that object : thus, for this sentence, ma saur 
ise Vepauhj ask. my sifter broke — what ? — her shoul- 
der ; this then, is the object, but as Pepaule follows, the 
participle does not change. 

Sometines a preposition is understood, or expressed by 
the pronoun, as in this sentence voila la dame dont fai 
parte : the pronoun dont is not the direct object, with 
which only the participle can agree ; it is the genitive : 
besides, the verb parler, in this instance is neuter, and 
therefore cannot govern a noun in the accusative case : ex 
Les Anglais se sont rem- The English made them- 

dus fameux dans cette selves famous in this war. 

guerre, 
Teiles sont ses objections ; Such are his objections 7 

fy ai p ease, I have t hoi igh t of th e m . 

EXERCISE UPON THESE REMARKS. 

Daughter, I had warned you of it. You 

avtriir.v . 
would have rendered yourself celebrated by your talents 

rc/K/;v.ren.v. 
and beauty, if you had not shown them so much vanity 

monfretw. 

He is the man (of whom) our neighbours have 

G'est dont 

complained. It is your fault, Bliss, I have already 

aindre : refl.v. 
scolded you (about it.) 
grander y v 



334 

Lastly, when the auxiliary verb and the participle 
passive are used impersonally. Du (when not signify 
iog owed,) pu and voulu, are also indeclinable : ex. 

Les pluies qiCil a fait, The rains which we have 

had. 
Je vous ai montre la re- I have shown you the gra- 

connoissance que fax du, titude I ought. 

Ma s(but a fait tout ce My sister has done every 

quelle a pu, thing she could. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

The storm, which we had yesterday, has 

tempetefi. 
done (a great deal) of damage to oui 

causer^, beaucoup ,'cidv. dommage 

ships The abundant showers which we have 

pluiej. 
had this week, have prevented me from going 

empecheVjV. 

into the country. The high winds which 

grand!, adj. vent^m. 
they have had in the county of Kent, have (blown 

com(e,m. renver- 

down) many houses and trees. - - At last he has 

ser,v. Enfin,a.dv. 

returned me all the sums which I had lent to 
rendre 3 v. somme,f. 

him, and which he had owed me so long. 1 

devoir,v. 
have not paid all the attention which I ought to 
f aire, v. 

the advice your father gave me. She has ob- 

avis,m. 06- 

tained from the king all the favours she would 
tenir,v. grace,?. 

- - My brother might have improved more, 

faire des progres 
but he has not made all the efforts he could. 

effort, m. ■ 

N. B, The rules on this subject, which have been 
regarded as being extremely intricate, and numerous, 
may be reduced to three, viz = lst 3 The participle wh"*i 



335 

attended with an auxiliary, agrees with the nominative, 
like an adjective. — 2d, When attended with the verb 
etre, the participle constantly agrees with the nomina- 
tive. — Lastly, the participle, when attended with the 
verb avoir agrees with its direct object, only when that ob- 
ject precedes the participle ; and in the compound ten- 
ses of the reflected verbs, the auxiliary verb etre must 
be regarded as filling the place of the verb avoir, and 
subjected to the same rules^ that being an anomaly in 
the language. 

EXAMPLE UPON THE FOREGOING RULES 

Pat recn les letires que I have received the letters 

vons nPavez ecrites au which you wrote to me 

sitjet de P affaire, que je with respect to the affair 

vous avais proposee ; et which I had proposed to 

apres les avoir lues avec you ; and after having 

attention, fai reconnu, read them with attention, 

comme vous, que, si je I perceived, as you did, 

P avais ent re prise, jhj that, if I had undertaken 

aurais trouve des ob- it, I should have met with 

stacks que je rtavais pas obstacles which I had 

prevus. not foreseen. 

Rem is indeclinable, because it is not preceded by 
any regimen ; ecrites is declinable, and agreed in 
gender and number with its direct object, or accu- 
sative, expressed by the pronoun relative que, 
which precedes the verb and relates to lettres ; pro- 
posee likewise agrees with que, by which it is preceded, 
and which relates to the word affaire ; lues is declinable 
on account of its regimen les, which precedes it and relates 
to letters; reconnuis indeclinable, because it is not preceded 
by any regimen to which it can relate ; entrcprise, on the 
contrary, is declinable, and takes the gender and number 
of the conjunctive pronoun P , which is its direct object 
and its antecedent, relating to affaire ; trouve is indecli- 
nable, because it is not preceded but followed by its accu- 
sative obstacles ;. prevus, on the contrary, is declinable, be- 
cause it is preceded by its direct object que, which relates 
to obstacles. 

Clearness is the principal quality of the French language r 
tnerefore equivocations in *he use, of the participles should 
be carefullv avoided : ex. Je les ai ranges en ordre, speak- 



330 

ing of papers, may signify, I have set them in order ; or, 
l have them, and they are in order : in such a case a dif- 
ferent regular turn should be chosen, with which this lan- 
guage abounds. 



SECT. VI. 

1JVDECLIJYJ1BLE PJiRTS OF SPEECH. 

Under this head are comprehended adverbs, prepositions 
conjunctions, and inteiyections. 

OF ADVERBS. 

Adverbs have been distinguished, according to their 
several significations, into adverbs of place, time, quality, 
quantity, number, order, affirmation, negation, doubt, inter- 
rogation, comparison, collection, separation, &c. But this 
classification, however ingenious, is far from being exact : 
it was therefore judged, that, if those of the most fre- 
quent use, and which, when compounded, form a partic- 
ular idiom, were carefully selected, and arranged in an 
alphabetical series, it would be more to the advantage of 
the learner. 

TABLE OF ADVERBS.* 

Abondammenl, abundantly, plentifully. 

a V abandon, at random, in confusion, in disorder 

D\ibord, at first, immediately. 

Absolument, absolutely. 

D"* accord, granted, done. 

Agreablement, pleasantly, comfortably. 

Jlinsi, (de meme,) so, thus, in the same manner. 

Msemenl, easily. 

Mai aisement, with difficulty. 

Dans un an dHci, a year hence. 

LPannee qui vient, the next year. 

Aacitnnement, ) ~ , . ,, 

Q , r . J > formerly, anciently. 

autrefois, ) } ? J 

En ami, friendly. 

a- P amiable, amicably. 

En arriere, tomber en arriere, to fall backward. 

a recidons, marcher a recidons, to walk backward. 

Jissez, enough. 

* Simple adverbs are generally placed after the verbs, and in com- 
pound tenses between the auxiliary and the- participle passive. 



Jlssur&meni , certainly. 
JtujounVkw, to-day. 

Time to ( WaujourdViui en huit, this day se'nmght. 
come. \ D'aujourtPhui en qirinze, this day fortnight 

f II y a aujourdThui huit jours, this day week., this 
Time \ day se 'nnight. 

past. j 11 y a aujourcPhui quinze jours, this day fortnight. 

yily a aujourcPhui un an, this day twelve months. 

Mutant, as much, as many. 

IT autant plus, so much the more. 

D' aidant moins, so much the less. 

Tout autant, ) • - . i , - x 

rr , • } lust as, lust as much, every whit. 
I out aussi, S 

Dorenavant, in future. 

a Pavenir, for the future, hereafter. 

a VAiglaise, after the English manner, fashion, or way. 

a Pliaiienne, after the Italian, &c. 

a la Francaise, after the French, &c. 

a la Turque, after the Turkish, See. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS. 

Our garden produces all kinds of fruits plenfi- 

sorte/. 

fully. Your sister left all her things in din- 

laisser,v. 

order. You did not know me at first. - -He would 

voulwrjt. 

absolutely do it. If you please, I will go to 

vouloir,v. 

London with you. Done. I hope we shall spend 

passerby. 

the day pleasantly. Have we not spent it so ? 

My brother learns his lessons easily, and I ivilh dif- 
ficulty. Jl year hence you will (be able to) spea*: 

pouvoir^v. 
French tolerably well. - - - - My father says I shall g<? 

to ^France next year. It was done so an- 
ciently. - - I had the honour of seeing you formerly 

but I d'«.not recollect where I had that pleasure : 
se rappeleVjV. 

2Q * Hee the article indefinite, page 54 



338 

I believe it was at Mr. P.'s, wha received us 

friendly. Your brother and mine have settled 

regler^x 

their affairs amicably. Make two steps back" 

pas,m. 
ward. He who walks backwards cannot see his 

way. Have you played enough ? Certainly 

you must be tired. We do not expect him 

devoir ft.- fatiguer^v. attendre,v. 

to-day. If it be tint; weather, I shall be back 

f aire, v. de retour 

iltis day se^nnight. 1 shall see you this day forinight, 

if I am* well. This day week I was (at your house.) . 

*hez vons. 
This day month I met your brothei.-- I came 

here this day twelve months. - - - - He has as 

ici, adv. 

much money and as many friends as you. - I was 

so much the more persuaded of what you told me, 

that I dismissed him this day three weeks. 

renvoyer,v. 
I will do it so much the less, as I promised him not 

que 

to meddle with that affair. My sister has 

de se meter, v. de,p. 

just as much wit, and is just as amiable as yours. 

que 
Your son has given you some trouble, but I 

peine ,(. mais,c. 
hope he will give you pleasure hereafter. If you 

forgive him this time, he will not do it for the 

future. In future, I never will trust him 

sefier.v. 

any more. She dresses after the English 

jot* s'habiller ,v '. 

* See note, page 222. 



339 

fashion, but she lives after the French way. She 

vivre,v. 

plays after the Italian manner. Your sister has a 

cap after the Turkish fashion. Come here 

bonnet,m. 

go there, look every where. 
chercher 7 Y. 

ADVERBS. 

, { off, down, down with, below. 
0, or en bas, ) 

En badinani, for fun. 

f a? j > ( much, many, a great deal. 
Bien, ) J 

a beaucoup pres, nothing near, (with ne before and pas af- 
ter the verb.) 
De beaucoup. by much, greatly. 
Bien, well, very. 
De bon cceur, heartily, with a good will. 

De bonne foi, ) . . 

e- v J , J > sincerely. 
bincerement, ) J 

De bonne heure, betimes. 

De bonjeuy fairly. 

De bon matin, early. 

De bouche, by word of mouth. 

a la bonne heure, in good time, luckily, well and good 

a bon droit, deservedly. 

a bon marche, cheap. 

a bride abattue, full speed. 

ca. et la, to and fro. 

a cause de quoi, on what account 

a cela pres, that excepted. 

Cependant, in the mean while, nevertheless. 

a cheval, on horseback. 

EXERCISE UPOX THESE ADVERBS. 

Hats off, gentlemen, and sit down. The 5 whole 1 

army 3 surrendered and laid down their arms 

se rendre,v. mettre,v. 

upon the ramparts of the citadel. - - - There is a mai 

below, whom you will see with pleasure. Though* 

Quoique,c 

* See conjunctions that govern the subjunctive. 



340 

we said it for fun, he was very angry with us. - - 

contre,]-). 
There were many ladies, and we had a great deal of 

pleasure You may say what you please, 

pouvoir^v. il vous plaira,v. 
but she is nothing near so handsome as her sis- 
ter He has by much increased his fortune. 

Whatever you do, do it well. If you do not do it with 

a good will, I will do it myself. - - - He has acted very 
sincerely in that business. Do you speak sincerely ? 

We will get up betimes. Have I not won 

se lever ^y. gagner^v. 

fairly ? - - - We will (set out) early, that we may arrive 

aftn que 
before the heat of the day. - - - It (is 

avant chateur,{. valoir 

better to) tell it him by word of mouth, ' than to 
mieux,v. de 

write to him. Sir, I have done my exercise. - - Well 

theme,m. 

a?id good. He has obtained it deservedly. My 

obtenirjV. 
father has bought a horse very cheap. Do you see 

those two horsemen, who come to us full speed ? - - - 

cavalier,m % 
They wandered to and fro without* knowing whither 

alter, \. 
to go. On what account is he angry with me ? 

That excepted, I have nothing to reproach him 

a reprocher,v. 

with. I should speak, but in the meanwhile, I 

<jot> devoir, v. 

(hold my tongue.) Miss White is yery handsome, 

se taireff. 

nevertheless, I do not love her. Some wen* 

Les uns 
to London in a coach, others on horseback. 

en y \). <zn a 

* Without, sa?i3, requires the present infinitive, 



how long 



341 

ADVERBS. 

Combien, how much, how many, how ? 

Combien y a- t-il que, 

Combien de temps y a-t-il que, 

Combien y avait-il que, 

Depuis quand, 

Combien de temps, 

Pendant combien de temps, 

N. B. 1 How much, how many, how, are rendered 
in French by que before an admiration : ex. 

Que vous etts jolie ! How pretty you are ! 

2. We make use of combien y a-t-il que, when the ac- 
tion mentioned in the interrogation has not yet ceased : 
and then the verb, which (in English) is in the com- 
pound of the present, must be rendered (in French) by 
the present of the indicative mood : ex. . 

Combien y a-t-il que vous How long have you been 
etes, or, depuis quand in London ? 
etes-vous a Londres ? 

3. If the verb (in English) be in the compound of the 
imperfect, it is to be rendered (in French) by the im- 
perfect of the indicative : ex. 

Combien y avait-il que vous How long had you been 

eiiez, or, depuis quand in London, when he 

etiez-vous a Londres died ? 
quand il mourut ? 

4. If the action have entirely ceased, we make use of 
pendant combien de temps, with the following verb in the 
compound of the present : ex. 

Pendaiit combien de temps How long were you in 
avez-vous ete a Londres ? London ? 

5. How long, in the sense of for what time, is also ren- 
dered by pendant combien de temps, with the verb in the* 
same tense as in the English : ex. 

Pendant combien de temps How long do you intend 
vous proposez-vous de to stay in Italy ? 
r ester en Italic 1 
29* 



342 

EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS. 

How much do you owe him ? You see to how 

many dangers and how many reproaches we are 

liable. How many times shall I be obliged to 

exposetf.p. de 

bid you to (be silent ?) - - - How troublesome 

dire y v. de se taire,v. importuned}. 

you are ! How sorry I am for* having displeased 

de 
you! How much I should be obliged to you, if 

you would grant me that favour ! How long 

accorder y v. 
have you been learning French ? - - - How long have 

they been in Paris ? How long had you been in 

a 
London when you married ? - - How long had you been 

se maritr,v. 
learning Italian, when you wrote tome ?-- How long 

Italien 
have your parents been in England ? - - How long 

pere et mere 
hud your brother been in Germany, when we left 

quitter ft. 

it ? How long were you in Holland ? How long 

en 
did your cousin learn the mathematics ? - - How long 

have that gentleman and lady (been waiting for) 

attendre,v. 
me ? How long has your relation been dead ? - - 

Hoiv long had he been in his regiment, when he 

died ? How long was he ill ? How long does your 

malade ? 
uncle intend to leave his son on the continent ? - 

se proposer de 
How long had your father and mother proposed 

* The prepositions de pour and &, always govern the present infini 
the and its compound. 



to stay in America? Why (are you proud) of 

<fe en s'enorgueillir,v. 

your beauty ? You do not know how long it will last 

ADVERBS. 

Combien y a-t-il d J ici ? How far is it hence ? 

Dans combien de temps ? How long will it be before ? 

Comme, as, like, how. 

Comme ilfaut, soundly, as it should be. 

Comment, how. 

a contre-cozur, against our will. 

a contre-sens, the contrary, or wrong way, in a wrong 

sense. 
a contre-temps f unseasonably. 
a corps perdu, hand over head, desperately 
de cote, ) 
a Pecart, > aside. 
a part, ) 

a cote, by the side of it. 
a cote Pun de P autre, abreast. 
De ce cote-ci, on this side. 
De ce cote-la, on that side. 
De cote et oV autre, up and down, about. 
De tous coies, on all sides, on every side. 
Coup sur coup, one after another. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS. 

How far is it hence to Dover ? How long will it be 

Douvres ? 
before you 1 send me x back the books I lent you ? 

renvoyer,\. 

They are punished as they deserv-e. My father's 

le 

house is like yours, it is very badly built. 

ma/,adv. 
See how it rains. Have they not been beaten 

soundly?-- This exercise is done as it should be. 

- - How can you speak thus ? We went to the play 

against our will. You hold your book the wrong 

way. Your brother took in a icrong sense all 



344 

that I said to him. Our master arrived very 

ce que 

unseasonably. The French rushed on the 

fondre,v. 

Austrians desperately. Lay this aside. Put 

Jiatrichienpx. 

that by the side of it. - - I perceive two ships sailing 

apercevoir,v. 
abreast. - - Let us walk on this side, and our companions 

will go on that side. They run up and down all day, 

and do (nothing but) play. How dare you run about 

ne que 
while your mother (is waiting for) you $ - - - 

pendant que,c. 

The enemies were victorious on all sides. We 

hear on every side, that peace will very 

apprendre,v. bien 

soon take place. They drank three bottles of Bur- 

avoir lieu jr. 
gundy wine, one after another. 

ADVERBS. 

Davantage, more. 

Dedans, > whhi inwardI/ . 

±Ln dedans, ) 

£•*"?» without. 

±j)i dehors, ) 

Deja, already. 

Demain, to-morrow. 

Le lendemain, the day after. 

Jlpres demain, the day after to-morrow. 

Dernier ement, lately. 

Ci-dessus, above. 

Par dessus, above, over and above 

Dessous, t underneath- 

Jiu dessous, ) 

a decouvert, openly. 

* dem p, half, by halves. 

a dessein, on purpose, designedly. 
a droite, to the right. 
a double entente, with a double meaning 
Encore, again, yet ; as ye* 



345 

En fin, at last. 

Ensuite, afterward, then, 

Entieremeni, entirely. 

Erpres, on purpose. 

a Pecart, out of the way. 

ii Pentour, round about. 

a PenverSj the wrong side outwards. 

a Vend, in emulation. 

Jiux environs, thereabouts. 

En nulle maniere, in no wise, (with ne before the verb.} 

En plein jour. > . , , 

t? i • -J- } a * noon, at mid-day. 
En plein midi, ) ) J 

En temps ei lien, in a proper time and place 

En tons cas, whatever may happen. 

En un clin cPceil, in the twinkling of an eye. 

En sursaut, suddenly. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS. 

I know how that happened : talk no more of it. - - - 

Look within, and you shall see it. She was ivilhin, 

and I was without. Have you already done your ex- 
ercise ? I will call upon you to-morrow, and 

passer,v. chez,p. 
the day after we will go and see my uncle. We 

will pay you the day after to-morrow, if we can. -- 

I was lately fat your house). You will find it above. 

chez vous. 

1 like your garden and walks above all, 

aimer, v 
There is a stone : look underneath, you will find 

something curious. Speak, and show yourself 

singulier. 
openly. We were half dead. - - - 1 never do 

things by halves. They killed him on purpose. - 

They did say so designedly. Go to the right. - - 

My brother always speaks with a double meaning. 

I have told the truth, and they do not yet believe me 



346 

At last , the rebels retired into the woods with 

se retirerjV. dans, p. bois,m. 

a great loss. Do first what you have to do, 

perte,?. Four c jr. 
afterward you shall go out. He did it entirely 

to please you. I came on purpose to see you 

pour, p. 

Take all these papers, and put them out of the 

toay. How can you find the place, if you always 

turn round about ? You have (put on) your 

mettre,v. 

waistcoat the wrong side outwards. My brothei 

teste, f. 

and your's work in emulation of one .another. 

He lives in London, or thereabouts. I will do it in 

a 

no wise. I was stopped at noon. We will tell him 

lui 
what we think in a proper time and place. What- 
ever may happen, I (do not care) for it. He did 

se soucier,v. 
it in the twinkling of an eye. This morning f 

awoke suddenly, but I soon fell asleep again 

s^ev eiller, v. 

ADYERBS. 

Facikment, easily. 
Fidelement, faithfully. 

£$. j i" a me 

a lafois, together. 

Combien defois ? how many times ? 

Unefois, once. 

Deux fois, twice. 

Troisfois, thrice, three times. 

Taut defois, so many times. 

Par fois, now and then. 

Fortement, strongly. 

Fort, very. 

Fort ct ferme, stoutly. 



347 

a fond, thoroughly. 

Defond en comble, from top to bottom, to all intents and 

purposes. 

De fronts abreast. 

Galamment, genteelly, politely. 

Gouttt a goutte, by drops. 

Guere ou gueres, (with ne before the verb,) little, but little. 

a la hate, in haste. 

En haul. ) n . • i 

r v i ' > up there, up stairs, above stairs. 

Dlieure en heure, hourly, every hour. 

Hier, yesterday. 

Hier au soir, last night. 

Avant-hier, the day before yesterday. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS. 

Your brother learns easily, but he forgets almost 

oublier/s. 
as easily as he learns. In the last battle cur troops 

fought (with the) French, all the &oldier3 and 
livrer,v. aux 

officers did their duty faithfully ; the enemy sur- 
r- 
endered at discretion, and were obliged to (march 

a de sor- 

out) of the country in a file. Let every one speak 

tir,v. Que 

in his turn, for if you speak ali together, how can 
a 

I hear what you say ? - - How many times did I tell 
entendre, v. 

you to write to your parents ? I spoke to him only 

de fere et mere ? 
once, but I saw him twice. My father generally 

goes to Germany thrice a year. I told it you three 

Mlemagne 
times. I saw him so many times. Do you go 

often to London ? I go (there) now and then. The 

souvent,3.dv. y 

king strongly opposed the enemy in the action 

s^opposer a melee ,f 



348 

- - - iTour little sister is very pretty. la all 

that (which) they undertake they always act 

agir,v. 

stoutly. My brother knows French thoroughly 

savoir le Frangais 
They demolished the house from top to bottom. 

I travelled in a post-chaise drawn by three horses 
abreast. Always behave genteelly. Your brothers 

came to see us, and we received them politely. - - 

up 
The wine runs from the hogshead by drops. - - Give 
coider, v. midd,m. 

him but little wine. l Never 3 do 2 things in 

Ne jamais ,adv. 
haste. Is Mr. D. above stairs ? Go up stairs, you 

will find what* you (look for) in the drawer 

chercher,v. tiroir, m. 

behind the door. --After having (waited for) him 
de rriere ,p . aitendre , v. 

hourly, he arrived at last. --We see the army 

increasing every hour.- -I went yesterday to London 
grossir,v. 
- It rained very much last night, and it has frozen 

very hard this morning. The day before yesterday 

tresfort 

I met your brother, who was riding on horse- 

se promener,v. 
back 

ADVERBS 

lei, here 

Jci autour, hereabouts. 

Id pre s, hard by. 

D^ici, hence. 

DHci en quinze jours, within a fortnight 

Par ici, this way. 

CPici, this way. 

Par ici par la, here and there. 

a Vimtant, immediately, instantly. 

Jamais, ever. 



o49 

Nk jamais, never, 

a jamais, forever. 

Justement, just, precisely. 

Jiisqu'a quand ? how long ? 

JusquHci, hitherto^ as far as this 

Jusque-la, so far, so far as that. 

Jus qu^ oil ? how far ? 

DeJGUr, in the day time. 

De jour a autre. ) c •, . , i ., 
-n J - 5 > from day to day, daily. 

De jour en jour, ) J ji j 

De deux en deux jours, } 

De deux jours Pun, > every other day. 

Tous les deux jours, ) 

Dans quinze jours, in a fortnight. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS. 

Did I not tell you to stay here ? How 

de 
many miles is it hence to Hampton-Court ? - - 
(There must) be (a great deal) of game here- 

11 doit,v. imp. gibier^m. 

abouls. How long has he lived hard by '? - - How 

demeurer ,v . 

far is it hence to Canterbury ? I will (call upon) your 

Cantorbery passer chez 

brother within a fortnight. Come this way. - - Your 

books are scattered here and there. - - Come back 
Spars. ad], 

immediately. They instantly invited him to dine 

d 
with them - - I do not believe that he ever will follow 

(by the subj.) 
your advice. - - My father never will see him again. 

conseiI,m. 
- - Great men will forever be celebrated in history. 

- (This is) just what I say. How long, O 

Voila^dv. 
Catiline, will you abuse our patience ? 

Catilina ■ abuser ,v.de 

HUherio the enemy has done nothing considerable 

de 
~ Learn this piece of poetry as far as thai. * 
30 pocsie 



350 
How far will you go r - - You always come to see me 

by night, why do you not come in the day time ? - - 

de 

We expect from day to day to receive news from 

de 
the Continent --We are daily exposed to great 

m. 
dangers. - - My master comes here every other da§ 
- - I shall go to France and Italy in a fortnight 
ADVERBS. 

La, there, thither. 

Let autour, thereabouts. 

Lei has, yonder. 

1}e B > * thence. 



En de Id, 

Par Id, that way. 

Loin, far. 

De loin, afar off, at a distance. 

Long-temps, a long while, long time 

Lors, then, at the time. 

0°"*. \ then. 
four tors, ) 

Des-lors, from that time. 

Mai, ill, wrong. 

Maintenant, now. 

Mediocrement, indifferently. 

Meme, even, yet. 

De meme, so, in the same manner. 

Mieux, better. 

De mieux en mieux, better and better 

Moms, less. 

Moins — moins, the less — the less. 

a moins, for less, at less. 

M mains, du moins, ) a{ , ^ the , t 

1 out au moms, ) 7 

En moins de rien, in a trice. 

JVaivcment, plainly, ingenuously. 

JYaturellement, naturally, by nature. 

Jlu nature!, to the life. 

Ne 9 ni, ni, neither —nor. 



351 

Mfan pas, ne pas, nc point,. non, no, not.* 
De nutty by night, in the night-time. 
Obligeammentj kindly, obligingly. 
Ok, where. 

OBSERVATION ON THE ADVERB Ou. * 

The adverb of place, Oh, where, is most commonly 
and more elegantly turned into French by que after the 
two other adverbs ici, here, la, there, to prevent the hia- 
tus caused by the meeting of the two vowels ; and some- 
times after nouns expressing* the place where something 
has happened, been done or committed, especially when 
the sentence begins with the verb etre, to be, used im- 
personally ; as, it is, it teas, it will be, &c. : ex. 

C*est ici que nous Patten- It is here (where) -we are 

dons, waiting for him. 

Ce fut la que je le vis pour It was there (where) I saw 

la premiere fois, him for the first time. 

Ce fut en plein senat que It was in full senate (where, 

Cesar fut inhumainement or in which) Caesar 

assassine, was inhumanly murdered 

EXERCISE UPOX THESE ADVERBS. 

It was there or thereabouts that I met him. - - Do 
Ce 
you see that tree yonder ? - - Thence I went to France, 

and soon after to Germany. - - If you go that way 

apres,^. 
you may call at Mr. H's. - - We are yet far from 

pouvoir,v f passer chez 
our house. - - I see many ships afar off. - - I saw him 
yesterday, but it was at a distance. - - You made me 
wait a long while - - The fight lasted a long 

comb at, m. 
time. - - He was ill at the time of my arrival. - - Then, 

* Pas, with the negation ne before it, merely expresses a negative, 
without affirming it, whereas point denies and affirms at once. Pa3 
often denies but partly, or with some modification ; point, on the con-* 
trary, always denies absolutely, totally, and without any reserve. 



352 

I believe you. - - From that time I began to 

commencer } v 
Bpeak to him. - - Does your son behave ill now ? - - 

When I do wrong, I repent very soon. - - They are 

tort blent o^adv. 

now in England. - - The tree that I planted, grows 

indifferently. - - Virtue is amiable even in an enemy. 

You blame him, and nevertheless you act in the 

agir,v. 
same manner. - - You work better than your sister. 

She reads French better and' better. -- My cousin 

le 
has less money than merit. - - The less you work, 

(by the fat;) 

the less you will improve. He will not do 

faire des progres. 
it for less. - - There are now in America 30,000 men 

at the least. - - If you cannot come, at least write 

to us. - - He replied plainly to all my questions, and 

I am much pleased with him. - - What he does, he 

bien satisfait, de,p. 
does it naturally. - - Miss Nichol's picture is 

portrait ,m. 
drawn to the life. - - I will neither see him nor 
/ai/,p.p. 
speak to him. - - My mother and sisters (were to) go 

devoir,v. 
next week to France, but my father says, that he 

neither can nor will expose them to the dangers of 

vouloir,v. 
a journey through a distant country. - - I (asked 
dans, eloigne ' de- 

for) a glass of wine, and not a glass of water. 

mander 9 'v. 
- - Will you come with me ? JYo, for you always 

car,c. 
travel by night. - - Always speak kindly. - - Where did 

you meet them ? ~ - It was ivhere I saw your brother 



353 

for the last time. - - It was at Caernarvon where 

Edward the Second (was born,) the first who bore the 

Edouard naitre,v. 

title of Prince of Wales. - - It was near the walls . of 

Galles. muraille 

Corunna in Spain, where, (or near which) the brave 
la Corogne 

Sir John Moore was wounded, and died a 

chevalier ,m. Jean <jt 

few hours after ; England will long regret the loss 

of that great general. It was there also where that 2 

famous 3 battle 4 (was fought 1 ) (in which) both our 

se donner,v. oil <zr> 

officers and soldiers showed so much courage. - - It is 

not amidst the pleasures of this world where (or amidst 

par mi, p. 
which) we find happiness ; it is in the bosom of inno- 

sein,m. 
cence and peace, where (or in which) we ought to 

(look for) it. -- It is in the county of Huntingdon 

chercher,Y. province,?. 

where the best cheeses in the kingdom are made.* 

ADYERBS. 

tyoii ? whence ? 

Par oil ? through what place ? which way ? through 

which ? 
Oui, yes. 

D' outre en outre, through. 
Pas a pas, step by step. 
l)e part el d^ autre, on both sides. 
Ntdle part, no-where, any-where. 
a peine, hardly, scarcely. 
Pele-mele, helter-skelter. 
Veid-etre, may be, perhaps. 
Pen, little. 
Peu a pen, by little and little, by degrees. 

a pen pi es, / a ] most ver y near thereabouts, 

a peu de chose pres, ) 7 J 

80* 



354 

Dans pen, in a short time. 

Depuis pen, lately, not long ago, a little while ago. 

a pied, on foot. 

Pieds nus, barefoot, barefooted. 

An pis alter, let the worst come to the worst. 

De pis en pis, worse and worse. 

Be plein gre, with a good will, freely. 

De plein pied, on the same floor. 

a pleines mains, largely. 

Plus, more, above. 

Plus — plus, the more — the more. 

Plus quHl n'en faut, more than enough. 

Jin plus, toid an plus, at the most. 

De plus en plus, more and more. 

a plus forte raison, much rather, much more so 

EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS. 

Did my brothers tell you whence they came ? - - - 

Which way are they gone ? The hole through 

which they (made their escape) was so small, that 1 

s^echapjoeVjV. 
do not know how they could (get out). - - Do you know 

sortir,\. 
your lesson ? Yes, Sir. - - - The barrel is pierced 

baril,m. 
through. I will follow you step by step. 

The battle was cruel and bloody, and 

combat, m. sanglant 7 tidy 

kept up (a long time) with an equal advantage 

pe hiainienir ,v . 
on both sides. I can find my book no -where. 

(There is no) going any-where in winter. - - He speaks 

en 
so low, that I can hardly hear what he says. The 

Spaniards pursued them so closely that they 
Espagnol,m. de si pres, adv. 

entered the town heller-shelter. I shall see you 

dans 
perhaps to-morrow. -- He has Utile money. -- If you 

give me a verb, I will learn it by little and Utile. - - - 



She is as tall as "you, or thereabouts. --I heard (hat 
your sister will (be married) in a short time. --Have 

se warier ' 
you (heard from) your mother lately ? - - I received a 

letter from her not long ago. i was on foot, and 

he was in a coach. - - I often pity the poor little 

chimney sweepers, who walk barefooted in 

cheminee ramoneur,m. 

winter. Let the worst come to the ivorst, I will 

(get rid) of it. Your brother writes worse 

se defaire,v. 

and worse. - - He submitted to it with a good will. 

se soumettre 
All our rooms are on the same floor. - - He is so cha- 
ritable, that he gives alms largely. - - I shall 

aumonefisivg. 
never more complain of the rude reception 

malhonnete^]. acciieil,m. 

which your uncle has given to my father. - - I have 

fait,j>.p. 
written three letters, neither more nor less. You 

are above twenty years old. - - The more we are 

plus de 
above others, the more it becomes us to be 

au dessus de,p. de 

modest and humble.* You give me more than 

tnough. How many coats have you ? - - I have six 

at the most. - - I shall endeavour to deserve your kind- 
ness more and more. - - If I have done that to 

pour,p. 
oblige my friend, I would much more so do it for my 

relations. 
parent y m* 

ADVERBS. 

Plutot, sooner. 

Point du tout, not at all 

* See the rule, page 75. 



35G 

a point nomine, seasonably. 

Tout a point, in the nick of time 

a propos, seasonably. 

Pourquoi ? or que ne ? why ? 

De pres, near, nearly, narrowly. 

Premierement, ) a . ,, c , , 

™ -7' } nrst, in the nrst place. 

JtLn premier lieu, ) ? l 

Des a present, from this moment. 

Presque, almost, hardly. 

P res que jamais, hardly ever, (with ne before the verb.) 

Presque toujour s, most commonly. 

De propos delibere, on purpose, purposely, deliberately 

Par cas fortuity by chance, accidentally. 

Par derriere, behind. 

Par dessics le mar die, into or over the bargain. 

Par en has, downward. 

Par en haul, upward. 

Par malice, through ill-nature, out of ill-nature. 

Par mcgarde, unawares. 

Par terre, upon the ground, down. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS 

My father arrived yesterday sooner than we ex- 

ne 
pected him. Do you like that book ? Not at 

all. You come very seasonably, and your brother 

came in the nick of time. --Tie speaks little, but he 

pew, adv. 
speaks seasonably. Why do you not learn your 

lessons better ? - - Why do you not come yourself ? 

- Your dog is so snarling, that (there is no) ap- 

hargneux,ad']. 
proaching him near. - - lie narrowly escaped 

being killed. In the first place, I must tell 

d"etre,v. 

you that I shall punish you, if you do not 

behave better. - - From this moment I begin to 
se comporter, y. a 

believe that you are altered. You arc almost 

change,]), ]) 



357 

as tall as I am. - - He is hardly ever at home. Wc 

chez lid. 
dine most commonly between three and four o'clock 

entre,p. 
- - They killed him purposely. - - I met him by chance. 
--That has happened accidentally. -- He struck 

frappcr,v. 

his enemy behind. He gave me three yards of 

aune 

muslin into the bargain. Shall I begin down- 

moussehne 

ward or upward ? Begin downward. - - He has 

torn my book through ill-nature. If I have 

dechirerjr. 

done him any harm, certainly I did it unawares. 

du 
I always find your books and hat upon the ground. 
• - It was Peter who threw me down. 
jeter y Y. 
ADYERBS. 
Quand ? when ? 

Depuis quand ? how long is it since ? 
Que ? why ? how ? 
Quclquefois, sometimes. 
a quoi bon ? to what purpose ? 
Rarementy seldom. 

■£"*> [as to the rest. 

JJu reste, ) 

a rebourSy the wrong way. 

d rcculonSy backward. 

a la renverse, backward, upon one's back. 

An or a rez de chaussee, even with the ground 

Sens devant deniere, preposterously. 

Sens dessus dessous, topsy-turvey. 

Ve tons sens, 

ue tous les senSy ) 

Separetnent, separately. 

Seulementy* only. 

De sang froidy in cold blood. 

Ue suite, together, one after another. 

* Only is often also expressed, in French, by ne before the vcib aiki 
que after it 3 then it becomes a conjunction. 



358 

Dans la suite. ) a , 

Par la suite, \ afterw ard. 

Sur le champ, directly, upon the spot. 
Siirement, safely. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS. 

When shall I have the pleasure of seeing you ? - 
How long is it since you lived in London ? - - Why do 

a 
you not come to see us sometimes ? - - To what pur- 

pose shall I write to him ? - - He writes to me very 

seldom. - - As to the rest, do as you please. - - You 

vouloir, v. fut. 
do (every thing) the wrong way. - - You hold your 

book the wrong way. - - He fell upon his back. - - 

If you walk backward, you will fall backward. - - Our 

eating-room is even with the ground. - - You put all 

salle 
your things preposterously. - - She has left (every 

thing) topsy-turvy. - - You may find it every- 

pouvoir,v. 
where. - - He defeated them separately. - - I only saw 

him once. - - He committted the murder in cold 

meurtre,m. 
blood, - - They go together. - - He will give you much 
pleasure afterward. - - Do directly what I bid 

dire>v. 
you. - - We arrived safely. 

ADVERBS 

Tant, so much, so many. 

Tant mieuXy so much the better. 

Tant pis, so much the worse. 

Tantot, by and by, sometimes. 

Tantot — tantot, sometimes — sometimes. 

Tot, ) 

Bientot, j *>on, very soon. 



359 

Tot on tardy one time or other, sooner or later, soon or 

late. 
Tant soil peu, very little, ever so little. 
Tard, late. 

a temps, time enough, in proper time. 
Be long-temps, for a long time, this long while. 
De temps en temps, > and the from ^ {o time 

a fort, wrongfully. 

a tort ou a droit, right or wrong. 

a tort et a tr avers, at random. 

Trop, too much. 

Toujours, always, ever. 

Pour toujours, forever. 

Tons les jours, every day. 

Tour a tour, by turns. 

Tout, quite, wholly, thoroughly, entirely.* 

Tout a coup, suddenly, on a sudden, all at once. 

Tout has, softly, with a low voice. 

Tout d?un coup, suddenly, on a sudden, all at once 

EXERCISE UPON THESE ADVERBS. 

He has so much money, and so many goods, 

that he does not know what to do (with them.) - - 

^ en, pro. 

(It is) so much the better for me, but it will be so 
C J est,v. ce 

much the worse for you. - - My father will come back 

revenir,v. 
by and by. - - Sometimes you write well, some- 
times you write very badly. -- My father says I shall 
soon go to France. -- Have patience, you will suc- 
ceed one time or other. - - The sun is the em- 
blem of truth, which dispel?, sooner or later, the 

dissiper,Y. 

* This adverb takes the nature of a noun adjective, and becomes 
declinable, in French, when placed before another adjective feminine 
neginning with a consonant and an h mute : ex. 
Ces femmes paraissaient tout These women seemed quite fright- 

affray xes et ioutes constern&es eaed and quite dismayed. 



3G0 

vapours of slander. - - - Did ho give you any meat : 
He gave me very Utile. - - You arrived late, but I 
came in proper time. - - I have not (heard from) my 
brother for a long time. - - Come and see us now and 

then. You accuse him wrongfully. Right or 

wrong, he will speak, and always speaks at 

voidoir,v. 
random. - - Give him a little money, but never give 

him too much. «■ - You always contradict me when I 

speak. - - O my children ! be ever good, and you will be 

ever happy. - - 1 bid you adieu for ever. - - I go every 

dire, v. 
day to town. - - We will dance by turns. I am 

quite tired with repeating the same things. My 

de 
sisters were quite transported with joy when they 

de 
heard the happy news of the victory. - - Misfortunes 
come sometimes suddenly upon us. Speak softly. 

A storm arose suddenly, and the sailors 

s'elever,v. 
were quite frightened. - — The ladies I saw at the 

a 
play were quite young and happy. — He has more 

brilliancy than solidity. Science is estimable 

brillant solide. 

but virtue is more so. 

davantage,a.dv. 

ADVERBS. 

Tout a fait, quite. 

Tout a Pheure, this minute, presently 

Tout droit, straight along. 

Tout de bon, in good earnest. 

Tout de son long, all along. 

Tout franc, frankly, freely. 

Tout haut, aloud. 

Tout outre, through and through. 



301 

(i tout bout de champ, ) 

a tern coups, F ' j at eveiy turn. 

a tous egards, in all respects. 

Be toutes ses forces, with all his or her might. 

Par tout, every where. 

Par tout oil, wherever. 

Vpnent, \ 9 uickl J r - 

T'ivement, ) . . 

Jluvif, jt° the quick. 

a vide, empty. 

Jhi plus vite, with all speed. 

Voici. here is, behold. 

Voild, there is, behoid. 

a rue cPceil^ perceptibly. 

F, there, therein, within, thither. 

EXERCISE UPON" THESE ADVERBS. 

You are quite altered. - - I will do it presenHij 
change. 
If you do not come this minute, I shall go ana 

s£n 

fetch you. - - Go straight along. - - Do you be- 

chercher 7 v. 

lieve it in good earnest ? - - He was lain down all 

couch e,p.p. 
along. - - He acts frankly, and speaks aloud. - - He 

ran him through and through. He sneaks 

percer.v 

at every turn, without knowing what she says. -- 

sans. p. savoir^v. 
She is better than her sister in all respects. - - He 

struck me with all his might. - - I have Hooked 

b - % i 

/ rapper ,v. cher- 

forj you everywhere --I will follow you wherever 

c//er,v. 

you go. - - Set out quickly. - - Her misfortunes 
(bj the fut.) maUteurjn. 

touch me /o ?Ae quick. - - The coach was returning 

s , en relo urntrs. r c fi . 
empty - - Go irith all speed to Mrs. Lucas and 

31 duz,p. 



362 

tell her to come directly. - - Here is my room/ and 

de 
there is yours. - - These children grow perccp- 

grandir y 
libly. - - Go thither instantly. 

tout de suite ,adv. 



SECT. VII 

OF PREPOSITIONS. 

Prepositions are divided into the three following 
classes. First, those that govern the genitive or ablative 
case. Secondly, those that govern the dative. And, 
lastly, those that govern the accusative. 

First, the following govern the genitive or ablative. 

Jiuiour de, about, round 

a cause de, because of, on account of. 

a cause de vous, de lui, d^elle, de nous. Sic. on vour, his, 

her, our, &c. account. 

a cote de, aside, by. 

a convert de, free, secure, or screened from. 

dfleur de, close to, even with. 

a moins de, under. 

a force de* by dint of. 

a raison de, at the rate of 

a Vabri de, at the rate of. 

a Pegal de, in comparison of. 

a Pegard de, with regard, with respect, as to, concerning. 

a la faveur de, by means of. 

a Pinsu de, without the knowledge of, unknown to. 

a la maniere de, ) . r , ,, P , . c 

, 7 77 J in or after the manner or fashion of 

a la mode de, \ 

a P opposite de, ) . , 

t/« v r • j } } over against. 
vis a vis de, ) & 

Jlu deed de, ) ,, . . , 
-r, /, ,' on tins side. 
iLn dega ae, ) 

Jiu de la de, on that side, on the other side. 

Jlu dc-hors de, out, without. 

Jlu dessus de, above, over, upon. 

Jhi dessous de, under, below, beneath. 

*This preposition is sometimes Englished by with : ex. 
II pleure a force de rire 9 He cries with laughing. 



363 

Jlu devant de, before. 

Alter au devant de, to go to meet. 

Au derriere de, behind, in the back part. 

Au dedans de, in, within. 

An lieu de, instead of! 

Jlu milieu de, in the middle of. 

Jlu prix de, en comparaison de, in comparison to 

Aux environs de, about, round about. 

Ensuite de, after. 

Faule de, for want of. 

a la hauteur de, (sea term,) orT. 

Hurs de, out of. 

Le long de, along. 

Loin de, far from. 

Fres or proche de, ) • , t 

a y K 5 > near, or ni£h by. 

Jiiipres de, S ° J 

Pour V ] amour de moi i de lui, d J elle, de vous, 8cc. for my 

sake, for his, her, your sake, &cc. 

Tout aupres de, close, hard by. 

a Pepreuve de, proof against, (able to resist.) 

EXERCISE UPON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

Come this way ; we shall walk round the meadow. 

prairie, f. 
I have sent nothing to your brother, because of his idle- 
ness ; but I forgive him on your account. - - Sit down by 

that lady's sister. - - Endeavour to set yourself 

mettre,v. 
free from blame. - - We are not yet secure from all 

danger. - Cut that sorrel even with the ground. 

oseillef. 
- - He is become a very good master by dint of 
study and practice. - - He will not sell it under 

vouloir,v. 
twelve guineas. - - My brother bought yesterday 

twenty pairs of silk stockings at the rate of fourteen 

shillings and sixpence a pair. -- Under that tree 

Sous, p. 
we shall be sheltered from the rain. - - Your horse 

(is worth) very little in comparison of his. - - JVith 
valoir,v, 



3G4 

regard to what you say, I do not mind it 

se soucier^v. en 

- - All the prisoners (made their escape) by means of 

s^echapper^v. 
the darkness of the night. - - Your brother . is 

obscurite,? 
gone to London without the knowledge of your 
mother. - - He (left off) Latin unknown to his 

quitter, v. 
father. - - Now the English ladies (dress themselves) 

sliabiller ,v . 
after the French fashion. - - Mrs. Tart lives in 

demeurer y v 
the Strand, over-against Catherine-street. - - V\ r e now 

Catherine 
live on this side of the river - Do not you say that 

demeurer 
you met my father on the other side of the bridge ? 

- - Why did you stay out of the house ? - - Mrs. A. 
is very proud, she (thinks herself) above every body, 

se croire 
and consequently she (looks upon) every body as 

regarder,v. 
ueneaih her. - - Did you observe the . elegant 

remarquer,v. 
lady who was in the box below you ? - - There 

hgefi 
is a large tree before the house. - - I am 

grand 
going to meet my aunt, will you accompany me ? - - 
My uncle has a rich plantation in the back 
part of Virginia. - - There is a fine statue tvithin the 

f. 
garden. - - He took my hat instead of his. — Let us 
go in the middle of the meadow. -- My house (is 

va- 
good for) nothing in comparison of hers. - - He 
/oir,v. 

walks two or three times a* day about the garden. - - 
foisf. 

* Remember the observations after tne article tin, une 3 a or an, at the 
bottom of page 61. 



365 

We drank tea, after which we went to 

prendre ,v. quoi^ro. 

the play. - - I can do nothing, for want of money. - - 

They were off the Cape of Good Hope when they 

Cap,m. EsperanceJ. 

were taken. — Do not push me out of the 

pousser^v. 
room. - - He is gone along the river. We are still 

far from our house. - - I met your friend Mr. A. 

near the church. - - My mother was buried nigh this 

marble pillar. # - - He passed by me without knowing 

sans, p. connattre 
me. - - 1 do it for your sake as well as for theirs. 

- - My best friend lives close to the Royal Exchange, 

demeurer Bourse^. 

and he lived formerly close to St. James's palace. - - 

The officers and soldiers were lodged in barracks, 

caserne, f. ■ 
cannon and bomb-proof. - - My shoemaker very 

canon^m. bombe,f.\il. 

much wanted to make me a pair of boots water- 

desirer^v. de 
proof but I had not money enough to pay him. 

pour, p. 

Secondly, the fouowing govern the Dative 
Conformementj according, pursuant. 

Uaqu , f t jjj unt y eyen j ag f ar ag { Q 

Jusqucs a, ) J 7 ' 1 

Par rapport d, with respect to, on account of. 
Quant d, as for, as to. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

A candid and sincere man always speaks and acts 

according to what he thinks. - - He has been punished 

pursuant to an act of parliament. - - Yesterday we 

parleme nt } m. 

* See rule, pa^e 57. 



366 

(waited for) him till five o'clock (in the) morning - - 

du 
They fought with obstinacy on both sides until the 

des deux 
beginning of the night - - If I had not stopped him, 
entree f. 
he would have gone even to Dover. - - We accompa- 

etre 
nied them as far as Rochester, and they pursued 
their way to Canterbury. - - I will do it with respect 

chemin 
to you, but never on account of them, --^s for me, 
I will not give him a penny. - - JLs for us, we were 

sou,m. 
(very much) dissatisfied, I assure you. - - As to what 

ires, 
people may say, I do not (care for) it. 

gens.p, pouvoir,v.(fut.) se soucier de,v. 

Thirdly, the following require the Accusative. 

Jlpres, after. 

D'apres, after, according to. 

Jlvant, before. 

Jlvec, with. 

a traversj cross, through. 

Chez, in, to, at, among. 

Chez moi, chez toi, chez lui, chez die, chez nous, &c. at or 

to my, thy, his, her, our, &x. house. 
Contre, against. 
Dans, in, into, within. 
Be, about, through. 
Depuis, since, from. 
Berriere, behind. 
Des, from. 
Bevant, before. 
Be dessus, from the top. 
Be dessous y from under, from beneath. 
Durant, during. 
En, in, into, like, as a, at 
Entre, between. 

Envers, towards, with regard to. 
Envircn, about. 



3G7 

Excepie, } 

Hors, > except, but, save. 

Hormis, j 

Moyennant, for, provided. 

Ml' ' I notwithstanding, in spite of, 



Malgre, 

Outre, beside. 
Par, by, through. 
Par depa, on this side. 
Paq* del a, on that side. 
Par derriere, behind. 
Par dessus, above, over. 
Pardessous, under, below. 
Parmi, among. 
Pendant, during, for. 
Pour, for. 
Sans, without. 
Sauf, saving, but, with. 

V e -° /l ' *j > according to. 
Suivant, ) ° 

Sous, under. 

Sur, upon, about. 

Touchant, concerning, about. 

Vers, towards, to. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE PREPOSITION 5. 

He arrived here an hour after you. - - Mias A. 

pants after nature. - - According to her assertion, it 

is false. - Let me drink before you. - - Did you 

Laisser 3 v. 
not see her walk with her father ? - - It was 

Ce 
the ancient Britons, who cut a road through 

Breton, chemin,m. 

this mountain. - - Such was the custom among the 

Romans. - - I was going to your house : but as I have 

met you, we will go to my house, where we shall dine. 

- - Do not lean against that wall. - - Go and 

s'appuyer,v mur,m. <jo* 

take ? walk in the garden. - - I am going into my 

fa ire un tour 



room. - - (Keep yourself) within the limits of de 

Se tenir^v. borne 

eency. - - 1 spoke to your father about your affairs. - - 

His father died through grief. - - 1 have not (heard 

from) her since her departure. - - Go into my room ; 

you will find a letter behind the looking-glass , 

miroir y m. 
(be so kind as) to bring it to me.-- From this mo- 

avoir la bonle de 
ment I believe you. - - Do not put yourself before 

me. - - We saw the camp from the top of the hill. - - 
[ saw it from under a tree. - -He behaved well during 
your absence. - - My sister is in England. - - He be- 
haved like an honest man in that affair. - - He acts as 
a tender father who loves you. - - Tell nobody what 

passed between you and me. - - Be not unjust towards 

se passer 

your neighbours. - - It was about four o'clock when 

proc/iam,m.sing. 
we (set out). - - Take all that you please except my 

v'ouloir^ifwt.) 
sword. - - I give you all my books, but the History of 

France. - - They were all drowned save my friend. - - 

noyer^v. 
He will do it for two guineas. - - I walk every day, 

notwithstanding the bad weather. - - T hope you will 

succeed in your undertaking, in spite of Mrs Slander. 
reussir y v. 
- Beside his own money, he spends all his sister's 

- - It is said that Gibraltar is (blocked up) by land 

bloquer,v. 
and by sea. - - I have passed through France and 

Italy. - - We have passed through Germany. - - He 

Jlllemagne. 
lives on this side, and his brother on that side of 

London. - - * He is a coward who attacks his enemy 
* See page 116, 



369 

behind. - - Let us see whether you can jump over 

st,c. sauiir 7 w. 

the table. - - Look under the door, and you will see 

it. - - Envy, jealousy, and slander, always reign 

medisance,?. 
among authors. - - What have you done during my ab- 
sence ? - - I have (been expecting) you for a long time. 

up 
- Your Aunt has sent me some books for you. - 

Without him what could I have done ? - - A woman may 

pouvoir 
please without * beauty, but she cannot succeed without 
virtue.* --He always (goes out) without me. - - The 
army marched three days and three nights without 
stopping - - He (carried away) all my furniture, saving 
s\irreter meubles, m.-pl. 

my bed. - - Do I not live according to the rules 

reghyf. 

which you have prescribed ? - - I found your buckle 

prescrire,v. bouclej. 

under the chair. - - You said you had left it upon 

chaise, f. la isser, v. 

the table. - - How could I lend you a guinea ? I had no 

money about me. - - Did not my brother write to you 

concerning that affair ? - - It was towards the evening 

Ce 
when he arrived. 
que,c. 

OBSERVATIONS on some PREPOSITIONS. 

Move. This preposition, when preceding a noun ex- 
pressing time or number, so as to signify more than or long- 
f.r than j is to be rendered in French by plus de : ex. 
he combat dura plus de The fight lasted above tws 

deux heures, hours. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION. 

My brother was not above twenty years old, when 

* Use no article. 

t See the N. B. before the Exercises upon the First Conjugation, 
page 183. Fivre, means, to live, to exist ; Demeurer, means, to live, 
to reside. 



370 

he (was married.) - - He made us wait above a week. -- 
se marier. 

My father's country-house is very handsome, but it 

cost him above six thousand pounds. --In the last 

sea-fight which took place between the French and 

avoir lieu 
the English, above twelve hundred men perished in 

the action (on the) side of the French, and the 

die 
English took above fifteen ships of the line. - - It is 

den 
above a year since my cousin set off for Jamaica. 

que partir^v. Jamaique,f.. 

At- is most commonly rendered by a, and sometimes by 
one of the French articles au, a la, a /', aux, according to 
the gender and number of the noun following : ex. 

Nous etions a diner. We were at dinner. 

Elle est a la maison, She is at home. 

II j one Men aux cartes, He plays well at cards. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION. 

If you be at Rome, live as they do at Rome. - - 
vivre on 
We will (get up) next week at six o'clock. - - When I 

se lever 
called upon Mr. B. he was at breakfast. - - (Every 
passer chez 
thing) I have is at your service. - - My brother is at 

Mr. H.'s academy. - - Were you at Mrs. C.'s ball last 

week ? - - You always travel by night at the peril of 

your life. - - I will pay you at the end of the year. - - 

My mother is at the height of happiness. - - He plays 

comble,m. 
very well at chess, and his companion begins 

echecs, na.pl, 
Jo play a little at draughts. - - He did it at the instigation 

of his friend, 



Oi 1 

After nouns or verbs denoting anger, derision, joy, prov- 
oralion, resentment, sorrow, surprise or concern, at is ren- 
dered by one of the following articles, de, du, de la, de l\ 
des : ex. 

// se mo que de vous, He laughs at you, 

Je me rejoins de voire ben- I rejoice at your good luck, 

heur, 
Nous sommes surpris de ce We are surprised at what 

que vous diles, you say. 

EXEPvCISE UPON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

Exasperated at his conduct, he told him never to 
Irriic ,'ddj. de 

laugh at poor people. - - We always (ought to) re 

se moquer, devoir 

joice at the good fortune which befalls our neigh- 

arriver,\ r .d 
hours. - - I am vexed at the news which we received 

fache 
last week. - - A good Christian never shows any re- 
sentment at the injuries which are offered to him. - - 

fa ire 
He always smiles at (every thing) which is said. - - A 

tout. 
patient man never grieves at his misfortunes. - 

s^aUristeryY. 
I cannot help being' surprised at her manner 

s' empecheryV.de 
of answering. - - I am concerned at the loss which 

fache 
vou sustained in vour trade. - - He was so mortified at 

essuijer,v • commerce,m. 

the disobedience of his sons, that he died through grief. 

de 

Jit is rendered by chez, when, in English, it precedes 
the word house, either expressed or understood, and the 
same rule is to be observed with respect to the preposi.. 
tion to : ex. 

•Petals chez voire frere, I was at your brother's 

Je vais chez Madame Lucas. I am going to Mrs. Lucas's. 



372 

EXERCISE UPON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

f called upon Miss Brown this morning, as I had 
passer chez 
piomised your mother, but she wa3 not at home. - - 

a 
Where was she then ? She was at her aunt's- - I 

done ? 
thought my friend was at his father's, but I mistook, 

se tromper 
for he was at his uncle's. - - How long have you been 
car 

at Mr. H.'s ? - -We lodge at my friend's, but we board 

manger 
at the pastry cook's. - - If you go to my ^brother, tell 

him to come to my cousin's, where I (am to) spend 

de passcr,v. 

the day, and we will go together to his friend's. * 

By, when preceding a numeral adjective immediately 
followed by another adjective expressing the dimension or 
superfices of an object, is rendered in French by sur, and 
when it precedes the verb in the participle active, it is 
then rendered by en : ex. 
Cette chambre a dix pieds de This room is ten feet long 

longueur sur sept et demi by seven and a half wide. 

de largeur. 
En agissant ainsi, vous vous By acting thus, you will 

fentz des ennemis, get enemies. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION. 

Mj box is a foot and a half deep by two wide and 

four long. - - The general (drew up) his army in order 

ran&er.v en 

of buttle, on a plain three miles long by two 

and a half wide. Our (school-room) at Alfred 

ecole^L 
House, Camberwell, is? forty feet long by 

thirty six wide, and our garden contains above 

an acre of land. - You will soon speak French 

arpent } m 



373 

by applying so. - - Your father gets a considerable 

s'appliquer faire,v. 

fortune by buying cheap, and selling dear. - - Men 

acquire learning by working, and not by sleeping. - - 

Water hollows a stone, not by falling with force, 

creuser,v. 
but by falling often ; so men become learned, not 

by studying with force, but by studying often. 

By, after the verbs to sell, to buy, to work, and the like, 
preceding a noun of weight or measure, day, week, month 
or year, is rendered into French by a, au, a la, a V, aux, 
according 'to the gender and number of the following 
noun : ex. 

Je ne vends rien a la liure, I sell nothing by the pound. 

11 acltete toujours a Vaune, He always buys by the ell. 

Nous travailhns a Vheure, We work by the hour, or by 

ou a, la journee, the day. 

EXERCISE UPON" THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

Always buy tea by the pound, and never by the 

ounce : you will get it cheaper. - - I never buy my 
avoir 

cloth by the ell, but by the piece. - - It is a sad thing 

to buy coals by the bushel • - How do you sell your 

de 

brandy ? We sell it by the gallon, and not by the 

bottle. - -He sells his wine by the dozen. - - I sell 

eggs by the hundred, and chesnuts by the quarter. 

- - How do you measure your cambrick ? by the eVi, 

baiiste,m. 
or by the yard ? - - Do you buy cider by the hogshead, 

tonne an, m 
or by the pipe ? - - Does your father work by the 

week or the month ? - No, Sir, he works by the year. 

Well ! I always thought he worked by the piece. 

By, immediately following the verbs to kill, to wound, 
to knock down, and the like, is made into French by d?un 
coup de, when it expresses the effect, blow, thrust, stroke, 

32 



374 

firing, &.c. of an instrument by which a man was either 
killed, wounded, &c. provided the blows have not been 
repeated : if the blows have been repeated, we make use 
of a coups de, in which case it is most commonly rendered 
in English by with : ex. 

II fit bless e dhm coup de He was wounded by an ar- 

jliche, row. 

Us Passommercnt a coups de They knocked him down 

baton, with a stick. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

Achilles w T as killed (at the) siege of Troy by an 
Jichiile an Troie 

arrow, which Paris, king Priam's son, (let fly) 

decocher^v. 
t<t his heel.* - - (Unable to) catch the thief, 

talon ,m. JYe pouvoir attrapei\v. 
they knocked 2 him 1 down 2 with sticks. -- At . last, 

.Eri/m, adv. 
the king, having broke his battle-axe and sword, 

hache-d 'armes ,f. 
was (knocked down) by a stone, and taken prisoner 

renverse,\).p. faitjp.y. 
William the Second was killed by an arrow in the 

New-Forest. - - My brother was wounded by a gun, 

fusil ,m. 
and my cousin was killed by a cannon-ball. - Edward 

boulet de canon,m. 
the First was wounded in Palestine ' with a poisoned 

f. 
dagger. - - He is so strong, that with his list ht 
poignard^m. 
could knock down an ox. - - He threw my brothel 

down, and almost killed him with his feet. -- 

par lerrCy 

They killed him not with stones, but with arrows. - - 

The soldiers kill one another with bayonets, and the 

se luer 
officers with sabres and swords. - - He killed his dog 

* See rule, page 111. 



375 

with kicks. - The city of Vera Cruz has been destroyed 
by cannon-shot. 

For, after reflected verbs, as also those which denote 
thanksgiving, kc. is rendered by one of the following ar- 
ticles, de, du, de la, de V , cles : ex. 

Je me rejeuis du service qvMl I rejoice for the service 
vous a rendu, et je Pen re- which he has done to you, 
mercierai dementi, and will thank him to- 

morrow for it 

EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION. 

I am very grateful for all the kindness 

reconmissani, adj . bonie, f. 

you have had for me. - - He is very sorry for the 

grief he has caused you. - - When we have reached 

aiteindre,Y. 
the age of reason, we are often sorry, but too late, 

for the time we lost when we were young. - - My 

brother desired me to thank you for the part you 

de 
took in his troubles. — Every one leaped for joy, 
peine, f. tressaillir 

when the happy news of peace arrived. - - A child 

who cares little for the author of his life, 

se soucier,v. jours, m. pi. 

is an unnatural being -An ungrateful son will be 

denature ,adj. 
punished (one time or other) for his ingratitude. 

From, preceding the name of a man or woman, or one 
of the personal, joossessive^ relative, or interrogative, pro- 
nouns, after the verbs to go, to come, to send, &c. is gener- 
ally rendered in French by de la part de, or de ma, de 
sa, de noire pari de voire part, &c. : ex. 

Mlez de ma part chez Go from me to Mr. D. 

Mons. D. 
Je viens de sa part, I come from him or her. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION. 

Go from me to Miss Dunkin's, and tell her I shall 

lux 



376 

be glad to see her : no, stop a little, tell her that 

de 
you come from my cousin, who has something very 

pretty to show her. - - From whom do you come ? 

Vdrid she 3 to me 1 - - Madam, replied I to her, I come 

repliquer,v. 
from my parents, who sent me. - - Well, answered 

pe.re et mere 
she, any one is always welcome, who comes from 

them. - - Send from me to Mr. Lucas, and let him 

faire 
know that I am, (very much) vexed at the letter I 

tres de 

received from him ; I never could have expected 

s^aitendre^v. 
to receive such an affront from and old acquaintance. 
a connaissance y f. 

In requires some attention from the learner, who is to 
observe that dans is followed by the article, a pronoun, 
or any word which may define the noun, when, on the 
contrary, en seldom admits of the article, whether ex- 
pressed in English or not : ex 

11 est dans la maison. He is in the house. 

Elle est en Jlngleterre, She is in England. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION. 

He always keeps himself (shut up) in his room. -- 

Take all the linen which I shall want in our jour- 
, linge^m. 

ney, and put it into my box. - - Walk* into the parlour. 

- - We live in the county of Surrey. - - Is there a good 

fire in the room ? - - Ovid, one of the finest poets of 

the Augustan age, expired in the seventeenth 

<P Augusts, m. siecle,m. 
year of our Lord, at Tomi, near Varna. - - Is 

your sister in France ? - - No, madam, she is tri 

* To walk or step into is translated by entrer, followed by dans in 
French ; but to walk or take a walk is se promener. 



:J77 
Spain. - - How long do you intend to stay in town ? 
Sir, do you keep house ? - - ±\o, we live in 
(ready furnished) lodgings. - - When we are in 

garniyRd]. chambre,f. on 

peace, people talk of war ; and when in war, ihey 

on on 

talk of peace. - - Your eldest son behaved [like a) 

en 
hero. - - If my son behave like an honest man, J shall 

act towards him as a tender father. - - In what does 
human happiness consist ? - - If you wish to be happy 
and esteemed in this world, live like a man of 
honour and probity. - - He walks in the garden with 

his friend. - - He is gone to spend the winter in 

<& 
Italy. - - The American 5 navy 2 officers 1 have acted 

marine 

lilce heroes. 

In, after words denoting pain, hurting, or wounding, 
and preceding one of the possessive pronouns in conjunc- 
tion with any part of the Dody, is to be rendered by one 
of the following articles, a, au, <i la, a V, aux, and the 
possessive pronoun left out; and when in precedes a 
noun denoting a part of time, it is not to be expressed 
in French : ex. 

// etait blesse au bras, et He was wounded in his 

non a la jambe, arm, and not in his leg. 

Vous le trouverez toujours You will always find him 

chez lui le matin, at home in the morning 

EXERCISE UPON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

My brother has constantly (a pain) in his head, and 

I have very often a pain in my teeth. - - Never eat 

any fruit which is not ripe, for there is nothing 

more apt to give you a pain in your stomach. - - My 

companion, by jumping over a form, (fell down,) 

banc 3 m. tomber,v m 

32* 



378 

and was much hurt in the shoulder. - - Your brother 

was wounded in the arm, but not dangerously, and 

my cousin was mortally wounded in the head. - - 

My master comes generally in the morning. - - I will 

call upon you in the afternoon, and in the evening go 

to the play. 

On or upon. This preposition is rendered by de after 
the verbs to depend, to live, to subsist, and the like ; and 
by one of the following articles, de, du, de la, de V , des, 
after the verb to plaxj, preceding the name of an instru- 
ment ; and before the days of the week and the names 
of the month, preceded by a numeral adjective the above 
preposition must not be expressed : ex. 

11 vii de pain et (Teau, He« lives on bread and 

water. 

Vous jouez du violon, et il You play on the violin, 

joue de la flute, and he plays on the flute. 

Cela arriva le dix-huit du That happened on the 

. mois dernier, eighteenth of last month. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION. 

We all depend upon divine mercy. - - A 

misericorde yf. 

good end generally depends on a good beginning. - 

Men do not live only on bread and meat, but on the 
grace of God. -- Birds subsist upon what they can 
catch. - - What do you live upon, you who never eat 
any meat ? - - In winter I live on milk and vegetables, 
and in summer I live upon bread and butter, cheese, and, 
all sorts of fruits. - - Upon what instrument does your 
sister play ? - She plays very well on the harpsichord, 
and she is now learning to play on the harp. - - Come 
on Friday early, and I will go to see you on the Saturday 
following. - - Why did you not play on the violin on 
Wednesday last ? - - On June the eighth, 1376, died 



Edward, prince of Wales, the delight of toe 

(in the pi.) 
nation, in the forty-sixth year of his age. - - On the 

third of June, 1664, the English obtained a great victo- 

remporter y v. 
ry over the Dutch off Harwich, took eighteen 

sur Ho llandais , m . 

skips, and destroyed fourteen more. 

Over. This preposition is commonly rendered in 
French by sur; but it must be rendered by the partici- 
ple passive of the verbs finir, passer , achever, when it de- 
notes an action ended : ex. 

11 a PavafUage sur vous y He has the advantage 

over you. 
Voire frere partit des que Your' brother set out as 
la pluiej ut passee, soon as the rain was 

over. 
Le diner est-ll fini ? Is dinner over? 

EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION. 

A coach passed over his body, and killed him. - - 
Tullia, Tarquinius' wife, the unnatural daughter 

Tarquin dena ture, adj . 

of Servius, king of Rome, ordered her coachman 

ordonner a 
to drive over the dead body of her father. - - In 
de passer, v. 
going to London, did you go over Westminster 

passer 9 v« 
bridge ? - - Yes, but in coming back I passed over 

Blackfriars bridge. - - They dissolved the army 

disperser^v. 
as soon as it was resolved that the campaign was 
over. - In France they drink coffee as soon as 

on prendre le 
dinner is over. - - You may go and walk when 

(by the fut.) <& 

the rain is over. - - They fought well, and the 

(by the fut,) 
battle was soon over. 



380 

With is rendered by dans, when it is used before nouns 
denoting the purpose, design, or motive of the agent : ex. 
// le jit dans Vattente d'etre He did it ivith an expecta- 

b\cn recompense , tion of being well re- 

warded. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION. 

He poisoned his brother ivith the hope of 

empoisonner ,v . 
'uheriting his estates. - - My brother is gone to 
heriter,Y. de bien,m. 
your house with the design of scolding you 

gronder,v. 
well. — He who beats another with the intention of 

killing him, is a murderer (at the) bottom of his 

cm 
heart. - - He did it with the intention of pleasing 

you, and not with any design of hurting you. - - 1 
went last week to Mr. Olympus, with the expecta- 
tion of receiving the money which I lent him a 
month ago, but he was not at home. - - I live with 
the hope of receiving it (one time or another.) - - 
He said so, with a design of deceiving you, if he 
could. 

With must be made by de after the following verbs, to 
starve, to die, to do, to dispense, to meddle, to encompass, to 
load, to cover, to strike, and those denoting fulness : like- 
wise after the following adjectives, amorous 9 charmed, 
pleased, displeased, endowed, eye. : ex. 

Elle meurt de froid et de She dies with cold and 

faim, hunger. 

Je suis content de ce que I am pleased with what I 

fai, have. 

EXERCISE UPON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

Lazy people (ought to) die with hunger ana 
devoir ; v 



381 

cold. - - The winter was so severe, that 1 was dying 

rrith cold. - - They are so rich that they do not know 

what to do with their money - - I hope you will dis- 
que U7^ 

pense me with that disagreeable (piece of work.) 

besognefi 
- - Do not meddle with my affairs, meddle with your 

own. - It is reported on all sides that that city (is to) be 

encompassed with walls. - - Do you see that wagon ? 

chariot, m. 
It is loaded iciih goods. - - Do you wish your house to 

que 
be covered with slates or tiles ? He was overwhelmed 
soitjV. iuilefi accable,nd}. 

with grief. - - The enemy, struck with terror and 

astonishment, -ran away. - - Honour me with your 
commands.--! have filled my cellar with good beer 
and excellent wine. - - Narcissus, seeing himself in a 

JYarcisse 
clear fountain, fell (in love) with his own 

deveniryV. amoiireax,B.dj . 
person. - - I am charmed with the agreeable company 

of your sister. - - As to us, little satisfied with his 

answer, w T e took other measures. - - Are you not 

nous vous 

pleased with the behaviour of your son Thomas ? - - 
satisfait^p.p. 
You would be wrong to be dissatisfied w r ith 

avoir tort de mecontent, adj . 

him, for he behaved (like an) honest man in 

se conduire y v. en 

that affair, and he is endowed with many good 

dowe,adj. 
qualities. - - The man who meddles loith nobody's 
* affairs, but quietly lives in peace, seldom makes 
himself enemies. 

With is rendered by contre after words denoting anger 
or passion ; and before nouns denoting the matter, instru- 



382 

menis, tools, or expressing how and in what manner a 
thing is done or made, it is rendered by one of the fol- 
lowing articles, a, au, a la, a /', aux, according to the 
gender and number of the following noun : ex. 

Madame votre mere est tres- Your mother is very angry 

fdchee contre vous, ivilh you. 

Une table a tiroirs, A table with drawers. 

Dessiner au crayon, a la To draw with a pencil, 

craie, with chalk. 

Se hatlre a Vepee, au pis- To fight with swords, with 

tolet, pistols. 

EXERCISE UPON THE SAME PREPOSITION. 

My brother was in 2 such 1 a passion 3 with me, that 1 
si u(7> cohere 
thought he would have beaten me. - - I believe what 
evoire,v. 

you say, but I was very angry with her when she 
told me she would not do it. - - I live near the river, 

and if you will come to see me, we will fish with a 

vouloir, v. 
net or a line. - - Your brother and my cousin 

filet, m. ligne,f. 

fought with sabres and pistols ; the former was 

sing. sing, 

wounded in his thigh, and the latter in his side. - - 

My house has been built with lime and sand. - - Did 

Miss Arnold show you the picture she has drawn 

with India ink? --.No, but she showed me her 

Chine, f. 
mother's picture done iviih chalk : I assure you it is 

crayon, m. 
very like. --Do not go so near that wall, it is newly 
ressemblant,a.d]. mur,m. 

painted with (white lead). - - I bought a penknife with 
ceruse, f. 

two blades. The Americans fought bravely 

lame. se baiire 

with the English at New-Orleans, 
JYouvelle 



383 

With is not to be expressed after some verbs, sueb as, 
io meet with, to trust with, to supply with, to reproach with, 
Sec. It is likewise to be suppressed where it expresses 
the situation, position, &c. of a person, or when it is used 
in the sense of having, holding, &c. : ex. 
11 a essuye bien des char- He has met with many 

grins, troubles. 

JVous lui fournirons tout ce We will supply him with 

dont it aura besoin, every thing he may want, 

// se promene toujour s un He always walks with a 

livre a la main, book in his hand, that 

is, having, or holding a 
book, Slc. 

EXERCISE UPON THE SAME PREPOSITION". 

He met with (so many) mortifications from his 

essuyer,v. 

sons, that through grief he fell ill and died 
de iomber,v . 

almost with despair. When you meet 

de- rencontrer,y. 

a poor man, never reproach him with his poverty, 

but endeavour to furnish him with the means 

mo yen. in. 
of immerging from his misery. - - I have trusted Mi. 

sortir,v. 
N. with my son's education, with the utmost con- 
fidence that he will answer my expectation. - - The 
New River supplies London with all the water which 

the inhabitants stand in need of. - - I reproached 

avoir besoin ,v. 
her with her ingratitude towards her benefactors. 
Tie always walks round his garden ivith a stick in his 

baton ,m. 
hand. - - Never speak to any body with your hat on 

le 
your head. - - He is represented on horseback, with 
a sword in his right hand and a horse - pistol 
Vepee arccr* pisiolet,m. 

in his left 

gttttcA^adj. 



384 

Without, (sans :) this preposition is sometimes express- 
ed (in English) by the imperfect or compound of the im- 
perfect of the verb to be, preceded by the conjunction if, 
and sometimes by but for : ex. 

Sans vous, je ne sais ce que If it were not for you, I do 
je deviendrais, not know what would 

become of me. 
Sans lui, mon frere aurait ete Had it not been for him, 
puni, my brother would have 

been punished. 
Sans elle, je serais mort de But for her, I should have 
faim, starved. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS PREPOSITION. 

Without the assistance of the Divine Providence, 
secours,m. 
what are we ? what are we capable of ? Accord- 
ing to what you tell me, and what I have heard, 

entendre, v. 
she has (a great deal) of wit and merit; and, but for 

that large scar which she has in her fore- 

grand, adj . cicatrice ,f. 
head she would be very handsome. Had it not 

been for the help of good and honest people, what 

could you have done ? If it had not been for me, 

he never would have paid you.-- Were it not for rich 

and charitable persons, what would become of the 

poor and needy ? - - Our neighbour fell into, the river, 

voisin,m. 
and but for my father, who was passing that way, he 

would have been drowned. - - Were it not for emula- 

se noyer, v. rcR. 
tion, (every thing) would languish in the world. 
tout 



SECT. VIII. 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

Most of the conjunctions are adverbs and prepositions, 
but always attended by de or que. They have been di- 



385 

vided into copulative, comparative, disjunctive, adversative, 
casual, dubitative, exceptive, conditioned, continued ive, con- 
clusive, Sec. Instead of following this arrangement, it 
will be of more importance for the scholar to understand, 
that different conjunctions require different states of Jtha 
verb. Some require the following verb in the infinitive 
mood, others in the indicative, and others again in the sub- 
junctive. 

These require the following verb in the infinitive mood. 

Mn de, in order to. 

a moms de, or ) , 

7 j > unless. 
a moms que de, ) 

Aveint de, or > . n 
a , i * > before. 

Jtvant epic de* ) 

*,lu lieu de, instead of. 

De crainte de, or ) r r r 
n ^ i } l° r tear ot. 

De peur de, \ 

Excepts de, except to. .» 

Faute de, for want of. 

JusquW, to that degree that, till 

Loin de, far from. 

Pluto I que de, rather than. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE CONJ JNCTIOXS. 

In order to learn well, we must study with (a 

on elevoir,v. 
great deal N > of attention. - - It will be impossible for 

ur 
you to learn French, unless you be diligent. - - Let us 

de 
breakfast before we begin (any thing). - - A prudent 

rien 
man (ought to, think several times, before he acts. 

He is gone to church, instead of coming with us. 

I would not do it for fear of displeasing you. --- l\c 

is capable of (every thing) except of doing good. - - 
lout 

* This is now little used. 
33 



38G 

For want of sending for a surgeon in 

envoyer chevcher,v. chirurgien,m. d 

time, he lost his arm. He carried his inso- 

pousser,v. 
lence to that degree that he spoke injurious words 

dire,w. parole,?. 

to him. - - Your cousin has humbled himself, till 

8 J humiKer,v. 
he fell (on his) knees before the idol. - - Far from 

a 
exciting them to fight, I did all that I could, in order 

a 
to prevent them. - - She would do (any thing") (in the^ 

tout an 

world, rather than speak to him. - - Rather than study, 

he loses his time, or spends it in trifles. 
passer 

The following require the verb in the indicative mood. 

Ainsi que* as. 

Tout ainsi que* just as. 

Apres que,* after that, after. 

a cause que, ) , 

71 * ? because. 

farce que, ) 

a ce que, according as, or to. 

a co?idition que, on, or upon condition that. 

a mesure que* in proportion as, as. 

Au lieu que, whereas. 

Des le moment que* the moment that. 

Aussi long-tems que,* as long as. 

Aussi loin que* as far as. 

Aussitot que, "| 

D^abord que, } * 

™ 1 ' ^*as soon as. 

Des que, \ 

Sitot que, J 

Allendu que, considering that, seeing tha. 

Comme, or ) # 

En tant que, ) 

De fagon que, 

De manure que, 

De sorte que, *> in such manner that, so that, so. 

Si bien que, 

Tellement que } 



387 

Depuis que, ever since, since. 

Puisque, since. 

De meme que, even as. 

D^oii vient que, how comes it to pass thai, iv»ty 

Lorsque, K when 

y anna, ) 

Mais, but.f 

a peine — que, hardly, scarcely — hut, or when. 

Outre que, besides that. 

Pcndmit que, j * wM& _ 

1 anais que, ) 

Peut-eire, perhaps. 

r% J ■* t though. 
{guana meme, ) & 

Set&n que. ) , ,. 

q - \ / *ac cording- as. 

Suivant que, ) 6 

Tant que* as long as. 

Que — de — ne, than, only. 

Aidant que* as much as. 

D^ aidant que, whereas, for so much as, sine?.. 

I)' autant plus que, so much the more, the m^/e, — as. 

Tout que, for all that.l 

Toute fois, yet, nevertheless. 

Toutes les fois que, every time, as often as, whenever. 

Sinon que, except that. 

Si, if, in case, whether. (Were I, Si j'etais.) 

EXERCISE UPON THESE CONJUNCTIONS 

I called at your sister's, as you had desired me. 
passer,\\ prier,v. 

- - 1 punish you as you deserve (it.) - - After you 

were gone, I began writing. - - I love you because 

you behave better than your brother. - - According 

as I see, you are very well. - - He will write to you, 

on condition that he shall speedily receive 

prompteme7d,B.dv. 

f This conjunction, when beginning a sentence, is always rendered 
by mais. In the middle of a sentence, the word but as only is always 
rendered by ne before the verb, and que after it : ex. 

Je n'ai parte a votre frere que ■ I have spoken to your brother 
aenx fois> bid twice. 

£ See rule, page 142. 



388 

your answer Li proportion as we study, we 

become learned. - - A skilful gardener pulls up 

habile arr acker,*/ 

weeds as they grow. Your brother 

mauvaise herbefi croitre,v. 

learns his lessons, whereas you do nothing. - - The 

moment that I saw you, I knew you again. - - I did 
not stay in Italy, as long as you did. - - I followed him 

(with my) eyes as far as I could. - - Jls soon as they 

des 
had taken the general, the army surrendered. - - Why 

did you give it to him, considering that you had 
promised it to me ? - - I did not come to see you, 
seeing that I did not know that you were ill. - - 
You (look at) me, as if I had taken your book. - - 

regarder^v. 
1 will lend you my horse, as you are my friend. 

So you will not come when I call you ? He 

beat him so that he almost killed him. - - - - 

Your mother is quite altered, since I saw her 

change ,p.p. 

last. You must stay at home, since you 

demierement^&w , au logis, 

are not well. - - The thing happened even as I had 

foreseen it. - - How comes it to pass that 1 have not 
seen your friend until now ? - - Why, in proportion as 

we grow older, do we not grow wiser ? When 

devtnir,v. 
rou are going to undertake an affair of importance, 

permit me to tell you, that you (ought to^ consult 

de 
your friends before you begin it. When she had 

done speaking, she (fell asleep.) Did you not see 

s y endormh\y . 
Mr. Brown this morning ? « - Yes, but 1 could not speak 



380 
to him. Sometimes those who meddle with our 

affairs but to serve us, are those who do us most 

pour le plus 

harm. The misfortunes of others seem to us 

tort.m. sembleVyV. 

but a dream in comparison to our own. - - If you 

songe^m. 
could give me but half of the money you owe me, I 

should be (very much) obliged to you. Beside thai 

he does not apply as he should, he is often absent 
refl. 

from school. We were hardly arrived, when it 

began to rain. While you lose your time, your 

a 

brother improves fast. Play on the harpsichord, 

beaucoup,B.dv. clavecin,m. 

while I write my exercise. - - Perhaps the master will 
forgive me. - - Tfiough you should cheapen for 

marchander 9 v. 
two hours, I could not abate sixpence. - - Our father 

punishes and rewards us according as we deserve. 

le 
Speak as long as you please, I will not grant you 

what you ask me. - - He had rather do harm 

aimer j\\ mieux,adv. 

to his companions than (be doing) nothing. If 

faire 7 v. 

vou loved to study, as much as you love to play, I 
a 

should have (no occasion) to complain. I avoid 

aucun sujet.m. £titer 9 Y. 

slanderers, as much as I fear them. You may 

mcdisard.m. 

believe me, for so much as I was present when he 

said so. This proceeding was the more extraor- 
dinary, as it was contrary to the laws of the king- 
dom. - - The belief of another life appears to 

croyancefi 
me so much the more conformable to truth, as it is 
the more neces.-arv to virtue - Virtue reigns so 
33* 



300 

much the more sovereignly, as it does not - reign by 
force and fear. - - For all that he is rich, I cannot 

esteem him. All men fseek after "> riches, and 

rechercher,v. 
yet we see few rich men happy. - - I see the king and 

queen every time I go to Windsor. - - He interrupts 

me as often as I speak. - - Whenever I go to London, I 

meet him. — She said nothing to me except that it 

was impossible (for her) to do what you required of 

lui,pro. de vouloir,v. 

her. - - I know not whether he would come, even though 

you should desire him. - - In case Mr. S. calls 

passer ,v. 
here, tell him I am not at home. - - If you do it, you 

will be punished. - - Tell me sincerely whether he 

did it or not. - - We should spare ourselves 

s'epargner,v. 
many troubles, were we more prudent. 
peinef 

The conjunctions that have this mark * affixed, as it 
appears in the preceding ones, when followed, in English, 
by a verb in the present of the indicative mood, and con- 
nected with another verb denoting futurity, require the 
verb, which, in English, is put in the present, to be ren- 
dered in French by the future. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE* 

You will be rewarded just as you deserve. - 

After you have done your exercises, you shall (go out.) 

devoir ,rn. 

- - I will explain these rules to you, as we read them 

- - Tiie moment that you burn this letter, the danger 
will be over. - - We will follow you as far as you go. 

- -As long as you (keep company with) those people, 

frequenter^, gens, 

never come to my house. - - We will (set out) as soon 

as we have dined. - - As you deserve, you will be 

It 



391 

rewarded. - - Send me Miss White, when she has 

done writing. - - You will write the words accord* 

fini,p.p.de 
mg as I dictate them. - - Jls long as you behave 

se comporter y v. 
well, you will be dear tc me. In short, said this 

good king, I shall only (think myself) happy in as much 

se entire 
as I cause the happiness of my people. 
faire 

It has been remarked in the degrees of comparison, 
that every comparative must be attended by the conjurc- 
tion que, than ; it must now be observed, that, if it pre- 
cede a verb in the infinitive, que is to be followed by de. 
But if the verb be neither in, nor can be turned into the 
infinitive, the conjunction must then be attended by ne ; 
that is, que before the noun or pronoun, and ne before the 
verb : ex. 

II taut mieux etre malheu- It is better to be unfortunate 

reux que d'etre coupable, than criminal. 

Mon pere est revenu pin- My father came back soon- 

tot que nous ne Vatten- er than we expected 

dions } him. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

It is more pleasing to enjoy good health, 

agrea 5 /e, adj. 
than to possess a large fortune. - - It is harder (to 
grandad], de 

be revenged) of an enemy, than forgive him. 

se vengerjY. 

It is better to (make a sacrifice of) a limb, said the 

sacrifier y v, 
surgeon, than to let him die. - - When the thunder 

roars, it is less dangerous to be in an open field, 

grander jr. 

than to take shelter under a tree. - - Should you 

se mettre devoir 

not apply more than you do ; you, especially, who 
refl. 



392 

(are to) be useful to your country ? - - - That would 
give me more pleasure than you imagine. - - Did you 

refl. 
not receive your goods sooner than you thought ? 
- - How many people can say to themselves, Had I 

se dire, v. 
employed my time better than I did when I was 

young, I should be (in good circumstances) now. 

a mon aise 
Diseases come faster than they go away. 

s*en retourner,v. 

The following require the verb in the subjunctive mcod 

Mn que, > th [n Qrder (h tQ tfae pnd tfaat 

Four que , ) 3 ; 

Jhant que,* before. 

Au or en cas que, in case that, if, suppose that. 

A moins que* 

Excepte que. 

q- i , L , ' > unless, till. 

01 ce west que, ' 

Que — ne, 

Bien que, ^ 

Encore que, > though, although, for all that, as. 

Quoique, ) 

Be crainte que* ) , , r r 

De peur qm, \ lest > for fear - 

Dieu veuille que, God grant. 

Plaise; or pint a Dieu que, please God, or would to God. 

a Dieu ne plaise, God forbid. 

Hormis que, ) ,, \ 

Hors que, \ save that > Unless > earce P t - 

Jusqtfa ce que* till, until. 

Loin que, far from. 

Moyennant que, > Al . , - . 

Pourvu que, J Save that > P r0Vlded *at. 

Nonobslant que, notwithstanding that. 

Fourpeu que, how little soever, however little. 

Sam que, without that. 

Soit que, whether, — or. • 

* These conjunctions require the negation ne before the verbs follow- 
ing them : ex. 

A moins qu'i/ ne lefasse, Unless he does it. 

De crainte, or de peur qu'ils ne vienncnt, For fear* or lest they come 



303 

Suvposons que, suppose, let us suppose that. 

Tant s'enfaut que je, I am so far from. 

Tend shnfaut qu'il or elle, he or she is so far from. 

Tant s 'en feud que nous, or vous, we, or you are so far from. 

EXERCISE UPON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. 

I will explain to you every difficulty, that you 

may not be disheartened in your undertaking. -- - 

decourager,v, 
Carry that money to Mrs. Nolle, in order that she 

may pay the writing-master when he comes. A 

(by the fut.) 
wise and prudent man lives with economy when 

young, to the end that he may enjoy the fruit of 

his labour when he is old. Before you begin an 

(by the fut.) 
action, consider well, and see whether you can bring 

en venir 
it about ; for, it is the end thai crowns the work. 
a bout ceuvre,m. 

Li ceise you want my assistance, call me, I shall be 

near you. If I do not call upon you this afternoon, 

1 will write to you. Suppose you should lose your 

friends, what would become of you ? You will 

never be respected, unless you forsake the bad 

abandonner 3 v. 

company you keep. You cannot finish (to-night,) 

ce soir 
unless I help you. I will not lend it you, unless 

you promise me to return it to her, as soon as you 
de rendre.Y. 

can. I shall not cease to importune you, till you 

(by the fut.) de 

have forgiven me. They are not happy, though 

they be rich. The general arrived yesterday morn- 
ing (at the) camp, weary and tired, but very season- 

lets, adj. 
ably ; immediately he gave his orders to 

pomr,p 



394 

begin the action, though he had not yet all his 

engager^. 

troops. - - - Although you have a good memory, this 

is not enough to learn any language whatever : 

poar y p. 

you must (make use) of your judgment. For all 

se servir,v.ref\. 
that she has no fortune, I do not love her the less for 

it. As zealous as he appears, I know one 

action of his life which is neither Christian nor 

equitable. I lend you my violin, although you did 

not return it to me the other day. - - My mother 

rendre^v. 
will come to see you, for fear you should forget to 

de 
go to the play with her. I will not give you 

that penknife, lest you should make a bad use of it. 

I will go to London to-morrow, for fear he 

should come himself. I will write again to 

your brother to-morrow, lest he should not 

(present of subj.) 
have received my last letter. - - We avoided an engage- 
ment for fear we should be taken, their force being 

superior to ours. God grant you be not disappointed 

tromper,v. 
in your hopes ! Would to God I had been there ! I 

would have conquered or perished. God forbid I 

vainer e^w. 
should blame your conduct. Your business never 

will be done properly, unless you do it yourself. I 

shall not go out to-day, except you go with me. 

They fought with fury on both sides, 

se battre y v. acharnement 

till night came. I shall not set out, till I have 

or- 

dined. I am going to write, till we go out. Far 

from hating him, I wish him all kinds of prosperity. 



39,5 
- - I forgive you this time, provided you promise me 

to be lazy no more, and pay more attention to 

dt faire 9 v. 

what you are told. - - I will give you leave to dance, 

permission de 
provided you give me your word of honour 

parole ,£ 

not to overheat yourself. Why did you tell 

de s'e chauffer^. 
me my father was arrived, notwithstanding you 

knew the contrary ? - - He is so quick, that 

prompt* adj. 
however little he is contradicted, he (flies into a passion) 

s'emporter,v. 
in an instant. However Utile you give her, 

she is of so 2 good 3 a 1 temper 4 , that she is always 

natur el, 111. 

pleased. Can you touch it witlioid my brother 

content^ adj. 

perceiving it ? Suppose w r e dine here to-day, 

shtpercevoir de 

and to-morrow at our house. I am so far 

from blaming you for assisting him, that, (on the 

(comp.ofthe pres.inf. ) cm 
contrary,) I (very much) admire your conduct. 

He is so far from despising her, that, on the con- 
trary, he respects and honours her. It is so 

far from raining, that, on the contrary, I think 
we shall have dry and hot weather during all this 
week. 

The conjunction si, if, or whether, instead of being re 
peated m a sentence, is more elegantly rendered by que y 
with the verb following it in the subjunctive mood, as, in- 
stead of saying, 
Si vous venez chez moi, ei If you call upon me and do 

si vous ne me trouvez pas, not find me at home, 

It is more elegant to say, 



390 

>Si voits v°nez chez mot et 
que vous ne me trouviez 
pas, &c. , 

Que must also be repeated in the second part of a 
sentence, as well as the pronoun, when there is a con- 
junction in the first pait of it ; in this case, que requires 
the following verb to be put in the same mood as the pre- 
ceding : ex. 

Des que je Vaurai vu et que As soon as I have seen him 

je lui aurai parU, je vous and spoken to him, I will 

leferai savoir y let you know it. 

QuoiquHl soli plus riche que Though he be richer than 

vous, et quHl ait de meil- you, and have better 

leurs amis, friends. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

If your father do not arrive to-day, and if you 

que y c 

want money, I will lend you some. 

avoir besoin de 

If you should see your sister, and speak to 

her, &c. If you study and take pains, I 

assure you that you will learn the French 

language in a very short time. Whether 

vou sing, or dance, do it with grace and atten- 
tion. If you love me, and (be willing to) 

oblige me, do not go to France with her. - - If men 

were wise, and would follow the dictates of 

lumiere,f. 
reason, they would (save themselves) many sor- 

s'epargner,v. : 

rows. If you meet my brother, and he speak 

to you, do 9 not answer. - - So that you saw and 

spoke to her. Though you have good relations, 

parental, 
your merit be known, and you do not want 

manquer de 
friends, your projects will not succeed without your 



broths [stance. - - «4s soon as I have dressed 

myself, and breakfasted, I will go to see him. 

While you play and lose your money, your sister is 
learning her lesson. T> e must pity him who has 

celui 
no talent, and only despise him who has no virtue. 

Play on the organ, while 1 read my brother's 

letter and answer him. Beside that he never 

studies and is always in the country, he has not 

so much wit as his sister. I will explain to you 

every difficulty (hi order) that you may take 

courage and learn well. Though you should have 

the best master in England, and learn ail the rules - 

of the grammar, if you do not put them in practice, 

you will never speak good French. God grant 

you may succeed in your pursuits, and obtain the 

entreprisefi 

favour you solicit so ardently ! Whether 

Soit que 
God (raise up) thrones, or pull them down ; 

elever 7 v. abaisser,y. ur> 

whether he communicate his power to princes, ' 

soil que puissance.?. 

or withdraw it to himself, and only leave therr. 

retirerjV. 
their own weaknes ; he teaches them their duty 

in a sovereign manner. Whether you speak or 

dc,v. 

(hold your tongue,) you will obtain nothing from 

se laire,v. 

me ; b'a. whatever you may say, speak so that you 

may never offend any one. - - Your brother told me 

per sonne. 
he was young, and was* but twenty years old wnen 

he was made a captain ; I think he was better in- 
ijOn plus 

* See the remark after the verb etre, to be, page 133 
34 



398 

formed and had more experience than you have. - - 

tnsiruit </?> 

I can assure you, that both our officers and soldiers 

have behaved nobly, and performed prodigies of 

faire 
valour, though the enemies were superior in num- 
ber, and had the advantage of the ground. 

terrein. 

It is here necessary to observe, that verbs denoting 
wish, will, command) desire , doubt, fear, ignorance, entreaty , 
persuasion) pretension, surprise) &c. always require the 
conjunction que after them, with the following verb in the 
subjunctive mood. 

In short, in those dispositions of mind where the will 
' is chiefly concerned, or whenever we express a thing 
with some degree of doubt or hesitation) then the verb, 
wKich, in English, is put in the infinitive mood, the par- 
ticiple active, or the future tense, must, in French, be 
put in the subjunctive mood : ex. 

Croyez-vous qiiil soil hon- Do you believe him to be 

nete ? honest ? 

Je chute que vous lefassiez, I doubt of your doing it. 

Je ne- crois pas qu'elle I do not believe she will 

viennC) come. 

See FalloiV) and the rules after it, page 316. 
Pay the utmost attention to the 

EXERCISE UPON THIS AND THE PRECEDING RULES. 

You wish him to pay you : he has no money ; I am 

obliged to lend him some every day. I do not 

de 

think tbat true philosophy may be less useful to 

women than men ; but I remark, that the most 

remarque^v. 
part of those who meddle (with it) are but 

se meler ',v. en 

very bad philosophers, without becoming better 

wives for it. - - I do not believe that your mother will 



399 

arrive to-day. She wishes you may succeed 

pouvoir,v. 

in ail your undertakings. I fear* she (will go 

craindre,v. s'en ai- 

away) without speaking to me. - - I much fear Jie 
/e?%v. 

will come sooner than you expect him. Do 

cettendre,?. 
you not say you are surprised that William has not 

GuiUaiime 
spoken to you . (ever since) last week. - - For my part, 
depuis Quant a moi, 

I am not surprised at it, for he is always pouting. 

bouder,v. 

- - Do you think he will succeed, and obtain the place 

croire 7 y. 
he aims at ? - - You have had much trouble, and we 
aspimr,v. peine 

all fear lest hereafter she should give you much 

(pres. of subj.) 
more. - - If you believe him to be your friend, why 

then do not you follow his advice ? - - It is necessary 

for you to go thither, and assure him, that I am very 
que 

thankful for all his kindness. I wonder that 

reconnaissani de 

Mr. R. has not yet asked your sister in marriage. 

[f you see her and she speaks to you, do not answer 

her. -- Order her to do it. - - Do you imagine 

Dire y v. sHmaghier,v. 

we are sure they will come to-night ? Do you 

think it -is possible for you to (bring it about ?* 

* croire^v. de en venir a boui,v. 

- - It is just we should suffer, since we deserve it. - - 

I do not say I have seen it. - - He (was afraid) lest 

craindre,v. que 

you should come while he was (gone out). 

sortir,Vk 

* The verbs craindre and apprehender when attended with no ne- 
gation, require that ne should be placed before the verb which fol- 
'ows : ex. Je crams quHl ne moire, I fear he will die. 



400 

Oui master has ordered, that we should (get up) to- 

se lever 
morrow morning eail/. - - You did not think that she 

(wanted to) deceive you, when she told you that 
vouloiryV. 
- I wonder you should doubt, that it is youi 
Ure surprise . ce 

daughter who told it me. Do you think my mother 

will let us go to the ball next week ? — Were Mr. S. 

discreet and willing to undertake that affair, I 

would communicate it to him immediately. - - It 

sur le champ 
will be better for you to go and speak to him your- 
self while he is in town, because I do not doubt* of 

his undertaking it. - - Were I certain that you would 

ne with the subj. pres. 
speak to him about it, I would desire him to dome 

prier de 

and dine with us to-morrow ; for I (am to) see him to- 
ucn 

night at his brother's. - - I am certain that he will 
satisfy you : are you certain he will satisfy me ? - - 
Your uncle is very glad you have written to your 

father. - - I will give you no rest unless you are re- 

que ne 
conciled with your mother. - - I do not believe it is 
she who has done it. - - Do you believe it ? - - My 

brother is not well, and I doubt (very much) of 

fort y 
his coming to see us before next spring. - - - 

Do you think he is on the road ? - - - I doubt 

cn,p.«/^ route ? 

whether he will come before next week. 

sidvant y ndj. 
I did not know you had studied geography so long 

* After the verbs D outer and JSfier, when these verbs are attended 
with a negation, ne is employed with the verb which follows : ex. 

Je ne nie pas que cela ne soit 3 I do not deny that it is so. 



401 

It must be observed, that after the verb voirfoir, tlie verb 
io have is not expressed, but rendered in French by que. 
It must also be observed, that the sign of the future tense, 
shall, when it refers to the will of a person, and meaning, 
I choose, 1 do not choose, do you choose 't &c. must be ren- 
dered in French by the present tense of the indicative 
mood of the verb voidoir, according to the number and 
person, with the following verb in the subjunctive mood : 
ex. 

Je veux qu'i/ fasse cela, I will have him do that. 

Je veux que vous me mon- You shall show me that 
triez cette lettre, letter, that is to say, I 

choose you should show, 

&c. 
Voulez-vous que je danse ? Shall I dance ? that is, do 

you choose, &c. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

You would have your daughter return to- 

vouloir^v. revenir,v. 

morrow, but that is impossible. 1 will have your 

father know what you have done : you must stay 

resieVyV. 

here till he comes. Your mother would have you 

come directly : why do you not come, then ? - - - I 
absolutely intend that she shall go thither 

vouloir,v. 
directly, and tell him, that, whether he be ill or 

se porter 
well, I will have him set out as soon as he lias re- 
ceived my letter. I will have you see my house, 

and tell me what you think of it. She shall not go 

penseryV. 
into the country, unless I go with her. - - My father 

would have me and my brother walk all the 

faire a pied,v. 
way. — Your sister shall go with me to Croydon, and 
chemin y m. 
not you. - - Your father will have you go to France 

in a month ; 1 am very glad of it ; however, I would 

34* 



402 

not have you do things too precipitately. Shall 

my brother show you his translation ? - - Your brother 

asked me whether he might go home to-morrow : 1 

told him he might go whenever he thought he 

crdire y v. 

should be wanted ; but you shall remain here till 

you have learned your lessons. - - I know a gen- " 

tie man who is going to Paris ; shall I tell him to call 

passer 
upon you ? 1 would not have you go to Germany 
chez 
without understanding French well, as that language 

will enable you to learn German much sooner than 

mettre en Stat de bien 

you expect. - - Your brother shall not go out to-day. 

shiiimdre. 
- - Will you (be so good as) to go and carry that letter 

avoir la horde de ucn 

to the post ? No, I cannot leave my play. But I tell 

you, that you shall (go there ;) I would have you pay 

faire,v. 
more attention to what you are told. 

Qui , que, or dont, preceded by a superlative, require 
the following verb in the subjunctive mood, and when 
qui stands as a nominative to a verb, denoting a condi- 
tion, it also requires the following verb to be put in the 
subjunctive mood : ex. 

Cest la plus belle femme qui She is the handsomest wo- 

puisse se voir, man that can be seen. 

Cest le plus mechant gargon He is the most wicked boy 

que je connatsse 9 that I know. 

Je veux line femme qui soit I will have a wife who is 

belle, handsome : 

that is, I will not have any woman for a wife, but on 

condition she be handsome. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE. 

Do you say you are surprised, that he has not 



403 

yet written to you ? I assure you it is not to be won- 

s'elonner 

dered at ; for, he is the most negligent man I know. 

It is necessary for you to go thither, and assure 

que 
him that he has done nothing that should 

devoirjV. 

(make 2 me 1 angry 3 ). He is the most charitable man 

f etcher, v. 
we have in the neighbourhood ; his purse is open 
to the poorest men he can find. Did 

you not tell me you (sought for) a master who had 

chercher,v. 
a good pronunciation, and was endowed with (a 

done de 

great deal) of patience ? - - When a father is capable 

of teaching his children, he is the best master whom 
they can have. - - I know nobody that improves 

fairs des progres 
more than Miss K ; and when she was learning 

French, had she learned it by rules, she would speak, 

It 

write and translate now much better than Miss S. , 

though she was two years in France. - - Has not your 
brother some friends whom he can trust ? - - Your 

se fier a,v. 
father has bought the finest horse that I have ever 
seen. - - Is there auy lady that appears more reasonable 
than she does ? - - If you ever choose a friend, I wish 

you may choose one whom you esteem, and who 

may be an honest man. - - It (will be better for) you to 

valoir mieax 
go and speak to him yourself, instead of writing to 

him, because I do not doubt of his undertaking and 
(bringing about) your affair ; he is the most diligent 
venir a bout de 
and the most careful man we have in this country. 

Before you begin any tiling of importance, consult 



404 

somebody who is your friend, and on whom you can 

rely; - - - Do you know any body who goes to 
/aire fond,v. 

France ? - - I have something to send to my sister. - 
If you do not follow my advice, believe me, it will 
be the greatest misfortune that can happen to you. 
- - Babylon was the finest city that ever was built. 

The best reason I can give you is, that I 

pouvoir,v. 
(was hot) well. - - H you lend me a horse, lend me 
se porteVyV. 
one that goes well. The God who has created us, 

and who created the universe, is the only one 

sew/, adj. 
to whom we owe homage, and the only one whom we 
(ought to) fear. 



SECT. IX. 
OF INTERJECTIONS. • 

Interjections, as before observed, serve to express the 
sudden emotions of the soul. 

There are several sorts, viz. 
Of joy, grief j pain, admiration, aversion, silence, calling, 
encouraging, warning, &e. such as, 

Sllons, gai I come, be cheerful. 

ca courage ! come, come on ! 

Bon ! good ! 

J!h,mon Dieu! oh, my God ! 

JSx, oindci ! ay, marry ! 

Ha, quelle joie !■ O, joy ! 

6 cieU O Heaven ! 

Fi,fi ! fy upon, shame ! 

Hold, ho ! ho there ! 

He las ! alas ! 

Malheur a ! wo to ! 

Misericorde ! bless me ! 

Prenez garde, gave ! have a care 



405 

Pair, chul, si ! hist, hush T 
Silence ! silence ! 

Come, friends, Jet us rejoice ! Good ! here are 

se rejouir,v. 

news for you, brother ! Fy, fy ! Robert, you* do 

not think of what you say. - - Oh ! how 1 lovely 6 a 4 

pcnser^v. a que 

virtue 5 is 3 modesty 2 ! Why do you not endeavour to 

s J efforcer,v.de 
acquire it ? Alas ! who can express the torments 

I suffer here ! Man without religion, never 

having his heart or mind at peace, can, alas ! 

esprit ^m. en, p. 

be but a very unhappy creature. Wo to you ! 

usurers, misers, unjust possessors of (other people's) 
U3i(rier 9 m.avare,m. autrui, pro. 

goods, hearken to these words : The treasures 
bien 9 m. ecouter^v. up parole,?. 

of iniquity (will be of no service) to you. - - O 

ne servir cle rien 
(lazy people,) go to the ant ; consider what she 

paresseux fourmi 9 f. 

does, and learn from her, wisdom and industry. - - 

Bless me ! I am undone ] - - Hush there ! silence ! 

perdu, p.p. 
- - Oh ! the dismal effects which laziness pro- 

funeste 9 adj. 
duces ! - - How 1 tremendous 8 an 2 office 3 is 7 that 
Que terrible, ad}. le ur* 

cf 4 a 5 judge 6 ! What wisdom, what integrity, what 

knowledge, w T hat sagacity of mind, what experience 

science, i. 

(are required !) 

ne faut-il pas avoir 9 v. 

REMARKS and EXERCISES ox the WORDS 

cle, a, and pour. 

Having, in this manner, gone through the respective 
parts of speech, there will be no occasion for a syntax 



406 

h will, however, be necessary to give some rules for as- 
certaining the proper use of the particle de or a, and the 
preposition pour, before a verb in the infinitive mood, and 
then to point out, by way of exercise, some idiomati- 
cai expressions that most frequently occur in the French 
tongue. # 

When two verbs come together in a sentence, the lat- 
ter, having no subject expressed nor understood, must be 
put in the infinitive mood, whether the English sign to, 
be prefixed or not. 

In the following cases, the infinitive mood must never 
be preceded by a particle. 

First, when the verb in the infinitive stands nomina- 
tive to another verb : ex. 

Aimer est un verhe, To love is a verb. 

Secondly, after the following verbs, oiler, croire, devoir, 
faire, ilfaut, savoir, valoir, mieux, venir, pouvoir, oser,vou- 
loir, and penser when rendered by to be like or near. 

EXERCISE ON THIS RULE. 

To know how to give seasonably, is a talent every 

body has not. To be able to live with one's self, 

and to know how to live with others, are the two 

great sciences of life. - - I had rather do it 

aimer mteux,y. 
now than later. Why dare you not undertake it ? 

I think you might succeed. He says he will lend 

pouvoir,v. reussir,v. 
you his gun with all his heart, because you know 

fusil ,m. 
how to make use of it. - - Aristotle, though he was 

ujn se servir,v. 
so great a philosopher, was never able to penetrate the 

cause of that prodigy. - - Tell him that he may set 

* The great number of idiomatieal expressions in the French lan- 
guage has long been considered as an almost insuperable difficulty in the 
way of its easy acquirement ; however, this difficulty is daily decreas- 
ing ; these peculiar expressions are now giving way to a regular con- 
structions and are very little used by the best writers. 



407 

out when (he pleases.) - - You never could 

il lui plaira,v. pouvoir,v. 
come more seasonably. - - We (are to) go to Vauxhall 
to-morrow. I am going to see your brother. 

(Is it not better) to set out now, than wait, 

Valoir mieux,v. de attendre,v. 

any longer ? If you think to oblige her, 

pkus croire,v. 

you mistake. - - We (were to) have had a ball yester- 

se tromperjv. 

day, but my sister was not well. You did very 

right, for you ought not to speak to him. I 

bien,ady. car ,c. devoir, v. 

(had like) to have fallen twenty times (in) coming 

penser,v. u?> 

hither - - To instruct, please, and move the pas- 

emouvoir, 
sions, are the three principal qualifications requisite in 

qualite necessaire 

an orator. - - If you would read this book, I could 

voidoir,v. j)ouvoir,y. 

lend it to you for four or five days. - - He wishes to 

voidoir 
learn without taking pains. 

peine,?. sing. 

The particle de is put before a verb in the infini- 
tive mood : First, when any of the following words, 
of, from, or with, are used before the participle active of 
any verb. (See the rule upon the participle active, 
page 327.) 

Secondly, after a noun substantive joined immediately 
to a verb, either without any article at all, or with the 
following articles, le, la, or les. 

Thirdly, after the following adjectives, decent, glad } 
impossible, necessary, sorry, worthy, vexed, and the like. 

Fourthly, after the following verbs : to advise, to ap- 
prehend, to bid, to cease, to commend, to conjure, to coun- 
sel, to defend, to defer, to deserve, to desire, to endeavour, 
to entreat, to fear, to hasten, to long, to order, to permit, to 
persuade, to pray, to promise, to propose, to refuse, to remem- 



408 

her, to threaten, to tell, to warn, to undertake, &c and the 
greater part- of the reflected verbs. 

And lastly, after the conjunction que, preceded by the 
comparative degree. 

EXERCISE UPON THIS RULE 

I have desired your brother to lend me some 
prier.v. 

money. My mother ordered me to tell vou to 

ordonner,v. 
go and speak to her directly. Did you not permit 

him to go out this morning ? I am surprised to 

soriir,v, 
find you so ill. - - I have not desired you to play, - - 

Bid your sister to send me my book. We 

Eire, v. a 

(were afraid) of displeasing you. What do you 

craindre 

advise me to do in such a case ? - - My sister 

comeiller,v. 

and I intend to (call upon) you on Friday next 

j)asser,v.chez,v. ay 

I am very glad to hear you are better. - - 

apprendre,v. 
She does not pretend to speak French as well as 

se piquer,v. de 

you. - - We were tired of repeating to you the same 
things so often. - - If you finish your exercise soon 
j'ou will . have the pleasure of walking, while the 

others will have the trouble of working. — Hasten 

se hater 
to tell her not to go thither (any more ;) for, she 
cle de phis,&dv. 

would be in danger of losing her life. - - En- 

la 
deavour to please your masters by your application to 

a 
study. --Do not you remember having said you 
would carry me to the camp ? - - Do not they 
mmerjr. 



409 

deserve to be encouraged, who undertake to serve 
meriter y v* 

the public ?-- We are all glad to hear you have 

overcome your enemies : we should have been sorry 
to have heard the contrary. - - What a fool 3 you 1 are 8 

apprendre, uo^ 

to grieve so, when you have so much reason to 

s'qffliger,v. 

rejoice ! Never endeavour to speak French unless 

you have a good pronunciation. - - I shall never refuse 
to do you a service (as long as) it is in my power. 

rendre^v. ^cn 

Have you a mind to do what you have pro- 

ujn envie, 

mised me ? I cannot give you the book you asked 

me for, my brother has not (thought fit) to send 

don j u g er & propose . 

h me back again. - - I desired you to bring your 

sister with you ; why did you not ? J - - I forbid 

defendre^v. 
you to speak or write to him (any more.) - - Would 

davaniage^dv. 
you not be very glad to read and speak Italian ? - - 

Condemn the opinion of no one hastily, but 

endeavour to regulate your own by the line of 
s'efforceTjW 

truth. - - Who can hinder me from speaking or 
virile,?. empecher,v. 

writing to her ? - - (Give 1 me 2 leave 1 ) to tell you, thai 
Permeitre,v. 

you do very wrong to disoblige your aunt. lie 

mai, adv. 
(was no + contented) to demolish the temple and pull 
s? conterder 9 y. c- 

down the statues, but, Sec. - - Is there (any tiling) 
6«7/(re,v. rien 

more glorious than to change anger into friendship ? 

* See the rale, page 116. 
\ Do it is understood, and must be expressed in French. 

35 



410 

- - (I long) to see your mother, and tell her all 
11 me tarde,v. 
that I think (about it.; 
era,pro. 



The particle a is to be placed before a verb in the in- 
finitive mood : First, after the auxiliary verb, avoir, to 
have, immediately followed by a substantive or an ad- 
verb, expressing a futurity in the action : ex. 

Tai plusieurs lettres a ecrire, I have many letters to write. 
Secondly, after nouns substantive joined to the verb avoir, 
or nouns adjective joined to the verb etre, signifying to 
be addicted, apt, bent, diligent, disposed, dreadful, easy, fit, 
hard, inclined, quick, ready, subject, used, &c. 

Thirdly, after the following adjectives, admirable, good 9 
dexterous, handsome, scarce , the last, the first, the second. 
&c. 

And, lastly, after the following verbs, to amuse, to aspire 
or aim at, to begin, to condemn, to continue or go on, to com- 
pel or force, to design or destine, to dispose, to employ 01 
spend, to encourage, to engage, to excite, to exhort, to help, to 
induce, to invite, to learn, to please, to serve, to take a pleas- 
ure or delight in or to, to leach, to think, Slc. 

EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING VERBS. 

Come hither, Paul, I have something to communi- 
cate to you. - - We have much to fear in our present 
situation, and a (great many) hazards to run. - - I 
cannot go to the play to-night ; for, I have five or 

six visits to pay. Is there any thing pleasanter 

rendre,v. agreable 

to behold than the flux and reflux of the sea ? We 

voir 
fought to) learn how to subdue our passions, 

uor* subjuguer,v. 

conquer our desires, and suffer patiently the most 

cruel misfortunes. She is always the first to 

disgrace,?. 
(find fault with) what I do. - - Do not gather 

irouver a re dire a 



411 

that apple, it is not yet good to eat. Mr N. told 

me you had a country-house to let. Mr. F. is a 

iouer,v. 
very agreeable man, always ready to serve his friends ; 

but he has the misfortune to be inclined to gaming. 

adonne jeu,m. 

- - - Your master does not love you, because you are 

not diligent in learning your lesson. We had for a 

long time nothing to eat but the fruits which we had 

gathered. - - - The greatest part of men spend their time 

either in doing nothing, or doing what they ought not to 

do. What you say of her is very hard to believe. 

difficile, ndj. 

Tell him, I have no complaint to make about his eon- 

de 

duct. Why do you oblige her to ask my pardon, 

me, pro. 

since she is not inclined to ^do it herself ? I believe 

she takes a delight in tormenting me. - - Life is so short, 
that we should employ all our days in preparing our- 
selves for the other world. - - There is no more danger 

to fear. Use yourself, said a father to his son, to 

S'accoatumer,v. 
practise virtue : that alone will help you to bear with 

supporter jr. 
patience all the vicissitudes of fortune. Never amuse 

yourself in reading bad books. - - You can never spend 

passer,v. 
your time better than in reading and studying the history 

of your own country. -- Learn to speak well ; but, above 

all, to speak truth. - - That science which Caches us to 

dire, v. 
nee things as they are, is highly worthy of cultivation. 

bien 
- - An honest man always takes pleasure in obliging 

his friends. Does your master teach you how to 



412 

translate English into French ? Do you begin to 

translate 2 French 3 well 1 ? - - Why did you not oblige 

him to pay you what he owes you ? Why do you 

not (get ready) to set out with us ? - - - I love to 

s'«ppre/er,v. * 
discourse with polite and sensible people. 

$* entretenir ,v . sense 

N. B. For the sake of euphony, the following verbs, 
to begin, to continue, to constrain, to engage, to exhort, to 
compel, ox force, to endeavour, to oblige, may be succeeded 
by de, or a, as most convenient. 

The preposition pour is to be used before a verb in the 
infinitive mood, when it expresses the cause, the design, 
or the end, and then the English particle to may be ex- 
pressed by in order to, to the end, or for to. This prepo- 
sition is also used after the adverbs, enough, on purpose, 
too, too much, or less ; and before an infinitive in the 
beginning of a period. 

EXERCISE ON THESE RULES. 

I will do (every thing) in my power to please him. - - 

Good rules are useless, if the attention, industry, and 

assiduile, 
patience of the scholar be not put into practice to learn 
them. - - Mrs. B. has (too much) pride to confess she 

(is in the wrong.) --To understand 2 geography 3 well 1 , 

avoir tort 
we must, &c. - - I assure you that I came (on purpose) 
on expres 

to see you. She will do all that is in her power to 

oblige you, and prove to you that she is truly your 
friend. - - Th$ wicked live to die, but the righteous 

die to live. She has vanity enough to believe all 

you tell her. - - What makes the misfortunes of kings, 
is not to have friends bold enough to tell them the 

truth. ---I wrote to you some rime ago, to let 

faire,v 



413 
you know that your brothers were arrived. - - - He 
promised me, that he would do (every thing) to de- 
serve the honour of your protection. I sent yes- 
terday my servant to your aunt's, to desire her to send 2 
me 1 back 2 again 2 the book I lent her a month ago, but 

she was not at home. We did all that we could 

f aire, v. 

to pass the river, but could not (accomplish it.) To 

en venir a bout. 
convince you that I am ready to do you any service, 

(be so kind as) to command me. Why did you not 

avoir la bonie,v. 

punish her for having done what you forbade her to 

do ? A man should live a century at least to know 

devoir connaitre 

the world, and many other centuries to (know how to) 

savoir, 
make a proper use of that knowledge. 
convenable 



SECT. X. 

OF 1DIOMAT1CAL EXPRESSIONS. 

ON THE VERB AVOIR, to have, Sec. 

a . 7 v 7 .*. (to have the head-ache, or a 

Jivoir mat a la teie, { ■ . ., T , ? 

( pain m the head. 

n • 7 . 77 (to have sore ears, or a pain 

Jivoir mat aux oreilles* { . ., * r 

I in the ears. 

» - j (to have sore eyes, or a pain 

Jivoir mat aux iieux, < ■ ,, J ? l 

J ; ( 10 the eyes. 

Q . 7 (to have a sore nose, or a 

Jivoir mat an nez, { . . •• , 5 

/ pain in the nose. 

n • 7 v 7 7 / (to have a sore mouth, or a 

Avoir mat a la bouclie. I . . - ,, ., ' 

I pain in the mouth. 

Jivoir mal aux dents, §c. to have the tooth-ache* 

We say, after the same manner, Avoir froid aux mains, 
aux pieds, fyc. to be cold in one's hands, Sec . ex. 

35* 



414 

J^ai froid a la tete, aux My head, my hands, and 

mains , et aux pieds, my feet, are cold. 

Avoir beau, to be in vain : ex. 
Vous avez beau parler, It is in vain for you to talk 

^hoir beaucoup de peine, To have much ado. 

Avoir de la peine a, to have dfficulty in : ex. 
J ? ai de la peine a vous croire, I can hardly believe you. 
Avoir besoin de, to want, to have occasion for. 
Avoir la bonte de, (daigner,) to be so kind as. 
Avoir connaissance, avis de, to have notice of. 
Avoir cours, to take, to be in vogue. 
Avoir honte, to be ashamed. 

Avoir la mine de, to be like, to look like : ex. 
Vous avez la mine d'etre You look like a man of un- 

intelligent, derstanding. 

Avoir piiie de, to pity. 
Avoir part au gateau, to share in the booty. 

Avoir bonne mine : ex. 

Vous avez tres bonne > T r 7 7 77 . i 

,,, . > lou look very well to-day. 
mine aujourovhui, ) j j 

Avoir plus de peur que de mal, to be more afraid than hurt. 

Avoir raison de, to be in the right to. 

Avoir soin, to take care. 

Avoir tort de, to be in the wrong to. 

* r , • r ' j S to have no occasion or business 

jV 'avoir que J aire de, < r r 

jy avoir garde de. or? -, u (to be sure not to, 

7 , . 7 > are expressed by.? 7 

oe garder men de, ) ( or by no means. 

Alter son train, to go one's own way. 

Alter trouver quelquhm, to go to somebody. 

Venir trouver, to come to. 

EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES. 

I could not call upon him this morning, because I 

had a pain in my head. My brother would have 

come with me, but he has a sore leg, and is obliged to 

keep his bed. I heard your mother had the 

garder le 



& 



tooth-ache : is it true ? No, madam, but she has 

a pain in her side, which prevents her from (going 

empecher 
out.) I have not yet finished my exercise ; 



415 
for my hands were so cold, that I could not write a single 
word ; besides, I had much ado to find my books. I 

did not know where (to look for) them. It will 

be in vain for you to write to me : I never will answer 

you. I can hardly believe what you tell me. 

It is in vain for me to speak to her : she still goes her 

own way. Miss N. cried very much yesterday, but 

I think she was more afraid than hurt. - - It has been 
in vain for him to torment your sister : she never would 
tell him what happened to her when she was at Mr 
P.'s. Go to him, and tell him that, unless he re- 
turns me my books in a very short time, I will desire 

d7> feu 

his father to send them to me : when you have told 

him that, do not (wait for) his answer : come to me im- 
mediately ; I shall be at your mother's, where I (am to) 
dine, and thence go to the play with the 2 whole 1 family. 

In vain I give myself trouble : I am not the richer 

for it. Your sister does not look so well to-day as 

she did yesterday. Jim 1 not in the right to go 

there no more ? I will take care to prevent them 

from coming hither. Believe me, I have long sus- 
pected them, and now I am very certain that both your 

cousins- and they have had a share in the booty. We 

should often be ashamed of our finest actions, if the 

world knew all the motives which produce them. 

You are in the wrong not to (ask for) his horse : he would 
lend it to you. - - Why should I borrow his horse, 

when I have one (of my own ?) 1 have no occasion for 

11 moi 
his Be so kind as to carry that letter to Mr. II. 's ; 

but be sure not to tell him who sent you. 1 hope 



41G 
you will by no means go there again after what has hap- 
pened to you. He was so altered, that she had 

much ado to recollect him ; but he now begins to look very 

remettre 
well. Somebody having advised Philip, Alexan- 
der's father, to banish from his states a man who had 
spoken ill of him : I shall by no means do it, answered he, 
he would go every where and speak ill of me. 



ces. 



ON ETRE, to be. 

( a son aise, ) . , 

r,, i 7 ' f to be in good circumstan- 

Etre < en bonne passe, > ^ a & 

( bien dans ses affaires y 
Eire bien aupres de quelqu'un, 

Eire mal avec quelquhin, 



to be in favour with some 

one. 
to be out of favour with 
some one. 
C to be chargeable, trouble- 
Etre a charge a quelqu'un, 1 some, or a burden to some 



Eire but a but, to be equal. 
Eire a moitie 1 } to go halves. 



one. 



xr. *, ., 7 r ., 7 ( to be within musket 

Eire a la portee du jusil, du canon, < , . , 

Etre a la portee de la voix, to be within call. 

-p, ( a la veille de, ) to be upon the brink, or very 

I sur le point de, ) near to. 

Eire en etat de, ) , , , , . n & „j 

„ . ? J j > to be able to anord. 

Jivoir le moyen de, ) 

EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

Your brother is in good circumstances now. Some- 
body told me he was in favour with the king. Yes, 

it is true, but he is out of favour with my father, 

because he is troublesome to the family. Well, Mr. 

Eh bim^ 
R. and he are equals. I thought Mr. A. and Mrs. 

D. went halves in that affair, but I heard the contrary 



417 

Suffer me to tell you, you do very wrong to treat 

permettre, 
her as -you do : you undouotedly must have forgotten 

she is in the queen s favour. Well, though she be in 

the queen's favour, do you imagine I am not to tell her 

what I think of her conduct ? The two fleets were 

within gunshot, and very near beginning the engagement, 

combat, m. 
when we left them. We will be within call. 

Why do you not take a coach now and then ? said she 
to me. I would willingly take one sometimes, replied I 
to her, but I cannot afford it, 



ON FMRE, TO MAKE, OR DO. 

Faire cas de, to value, to esteem. 

Faire un tour de promenade, to take a walk. 

Faire le malade, to sham sickness. 

Faire Pecole buissonniere, to play truant. 

Faire beaucoup de chemin, to go a great way. 

Faire le bel esprit, to set up for a wit. 

Faire fond sur quelquhm, to rely upon one. 

™ • / /. x ( to let one know, to inform, 

Faire savoir, (envoyer dire.) I - - A - ' > 

' v J . I to send word. 

Faire voile, or C . , ., 

Mettre a la voile, \ 

Faire faire, to bespeak, to get made, to oblige one to do. 

Faire de son mieux, to do one's best 

Faire semblani, to pretend. 

Faire de son pis, to do one's worst. 

JVe faire que de, to be just, or 

Venir de, to have but just : ex. 

11 ne fait que d'amrer, He is bid just arrived. 

JVe faire que, to do nothing but. 

Se faire dts amis, des ennemis, to get friends, enemies. 

Se faire des affaires, to bring one's self into trouble. 

o, r • . (to be conceited, to have a good 

tS en faire acr.roire. < . . n , f ]r & 

J ' I opinion ot one's sell. 

Cen est fait de mot, I am undone, it is over with me. 

C J en etait fan de lui, he was undone, it was over with him 



418 

r»> *, o^„ f„u J) n S sne will ke undone, it will be over 
C en sera fait d 7 elle» { .^ , > 

J y ( with her. 

™ -. r -. j { we should be undone, it would 

Wen set ait fait de nous, < , 

J 7 I be over witn us. 

The English verb to cause, preceding the verb to be, 
immediately followed by a participle passive, is render- 
ed in French, by the verb faire, and then the verb to be 
is not expressed, but the participle passive is turned into 
the infinitive mood : ex. 

11 lid fit couper la tete, He caused his head to be cut off. 

EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

Do not lose that ring, for I value it much ; it is a par- 
ticular friend of yours who gave it me. I would go 

and take a walk, if I were well. Do you not sham 

sickness now and then ? Did not your brother play 

truant last week ? That man goes a great way for 

a trifle. Mr. P. sets up for a wit, wherever he goes. 

You may rely upon what I tell you. He succeeds 

better in being conceited, than in giving others a 

a a 

good opinion cf himself. I begin to be (very much) 

satisfied with his brother, who now does his best, and 
will soon be able to write a French letter to his father. 

Let me know whether he will pay you or not. 

We shall set sail about the fifteenth of next month. - - 
Why did not you bespeak three or four pairs of shoes 

more ? Send word to your brother, or let him 

know, that there is a letter for him here. 1 will give 

him an exercise, and oblige him to do it in my pre- 

en 
sence. She told me if she were obliged to do it, 

she would do her ivorst. - — She pretends not to 

de 
listen, but I assure you she does not lose a word of what 

you say. = - ~ We were but just (come in) when it began 



419 
to rain - - It would have been something to us, could the 

enemy have known what passed in our camp. You 

do nothing bid play, from morning till night. That 

young lady will get friends every where. If you do 

not take care, you will bring yourself into trouble. -- - 
Permit me to tell you, that they are too much conceited. 

de 
- -■- Your brother is undone, if his master comes to Know 

of it. The king caused them to be put to prison. 

He caused a superb palace to be built. 

ON DIFFERENT VERBS. 

Aimer mieux, to have rather, to choose rather. 

Se donner bien des airs, to take a great deal upon one's selC 

11 ne f aid pas s'etonner, it is no wonder. 

// me tarde de, I long to. 

Penser, to be like. (Followed by a verb in the infinitive 

mood.) 

, i ^ k to lay the fault or blame upon one, to 

S 7 en prendre a, { * J . . c r * 

1 ' ( loo& to one for. 

Shj bitn prendre, or <j to go the right way to 

S'y prendre de la bonne fa con, \ work. 

S r y prendre mal, to go the wrong way to work. 

c,, ' 7 , , , . ( to go quite a different, or 

& 7/ prendre zoat autrement* < & ./* , i ' 

J " 'l another way to work. 

Prendre en mauvaise part, to take amiss. 

Venir a bout de, to bring about, to accomplish. 

EXERCISE ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

I choose rather, to (set out) now than later. She 

told me she had rather speak to any other person than 

to Mr. L. They had rather have had you stay in 

que, subj. 

Italy two or three years longer. Do not you think 

de plus 
Mrs. II . takes a great deal upon herself? It is no won- 
der that I do not speak French so well as you ; you have 
been several years in France, and I never was there 



420 

- - I hope your brother will succeed in his undertak- 
ing ; for, he goes the right way to work, and I am certain 

that he will bring it about. Your cousin, on the 

contrary, will always be poor ; for, he goes the wrong 
way to work in (every thing) he undertakes.--- She 
longs to see your father, and tell him you behaved well 

all the time of his absence. I had like (to nave 

eirc, 
been) killed in coming here. If he lose, he ivill lay 

the blame upon you. Why do you lay the blame 

upon her ? she was not even in the room when that 

happened. - - - Should not your sister succeed, whom 

would she lay the fault upon ? You say you 

long to speak French \ and I too, I assure you. I 

long to tell you something ; nevertheless, I do not know 

how to communicate it to you, for fear of disobliging 

you. When you have a mind to tell me something 

disagreeable, you should go quite a different way to work. 

.1 beg of you not to take amiss what I tell you. 

prier^M^ 
Do not begin a thing unless you are sure to bring it about. 

de 



ON DIFFERENT VERBS. 

Se passer de, to do, to live without, or to be easy without 

S avoir bon gre, to take kindly of. 

Tr ouver mauvais que, to take ill if. # 

Trouver a redire d, to find fault with. 

Tenir maison^ to be a house-keeper. 

Tenir boutique, to be a shop-keeper. 

Tenir par ole^ to keep one's word. 

- , . ys ( to be in a person's power. 
JSe tenir mi 1 a I , r . l , l 

1 ( to he in a person s power : ex 

* With tho following verb in the subjunctive, 



421 

// ne iienl qu'a mol. a rows, It is in my, youv, his. hei 

a luij a tile, §c. power, Kc. 

// ne Herd pas a mot, a vous, It is not my, your, fault, &.c 

Sec. que, if.* 

S*en tenir a, to stand to. 
Voidoir clu bun a, to wish one well. 
En vouloir «, to have a spite against. 
Je souhaiterais pouvoir, I wish I could. 

I y ra, il y allait, cle voire vie, your life is. was, at stake. 

., -7 77 -, 7 7 ( my honour is, was 

II y va. it i] allait, de mon honneur, { J A - - /-, 
3 \ J ; > \ concerned in it, 

Je ne laisse pas de, nevertheless, or for all that, I. 

EXERCISE OX THE PRECEDING IDIOMS, 

When I have wine, I drink some ; but when I have 
none, I am easy without it. - - - If you will be so kind as to 
write to my father, to let him know my situation, I 
shall take il kindly of you, and promise you never to find 

fault with what you may recommend to me. 1 wish J 

could do you that service ; I would do it with all my 

heart. I hope you will not take it ill, if I write to 

que 

your uncle (at the) same time. I shall stand to 

en 

what you say. He has been a house-keeper these five 

and twenty years. - - - He might have succeeded much 
better than he has done, had he followed his uncle's ad- 
vice and mine ; but he never was satisfied, and was con- 
tinually finding fault with what we were telling him. 

However little you send him at present, he will take it 

kindly of you. It is in her power to live in the coun- 

de 
try, and be very happy there. It will soon lie in your 

power to make us happy I assure you it shall not be 

de 

m V f au &> {f y -* do not succeed ; for I wish you well. 

Since it lies in your power to recommend Mr. P. to your 

de 
friend, why do you not do it ? When you see him, 

* With the following verb in the subjunctive, and ne before it. 
36 



422 

you may assure him, that, since it is in my power to do it, 
I will not forget him. - - - You have a spite against my 
brother ; because it ivas in his power, two or three 

times to oblige you, and he never would. I wish J 

could persuade you how sorry he was for it ; but his 
honour was concerned in not doing it ; and, though you be 

de 
very angry with him, he would , nevertheless, (or, for all 

thai,) do you service if it were in his power. Had I 

thought he would have refused me that favour, I neve* 

would have asked it (of him ;) I might very well have 

lid 
done iviihout if. You ought to have thanked him for 

that attention, instead of being angry with him ; but 

de contre 

when your sisters heard that you could not obtain his 

leave, they took it amiss, and have (ever since) had a spite 

conge 

against him. When they told me (of it,) I would most 

le 
willingly have represented to them (how much) they 

lucre in the ivrong : but I would by no means do it ; for 1 

know it is in their power to do me (a great deal) of harm, 

and I do not wish to get enemies. Every body admires 

her humanity ; for, though he has behaved in so ungrate- 

de 
ful a manner towards her, she would, nevertheless, have 

done him service, if he had lived. 



GENERAL AND PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES, 

OY THE UNDERSTANDING OF LANGUAGES. 

The understanding of languages serves (foi an) m- 
inielligencefi. de ' 

troduction to all the sciences. By it we come with 

parvenir,v 
very little trouble at the knowledge of (a great 
peine 



423 

many) fine things, which have cost those who in- 

a 
vented them (a great deal) of pains. By it all 

times and countries lie open to us. By it 

siecle,m. pays etre,v. 

we become, in some measure, contemporary to all 

de 
ages, and inhabitants of all kingdoms. It (enables) us 

meitre en etat 
to converse with the most learned men of all antiquity, 
de 
who seem to have lived and laboured for us. We 

find (in them) many masters, whom (we are allowed) 

il nous est per mis 
to consult at leisure ; many friends who are always 
de 
at hand, and whose useful and agreeable conversation 

improves the mind. It informs us of a thousand curious 
enrichirjY. 

subjects, and teaches us equally (how to derive an 

a 
advantage) of the virtues and vices of mankind. Without 
profiler 7 v. 
the assistance of languages, all these oracles are 

secours, ni. languej. 

dumb to us, and ail these treasures (locked up ;) and, 

pour, p. fermer,v. 

for want of having the key, which alone can open us 

se«Z,adj. 
the door (to them,) we remain poor (in the) midst of (so 

en,v. au 

many) riches, and ignorant in the midst of all the sciences. 



OF STUDY. 

We (come into the world) surrounded with a cloud 
naitre,v. * 

of ignorance, which is increased by the false pre- 
judices of a bad education. By study, the former 
* See the observation on the preposition with, page 379. 



424 
is dispersed, and the latter corrected. It gives 

proportion and exactness to our thoughts and rea- 

jusiessefi 

soning ; instructs how to range in due order what- 

<^ conv enable 

ever we have to speak or write ; and presents us with 
dire y v. up 

the brightest sages of antiquity as patterns for our 

modele^m. 
conduct 5 those sages, in this sense, we may call, with 
Seneca, the masters, and teachers of mankind. But 
S4neque precepieur,m . 

the usefulness of study is not confined to what we 

bomerjV. 
call science ; it renders us also more fit for business 

and employment ; besides, though this study 

de plus, adv. quand, c» 

were of no other use but (the acquiring) a habit of 

de * 

labour, (the softening) the pains of it, (the pro- 

curing) a steadiness of mind and (conquering) 

* fermetijf. * 

our aversion to application or a sedentary life, or 

whatever else seems (to lay a restraint upon) us, it 

up assujetir,v. 

would still be of very great advantage. In reality, 

it draws us off from idleness, play, and debauchery. 

retireVjV. up 
It usefully (fills up) the vacant hours of the day, and 

renders very agreeable that leisure, which, without the 

assistance of literature, is a kind of death, and, in a 

especefi 
manner, the grave of a man while he is alive. It ena- 
bles us to pass a right judgment upon other men's 

t 

* These participles active are to be rendered in French by the in- 
finitive, and the conjunction and preposition should be repeated before 
each. 

t Repeat this same preposition before each verb. 



425 

labours, to enter int'j society with men of understanding, 

en esprit 

to keep the best company, to (have a share in) 

frequenter ,v. prendre jiart a. 

the discourses of the most learned, to furnish out matter 
for conversation, without which we must be silent ; to 

qilOl 

render it more agreeable and more useful, by intermix 
ing facts with reflections, and setting the one by the 

relever,v. 
other. 



SECT. XI. 
SCHEME FOR PARSING A SENTENCE. 

As it is very essential to the thorough learning of a 
language, not to mistake one part of speech for another, 
we finish this grammar by giving a classical and method- 
cal scheme for parsing a sentence. The examples, with 
very little change, may suit any language. 

Article. Questions : Is it definite, partitive, or indefi- 
nite ? What gender ? What number ? 

Examples. Le pouvoir elu roi ; the power of the king : 
la I- liberie des homines ; the liberty of men : J'ai clu pain, cle 
la viande, des pomrnes ; I have bread, meal, apples : La 
soeur de Pierre ; Peter's sister. 

Application. Le, definite art. m. — du, contraction of 
de le, genitive defi. art. m. — La, definite art. f. — des con- 
traction of de les, genitive defi. art. both genders, pL— da, 
in the sense of some, part. art. m. — de la, in the sense of 
some, part. art. f. — des, in the sense of some, part. art. both 
ge'nders, pi. — de, indefinite art. both genders and numbers 
geni. and abl.— a dat. indef. art. 

Substantive. Questions : What gender ? What num- 
ber ? If the noun singular, name its plural ; if plural, 
name its singular. 

Examples. Le pouvoir du roi ; la liberie des hommes ; 
le prix des denrees, the price of provisions. 

Application. Pouvoir, substantive, m. pouvoirs for its 
pi. — liberie, subst. f. liberies for its pi. — Prix, subst. m.prix 
for its nl. — Denrees subst. f. pi. denree for its singular. 
36* 



426 

Adjective. Questions : What gender ? What number ? 
What does it agree with in the sentence ? If it be mascu- 
line, name its fern. If it be feminine, name its masc. 

Examples. Un heau chapeau, a fine hat ; ces femmes 
sontjolies, those ladies are pretty ; cette fille est orgueille- 
use, that girl is proud. 

Application. Beau, noun adj. m. agrees with chapeau ; 
it has belle fji its feminine.— Jolies, noun adj. f. pi. agrees 
with femmes ; it has joli for its masculine. — Orgueilleuse, 
noun adj. f. agrees with jille ; it has orgueiileux for its 
masculine. 

Pronoun. Questions : Is it personal, conjunctive, pos- 
sessive, relative, demonstrative, interrogative, or indefi- 
nite ? What gender ? What number ? With what does it 
agree in the sentence ? 

Examples. Elle a mon livre, she has my booh. Cetle 
plume ne vaut rien, this pen is good for nothing. L'homme 
qui vous parlait, the man who ivas speaking to you. II 
y a plusieurs annees, several years ago. Quel homme ? 
What man 1 

•Application. Elle, pronoun pers. f. agrees with a. Mon. 
pronoun poss. m. agrees with livre. Cette, pronoun de- 
monstr. f. agrees with plume. Qui, pronoun rel, both 
genders and numbers, agrees with homme. Plusieurs, pro- 
noun indef. pi. both genders, agrees with annees. Quel ? 
pron. int. m agrees with homme. 

Verb. Questions : Name its infinitive — its person — its 
number — its tense — its mode. 

Examples. Pendant qu'ils etaient ensemble, '^entendis 
sonner midi ; while they were together, 1 heard twelve 
o'* clock strike. Quqiqu'il paraisse heureux, tfenviez pas 
son sort ; though he may appear happy, do not envy his 
situation. 

•Application. Etaient, from etre ; 3d pers. pi. imperf 
tense, indie, mood. Entendis, from entendre ; 1st pers. 
sing, preterite, indicative mood. Paraisse, from paraitre, 
3d pers. sing. pres. tense, subjunc. mood. Enviez, from 
envier ; £d pers. pi. imperat. mood. 

Preposition. What does it govern in the sentence ? 

Examples. Avant midi : sons argent ; before noon : 
without money. 



427 

Application. Avant, a preposition, governs midi : Sans, 
a preposition., governs argent. 

Conjunction. What mood does it require ? Name the 
verb it acts upon in the sentence. 

Examples. Lorsque le roi entra, when the king came 
in. Quoique vous sovez riche, though you be rich. Je lis 
pour m'amuscr, 1 read to amuse myself. 

Application. Lorsque, a conjunction, requires the indie. 
Here it governs entra. Quoique, a conjunction, requires 
the subjunc. Here it governs soyez. Pour, a conjunc- 
tion, requires the infinitive. Here it governs amuser* 

Adverbs and interjections. Only name them 

Examples. Ah ! mon ami, agissez prudemment ; ah, 
my friend, act prudently. 

Application. Mi is an interjection. — Prudemment is an 
adverb. 



428 
ABREGE 

DE LA VERSIFICATION FRANCAISE. 

f> 

Les vers, a ne les consiclerer que sous le rapport de 

lour mecanisme, sont des paroles arrangees selon certaines 

regies fixes et determinees. 

Ces regies regardent sur-tout 3e nombre des syllabes, 
la cesure, la rime, les mots que le vers exclut, les licen- 
ces qu'il permet, et enfiii les different es manieres dont il 
doit etre arrange dans chaque sorte de Poeme. 

Des differentes especes de Vers Frangais. 
On compte ordinairement cinq sortes de vers franqais. 
C'est par le nombre des syllabes qu'on les distingue. 

1°. Ceux de douze syllabes, comme : 

Dans le re-duit ob-scurd'u-ne al-ct>-ve en-fon-cee 
S'ele-ve un lit de plu-me a grands frais a-mas-see ; 
Q,ua-tre ri-deaux pom-peux, par un dou-ble con-tour, 
En de-fen-dent 1 'en-tree a la clar-te du jour. 

Ces vers s'appellent ahxandrins, herotques ou grc 

2 U . Ceux de dix syllabes, comme : 
Du peu qu'il a le sage est sa-tis-fait. 

f>°. Ceux de huit syllabes, comme : 

L'hi-po-cri-te eu frau-des fer-ti-le. 
Des Pen-fan-ce est pe-tri de fard ; 
11 sait co-lo-rer a-vec art 

Le fiel que sa bou-che dis-tille. 

4°. Ceux de sept syllabes, comme : 

Grand Dieu ! vo-tre main re-clam 
Les dons que j'en ai re-^.us. 
El-le vient cou-per la trame 
Des jours qu'el-le m'atis-sus. 
JNTon der-nier so-leil se leve, 
Et vo-tre souffle m'en-leve, 
De la ter-re des vi-vans ; 
Com-me ia feuil-le se-chee 
Qui, de sa ti-ge ar-ra-chee, 
De-vient le jou-et des vents. 

5°. Ceux de six syllabes, comme : 

A soi-meme o-di-eux 
Le sot de tout s'ir-ri-te : 
En tous lieux il s'e-vite, 
Et se trouve eu tous liens. 



429 

Les vers qui out raoins de six syllabes ne sont guere 
d'usage que pour la poesie lyrique, et quelques petites 
pieces badines. 

DE LA CESURE. 

La cesure est uri repos qui coupe le vers en deux par- 
ties ou hemistiches. 

Ce repos doit etre a la sixieme svllabe dans les grands 
vers, et a la quatrieme dans ceux de dix syllabes. L'es- 
pi it et l'usage de la cesure sont tres-bien exprimes dans 
ces vers de Boileau. 

Que toujours en vos vers. - le sens conpant les mots, 
Suspende Phemistiche, - en marque le repos. 
Sur les ailes du temps- la tristesse s'envole. 
Q,ue le mensonge - im instant vous outrage, 
Tout est en feu- soudain pour Pappuyer ; 
La verite - perce enfin le nuage, 
Tout est de glace - a vous justifier. 

II n'y a que les vers de douze et de dix syllabes qui 
aient une cesure. 

Pour que la cesure soit bonne, il faut que le sens auto- 
rise le repos ; ainsi dans les vers suivants la cesure est 
defectcuse. 

N'oublions pas les grands -bienfaits de la patrie. 
Faites voir un regret -sincere de vos fautes. 
Mon pere, quoiqu'il eiit-la tete des meilleures, 
Ne m'a jamais rien fait - apprendre que mes heures. 

La cesure ne vaut rien dans ces exemples, parce que le 
sens exige que le mot ou est la cesure, et celui qui le suit, 
soient prononces tout de suite et sans pause. 

Mais la cesure est bonne dans les vers suivants ; 

Ses chanoines vermeils - et brillantsde sante 
S'engraissaient d*une leiigue - et sainte oisivete 

Ici la cesure est bonne, parce qu'on peut faire une 
petite pause apres un . substantif suivi de plusieurs adjee- 
tifs, ou entre plusieurs adjectifs qui suivent ou qui prece- 
dent un substantif. 

I. Remarque. Le dernier mot du premier hemistiche 
peut se terminer par Ye muet, pourvu que le mot suivant 
commence par une voyelle. 

Ami lui dit le chantre encoi pale d-horrear, 

N'insulte pas de grace a ma juste terreur. 
II trcpig^e de joie. il pleore de tendresse. 



430 

II. Rem. Les pronoms cela y celui, celui-ld,, etc. et de 
qui mis pour dont, peuvent aussi terminer le prerniei 
hemtstiche, ou recevoir la ensure ; on souffre cette neg- 
ligence, mais ll faut se la permettre rarement ; elle donne 
toujours aux vers un air prosaifque. 

II n'est fort entre ceux que tu prends par centaines, 
Q,ui ne puisse arreter un rimenr six semaines : 
Benissons Dieu de qui la puissance est sans bornes. 

Les vers de dix et de douze syllabes sont comme tons 
les autres, assujetis auxregles dont il nous reste a parler. 

DE LA RIME. 

La Rime est la convenance de deux sons qui terminent 
deux vers. Quelquefois on exige aussi qu'il y ait conve- 
nance d'orthographe, que deux sons semblables soient re- 
presented par les memes lettres. 

Oil me cacher ? fuyons dans la nuit infernale. 
Mais que dis-je ? mon pere y tient l'urne fatale. 
Le sort, dit-on, Pa mise en ses sevcres mains. 
Minos juge aux eufers tous les pales humains. 

On distingue deux sortes de rimes, la feminine et Id 
masculine. La premiere est celle des vers qui se termi- 
nent par un e muet, soit seul, soit suivi d'une s ou d-nt. 

Travaillez a loisir, quelque ordre qni vous presse, 

Et ne vous piquez point d'une folle vitesse. 

II veutles rappeler, et sa voix les eflraie; 

lis courent ; tout son corps n'est bientot qu'une plaie. 

Dans quels ravissemens, a votre sort liee, • 

Du reste des mortels je vivrais oubliee. 

Un jeune homme, toujours bouillant dans ses caprices, 

Est pret a. recevoir 1' impression des vices. 

C'est peu qu'en un ouvrage ou les fautes fourmillcnt, 

Des traits d'esprit semes de temps en temps petillent. 

Ces vers feminins ont une syllabe de plus que les mascu- 
lins : mais comme Ve muet sonne faiblement dans la sylla- 
be qui termine le vers, cette syllabe est comptee pour rien. 

La rime masculine est celle qui finit par une autre let- 
tie que Ve muet, ou seul, ou suivi d'une .9, ou enfin d'nt. 

Chaque vertu devient une divinite ; 

Minerve est la prudence, et Venus la beaute*. 

Le travail est souvent le pere du plaisir ; 

Je plains l'homme accable du poids de son loisir. 

Remarque La syllabe oient ou aient, qui se trouvc dans 



4ai 

les imparfaits et les conditionnels des verbes, forme une 
rime masculine, parce que cette syllabe a le son de Ve 
ouvert. Ainsi les vers suivants sont masc'ulins. 

Aux accords d'Amphion les pierres se mouvaient, 
Etsurles mars Thebains en ordre s eleveient. 

RIMES RICHES ET SUFFISANTES. 

Les rimes masculines et ferninines se divisent en Aches 
et en sufjisantes. 

I La rime riche est formee de deux sons parfaitement 
semblables, et souvent represented par les memes lettres. 

Indomptable Taureau, Dragon impetueux, 

Sa croupe se recoube en replis tortueux. 

De rage et de douleur le monstie bondissant, 

Vient aux pieds des chevaux tomber en mugissant. 

Au moment que je parle, ah! mortelle pensee ! 

lis brayent la fareur d'une amante inseusee. 

II. La rime suffisante est celle qui n'a pas une ooaven- 
ance aussi exacte de sons et d'orthographe. 

Helas ! Dieux tout-puissans, que nospleurs vous appaisent, 
Que ces vains ornements. que ces voiles me pssent ! 
Quelle importune main, en formant tous ces nccuds, 
A pris soin sur mon front d'assemblei mes cheveux ? 

III. Dans la rime masculine, on n'a guere egard en 
■general, qu'au dernier son des mots : ainsi maison rime 

avec poison ; piete avec purete ; proces avec succes. 

IV. Mais dans la rime feminine, on fait une attention 
particuliere au son de l'avant derniere syllabe, parce que 
celui de la derniere n'est ni assez plein, ni assez marque, 
pour produire une conformite de son sensible et agreable 
a l'oreille Ainsi mere et mare, audace et justice, esiime 
et diademe ne rimeraient pas ensemble, quoique ces mots 
se terminent par la meme syllabe re, ce y me. 

Mais visible et sensible, monde etprofonde, justice et yre- 
cipice'y usage et partage, peuvent rimer ensemble, parce 
que ces mots ont une convenance de sons dans les avant- 
dernieres syllabes. 

Y. Comme la convenance de sons est essentielle a la 
rime, on ne saurait bien faire rimer les syllabes breves a- 
vec les longues, les I mouillees, avec les I non mouillees, 
etc. comme mctiire et metre ; joule et route ; jeune (qui 
n'est pas vieux) et jeune (abstinence) ; la fille et la file ; 
peril et pueril, etc. Ainsi J. B. Rousseau a manque a son 
exactitude ordinaire, quand il disait a son ami-; 



432 

Et «nr ce herd emaillt 
Ou Neuilli horde la Seine, 
Reviens an vin d'Auvile, 
Meier ies eaux d'Hypocrene; 

VI. L'e ferme, l'i et Vu, soit seuls, soit suivis des con- 
sonnes, /, s, t, ou z, ne forment pas de bonnes rimes, si dans 
les deux syllabes rimantes ils ne sont precedes de la tneme 
consonne. Ainsi bonte et donne, vertus et recus, amis et 
avis, cultivez et doriez, ne rimeraient pas bien. 

Choisissez des amis de qui la piete 
Vous soit un sur garant de leur fidelite. 
Ami droit et. sincere on doit a ses amis 
Garder fidelernent ce qu'on leur a promis. 

VII. L'observation precedente a lieu pour Va dans les 
verbes : il donna et ii ahna, il porta et il rev a, il immola 
et il saura, ne rimeraient pas ensemble. Et en general 
elle est d'tisage pour tons les sons communs a un grand 
nombre de mots. Ainsi les sons ant ou ent, eu et on ne 
riment bien qu'autant'qu'ils sont precedes des memesl-et- 
tres, comme puissant, chassant ; agrement, regiment ; pas- 
sion, mission ; ambitieux, religieux ; vieux, mieux. 

Mais les mots suivantsne rimeraient pas bien ensemble : 
puissant, chancelant; raison, passion; heureux religieux, etc. 

VIII. Quand la rime est formee par des sons pleins, 
comme ar, as, at, or, os, ot, er cs, et, ai, ei, oi, eau, eu, ou , 
par an, am, en, em, ion, oin ; en un mot par des voyel- 
les precedees d'une ou de plusieurs consonnes, alors on 
n'exige pas que ia lettre qui precede soit la meme dans les 
mots qu'on veut faire rimer. Par exemple, embarras et 
combat, g7'os et sots, progres et succes, mer et enfer, ouvert 
et souffert, soupir et desir, espoir et devoir, jamais et par- 
faits, pain et main, nuit et conduit, temoins et besoins, soutiens 
et conviens, et autres semblables peuvent rimer ensemble. 

IX.. Un mot en s, x, ou z, ne peut rimer qu'avec un 
mot termine par l'une de ces trois consonnes. Ainsi ad- 
mirable ei tables, risible et plausibles, le secours et le jour, 
la vaniie et vous meritez, la foi et les lois, le courroux et 
e genou, etc. ne rimeront pas bien ensemble. 

Mais lois et Hois, courroux et tons, celestes et tu detestes, 
v amies et vous meditez, clefs et vous raclez le discours ct 
!e cours, fbrmeront de bonnes rimes. 

X. Dans les verbes ois et oil, avant le son de Ye ou- 



433 

vert, ne riment guere qu'avec un autre verbe. Quoique 
yaimois et jamais, donnois et harnois, plagoit et lacet, mart" 
quoit et banquet, je deplacois et les succes, se terminent par 
!e meme son, l'usage ordinaire est de ne les pas faire ri- 
mer ensemble. 

XI. Les terminaisons ent, oient, ou, aient, ne doivent ri- 
mer qu'avec des verbes qui aient les memes terminai- 
sons : ils privent, ils ecrivent ; ils Invent, ils burent ; 
qu'ils surfassent, qu'ils effacent ; etc. mais ils meprisent ne 
rimeraient pas bien avec entreprise ; la surface avec ils 
surp assent. 

XII. La convenance des sons et d'orthographe ne peut 
autoriser la rime du mot aves lui-meme, d'un simple avec 
son compose, ni meme de deux mots derives de la meme 
racine, quand ils se ressemblent trop pour la signification. 
Ainsi la rime est defectueuse dans ces vers : 

Je connais trop les Grands dans le malheur amis, 
Ingrats dans la fortune, et bientot ennemis. 

Elle est tout-a-fait vicieuse dans ceux-ci : 

Les chefs et les soldats ne se connaissent plus ' 
L'un ne peut commander, l'autre n'obeit ^Zws. 

XIII. Mais deux mots entierement semblables par le son 
et l'orthographe riment bien ensemble, lorsqu'ils ont des 
significations differentes. Les derives sont dans le meme 
cas, s'ils n'ont plus un rapport sensible pour le sens. 

Prends-moi le bon parti, laisse la tous les livres ; 

Cent francs au denier cinq, combien font-ils ? vingt livres 

Nobles, souvenez-vous qu'une naissance illustre. 

Des sentimens du coeur reeoit son plus beau lustre. 

Dieu punit les forfaits que les rois ont commis, 

Ceux qu'ils n'ont point venges, et ceux qu'ils ont permis. 

XIV. Les deux hemistiches d'un vers ne doivent pas 
rimer ensemble, ni meme avoir une convenance de sons 

corarae : 

II ne tiendra qu'a toi de partir avec moi 9 
Aux Saumaises future preparer des tortures. 

XV. Le dermer hemistiche d'un vers ne doit pas no 
plus rimer avec le premier du vers precedent ou du vera 
suivant. 

II faut, pour les avoir, employer tous vois soins ; 
Ils sont a moi, du rnoins tout autant qu'a mon frere. 
37 



434 

Un fiacre, me couvrant d'nn deluge de bone 
Contre le mur voisin m'ecrase de sa roue ; 
Et, voulant me sauver, ties porteurs irihumains 
De leur maudit baton me donnent dans les reins. 

XVI. II faut encore eviter la rime dans les premiers 
hemistiches de deux vers qui se suivent. 

Sinon demain matin si vous le trouvez bon, 
Je mettrai de ma main le feu dans la maison. 

Quelquefois cependant la rime des premiers hemistiches 
n'a rien de choquant ; c'est lorsqu'elle se fait par la rep- 
etition d'une pensee, d'une expression qu'on reproduit a 
dcssein, pour fixer davantage Pattention du lecteur; com- 
me : 

Qui cherche vraiment Dieu, dans lui seul se repose ; 

Et qui craint vraiment Dieu, ne craint rien autre chose. 

Des termes que 'le vers exclut* 

I. Les bons Poetes rejettent avec soin tous les termes 
durs, ou difficiles a prononcer, ou bas et prosaiques. Rare- 
ment ilsse servent des conjonctions que les orateurs emploi- 
ent souvent pour lier et arrondir leurs periodes ; telles que 
c^est pourquoi, parce que, pourvu que, puisque, de maniere, 
de fagon que, desoneque ou en sorte que, outre, d J ailleurs } 
er v cffet, etc. 

II est un heureux choix de mots harmonieux , 
Fuyez des mauvais sons le concours odieux. 
Le vers le mieux rempli, la plus noble pensee, 
Ne peut plaire a 1' esprit, quand l'oreille est blessee. 

II. Un mot termine par une autre voyelle que Ve muet, 
ne peut etre suivi d'un mot qui commence aussi par une 
voyelle ou une h muette : ce serait un hiatus. 

Gardez qu'une voyelle a courir trop hatee. 
Ne soit d'une voyelle en son chemin heurtee. 

Ainsi les phrases suivantes ne formeraient ^pas de vers. 

Que l'aimable vertu a peu d'adorateurs ! 
Evitez le souci, et fuyez la colere. 

III. Comme la conjonction et a toujours le son de IV 
ferme, elle ne saurait non plus dans le vers etre suivie 
d'une voyelle. On ne pourrait pas dire en vers : 

Qui sert et aime Dieu, possede toutes choses, 
Mais on dira bien : 

Qui connait et sert Dieu, possede toutes choses 



435 

IV. Des voyelies nasales qui, clans la prononciation ne 
doivent pas etre liees avec le mot suivant, ne peuvent 
avec grace etre suivies d'un mot qui commence par une 
voyelle. Ainsi la rencontre des voyelies nasales et des 
voyeiles simples est desagreable dans ce vers : 

Un grand nom est un poids difficile a porter. 

Ah ! j'attendrai long-temps, la nuit est loin encore. 

Cependant cette rencontre peutse soufTrir, quand la pro- 
nonciation permet de pratiquer un petit repos entre le mot 
qui finit par un son nasal, et le mot qui commence par une 
voyelle ; comme dans ce vers de PAthalie de Racine : 

Celui qui met un frein a la fureur des flots, 

Suit aussi des medians arreter les complots. 

V. Ue muet final et precede d'une voyelle, comme dans 
donneey aimee, Jisie, envie, la pale, la joie, la proie, la rue, 
entrevue, etc. ne peut entrer dans le corps du vers qu'au 
moyen de l'elision ; ainsi les vers suivants sont inal con- 
struits : 

Au travers du Soleil, ma vuie, s'Jblouit. 

lis vous louent tout haut et vous jouent tout bas. 

II avoue sa faute et demande pardon. 

Mais ceux-ci sont reguliers a cause de l'elision, 

La joie est naturelle aux ames innocentes. 
A quels mortels regrets ma vie est reservee ! 

VI. L'e muet, dans le corps du mot et precede d'une 
voyelle, est compte pour rien dans la prononciation ; sou- 
vent raeme on ne Pecrit pas. II agreera, criera, louera, 
remanent, divorcement, etc. ne font pas plus desyllabes que 
agrera, crira, lour a, r eminent, dtnoument. 

ENJAMBEMEXT DES VERS. 

Les vers n'ont ni grace ni harmonic, quand on rejette 
au commencement du second vers des mots qui dependent 
aecessairement de ce qui se trouve a. la fin du premier. 

Quel que soit votr.e ami, sachez que mutuelle 
Doit etre l'amitie ; me me ardeur raeme zele. 
II n'est done point d'atnis, pour la demiere fois 
Je le repete encor : peu connaissent les lois 
D'une waie auntie. 

Dans le premier vers, miduelle depend necesgairement 
de ces mots doit cire Vamiiie, 



43G 

Dans les derniers, ces mots d J une vraie ami-lie sont de- 
pendants de ceux-ci, les lois, et Ton ne peut les separei 
dans la prononciation. 

Ces enjambements sont proscrits dans la haute poesie, 
mais ils se tolerent dans les fables et dans les autres pieces 
de style familier. 

Si neanmoins la dependance d'un vers s'etendait jusqu'a 
la fin du suivant, en sorte qu'a la fin du premier il y eut 
un petit repos, Pharmonie loin d'etre blessee n'en serait 
que plus sensible. 

La git la sombre envie, a Pceil timide et louche, 
Versant sur des lauriers les poisons de sa bouche. 
Ce malheureux combat ne fit qu'approfondir 
L'abime dont Valois voulait en vain sortir. — Volt. 

Des licences qu'on se permet dans les Vers. 

Des licences consistent dans certaints disposition de mots, 
dans l'emploi de plusieurs termes dont la prose n'oserait se 
servir, dans le retranchement d'une lettre. 

DES TRANSPOSITIONS. 

I. On place avec grace les regimes composes avant les 
mots et les verbes dont ils dependent 

A la Religion soyez toujours fidele, 
Les moeurs et la vertu ne sauvent point sans elle. 
C'est Dieu qui du neant a tire l'univers ; 
C'est lui qui sur la terre a repandu les mers. 

Sans Dieu rien n' eut ete. 
Et lui seul des mortels fait la relicite. 
A vous former le cceur appliquez-vous sans cesse. 

II. On place entre PauxiliaiiQ et le participe, entte le 
verbe et son regime, des mots qui n'y seraient pas souf- 
ferts en prose. 

Un vieillard venerable avait, loin de la Cour, 
Cherche la douce paix dans un obscur sejour : 
Dieu fit dans ce desert descendre la sagesse. 

Les transpositions, quand elles sont naturelles, et 
qu'elles n'embarrassent pas le sens de la phrase, donnent 
de la grace et de la noblesse a la poesie ; mais elles ne 
valent rien, lorsqu'elles rendent le vers dur, ou qu 5 elles 
obscurcissent la pensee,commedans les vers suivants : 

Q,uoi ! voit-on revetu de l'etole sacree 

Le pretre de Vautel s'arrete* a l'entree ? 

Craignez de voire orgueil <*e vous rendre k dupe 



437 

Q,ue to u jours la fierle, Phonneor, la bicnseaiicc, 
De cette folle ardeur s'oppose a la naissance. 

Des mots propres a la Poesie. 
La poesie se sert en general des memes mots que la 
[p'ose ; cepcndant il y a quelques expressions que les 
Poetes emploient heureusement, et qui seraient depla- 
cees dans la prose. Telles sont antique pour ancien : 
coursier pour cheval : PEtemel, le Trcs-Haut, le Tout- 
Puissant pour Dieu : le flanc pour le sein, le ventre : le 
glaive pour Vepee : les humains, les mortels, la race de Ja- 
pet pour les Jiommes : hymen ou hymenee pour mariage : 
espoir pour esp trance : le penser pour la pensee : jadis 
pour autrefois : .naguere ou nagueres pour il rty a pas 
long-temps : labenr pour travail : repentance pour repentir : 
soudain pour aussitot : ombre etemelle, sombres bords pour 
Vevfcr, etc. 

Ou sont, Dieu do Jacob, tes antiques bontes ? 

On fait cas d'un coursier, qui, tier et plein de coeur, 

Fait paraitre en courant sa bouillante vigueur, 

L'Etemel en ses mains tient seul nos destine.es. 

Cele'orons dans nos chants la gioire du Tres-haut. 

Si quelque audacieux embrasse sa querelle, 

Clu a la fureur du glaive on le livre avec elle. 

Souvent d'un faux espoir un ainant est nourri. 

Les Dieux m'en sont temoins, ces Dieux qui dant mon iluud 

Ont allame le feu fatal a tout mon sang, 

Cos Dieux qui se sont fait une gioire cruelle 

De seduire le occur d'une faible mortelie. 

Soumise a mon epoux, et cachant mes ennuis, 

De son fatal hymen je cultivais les fruits 

On n' aime plus comme on aimait jadis. 
Va dans ] 'ombre eterneile, ombre pleine d'envie ; 
Et ne te meie plus de censurer ma vie. 

La lecture des bons Poetes fournira une foule d'autres 
expressions propres a la poesie. 

Nous ecrivons en prose je crois, je t'ots ? 'je dis, je sa?s, je 
vis j 'faveriis, etc. Les Poetes, selon le besoin, emploient 
ou retranchent Vs dans ces mots, lis ecriventdememe 
jusqne ou jusques, encore ou encor, grace au Ciel ou graces 
au Ciel. lis emploient aussi alors que, pour lorsque, cepen- 
dant que pour pendant que, avecque pour avec, etc. 

Les bons Poetes se servent rarement de la plupart de 
ces dernieres licences ; et ceux qui se livrent a. la poesie 
ne doivent pas oublier le precepte de Boileau. 
37* 



438 

Sur tout qu'en vos ecrits la langue reveree, 

Dans vos plus grands exces vous soit toujours sacree ; 

Envain vous me frappez d'un son melodieux, 

Si le terme est impropre ou le tour vicieux : 

Mon esprit n'admet point un pompeux barbarisme, 

Ni d'un vers ampoule 1'orgueilleux solecisme. 

Sans la langue, en un mot, Pauteur le plus divin, 

Est toujours, quoiqu'il fasse, un mechant ecrivain. 

DE L' ARRANGEMENT DES VERS ENTR'EUX. 

Dans les differentes manieres dont le vers doivent etre 
arranges, il faut considerer la rime et le nombre des sylla* 
bes. 

Le nombre des syllabes est arbitraire dans les pieces 
libres et dans la poesie lyrique ; mais il est determine 
dans les autres pieces serieuses, qui sont la plupart Ren- 
tes en yers de douze syllabes. Ainsi dans le Poeme epi- 
que, l'Eglogue PElegie, la Satyre, PEpitre, et dans la 
Tragedie et la haute Comedie, il est d'usage de n'employ- 
er que le vers Alexandrin. 

^ Quant a la rime, deux vers masculins peuvent etre sui- 
vis de deux vers feminins et vice versa ; ou bien un vers 
masculin est suivi d'un ou de deux feminins, et un vers 
feminin d'un ou de deux masculins. 

On appelle vers a rimes plates ceux qui sont disposes 
de la premiere fa§on, comme les suivants. 

De figures sans nombre, egayez votre ouvrage ; 
Q,ue tout y fasse aux yeux une riante image : 
On peut etre a, la fois et pompeux et plaisant, 
Et je hais un sublime ennuyeux, languissant. 
Un poeme excellent ou tout marehe et se suit, 
N'est pas de ces travaux qu'un caprice produit : 
II veut du temps, des soins ; et ce penible ouvrage 
Jamais d'un ecolier ne fut l'apprentissage. 

On appelle vers a rimes croisees ceux qui sont ordonnes 
de la seconde maniere, comme ceux-ci dans lesquels 
Rousseau dit en parlant de Circe furieuse : 

Sa voix redoutable 

Trouble les enfers, 

Un bruit formidable 

Gronde dans les airs, 

Un voile efFroyable 

Couvre l'univers. 

Mais quand on n'observe d'autrc regie que de ne pas 
mettre de suite plus de deux vers masculins ou feminins, 



439 

et qu'on fait suivrc un vers masculin ou femimn, d'un ou 
de deux vers d'une rime differente, alors ils s'appelient 
vers a rimes melees, comme ceux-ci : 

Ah ! si d'une pauvrete dure 
Nous cherchons a nsms affranchir, 
Rapprochons-nous de la nature, 
Qui seule peut nous enrichir. 
^qrgons de funestes obstacles ; 
fteservons pour nos tabernacles 
Cet or, ces rubis, ces metaux ; 
Ou dans le sein des mers avides 
Jetons ces richesses perfldes, 
L 'unique aliment de nos maux. 

Lorsque les vers sont en rimes plates, ils ont ordinaire- 
ment le merae nombre de syllabes. Mais lorsqu'ils sont a 
rimes croisees ou a rimes melees souvent ils ont une me- 
sure inegale. 

Dans les vers a rimes plates, c'est un defaut de faire 
revetair deux rimes masculines ou feminines deja employ- 
ees, de maniere qu'elles ne soient separees de deux autres 
semblables que par deux rimes d'une espece differente, 
comme dans cet exemple : 

Soudain Potier se leve et demande audience : 
Chacun, a. son aspect, garde un pro fond silence. 
Dans ce temps malheureux par le crime infecte, 
Potier fut toujours juste, et pourtant respecte. 
Souvent on l'avait vu, par sa male eloquence} 
De leurs emportemens reprimer la licence, ' 
Et conservant sureux sa vieille autorite, 
Leur montrer la justice avec impunite. 

L'oreille est aussi choquee par la convenance de sons 
dans les rimes masculines et feminines qui se suivent, com- 
me dans ces vers, d'ailleurs pleins de belles images. 
Tel des antres du Nord echappes sur la terre, 
Precedes par les vents, et suivis du tonnerre, 
D'un tourbillon de poudre obscurcissant les airs, 
Les orages fougueux parcourent V Univers. 

On compose a rimes plates les grands poemes, tels que 
PEpopee, la Tragedie, la Comedie, l'Eglogue, PElegie, 
la Satyre, l'Epitre ; a rimes croisees, POde, le Sonnet, 
le Rondeau ; et a rimes melees, les Stances, PEpigramme, 
les Fables, les Madrigaux, les Chansons, 

II n'y a d'autres regies a observer dans les grands 
poemes pour la distribution des rimes que d'eviter la con* 



440 

sonance, et clc ranger les vers masculins et feminins 
deux a deux les uns apres les autres. Nous nenous eten- 
drons done pas davantage sur cefc article par rapport a 
PEpopee, a la Tragedie, etc. Nous ne dirons rien non 
plus des autres regies de ces poeme^. Ces dissertations 
nous meneraient trop loin. Consultez PArt poetique de 
Boileau, et les meilleures poetiques anciennes et modernes. 
Mais Pordonnance des vers dans plusieurs petits poemes 
a des regies fixes et particulieres. Ce sera le sujet des 
articles suivants. 

DES STANCES. 

Une Stance est un certain nombre de vers, apres ^s 
quels le sens est flni. Dans une Ode elle s'appelle Strophe. 

Une stance n'a pas ordinairement moins de quatre vers, 
ni plus de dix. La mesure des vers y est arbitraire ; ils 
peuvent etre ou tous grands ou tous petits, ou bien meles 
les uns avec les autres. 

Les stances sont appelees reguli&res, lorsqu'elles ont un 
me me nombre de vers, un rneme melange de rimes, et 
que les grands et les petits vers y sont egalement distri- 
bues. Elles sont appelees irregulieres , lorsqu'elles n'ont 
pas tout.es ces convenances. 

Pour la perfection des stances, il est necessaire, 1° 
Que le sens finisse avec le dernier vers de chacune. 

2°. Que le dernier vers d'une stance ne rime pas avec 
le premier de la suivante. 

3°. Que les stances d'unememe piece commencent et fin- 
issent par des rimes de meme nature ; e'est a-dire, que si le 
premier vers d ? une stance flnit par une rime masculine, les 
premiers vers des strophes suivantes doivent egalement 
etre masculins. 11 est cependant bon de remarquer que 
quoiqu'en general il ne soit pas permis de mettre de suite 
quatre rimes de meme espece, cependant plusieurs au- 
teurs Pont fait d'une stance a Pautre, parce qu'ils ont re- 
garde chaque stance d'une piece comme isolee, et comme 
independante de celle qui suit. Mais nous croyons que 
cette licence ne peut etre toleree que dans les chansons. 

Si une stance est seule, elle prend un nom particulier, 
du nombre des vers dont elle est composee. Elle s'appelle 
Quatrain, si elle en a quatre ; Sixain^ si elle en a six , 
Dixahi 7 si elle en a dix. Et quelquefois a raison du sujet 



441 

c'est une Epigramme, un Madrigal. On appelait autre- 
fois Octave une stance de huit vers. 

On voit que toutes ces stances sont du nombre pair. II 
y en a aussi du nombre impair, de cinq, de sept et de neuf 
vers. 

REGLES POUR LES STANCES DE NOMBRE PAIR. 

I. Stances de quatre vers. 

Ces stances sont plusieurs quatrains joints ensemble, e* 
lies par un sens qui dure jusqu'a la fin de la piece. Entre 
ie premier vers masculin ou feminin, et celui qui lui re- 
pond, on met un ou deux vers d'une rime difTerente, commc 
dans ces vers ou PAmitie fait elle-meme son portrait. 

J'ai le visage long, et la mine naive, 

Je suis sans finesse et sans art. 
Mon teint est fort uni, ma couleur assez vive, 

Etjenemets jamais de fard. 
Mon abord est civil ; j'ai la bouche riante, 

Et mes yeux ont mille douceurs : 
Mais quoique je sois belle, agreable et charmante, 

Je regne sur bien peu de cosurs. 
On me proteste assez, et presque tons les homrnes 

Se van tent de suivre mes lois : 
Mais que j'en connais peu dans le siecle ou nous sommes. 

Dont le coeur repend a ma voix ; 
Ceux que je fais aimer d'une flamme fidele, 

Me font l'objet de tous leurs soins ; 
Et quoique je vieil lisse, lis me trouvent fort belle, 

Et ne m'en estiment pas moins. 
On m'accuse pourtant d'aimer trop a paraitre 

Ou l'on voit la prosperite ; 
Cependant il es» vrai qu'on ne me peut connaitre 

Q,u'au milieu de l'adversite. 

Autre exemple : 

Dans ce sallon pacifique / 
Ou president les neuf sceurs, 
Un loisir philosophique 
T' ofrre encor d'autres douceurs. 

La nous trouverons sans peine 
Avec toi, le verre en main, 
L'homme apres qui Diogene 
Courut si long-temps en vain. 

Et dans la douce all egr esse 

Dont tu sais nous abreuver, 

Nous puiserons la sagesse 

Gtu'ii chercha sans la trouver.— J. B- Rousseau'. 



442 

Remarque. Les veritables quatrains n'ont aucune liai 
son pour le sens, et la morale en est ordinaircment la 
matiere. Exemple : 

Ne demandez a Dieu ni gloire, ni richesse, 

Ni ces biens dont i 'eclat rend Ic peuple etonne : 

Mais pour bien commander, demandez la sagesse , 

Avec un don si saint tout vous sera donne. 

Ecoutez et lisez la celeste parole, 

Que, dans les livres saints, Dieu nous donne pour loi. 

La politique hurnalne au prix d'elle est frivole, 

Et forme plus souvent un tyran qu'un bon Roi. 

II. S lances de six vers. 

EJles sont composees d'un quatrain et decleux vers d'une 
meme rime, qui se mettent au commencement ou a la fin. 
B'ailleurs les vers d'un quatrain se me.ent de la memo 
maniere que ci-dessus. 

Si les deux vers d'une meme rime sont au commence- 
ment, alors a la fin du troisieme, on met ordinaircment un 
repos, et le sens ne doit pas s'etendre jusqu'auquatrieme. 
Ce repos donne beaucoup de grace et d'harmonie a cette 
sorte de stances. 

On peut voir., par les exemples suivants, que ce repos 
peut etre plus ou moins marque, et qu'il n'est pas rigoure- 
uscment exige dans les sixains. 

Ce n'est done point assez que ce peuple perfide, 
De la sainte cite profanateur stupide, 
Ait dans tout 1 'Orient porte ses etendards ; 
Et paisible tyran de la Grece abattue, 

Partage a. notre vue 
La plus belle moitie du trone des Cesars. 
Des veilles, des travaux un faible coeur s'etonne. 
Apprenons toutefois, que le fils de Latone, 

Dont nous suivons la cour, 
Ne nous vend qu'a ce prix ces traits de vivo flammc 
Et ces ailes de feu qui ravissent une ame 

Au celeste sejour. 

La place de ce repos varie, et est tantot apres le sec- 
ond, tantot apres le quatrieme vers, dans les sixains ou 
les deux vers d'une meme rime sont a la fin de la strophe, 
comme dans les stances suivantes. 

Seigneur, dans ton temple adorable, 
Quel mortel est digne d'entrer ? 
Qui pourra, grand Dieu, penetrer 
Ce sanctuaire impenetrable, 
Ou tes saints inclines, d'un oeil rcspeetueux. 
Contemplent de ton front 1' eclat majesteux ? 



443 

Ce sera eelui qui da vice 

Evite le sentier impur, 

Qui marche d'un pas ferme et sur, 

Dans le chemin de la justice ; 
Attentif et fidele a distinguer sa voix, 
Intrepide et severe a pratiquer ses loix ; 

Celui devant qui le superbe, 

Enfle d'une vaine splendeur- 

Parait plus dans sa grandeur 

due 1'insecte cache sous l'herbe ; 

Qui bravant du mechant le faste couronne, 

Honore la vertu du juste infortune. 

III. Stances de kuit vers-, 
Ces stances ne sont ordinairement que deux quatrains 
joints ensemble. Le sens doit finir apres le premier ; et 
les vers de tons les deux s'entrelacent, comme nous l'a- 
vons deja dit. Exemple : 

Tel en un sacre vallon, 

Sur le bord d'une onde pure, 

Croit a I'abri de rAquilon 
Un jeune lys, l'amour de la nature. 
Loin du rnonde eleve, de tons les dons des Cieux 

II est orne des sa naissance ; 
Et du mechant l'abord contagieux 

N'altere point son innocence. 

Racine, cliceurs (VJlthalie. 

Si quelque jour etant ivre 

La rnort arretait mes pas, 

Je ne voudrais pas revivre 

Apres un si doux trepas : 

Je m'en irais dans l'Averne 

Faire enivrer Alecton, 

Et batir une taverne 

Dans le manoir de Pluton. — Mai the Adam. 

Ces stances peuvent aussi commencer par deux vers 
sur une meme rime, et les six autres sont sur des rimes 
croisees. Quelquefois aussi ces stances n'ont qu'un six- 
ain sur deux ou trois rimes, apres quoi viennent deux vers 
de meme rime 

Ces melanges de rime peuvent aisement se concevoir 
sans qu'il soit necessaire d'en citer des exemples ; d'ail- 
leurs ils ne sont pas communs. 

IV. Stances de dix vers. 
Les stances de dix vers ne sont autre chose qu'un qua- 
train et un sixain, dont les vers s'entremclent selon les re- 
gies ordin aires. Elles tirent leur harmonie d'un premier 



444 

repos place a la fin du quatrain, et d'un second apres ie 
septieme vers. Ex. 

C'est un arret du Ciel, il faut que 1'homme meure ; 

Tel est son partage et son sort : 

Rien n'est plus certain que la mort, 
Et rien plus incertain que cette derniere heure. 
Heureuse incertitude, utile obscurite, 

Par oU ta divine bonte 
A veiller, a prier, sans cesse nous convie ! 
Que ne pouvons-nous point avec un tel secours, 
Qui nous fait regarder tous les jours de la vie 

Comme le dernier de nos jours ! 

Les Cieux instruisent la terre 
A reverer leur auteur ; 
Tout ce que leur globe enserre, 
Celebre un Dieu Createur. 
Quel plus sublime cantique 
Que ce concert magnifique 
De tous les celestes corps ! 
Quelle grandeur infinie ! 
Quelle divine harmanie 
Rpsulte de leurs accords ! 

RECLES TOUR LES STANCES DE NOMBRE IMPAIR. 

Les stances de nombre impair ont toutes, trois vers su< 
une meme rime. L'ordonnance des vers y est d'ailleura 
arbitraire, excepte qu'on ne pent mettre que deux rimes 
semblables de suite, et que Ie quatrain par lequel com- 
menccnt les stances de sept ou de neuf vers, doit etre ter 
mine par un repos. 

Stance de cinq vers. 

O rives du Jourdain ! 6 champs aimes des Cieux 
Sacres monts, fertiles vallees, 
Par cent miracles signalees, 
Du doux pays de nos ai'eux 
Serons-nous toujours exilees ? 

Pardonne, Dieu puissant, pardonne a ma ftiiHesse 
A 'aspect des mechans, confus, epouvante, 
Le trouble m'a saisi, mes pas ont hesite ; 
Mon zele m'a train, Seigneur, je le confesse, 
En voyant leur prosperite. 

Stances de sejjf vers 

Si la loi du Seigneur vous touclie, 

Si le mensonge vous fait peur s 



445 

Si ia justice en votre cceur 

Regne aussi bien qu'en votre bouche ; 

Parlez, fils des hommes, pourquoi 

Faut-ilqu'une haine farouche 

Preside aux jugemens que vous lancez sur mo' *• 

Stance de neuf vers. 

Quel rem part, quelle autre barriere 
Pourra defendre l'innocent 
Contre la fraude meurtiiere 
De l'irnpie adroit et puissant ? 
Sa langue aux feintes preparee, 
Ressemble a la fleche aceree 
Qui part et frappe en un moment 
C'est un feu leger dans Pentree. 
Que suit un long embrasement. 

DU SONNET. 

Boileau feint qu'Apollon, 

Voulant pousser a bout tous les rimeurs fraocois, 
Inventa du Sonnet les rigoureuses lois, 
Voulut qu'en deux quatrains de mesure pareille, 
La rime avec deux sons frappat huit fois l'orcille ; 
Et qu'ensuite six vers artistement ranges, 
F assent en deux tercets par le sens partages. 
Sur-tout de ce poeme il bannit la licence, 
Defendit qu'un vers faible y put jamais entrer, 
Et qu'un mot deja mis osat s'y remontrer. 
Du reste il l'enrichit d'une beaute supreme : 
Un Sonnet sans defaut vaut seul un long Poeme. 

Le Sonnet est compose de quatorze vers d'une mesure 
egale, et pour l'ordinaire de douze syllabes 5 ces vers sont 
partages en deux quatrains et un sixain. 

Les rimes masculines et feminines des deux quatrains 
sont semblables, et on les entremele dans l'un, de la 
merne maniere que dans 1'auU'e. 

Le sixain se coupe en deux tercets, c'est-a-dire, en doux 
stances de trois vers. Ces tercets commencent Tun et 
l'autre par deux rimes semblables, en sorte que le troisieme 
vers du premier, rime avec le troisieme du second. 

II faut eviter que le melange des rimes, dans les quatre 
derniers vers du sixain, soit le rneme que dans les qua- 
trains. 

Le second vers de chaque quatrain doit avoir un repos 
Les deux quatrains et les deux tercets doivent etre tei- 
mines chacun par un repos encore plus grand. 
38 ' > 



44G 

D'ailleurs tout doit etre noble dans ce Poeme, petisec*, 
style, elocution. Point de repetitions, point de redun- 
dance. La force et Pelevation en sont les principaux 
caracteres. 

On voit cependant des Sonnets, dont les sujets ne sont 
pas sublimes ; le style alors en est mediocre, et doit Peire. 
Voici deux exemples du Sonnet. Le premier dans le 
genre simple, exprime la nature meme du Sonnet. 

Doris, qui sait qu'aux vers quelquefois je me plais, 
Me demande un Sonnet et je m'en desespere. 
Q,uatorze vers grand Dieu, le moyen de les faire ! 
En voila cependant deja quatre de faits. 
Je ne pouvais d'abord trouver de rime, mais 
Enfaisant, on apprend a se tirer d'affaire. 
Poursuivons * les quatrains ne m'etonneront guere, 
Si du premier tercet je puis faire les frais. 
Je commence au hasard, et si je ne m'abuse, 
Je n'ai pas commence sans l'aveu de ma Muse, 
Puisqu'en si peu de temps je m'en tire si net. 
J'entame le second, et ma joie est extreme ; 
Car des vers commandes j'acheve le treizieme. 
Comptez s lis sont quatorze, et voila le Sonnet. 

AUTRE SONNET. 

Grand Dieu tes jugemens sont remplis d'equite : 
Teujours tu prends plaisir a nous etre propice ; 
Mais j'ai tant fait de mal, que jamais ta bonte 
Ne me pardonnera qu'en blessant ta justice. 
Oui, Seigneur, la grandeur de mon impiete 
Ne laisse a ton pouvoir que le choix du supplice, 
Ton interet s'oppose a ma felicite, 
Et ta clemence meme attend que je perissc. 

Contente ton desir, puisqu'il t'est glorieux ; 

Offense-toi des pleurs qui coulent de mes veux : 

Tonne, frappe, il est temps, rends-moi guerre pour guerre, 

J 'adore, en perissant, la raison qui t'aigrit : 

Mais dessus quel endroit tombera ton tonnerre 

Qui ne soit tout couvert du sang de Jesus-Christ. 

DU RONDEAU. 
Le Rondeau ne Gaulois a la naivete. 

Tel est le caractere de ce petit poeme. Toutes sortes 
de vers y sont propres, excepte les Alexandras qui ont 
trop cLe gravite. II y entre treize vers de meme mesure 
sur deux rimes. 

On peut faire dans le Rondeau ce qu'on ne fait point 



447 

dans les autres Poemes. Comme il ne doit y avoir dans 
los huit derniers vers que trois rimes feminities, on peut 
mettre de suite sur trois rimes masculines le cinquieme, 
ie sixieme et le septieme. Mais on fait rarement ce me- 
lange dans les cinq derniers vers. 

Le Rondeau a deux repos necessaires, Pun apres le 
cinquieme vers, i'autre apres le refrain. 

Le refrain qui se place apres le huitieme vers, et a la 
fin de la piece, n'est autre chose que la repetition d'ya ou 
de plusieurs mots du premier vers. II doit avoir un sens 
lie avec ce qui precede, et etre amene delicatement. Le 
premier des deux Rondeau x qui suivent, explique les re* 
gles du Poeme. 

Ma foi, c'est fait de moi, car Isabeau 
M'a conjure de iui faire un Rondeau : 
Cela me met en une peine extreme. 
Q,uoi treize vers, huit en eau, cinq en erne .' 
Je lui ferais aussitot un bateau. 
En voila cinq pourtant en un monceau : 
Faisons-en huit en invoquant Brodeau, 
Et puis mettons par quelque stratageme, 

Ma foi, c'est fait. 
Si je pouvais encor de mon cerveau 
Tirer cinq vers, l'ouvrage serait beau : 
Mais cependant me voila dans l'onzieme, 
Et si je crois que je fais le douzieme : 
En voila treize ajustes au niveau. 

Ma foi, c'est fait. 
Le bel esprit, au siecle de Marot, 
Des dons du Ciel passait pour le gros lot ; 
Des grands seigneurs il donnait accointance, 
Menait par fois a. noble jouissance, 
Et qui plus est faisaitbouiilir le pot. 
Or est passe ce temps oii d'un bon mot, 
Stance ou dixain, on pay ait son ecot ; 
Plus n'en voyons qui prennent pour finance 

Le bel esprit. 
A prix d'argent l'auteur, comme le sot, 
Boit sa chopine et mange son gigot ; 
Heureux encor d^en avoir sufhsance ! 
Maints ont le chef plus rempli que la panse : 
Dame Ignorance a fait enfin capot 

Le bel espri?* 
DE LSEPIGRAMME. 
L'Epigramme plus libre, et son tour plus borne, 
N'est souvent qu'un bon mot de deux rimes orne 



i. * - £ 

448 

Cefcte piece ne doit contenir qu'autant de vers qu'il en 
faut pour exprimer vivement la pensee ou le bon mot qui 
en est Fame. C'est pourquoi le nombre n'en est pas de- 
fermine, non plus que la mesure et le melange des rimes 
Exemple : 

Ci-git ma femme : ah ! qu'elle est bien 
Pour son repos et pour le mien ! 
Un magister s'empressant d'etoufTer 
Quelque rumeur parmi la populace, 
D'un coup dans l'oeil se fit apostropher, 
Dont il tomba,faisant laide grimace. 
Lors un frater s'ecria : place, place ; 
J'ai pour ce mal un baume souverain. 
Perdrai-je Tceil ? lui dit messer Pancrace ; 
Non, mon ami, je le tiens dans la main. 

DU MADRIGAL. 

Le Madrigal plus simple, et plus noble en son tour, 
Respire la douceur, latendresse et Tumour. — Boileau. 

Ce petit poeme ne differe que par-la de PEpigramme, 
dont la pointe est souvent aiguisee par la satyre. Exem- 
ple : 

L'autre jour l'enfant de Cythere, 
Sous une treille a demi gris, 
Disait, en parlant a sa mere : 
Je bois a toi, ma chere Iris. 
Venus le regarde en col ere : 
Maman, calmez voire courroux, 
Si je vous prends pour ma bergere, 
J'ai pris cent fois Iris pour vous. 

Not A. Le Sonnet et le Rondeau out aujourd'hui perdu tottte lour 
vogue, et il est tres-rare que l'on a'exerce dans ces deiix genres de 
poesio. 



